JP2020103914A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of providing more profit for a player, the game machine making a plurality of special patterns be dynamically displayed simultaneously.SOLUTION: Before a dynamic display start condition on an established propriety determination condition is established, master control means determines first large winning or second large winning and notifies a slave control means. When notified of start of the first large winning by a result of the notification, the slave control means determines whether or not to report it to a player before executing reporting. Thereby, when the first large winning is reported and the player is in a second game state, the player can play a game while effectively using a remaining time of the second game state. Therefore, the player can be provided with more profit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 124

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a plurality of starting openings provided on the game board surface, the winning or failure of the game is drawn by lot, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed. It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, corresponding to each starting port, the winning or losing of the game is individually drawn, and the lottery result is a special symbol corresponding to each starting port (for example, the first special for two starting ports). After the symbols and the second special symbols are dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified. In this way, it is proposed that a plurality of special symbols can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

For example, in Patent Document 1, when the game ball enters the first starting port, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is started, and when the game ball enters the second starting port, the dynamic of the second special symbol is started. Start display. Therefore, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is dynamically displayed, when the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the other special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Both are in a state of being dynamically displayed at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode for notifying the big hit, the big hit game is started.

As a type of jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the probability that the jackpot will be in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is improved to a high-probability gaming state that shifts to a high-probability gaming state, and a jackpot probability that is lower than the high-probability gaming state. The normal jackpot and the transition to the probability game state are set. When a normal jackpot is started during a high-probability game with one special symbol, the result is determined based on the probability of the normal game state in the other special symbol that has already started to be changed and has not yet been confirmed.

JP, 2005-319221, A

By the way, in such a gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independently and dynamically displayed, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are short to normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot. If you win each time, if the regular variation jackpot is executed after the probability variation jackpot is executed, the high-probability game state ends in a short time, and the player's willingness to play is shortened. There was a problem that it attenuated.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that dynamically suppresses a player's willingness to play in a gaming machine that simultaneously dynamically displays a plurality of special symbols.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a main control means for executing main control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing control of the game according to an instruction of the main control means. , The main control means executes the win/no judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, and the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss judgment condition. Based on the judgment result of the first lottery game by the judging means and the judgment means, the first winning/unjudging signal is based on the judgment result of the second lottery game by the winning/unjudging means, and the second winning/unjudging signal. And the subordinate control means dynamically display the first identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the first lottery game, based on the first win/loss judgment signal. And a second display means for dynamically displaying, based on the second win/loss judgment signal, second identification information indicating a win/no judgment result of the second lottery game. When the result of the hit determination is a win, and the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given, and the main control means is When the winning/non-winning determination means determines that the game state after the bonus game is the first jackpot for shifting to the first game state, or the player is more likely to play the game than the first game state. Based on the hit type determining means for determining whether to make the second jackpot to be shifted to the advantageous second game state, and whether the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied Whether the first big hit or the second big hit, the dynamic display start condition in which the identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition is a condition for starting the dynamic display. Based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means and the pre-judgment means for judging the pre-judgment information concerning the judgment result, and generates the pre-judgment signal for notifying the sub-control means to the sub-control means. A pre-determination signal generating means for outputting to the means, the sub-control means, based on the receipt of the pre-determination signal, to the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination signal. Until the corresponding dynamic determination start condition of the win/fail judgment condition is satisfied, the first hold information is stored based on the slave hold information storage unit that stores the advance judgment information and the preliminary judgment information stored in the slave hold information storage unit. Pre-determined information indicating that it is a big hit is stored Based on the fact that the sub-monitoring unit that determines whether or not the sub-monitoring unit stores the pre-determination information that indicates that the first jackpot will be stored, the pre-determination that is determined to be the first jackpot. The advance notification determining means for determining whether or not to notify the player of the game state transition information related to the information, and when the advance notification determining means determines to notify the player, the player is in the game state. And a notifying means for notifying a game state shift notification mode based on the shift information.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the pre-determination signal generating means of the main control means corresponds to the determination result of the pre-determination means and corresponds to the determination result. The pre-judgment signal capable of discriminating a judgment condition is generated, and in the game state transition notification mode, the win/win judgment condition corresponding to the pre-judgment information is the first win/win judgment condition or the second win/win judgment. It is configured in a notification mode capable of identifying whether it is a condition.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the main control means makes the first jackpot by the pre-determination means during the second gaming state. Alternatively, when it is determined that the second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the bonus delay means delays the start of the bonus game corresponding to the determined first or second win/loss determination condition.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, in which the operating means operable by the player and the first operation of the operating means by the player perform the first operation. The first win/win judgment condition is easier to satisfy than the win/win judgment condition, and the second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied than the first win/fail judgment condition by performing a second operation different from the first operation. And a variable means for changing the second advantageous state easily.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the main control means is dynamically displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information. In the case where the bonus game is given with the other identification information, the bonus game carry-over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the other bonus game is completed, and the benefit by the bonus game carry-over means The win/no judgment result of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the end of the game is maintained by the win/no judgment result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the bonus game. And a determination means for maintaining the acceptance/rejection.

A gaming machine according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the main control means responds to a win/win condition determination condition that has been established based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information is dynamically selected from a dynamic display mode group including at least a normal dynamic display mode and an extended dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time longer than the normal dynamic display mode. It is determined according to the satisfaction of the display start condition, and based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment means, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is dynamically displayed from the dynamic display mode group. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining according to the establishment of the condition, and the dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the satisfaction of the first or second propriety determination condition. The pre-dynamic display mode determination means for determining before the start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determination means are the secondary control means. And a preliminary dynamic display mode signal generating means for generating a preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the preliminary dynamic display mode signal, and outputting the preliminary dynamic display mode signal to the slave control means. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information that is the first jackpot for determining the extended dynamic display mode is stored.

A gaming machine according to claim 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 6, wherein the main control means is established based on that the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met. The main holding information storage means stores the holding information for determining whether to be the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot with respect to the hit determination condition, until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The pre-judgment means of the control means makes a judgment based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, and the privilege delay means of the main control means is the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment. While the hold information corresponding to one of the determination conditions is determined to be the first jackpot by the advance determination means, the hold information corresponding to the other is newly established, and the hold information is determined in advance. When it is determined by the means that the second jackpot is to be achieved, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the newly established hold information of the other winning/disabling determination condition is the first jackpot stored in the hold information storage means. It is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means.

In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means.

Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed.

In the main control means, when the hit determination means determines a hit, the gaming state after the bonus game is set to the first jackpot to be shifted to the first gaming state, or the player is more than the first gaming state. The second jackpot to be shifted to the second gaming state, which is advantageous to, is determined by the hit type determining means. Based on the fact that the first or second win/loss judgment condition is met, whether the hit is the first jackpot or the second jackpot is met. The identification information corresponding to the hit determination condition is determined by the pre-determination unit before the dynamic display start condition that is the condition for starting the dynamic display is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information regarding the determination result is generated by the preliminary determination signal generation means and output to the secondary control means. ..

Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the preliminary determination signal, until the dynamic display start condition of the hit determination condition corresponding to the preliminary determination information, the preliminary determination information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Remembered. Based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information indicating that the first big hit is stored.

Based on the fact that the secondary monitoring means determines that the pre-determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be stored, the game state transition information relating to the pre-determination information that is determined to be the first jackpot is provided to the player. Whether or not to notify is determined by the advance notification determining means. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notification means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information.

As a result, the player is notified of the game state transition notification mode, and if the current game state is the second game state, the player determines that the remaining time of the second game state is short, and the remaining time. A game can be played by effectively utilizing time. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, with respect to the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, the pre-judgment signal generating means generates a pre-judgment signal capable of discriminating the hit/miss judgment condition corresponding to the judgment result. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured as a notification mode in which it is possible to identify whether the win/failure determination condition corresponding to the advance determination notification mode is the first win/failure determination condition or the second win/fail determination condition. Thereby, the player can play the game so that the first jackpot is not satisfied by the game state transition notification mode, and the winning/deciding condition is preferentially satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to play the game more effectively using the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined by the pre-determination means during the second game state that the first or second win/loss determination condition that is the first jackpot is satisfied, the determined first or second win/loss When it is determined that the determination condition is satisfied, the start of the determined privilege game is delayed by the privilege delay means. As a result, the second game state is given to the player for a longer time, and there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of any of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first advantageous state in which the first win/win judgment condition is more easily established than the second win/win judgment condition by the player first operating the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first operation which is different from the first operation By performing two operations, the variable means changes the state to the second advantageous state in which the second win/loss determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first win/loss determination condition. Thereby, based on the delay information notified by the notification means, by operating the operation means, it is possible to change to a state in which the win/loss determination condition different from the win/loss determination condition in which the privilege game is delayed is easily established. More lottery games can be played by the player during the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of any one of claims 1 to 4, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, when one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, when the privilege game is given by the other identification information, the remaining movement of one of the identification information is performed. The special game carry-over means carries over until the special display of the other special game ends. Then, the result of the judgment of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the end of the privilege game is judged by the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game. The judgment result is maintained by the judgment determination maintaining means.

As a result, during the second game state, the lottery game whose dynamic display is started is delayed in the second game state while delaying the start of the privilege game that is a transition to the first game state. Since it is maintained, even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent a problem that would be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new winning while the bonus game is delayed.

According to the gaming machine of claim 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of any one of claims 1 to 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition is based on at least the normal win/win state and the normal dynamic display mode based on the fulfillment of the first win/loss determination condition. Is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from the dynamic display mode group configured by the extended dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display time according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by means. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition. Is determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means. A preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means and output to the slave control means. It Based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal, the secondary monitoring unit determines whether or not the preliminary determination information that is the first jackpot for determining the extended dynamic display mode is stored.

As a result, the player is informed in the gaming state transition notifying mode that the winning/judging determination condition for the first jackpot, in which the delayed start during the second gaming state is delayed, is satisfied. Therefore, by being notified of the game state transition notification mode, the player can more quickly determine that the remaining second game state is short and can effectively use the remaining second game state. There is.

According to the game of claim 7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 6, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second hit/miss determination condition, a hold for determining whether the hit/win determination condition that has been satisfied is the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. The information is stored in the main pending information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, the advance determination means makes a determination.

In the main control means, while the holding information corresponding to one of the first winning/disagreement judging condition and the second winning/damage judging condition is judged to be the first jackpot by the preliminary judging means, the holding information corresponding to the other is newly added. If the hold information is determined to be the second jackpot, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the newly held hold information of the other win/fail judgment condition is stored in the hold information storage means. The privilege delay means delays the start of the privilege game corresponding to the stored first jackpot holding information.

As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the first game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the second game state is executed, so that two privilege games are executed. After that, the player can be allowed to play a game in the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and it is possible to prevent the expectation for the jackpot from being hindered.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which looked through the inside from the front side of the sorting apparatus in 1st Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which looked through the inside from the back side of the sorting apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment typically, and (b) is a reserved symbol display displayed with a 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display mode before rearrangement and after rearrangement. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment, a special design reservation sphere storage area, a special design reservation sphere execution area, a normal design reservation sphere storage area, and a normal design reservation sphere execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the jackpot random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random symbol per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement reservation storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. .. (A) is the figure which showed typically the normal time special hit variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed typically the normal time special deviation|variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is the figure which showed typically the special reduction fluctuation pattern table for time reduction / probability change in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a model of the special deviation fluctuation pattern table for time reduction / probability change in 1st Embodiment FIG. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation quantity display renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a temporary fluctuation stop process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a reservation rearrangement process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the adjustment special deviation change pattern table in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically some other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st continuation winning a prize judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the large opening opening and closing processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st prefetch processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordinate reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A) is the figure which looked through the inside from the front side of the sorting apparatus in 9th Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which looked through the inside from the back side of the sorting apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning route notification process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 11th Embodiment, (c) is the display of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the area|region typically. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 14th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 15th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st caution advance notice process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 16th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st notice lottery processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st extension change look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd announcement lottery processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 17th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 18th Embodiment, (b) is the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 18th Embodiment. It is not shown schematically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement reservation storage area in 18th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 18th Embodiment typically. .. (A) is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of the main controller in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a time reduction / probability change special contact (off) in 18th Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a part of a variation pattern table and a normal special hit (off) variation pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pre-reading update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fusion production lottery process performed by MPU in the main controller in 18th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically some other memory areas of RAM of the main control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of time saving/probability change special hit variation pattern table of ROM of the main controller in 19th Embodiment, and time saving/probability change special hit deviation pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation change process performed by MPU in the main controller in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 20th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement pending storage area in 20th Embodiment, (b) is a part of other memory area in RAM of MPU of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st duplication hit processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the large opening opening and closing process performed by MPU in the main controller in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit middle production process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of normal extraordinary deviation pattern table in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of special deviation change pattern table for time reduction / probability change in a 21st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordinate reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordinate hold rearrangement display alerting|reporting process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 21st Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front surface area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front surface area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls and rails 61 and 62, a first starting opening 63a, and a first starting opening 63a. The second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

A distribution winning apparatus 630 is provided in the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the distribution winning apparatus 630 as viewed from the back.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the sorting winning device 630 is provided with the ordinary electric accessory 64 at the upper part. In the normal state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is arranged in a state where the opposing blades 64a and 64b are erected upward at an interval (the diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm) in which one game ball can enter. .. In the normal state (the state in which the blades 64a and 64b are erected upward), the route in which the game ball enters the distribution device 630 is only the route that passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. First, the player shoots a game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64.

When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the passive distribution member 640 is arranged, and the entered game ball is received by the accommodation portion 640a or 640b of the passive distribution member 640. When the game ball is received in the accommodation portion 640a, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 4A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is the first starting opening. Lead to 63a. Here, the passive distribution member 640 is configured to be rotatable about the left and right sides by about 90 degrees, and the magnet 640c is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b.

In the base body 900 provided on the back side of the distribution winning apparatus 630, the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 is provided with the base-side magnet 900a at a position on the center line between the blade 64a and the blade 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. Has been done. As shown in the top view of the distribution winning apparatus 630 shown in FIG. 4C, the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have repulsive polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 900a is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip portion. The base-side magnet 900a is arranged and fixed so that its tip end faces the passive distribution member 640 side.

The magnet 640c of the passive distribution unit 640 is also configured by a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive distribution member 640 so that the tip end faces the base-side magnet 900a side. At a position where the passive distribution member 640 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 640a and the accommodating portion 640b is directly above (the facing blades 64a and 64b are on the center line of the space where about one game ball can enter). The base-side magnet 900a and the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 come to the position where they are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), the repulsive coupling may occur and the passive distribution member 640 may stop at a position where the boundary wall faces directly upward. Instead, it will be maintained at the position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 640c reaches the position on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 (the position above), the passive distribution member 640 separates the magnet 640c from the base-side magnet 900a. By the repulsion, the passive distribution member 640 rotates to the left or right, and one of the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b receives the game ball entering the distribution device 630 (upper side of the gaming machine). Will turn to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b and causing the ball clogging.

Further, the repulsion of the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c causes, for example, the accommodation portion 640a to receive the game ball and rotate about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first starting opening 63a, and then to be passive. It is possible to prevent the sorting member 640 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first starting opening 63a, the accommodation section 640b is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the distribution device 630 is received by the accommodation section 640b and the game ball is received. The weight of the passive distribution member 640 rotates about 180 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the second starting opening 63b. In this way, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b to win the prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as the first lottery) to be described later, which is caused by winning the first starting opening 63a. It is possible to efficiently execute a game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) caused by a winning of the second start opening 63b.

On the left side of the center of the game board 13, a normal symbol starting port 67 is provided. The normal symbol starting port 67 is composed of a gate type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

When the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display section 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "x" are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped (lighted). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. Displayed by.

When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88. When a symbol that is a hit is displayed, the normal electric accessory 64 operates, and the blades 64a, 64b of the normal electric accessory 64, which are normally maintained in an upright position, are erected substantially vertically. By moving in a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape) and guiding the game balls by the blades 64a, 64b, it becomes easy to enter the game balls into the distribution device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been off, is lit on the second symbol display portion 88.

The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a lights the number of reserved balls which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which variable display has not been executed among the balls won in the first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, and the normal symbol starting opening 67. This is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display are also indicated by a corresponding lighting state.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The left 7 segment LED, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, the variable display is displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first start opening 63a elapses (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the 7 segments is displayed in blinking). After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, a symbol "-" indicating that the central one segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Further, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a variation pattern with reach and a variation pattern with non-reach, a long-term variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short-term variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. In this way, even when sorting is performed based on a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic information regarding the time information is determined. It corresponds to the display mode.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time also corresponds to the time when the accurate fluctuation starts, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern or not) Information about time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined based on whether or not) is also applicable.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determination of the big hit type. To do. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R regular jackpot, 15R certainty variation jackpot, and 2R certainty variation jackpot are prepared. The jackpot pattern displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "9" for the 15R normal jackpot, "7" for the 15R certainty jackpot, and "3" for the 2R certainty jackpot, for example. Is displayed).

Here, the "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, in a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(b)) for low probability described later. It is about the game being set. The "15R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set. That is. The "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set. That is.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 79 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol (first symbol). A special symbol, a second special symbol) is provided with a third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the left side as shown in FIG. In the display area Dm1, three symbol rows of left, middle and right showing the first special symbol which is one of the third symbols are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ( Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, also in the second special symbol which is one of the third symbols, it is displayed in the right side display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying before and after rearrangement of the reserved symbol display on the actual display screen.

The third symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777"), a variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the end of.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the upper display area Dm. It is composed of a display area for displaying and a display area for displaying a holding symbol (the number of held first lottery game and second lottery game) in the lower display area Ds. The upper side display area Dm is divided into a left side display area Dm1 and a right side display area Dm2 so as to be displayed. Mainly, the left display area Dm1 variably displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol showing the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning of the second starting opening 63b is variably displayed.

In the left side display area Dm1, three symbol columns L1, L2 and L3 are displayed respectively on the left, middle and right sides. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with the periodicity for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol column L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, the symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

In the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line U1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further divided in the left-right direction into eight small area reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of three main symbols of the special symbol (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display region Dm, the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2, respectively. It

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b is withheld up to four times, respectively. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a during the variable display of the first special symbol, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds. In the display area of (), the reserved symbol display area of the smallest number among the areas where the reserved symbol is not displayed (the reserved symbol display area on the left side), "○", which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game, is displayed. ..

In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 63a, the "●" which is the reserved symbol of the second lottery game is lower. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the side display area Ds.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. When the game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630, the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4) distributes the game ball to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b in order. In a state where the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and there is no hold in the first lottery game, and if the first start opening 63a is won, whether or not the second special symbol is being variable displayed. Regardless, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the left display area Dm1 and then stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously and simultaneously displayed in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2, respectively. Therefore, by the distribution winning device 630, the game balls that alternately win the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are distributed, so that the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. it can. As will be described later, in the first lottery game and the second lottery game, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the jackpot game is to be executed. Therefore, the lottery opportunity for the jackpot game is executed only in the first lottery game. By comparison, it is possible to increase the number of times of lottery, and it is possible to increase the chances that the player can win the jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 constituted by the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and three, four, or more lottery games and corresponding start. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that each lottery result can be variably displayed at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning apparatus 630 has a mechanical structure (the structure of distributing the game balls by the passive distribution member 640), but only one starting opening is provided and the game balls are won every time. Naturally, it may be configured to be alternately allocated to the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing the game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively utilized.

When a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, a first starting opening switch or a second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, the main control device 110 makes a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big hit, and if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display is temporarily interrupted, and the jackpot game ( For example, in the case of 15 rounds of regular jackpots, after the 15 rounds of jackpot games) are finished, the variable display of the special symbols is continued for the remaining variable time.

The variation display for the remaining variation time is displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display so that the player can recognize that the variation display that has been interrupted is the remaining variation display. Also, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, the variation display mode that matches the remaining variation time is selected. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or less than the reference time (3 seconds or less in the present embodiment), the word "Lottery result of fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped is displayed!" After being displayed for the remaining fluctuation time on the three-symbol display device 81, it is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the determination result. Then, in conjunction with the determination result being stopped and displayed, the text "The temporary display of the floating display lottery result has been displayed!" is displayed and continues to be displayed until the next change is started.

On the other hand, when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), all the main symbols constituting the special symbol are variably displayed at a constant speed, and the characters “temporarily stopped variation The notification mode indicating that the display is changing! After that, when the remaining variation time elapses, the main symbols are stopped and displayed all at once with the symbols indicating the determination results.

With this configuration, the player can recognize that it is a continuation of the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted midway, and can recognize that it is the lottery result of the interrupted variable display. it can. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted on the way, the player can be prevented from playing the game with dissatisfaction or doubt that the lottery may have disappeared on the way.

Further, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, if the other special symbol is in a state where the variable display is stopped, a new variable display Is prohibited from starting. When the jackpot game ends, the variable display is set to start again based on the winning of the corresponding start openings 63a and 63b.

As a result, during the jackpot, the other special symbol, the lottery game is executed, it is possible to prevent the problem that the occurrence of the jackpots overlap, and the problem that the player can not concentrate on the jackpot game.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted, the fact is informed to the player by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice is not limited thereto. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, like the display mode in which the player knows that the change has been resumed (for example, it is displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display in which the character etc. has been interrupted is displayed) Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode only for restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the suspended variable display is restarted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is suspended. Although it was configured to stop the variable display, but not limited to it, during the big hit game, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued as it is, and the remaining fluctuation time is measured after the big hit game. May be restarted, and the variable display of the special symbol may be adopted.

With such a configuration, the special symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner even during the jackpot game, so the player can confirm that the other variable display will continue without disappearing, You can play jackpot games with peace of mind.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display may be continued without interruption, and the lottery game may be executed as usual.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further perform the lottery game even during the jackpot game, it is possible to make more lottery games in a short time, and many lottery games can be played by the player. It becomes possible to do it. In such a configuration, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit during the jackpot game, the execution of the jackpot game is delayed until one jackpot game ends (stock. By doing so, the player can continuously perform a jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable symbol or the second variable symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the variable mode exclusively for the remaining variable display with respect to the interrupted variable display mode. Not limited to that, the remaining variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variable display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed while blinking. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed by lighting and displaying the remaining variable display-dedicated color (for example, blue). By doing so, not only the third symbol display device 81, but also the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, the remaining variable display is displayed to the player. Can be notified.

Further, similarly to the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may be changed depending on the remaining variation time.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner in a state of being stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, the letter h" in a predetermined cycle. By thus configuring, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (during suspension).

On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally elongated rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the jackpot of the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, it becomes a big hit stop symbol. While turning on the symbol display device 37, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed in the corresponding display area (left display area Dm1 or right display area Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. .. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined jackpot type. For example, in the case of the 15R regular jackpot, it can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a privileged game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning a prize device 65, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit based on winning the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, The opening/closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). To be done.

The variable winning device 65 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. .. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as required.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display portion 88 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, etc., the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol per random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special jackpot type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. In addition, a normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1000) (see FIG. 17). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning for the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 and the second starting port 63b in which each counter value for the winning for the first starting port 63a is stored. A second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are each provided with up to four holding balls, and a total of up to eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol is not jackpot game, the gaming ball wins during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, and the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 63a, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1, and when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, during a period during which the special symbols cannot be selected by lottery, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball has the first starting opening 63a or In the case where the second starting opening 63b is won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired, and the winning opening is won. Is stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 game balls in this embodiment) ) Only is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b, but is not limited to this, and may be four for each, or the upper limit value. You may not make money.

Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning). At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning opening of the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 8B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table 202a. When the value of the generated random number that becomes a jackpot (in the present embodiment, "7" when the probability is low and "0-9" when the probability is high) is determined as a jackpot.

The special random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hit values) to be a big hit is 1 when the probability is low, the value "7" is 10 when the probability is high, and the value "0-9" is a big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching. The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning). At the timing, the first special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning opening is stored.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is not a big hit random number, that is, a random number that is out of the range. For example, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere executing area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding sphere executing area 203c2 is a big hit, a variation pattern or stop in the variation display effect The type will be that of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, various tables are stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8C is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the big hit type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 15 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) for low probability after the jackpot game is set to "15R normal jackpot", the maximum. The number of rounds is 15 rounds and after a jackpot game a high probability special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) is set "15R probability variation jackpot", the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds and there is a high probability after a jackpot game. There is a "2R probability variable jackpot" in which the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for time (see FIG. 8B) is set.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8C, the value “60 to 99” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, and the value “0 to 49” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot. And the value “50 to 59” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a big hit, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 The jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 stored in. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “20”, the 15R certainty variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “80”, the 15R normal jackpot is the jackpot type. It is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the 15R regular big hit is selected with a probability of about 40%, the 15R probability variation big hit is selected with a probability of 50%, and the 2R probability variation big hit is selected with a probability of 10%. The jackpot type table 202b is defined so as to be selected.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters will be continued. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Further, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 100, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

The values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening. At the timing of winning the prize in 63b (starting prize), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not being variably displayed, and is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. If the various counter values of the reserved balls are not stored, they are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203.

FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the special bonus fluctuation pattern table 202d in the normal time is a case where the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a (hereinafter, referred to as a normal gaming state. ), 15R regular big jackpot and 15R certainty variation big jackpot (hereinafter, 15R jackpot) and 2R certainty variation jackpot referred to when the 15R jackpot is decided 15R jackpot dedicated and 2R certainty variation jackpot Are classified into groups (groups) based on the 2R certainty variation jackpot exclusive reference that is referred to, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the classified groups. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (hit value), it is stored in the execution area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area. The fluctuation pattern group is selected from the fluctuation pattern groups corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 thus selected. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

The 15R jackpot has various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premier reach. Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for various types of normal reach, 11 to 95 for various types of super reach, and 96 for various types of premier reach. It is ~100. Nole reach various is a reach with a short variation time, after the short reach, the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned (so-called, the pattern is aligned at the end of the bite) is a variation pattern, and the super reach various , A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach with a variation time longer than that of the normal reach (for example, reach that develops from the long reach or the normal reach), and various types of premier reach are even longer variation than the super reach. The 1st symbol (or 3rd symbol) is aligned after the reach of time (for example, the reach that develops further after super-reach or the special reach where the development destination from normal reach is different from super-reach) is a fluctuation pattern and the judgment result is out In the case of, the fluctuation pattern is not selected.

It should be noted that "various reach" means that there are many things with different effects even in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, or a certain character is displayed. There is a reach that is suddenly displayed, and in addition to that, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as a notice effect added before the start of variable display and an effect that is a big hit in the re-variation display.

In the case of the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the 2R certainty variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation exclusive variation pattern is, for example, a special variation pattern for stopping the special symbol at “341” and notifying that the 2R probability variation has been won.

FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal special deviation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10B, the normal-time special deviation variation pattern table 202e is a normal reach in which the variation time is relatively short among various types of normal deviation and normal reach deviation which are completely disengaged as a stop type at the time of disengagement in the normal game state. It consists of various normal reach (short) that will be out of the normal reach, normal reach (long) that will be out of the normal reach, and various super reach that will be out of the super reach.

Correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and each fluctuation pattern group is such that when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 29", it is usually out of the normal range, and when it is "30 to 60", the normal reach (short ) Various kinds of normal reach (long) are selected in the case of "61 to 89", and various kinds of super reach are selected in the case of "90 to 100".

The normal deviation A and the normal deviation B are set for the various kinds of normal deviation in which the variable display is completed in a short time and the reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the normal deviation A is selected, and when the value is "101 to 198", the normal deviation B is selected. Further, a variation pattern of normal reach short A to C is set for each of the normal reach (short) types which are out of reach but have a short variation time. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", the normal reach short A is "71 to 128", and the normal reach short B is "129 to 198". , A normal reach short C variation pattern is selected. Similarly, the variation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach.

FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing a special reduction variation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability variation stored in the ROM 202. Further, FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e for time saving/probability variation stored in the ROM 202. When the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a, the special short hit/probability change special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special short hit probability change special hit deviation pattern table (hereinafter, game This is a table for selecting a variation pattern that is selected when the state is a probability variation game state) and when the time saving counter 203k is set to a value of "0" or more (hereinafter, the game state is referred to as a time saving game state). ..

The selection of the variation patterns is the same as that of the normal special variation pattern table 202d and the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e, and the description thereof will be omitted. As for the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e, only one type is explained here, but the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special special variation pattern table 202d and the special special symbol, respectively. The deviation variation pattern table 202e is set, and for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the distribution of the variation pattern determination counter C3 is changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Thus, even if the same value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same fluctuation pattern is not selected. With this configuration, different variation patterns can be easily selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and various effects can be produced.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters will be continued. The ordinary hit random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8D) is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number which is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 8(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is set. When the value of the random number that is a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit.

Also, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) in the present embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 (through gate). .. The number of random number values to be won is 24 in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Further, in the high-probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that the winning value is the normal random number counter C4 in the range of "5-28", in the high probability game state, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired. Is determined to be in the range of "5-204", the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display portion 88, and the normal electric accessory 64 In the normal game state, the blades 64a and 64b are opened twice for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment), and in the high probability game state for a predetermined time (1 s in this embodiment). The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable state, and if each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i, and is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Further, in the case where the normal symbol (second symbol) is being variably displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved sphere stored in the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Is stored in the ordinary hit random number counter storage area 203h1 corresponding to the number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value obtained from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous one is held because the holding is exhausted. It is set to OFF when data is shifted into the area. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether or not data is stored in the holding area, or whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed is executed depending on which holding area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, about the lottery of the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery With the game (second special symbol), set various dedicated counters, and update different counters by changing the update timing and initial values of the various counters of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter values may be configured.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same trigger, it is possible to acquire the counter value of a different value. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, and a problem that the determination result of the winning or hitting is synchronized.

Even if the variation patterns are selected from the common variation pattern tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern to be selected is prevented from being synchronized with each other, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, it is possible to suppress the storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and to have an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area).

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 32). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

RAM203, 1st special design reservation sphere storage area 203a, 2nd special design reservation sphere storage area 203b, 1st special design reservation sphere execution area 203c, 2nd special design reservation sphere execution area 203d, 1st special design reservation sphere number Counter 203e, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, the normal symbol flag 203j, the time saving counter 203k, the probability variation flag 203m, First big hit flag 203o, second big hit flag 203p, first fluctuation stop flag 203q, second fluctuation stop flag 203r, first fluctuation time storage area 203s, second fluctuation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, etc. It has at least a memory area 203v.

The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning the first starting opening 63a up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that the game sphere has won the second starting opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for

The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, the first special symbol When various counter values are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. ..

The first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c, the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d, for the counter with the detection of the start winning Values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 7) are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won the first starting opening 63a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, The special winning random number counter storage area 203a1, the special winning type counter storage area 203a2, the variation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 are stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the corresponding values are obtained, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is similarly stored in each area (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, it performs the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37 or the process of setting the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the like described above. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, it corresponds to one starting winning. Data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37. Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 32, S1112) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the winning a prize for start is detected and the number of balls held in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of holding balls) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 63a. When is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main controller 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserve balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting opening 63b. When is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is incremented by 1. Is.

MPU201, when the respective values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, respectively, The data stored in the 1 special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d is referred to in the first variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) or the second variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206). Then, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, by the control of the main control device 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, by the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a game ball passing through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, "start prize"). Based on that), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times each. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in association with the detection of the starting winning into the normal symbol starting opening 67 is stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the normal hit random number counter C4 of the counter buffer is detected. The value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h has four holding areas so that the data corresponding to one starting winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h, the data of the holding spheres in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant in the earliest order to be consumed. To be done.

Further, the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the starting winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hit lottery or the first. It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 are executed. In the data (value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding sphere storing area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is the ordinary symbol holding sphere. Shift to execution area 203i. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data for the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored and is held, and is also a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. Further, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next holding area (the holding area corresponding to the holding number obtained by reducing the holding number by one when the holding is exhausted), the value of the holding area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the variable display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

The hour/hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour/hour count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time saving number is set, until the time saving number is set to 0, the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability is set in the normal symbol per random number table 202c. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 have a longer opening time than in the normal gaming state (in the present embodiment, 1s) The opening operation is repeated twice. This gaming state is hereinafter referred to as a time saving gaming state.

The time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and stopped, and when the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes 0, the time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol. The normal symbol per random number table for low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set, and when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the opening time is 0.2 s. The blades 64a, 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are opened by setting the number of times of opening once.

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 15R certainty variation jackpot game is won, and when the 15R certainty variation jackpot game is executed, based on the fact that the jackpot game is finished, a flag that is set to ON Is. On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON, and is set to OFF when the symbols (all types) showing the jackpot in the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game, depending on the jackpot type, If it is a 15R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot, it is set to ON.

The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a hit on the basis of winning the first starting opening 63a. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off.

The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired is a hit based on winning the second starting opening 63b. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off.

The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol has been determined to be a hit, while the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S603), the variable display of the first special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process.

The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol has been determined to be a win, while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S407) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S803), the variable display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process is executed.

The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area in which the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first fluctuation time storage area 203s counts the fluctuation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol starts variable display, and the fluctuation time (2 ms for one interrupt) is measured.

The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area in which the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variation time storage area 203t counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt) is measured.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is measured by counting the number of interrupts in the first fluctuation time storage area 203s and the second fluctuation time storage area 203t. However, the invention is not limited to this, and time measurement data is acquired at the start of fluctuation from the RTC. The configuration may be such that the time measurement data is acquired at any time thereafter and the fluctuation time is measured. Further, it is of course possible to store the variable time for variable display in advance and subtract the value at any time.

The rearrangement storage area 203u is a first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or a second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). It is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of the holding areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the rearrangement storage area 203u. The rearrangement storage area 203u corresponds to a pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each of the numbers of holdings in the holding areas 1 to 8 is stored, and a first special symbol and a second special symbol that are being variably displayed. And a changing data storage area in which each determination data to be stored is stored.

In each of the holding areas 1 to 8 of the pending data, there is a win/fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, and a prefetch probability variation flag 203u6. Are provided respectively. It should be noted that the holding areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the holding area 1 in the order in which the respective holding balls are established (a total order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined). That is, the holding areas 1 to 8 show the order in which the holding balls are established in the pachinko machine 10 by combining the holding balls of the first special symbol and the holding balls of the second special symbol.

In the variable display data storage area, a win/fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a jackpot type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 are provided in correspondence with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Has been.

The hit determination result storage area 203u1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

The jackpot type storage area 203u2 is the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). It is a storage area in which the big hit type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the types of fluctuation patterns determined based on the various data stored in are stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable display order storage area 203u4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in. The fluctuation display start order is specifically determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of a newly stored holding ball and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each previously stored holding ball. ..

The fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area for storing the time until each of the calculated data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually starts to be displayed on a variable basis based on the various data stored in. When the variable display start time is stored in the holding area, it is updated at any time in the other process (S112) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The prefetch probability variation flag storage area 203u6 predicts that the type of the jackpot type storage area 203k2 stored in the first prefetch update process (S933 in FIG. 26), which will be described later, is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (determined in advance). Is a storage area that is set to ON and stored. Further, the pre-read probability change flag storage area 203u6 is set to OFF because the area before the shift is stored to 0 every time data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag storage area 203u6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the changing data storage area, and new data is overwritten (shifted) in the changing data storage area to be set to OFF. .. Further, when the game machine is powered on and the RAM clear process is executed, it is set to OFF as an initial value.

Each data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

In this way, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and a holding ball is generated, each holding ball is formed by combining the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of the reserved ball is stored. Therefore, the winning command is generated based on the rearrangement storage area 203u, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, the holding of the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is established. It is possible to generate a command to be output to the display control device 114 so as to display the reserved symbols in order. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also discriminated and stored in association with the established order, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the winning command by generating the winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the received winning command, it is possible to determine the order of establishment of each hold and the actual start order of variable display.

In addition, since the variable start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and that time is managed (updated as time passes), the change display start order of newly stored hold data can be easily performed. Can be determined.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display part 88, and the opening/closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled so that the displayed reserved symbol display is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning of the winning hole is an important factor that determines the gaming state, it is necessary to prevent the player from intentionally winning the winning hole by changing the flow of the ball by vibration. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the command storage area 223a, the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b2, the first variation start flag 223c1, the second variation start flag 223c2, the second 1st stop type selection flag 223d1, 2nd stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary 1st fluctuation stop flag 223e, secondary 2nd fluctuation stop flag 223f, secondary 1st fluctuation restart flag 223g, secondary 2nd fluctuation restart flag 223h, secondary 1st At least a variation time storage area 223i, a secondary second variation time storage area 223j, a secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

The first special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b1 is, similarly to the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, the first special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The second special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b2 is, like the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, the second special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, when the variable display is set on the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (FIG. 38, S1612).

The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, when the variable display is set on the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (FIG. 38, S1612).

The subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1702).

The second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1706).

The subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the temporarily stopped first special symbol is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1710).

The second subordinate variation restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the variable display of the temporarily stopped second special symbol is resumed. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control device 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1714).

The subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value that is synchronized with the first fluctuation time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added for each 1 ms, and the fluctuation time of actual fluctuation display is stored.

The sub second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value in synchronization with the second fluctuation time storage area 203t in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added for each 1 ms and the actual variable display variable time is stored.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k has the same data as the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area that is stored based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113.

FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k stores a variety of data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the holding area of the pending data from the holding area 1 to the holding area 8. And a storage area for data during variable display. Each of the holding areas includes a win/fail judgment result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a subordinate reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a rearrangement flag 223k7. And each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding holding area. Also, every time a display variation pattern command for starting the variable display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the previous reservation area. The reserved data in the reserved area 1 is a storage area for the changing data of the first special symbol in the case of the first special symbol, and a changing data of the second special symbol in the case of the second special symbol. Each is shifted and stored in the storage area.

The hit determination result storage area 223k1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored is extracted from the received winning command and stored. The information on the hit/miss judgment result extracted from the winning command is one of the hit/no hit judgment result storage areas of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

The jackpot type storage area 223k2, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special winning type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable order storage area 223k4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is extracted from the received winning command and stored based on various stored data.

The fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). Is a storage area in which the calculated time until each data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is extracted from the received winning command and stored. .. The variable display start time, when stored in the holding area, is updated at any time in the holding number display processing (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated respective data of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start the variable display. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in fluctuation (interruption count, etc.)), and fluctuation display start It may be a command corresponding to the time until.

The subordinate read probability variation flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is 15R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot.

The rearrangement flag 223k7 indicates that the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display (a reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). It is a flag.

In this way, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a reserved ball occurs, based on the data extracted from the winning command, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of each reserved ball is stored according to the order of establishment of the reserved balls including the above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, the display control device to perform the hold symbol display in the order of establishment of the hold, which is the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, based on the winning command, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is updated with the data synchronized with the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main controller 110, and the suspension data is changed (new suspension is established). Also, the data can be sequentially synchronized and updated.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). The RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

When a power failure occurs, MPU 201 of main controller 110 stores each data in rearrangement storage area 203u in the backup area of RAM 203 as backup data. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and the respective pending areas corresponding to the rearrangement pending storage area 203u or in transition. It is stored in the data storage area.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), based on the rearrangement-reserved storage area 203u in which the backed-up data is read and stored, as in the winning command generated in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S939). All winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, so that data that is synchronized with the same rearrangement pending storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k.

Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k can be restored even after a power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 backs up each data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs. Of course, it may be configured to be stored as.

The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to main controller 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or normal symbol, and various lottery such as selection of winning or variation pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery on whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed as a sub-control. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) which is called a board box and is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method of leaving an unopened mark such as breaking the member forming the through hole or breaking the sealing member. ..

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same design as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, is distributed by the passive distribution member 640, and the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired. Based on each counter value, after the determination of the lottery and the variation pattern, etc., the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Variable display (dynamic display). Further, during the variable display of the first special symbol, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) for the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery machine, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the right 7 In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed in the left display region Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. ..

When the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a during the variable display of the first special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winning. Since the first lottery game which variably displays the lottery result cannot be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, a mode showing the number of reserved "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37 (for example, one The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding spheres is incremented by 1).

When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. The winning command can identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is the winning, and the number of reserved balls (reserved number) can be identified.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, it extracts holding information such as the number of holdings and information about the winning opening from the received command, and based on the holding information, the third symbol display device. A process of displaying the reserved symbol in the corresponding reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds at 81 is executed. As for this reservation design, as shown in Figure 5 (b), if it is the reservation design which corresponds to the reservation information of the 1st special design (1st starting mouth 63a), “O”, 2nd special design (the 2nd starting) If it is a hold symbol corresponding to the hold information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each hold information (one hold symbol for each hold).

Similarly, during the variable display of the second special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), each counter value is acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol reserve ball storage area It is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is updated. Then, the hold symbol indicating that the hold information is stored in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined. The example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. This is, first, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, the first special symbol has a variation time of 10s remaining, the second special symbol has a variation time of 5s remaining Showing. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the holding symbol indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds1 (holding information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b). "", the holding symbol "○" indicating that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol, the holding symbol "○" indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds3 "," is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4, which is a reserved symbol "○" indicating that it is the reserved information of the first special symbol. In this case, it is shown that the order of winning in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the order of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 from the reserved symbol display area Ds1 in ascending order.

In other words, after the game ball is won in the second starting port 63b, the first starting port 63a is won, then the second starting port 63b, then the first starting port 63a is won. It shows that it did.

As shown in FIG. 12, in each hold data, the change time of the change pattern selected when the hold is started to change is predicted and stored in advance (the determined change pattern type is stored. Has been). Then, since the second special symbol is stored in the first winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 1 corresponds), the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variably manner remains. When the variable time (5 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, so the variable display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. Also, since the first special symbol is stored in the second winning order (the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponds to the retaining area 2), the remaining of the first special symbol which is currently displayed in a variable manner. When the variable time (10 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, and the variable display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the second special symbol is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 3 corresponds), the second special symbol is currently displayed. When the variation time (40 s) of the pending data stored in the first winning order has elapsed in the remaining variation time (5 s), the variation display starts, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since the first special symbol is stored in the fourth winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 4 is applicable), the first special symbol currently being displayed is changed. When the fluctuation time (10s) of the pending data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated as 20 seconds later.

In this way, in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, the variable display start times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are calculated in the order in which they are established, and the variable display start time is in the descending order based on the variable display start time. In, the variable display order is assigned.

At this timing, when the player operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in the rearrangement display mode shown in FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the winning order is reserved. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol of the third winning order (the reserved symbol display of the fourth winning order is interrupted before the reserved symbol display of the third winning order).

FIG. 13 shows a case where the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a after 1 s from the state of FIG. 12, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining a variable display start order of newly stored reserved symbols.

Since FIG. 13 is a state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the variable display has a remaining variation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining variation time of 4 s. Further, the fluctuation start time of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u is also updated.

The newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is reserved in the fifth winning order, and in the rearrangement storage area 203u, each data is stored in the storage area 5. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol in the variable display, the variation time of the suspension of the first special symbol of the winning order 2 and 4 are added respectively, and newly. The time when the hold of the established (stored) first special symbol becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the rearranged order (variable display start order) is rearranged in the order in which the variable display is started based on the variable display start time of each holding area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 and requests the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after rearrangement of FIG. 13, the fourth and fifth reserved symbols in the winning order are displayed. Is displayed in rearrangement with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the winning symbol display of the fourth and fifth winning symbols is interrupted before the displaying of the third winning symbol in the winning order).

In this way, each time a hold occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sorting order is determined in advance, so that the player can perform an operation (operation of the frame button 22) requesting sorting. In this case, the reserved symbol display after rearrangement can be promptly displayed.

Further, the variation patterns of the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot are likely to be longer than the variation pattern selected when the variation time is out of sync. As shown in FIG. 13, the variation time of the first winning order hold is as long as 40 seconds. Therefore, the hold of the same second special symbol that is established after that, the variable display start time is later than the hold of the first special symbol that was established later, and when rearranged, a long variable time is selected. Behind the pending symbol display that is present, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that is different from the pending that the long variation time is selected is collectively displayed. Therefore, the greater the number of reserved symbol displays that are displayed by being interrupted in the subsequent reserved symbol display area of the reserved symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of a big hit for the previous reserved symbol display, and the player is You can rearrange with the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, interest in the game is increased and the game can be continued without getting tired.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 40. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (FIG. 32) started when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 33, S1200) executed after the startup process, and periodically (in the present embodiment). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) which is activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 31) which is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 32) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) will be described.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are provided in the RAM 203. Once stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the holding ball number command set in the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large opening opening/closing process for executing is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated in the RAM 203. It is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1 and the normal winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (the In the embodiment, when reaching 399, 99, 100, 198, 239), each is cleared to 0. When the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C4, and the initial value is set in the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (S107), and then, a start winning process associated with winning the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the normal symbol starting process 67 is a normal symbol changing process that is a changing process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through (S109), and then the normal symbol starting port 67. A through gate process for the game ball passing through is executed (S10). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A firing control process is executed to control the game ball to be launched (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S111) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. Then, when the sphere is turned on, in order to send the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). Special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on each acquired counter value, various determinations and determinations are made, and the determined variable display by predetermined control. In the mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to enable variable display at the same time, or to be stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the determination result. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 17, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display has elapsed, the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game. With the process of stopping the variable display, the second special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol showing a big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not held, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the hold data is executed. ..

After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display. When the time has passed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the variable display stop of the first special symbol with the symbol indicating the big hit are performed, and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol which is being variably displayed is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed, the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but like the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), when the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. While the process for restarting the variable display is executed, if the temporary stop is not performed, and if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area 203b, The jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the pending data are executed. Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is provisionally stopped (S301). Whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, although the variation time (variation pattern) is set. .. When it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is restarted (S302). Regarding the variation time of this first special symbol, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), which will be described later, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started to be varied, a variation pattern or the like is selected. Then, the start of measurement of the fluctuation time is set. When the variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the main controller 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first display device 37 in accordance therewith. The variable display of the first special symbol (the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b) in the first symbol display device 37 is restarted (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to restart the variable display of the first special symbol that is temporarily stopped is set (S304). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e is acquired (S305). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306). When the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is determined to be larger than 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S308). .. The data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol holding number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the game that is set. Based on the state, the jackpot judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed. When the determination result is a big hit, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON. Thereby, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display, and it can be recognized that the jackpot game is started after the stop display, and the second special symbol in the variable display is temporarily stopped during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Can be made.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Processing for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (during probability change) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON. If the probability variation flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (during probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether or not the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is off (that is, the game state is a low probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S402: No), in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the big hit random value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S405). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). Thereby, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the determination result is a big jackpot, and when the variable display of the first special symbol that notifies the determination result is stopped and displayed, if the second special symbol is changing, if The variable display will be stopped.

In this way, before starting the variable display of the first special symbol, by setting the second fluctuation stop flag 203r to ON, at the time of the fluctuation table stop of the first special symbol, the temporary stop of the second special symbol is performed. Compared with the case of determining whether or not it is possible, it is possible to prevent a problem that the control processing is concentrated when the fluctuation stops.

Based on the acquired value of the special winning type counter C2, the jackpot symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37, and the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S408). Thereby, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the special winning type counter C2 (for example, "7" if the 15R probability variation big jackpot) is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is OFF (S405: No), the off symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S409). In the present embodiment, in the case of disengagement, "-" indicating disengagement is set in the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S310).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S310). ). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S502). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

The jackpot type table is determined based on the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot type table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, and a 15R jackpot table is determined for the 15R probability jackpot and a 15R regular jackpot, and a 2R jackpot table is determined for the 2R probability jackpot. .. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S505).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp controller 113 of the selected variation pattern is also set. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

Along with the setting of the variation pattern command, by starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time can be measured in time with the variation start of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately measured. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). When it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), the temporary first variation stop command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to temporarily suspend the first special symbol is set. , The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first fluctuation stop flag 203q is set to OFF (S603). Then, the measurement of the first fluctuation time is interrupted (S604).

With such a configuration, the first special symbol can also be temporarily stopped together with the timing at which the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the winning judgment symbol. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game in the second lottery game and play the game.

Moreover, since the measurement of the first fluctuation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, the remaining fluctuation time can be accurately measured after the big hit game.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops the first special symbol in a display mode that allows the player to know that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Specifically, a character such as "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" is displayed, or the three main symbols on the left, middle, and right constituting the special symbol are continuously variably displayed in a swaying display mode, whereby the player To notify that the vehicle is temporarily stopped. The display mode for notifying the temporary stop is not limited to this, and other notification modes may be used.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, variation display is being performed) (S602: No), the process of S605 is executed. When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the variation time of the first special symbol in the variation display is the end time (S605).

When it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606). When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various types of jackpot games are set based on the determined variation stop type (S608). Specifically, in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot and 15R normal jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30 seconds. It In addition, in the case of 2R certainty variation jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2s.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time saving counter 203k is greater than "0" (S609). When it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is larger than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is decremented by 1 (S610). That is, each time the first special symbol is variably displayed, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k has a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S609: No), the process of S611 is executed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is set with a first confirmation command for instructing that the variable display of the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S611). The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol showing the determined hit/miss judgment result (S612). The value of the first fluctuation time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first fluctuation time measured value is cleared to 0 (S613). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the above-mentioned first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), for each process from S301 to S310, the first special symbol , 1st variable time measurement restart, 1st symbol display 37, 1st special symbol fluctuation restart command, 1st special symbol reservation sphere number counter value (N1), 1st special symbol reservation sphere storage area, 1st special symbol Big hit determination process, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process in each process of S701 to S710, the second special symbol, the second variable time measurement restart, the second symbol display device 37, the second special symbol holding ball number counter Value (N2), the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area, the second special symbol jackpot determination process, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, since the same except that they are changed, the description thereof is omitted. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), for the process of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area In the process of S711, in the second special symbol holding sphere execution area, for each process of S407 to S408, the second fluctuation stop flag, the first jackpot flag in each process of S717 to S718, the first fluctuation The description is omitted because they are the same except that they are changed to the stop flag and the second jackpot flag.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S710).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 22, S710), the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310) described above, the first to each processing from S507 to S508 The processes of the stop type command and the first variation time measurement start from S727 to S728 are the same except that they are changed to the first stop type command and the first variation time measurement start, respectively. Omit it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207).

In the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the first variation stop for each of the processes from S601 to S604, with respect to the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 19, S204). Flag, 1st special design, temporary 1st fluctuation stop command, 1st fluctuation time measurement interruption each processing of S801-S804, 2nd fluctuation stop flag, 2nd special design, temporary 2nd fluctuation stop command, 2nd It is changed to variable time measurement interruption, and for each process from S611 to S613, the first commit command, the first special symbol, and the first commit command in each process from S811 to S813, the second commit command. , The second special symbol, since it is the same except that it is changed to the second fluctuation time measurement value, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. Can be made. Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

Moreover, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has a variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Relatively short, even in one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is easily executed, by increasing the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbols are not variably displayed becomes long.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in which either the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery game is executed, when the distribution device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, the variation time is relatively long. If it is not shortened, there will be many overflows that will not be reserved balls. However, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery game is performed with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, on the other hand, even if the variation with a long variation time is selected, the variation of the special symbol on the other side as well. As a result, lots of special symbols can be drawn in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of sufficient variation time as needed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In addition, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so that the player has confirmed that the lottery game that was in the middle of variable display has not disappeared. It is possible to grasp and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the distribution device 630, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b are likely to be alternately won, and the first start opening 63a or the second start. The prize is biased toward one of the mouths 63b, and the player tries to make the other starting mouth, which is less reserved, win the winning ball. It is possible to suppress the problem that many invalid balls occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) determines whether a game ball has won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and in the case of winning, the upper limit holding number (first starting opening 63a, It is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b, up to four in each of the 2 starting ports 63b). Moreover, each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding sphere storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a win/fail judgment result, a variation pattern to be selected, or the like is executed in advance. The starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 63a (start winning) (S901). Here, the winning of the first start opening 63a is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 63a (there is a starting winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether the number is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first starting opening 63a (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S904). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold number is set (S905). Various counter values, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding balls of the RAM 203 are stored. It is reserved (stored) in the special hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the execution area 203c (S906).

Next, the first prefetch processing is executed (S907). The first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special display in which the variable display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is stored. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what the order is, and from the variation display order and each of the stored counter values, the judgment result, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. The process of determining is executed.

Next, regarding each processing of S908 to S914, the same processing as the processing performed for winning the game ball into the first starting opening 63a executed in each processing of S901 to S907 is the second processing. The only difference is the process executed for the starting port 63b, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first prefetching process (S907) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch processing (S907).

In the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907), first, special counter random number counter C1, special counter type counter C2, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, fluctuation The respective values of the pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are read (S921). The read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the rearrangement storage area 203u, and the variable display is started based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value). The variable display start time is calculated (S922).

This fluctuation start time is, as shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol in the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reservation data (if the reservation data is based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second special symbol. If it is the hold data based on the starting opening 63b, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol) and the holding data previously stored based on the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored holding data is determined. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation times.

Here, each of the hold data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored hold data means that the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first starting port 63a. Hold data based on the first starting port 63a (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored on the other hand, on the other hand, if the newly stored hold data is hold data based on the second starting port 63b, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 63b that has been done.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203u (S923). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, However, if the newly stored variable display start order of the pending data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is obvious that only the changed order is renumbered. Good.

It is determined whether the game state at the time when the newly stored hold data starts changing is the high probability game state (S924). Regarding the game state when the fluctuation starts, although there is a thing that the prefetch probability change flag 203u6 is on although the stopped data is changed by the time when the newly stored hold data starts to change, and then the 15R normal jackpot is stopped. It is determined by determining whether or not there is. When it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts to change is the high-probability game state (S924: Yes), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high-probability case jackpot determination value On the basis of the above, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is valid, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts to change is the low-probability game state (normal game state) (S924: No), the special symbol jackpot for the low-probability case Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is valid, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S927).

The first prefetch update processing is executed (S926). The first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but it is determined whether or not the pending data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Based on, the jackpot type (whether it is a probable change) and the variation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated).

Next, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926), first, it is determined whether or not the win/no-judgment result predicted in the process of S925 or S927 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) is a big hit (S931). When it is determined that the hit determination result predicted in the processing of S925 or S927 in the first prefetch processing (FIG. 25, S907) is a jackpot (S931: Yes), the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or It is determined whether or not it is the second R probability variation big hit) (S932). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (S932: Yes), the pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 of the sorting reservation storage area 203u corresponding to the newly stored reservation data is set to ON (S933). .. The prefetch probability change flag 203u6 is set to OFF because the data in the reserved area before the shift is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the holding area in order, and is set to OFF by shifting and overwriting (clearing to 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area. To be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the probability variation jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S932: No), the process of S934 is executed.

The special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the start of variation display (whether it is in probability variation or shortening time) is newly stored from the special winning variation type counter C2 and the variation pattern determining counter C3 of the pending data. The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S934).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the win/no determination result predicted in the process of S925 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) is out (S931: No), the game state at the start of variable display (probable change or shortened time). Whether or not), the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e is determined at the start of fluctuation display based on the values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data. The fluctuation pattern is predicted (S935).

The predicted hit/miss, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponding to the winning order (corresponding to the newly stored suspension data) (S936). It is determined whether or not the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is interrupted (changed in order) to the previously stored variable display start order (S937). .. If it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u is interrupted (changed in order) to the previously stored variable display start order, (S937: Yes), about the pending data after the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data (the pending data in the order of starting to vary after the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data fluctuates and stops) Then, again, the success/failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted and updated (S938). Based on the hit/miss, stop type, variation pattern, winning order, variation display start order, and pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 corresponding to all the retention data stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the respective data is converted into a voice lamp control device. A winning command for notifying 113 is generated for each holding data (S939).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and is held until the variable display of the corresponding special symbol can be started, it is determined whether or not it is won before the variable display is started. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of variation start by the player's operation.

Further, when a new hold is stored and the order in which fluctuation starts is changed due to the new hold (the newly stored change start order of the reservation is interrupted and stored), the rearrangement storage area 203u is again stored. Of the stored hold areas, the newly stored hold is newly stored because the judgment of acceptance, stop type, and variation pattern are updated for the hold that starts changing after the newly stored hold is stopped. By doing so, even when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state) changes, it is possible to update it to accurate data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the newly stored hold start sequence is interrupted and stored, the hold data in the hold area (whether the judgment is correct, the stop type, or the fluctuation pattern) is updated again. Not limited to this, when a new hold is stored, the judgment may be performed again for all the hold areas every time. With this configuration, the data in the holding area can be updated each time new holding is stored, and more accurate data can always be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a second prefetching process (S914) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S914).

The second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) prefetches the pending data based on the winning of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) in the first starting opening 63a, and is stored in advance. In contrast to the process of determining the variable display start order of the pending data and making various determinations, the pending data based on winning the second starting opening 63b is prefetched in advance and the stored pending data is stored. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and various determinations are performed, and the detailed description is omitted.

Further, as for the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, 914) shown in FIG. 28, the above-described first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) is the first. While the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command based on the variation display start order of the pending data based on the winning of the first starting port 63a, the winning of the second starting port 63b is performed. Based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on the above, the same process is executed, only the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command, and detailed description is omitted. To do.

In this way, game balls are won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When the reserved data is stored (the hold data is stored), the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) is executed. The newly stored reservation data is stored in the rearrangement reservation ball storage area 203u in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) in which the order of the variable display start is sorted first. Since it is decided by comparing with the variable display start time of each held data that is stored, the gaming state (whether it is during the probable change) is accurately determined when the stored data stored is started to display. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the result of the judgment, the stop type, the fluctuation pattern displayed in a variable manner, and the like. Therefore, next, even when new pending data is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second The variable display start time of the newly stored pending data can be accurately predicted based on the variation time (variation pattern) of each pending data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variable display start order can be predicted.

In addition, when the variable display start order of newly stored hold data is stored by interrupting the variable display start order of previously stored hold data (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold display is performed. For each pending data in the variable display start order after the data, the game state at the start of variable display is predicted again by the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). Then, since the winning/prohibition, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted (look ahead), the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored hold data from the winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a normal symbol variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors' prize 64, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit. (S1001). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the hit indicating is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 to when the opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S1001: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1001: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol that is being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1003). The variable time here is a time preset by the processes of S1017 and S1018, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 88.

In the processing of S1003, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, when it is determined that the variation time of the normally displayed variable symbol has elapsed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 88 is set (S1004). .. In the process of S1004, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is missed and the display mode at the time of disengagement is set by the processing of S1017, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) as the second symbol on the second symbol display unit 88. Display) is set. By the process of S1004, when the stop display is set, the variable display in the second symbol display unit 88 ends, the process of S1017, the display mode set in the process of S1018, the stop symbol (second symbol) is The stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display portion 88.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the regular design lottery this time is a win (S1005). When it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ordinary symbols this time is a win (S1005: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbols this time is out of alignment (S1005: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1007). After the processing of S1007, the processing of S1023 is executed.

Next, it is judged whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1009).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal symbol reserve 1 to the normal symbol reserve 4 of the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, ordinary symbol hold 1 → execution area, ordinary symbol hold 2 → ordinary symbol hold 1, ordinary symbol hold 3 → ordinary symbol hold 2, ordinary symbol hold 4 → ordinary symbol hold 4, etc. within each area Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

Next, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 0 (that is, not during hour/hour) (S1012: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability time (FIG. 8(d)) Based on, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1013). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is not 0 (that is, during hour saving) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (( S1014). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1014: Yes), the process of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big bonus of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1014: No), the normal judgment per random symbol table for high probability (FIG. 8 (d)) On the basis of this, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1015).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out) (S1016: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of disconnection is set. (S1017). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be winning (that is, it is winning) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode at the time of winning is It is set (S1018).

It is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during hour/hour (including a certain variation)) (S1019). When it is determined that the time is not shortening (S1019: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the opening frequency is set to 1 (S1020).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is shortening (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1021: Yes), the process of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is 1 s and the number of times of opening is two times. It is set (S1020).

It is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during hour/hour (including probability variation)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is shortening (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

Next, the through gate passage processing (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67, and if the game ball has passed. , Is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 for ordinary hits.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1033).

Whether the sphere does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or even if the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt process, and the first normal symbol flag, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 empty holding area (ordinary symbol holding 1 to ordinary symbol) It is stored in the first area of the hold 4) (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol reserve 2, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol reserve 3, if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol reserve 4, first, respectively. Area.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed to start the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (11605). If not, it is not stored. (S1105: No), since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1110 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1110. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1111, S1112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1104: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1108). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1113). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process shifts to a main process (S1200) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), roughly, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

In the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is output to each sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). The display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display portion 88 is acquired. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, and when the hit state of the second symbol is reached, the normal electric auditors' prize 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1207). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1207: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201 and the above-described respective processes after S1201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1207: No), the initial period is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1208, S1209).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1202 (S1209).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, so that the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special random number counter C1 Of the random number counter C4 per ordinary number) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1206, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 31 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1210 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1211). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1206 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1205 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1201 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing (S1400) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the power-off process in S1418 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1302: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1418 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1418 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is executed, the process of S1308 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1304 to S1306 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1309, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1309 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304 when the processing of S1308 is reached through the processing of S1304 through S1306. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main processing (S1400) is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing (S1400) was started or since the processing of S1401 was executed last time ( S1401) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1410. In the process of S1401, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S1402 to S1410 that determines whether 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S1411 and the command determination processing of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the power supply notifying process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update process (S1406), which will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the pending symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. ..

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the rearrangeable period (a period during which the jackpot game and the state where there is no hold) are pressed, the hold symbol display that has been displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts variable display. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is then executed (S1408), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410). After this, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1411, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to the user, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), the temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) is a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped from the main control device 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Based on having received, the process for temporarily stopping the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. Details of this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the temporary fluctuation stopping process (S1412), the pending rearrangement process is executed (S1413). This reservation rearrangement processing displays the reserved symbol displays in a rearranged display start order from the winning order based on a player's button operation based on a winning command output from the main control device 110, based on the player's button operation. Execute the process. Details of the reservation rearrangement process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the reservation rearrangement process (S1413), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1414 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to the process of S1401 to repeatedly execute the main process (S1400). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process (S1400) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the command determination processing (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1414). The command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. To judge. Details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main controller 110 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command is received (S1501). Here, the first variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the first variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the first variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be distinguishable from the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the second variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the second variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the second variation pattern command is received (S1504: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the second variation pattern command is not received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1507). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command is received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to ON when the first stop type command is received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to ON. (S1508). The stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Is stored so that it can be identified.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter f (that is, the number of holding balls of the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a voice lamp. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113, the holding ball number of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 (S1511).

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning), every time there is a starting winning. , S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the second It can be adjusted to the value of the 2 special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, at the time of starting winning detection, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. However, the value can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e or the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203f of the main controller 110.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), information of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each holding area in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u that is extracted is the judgment result, jackpot type, change pattern type, change display order, and time until start of change display for each hold. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). When it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received (S1515: Yes), when the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received, the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received and set to ON, the secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol fluctuation restart command or the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received. It is determined whether or not it is (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation restart command corresponding to the received command is received. In this case, the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON. When the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received, the sub second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending quantity display update processing (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing (S1406). This reservation number display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the reservation symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each reservation area of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k. ..

In the reservation quantity display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the fluctuation display start time of the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is turned on is a variable display start order, and is held corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off. As for the symbol display, the held symbol display is displayed in the order in which the hold is established (S1432).

Here, in the rearrangement flag 223k7, the frame button 22 is operated during the rearrangeable period in the pending rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the button is pressed), it is set to ON in all hold areas in which hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed hold symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the hold variable display start order from the hold hold order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF for the newly stored hold, the order established without rearrangement, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol displays displayed at that time are rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter. Also, the rearranged hold symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the newly stored (reoccurring) hold symbol display is displayed in the established order first. Since it is displayed at the end without being displayed by interrupting the reserved symbol display that is being performed, the player can suppress the problem that the current display is confused as to which sequence is displayed. You can

Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol displays that are displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to notify the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

Also, in the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display, when the reserved symbol having a slower establishment order is displayed before the reserved symbol having a faster establishment order is displayed. Of the pending symbols displayed before the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt, the pending generated by winning in the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt is a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with the expectation of a big hit.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is based on the first or second variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, a process of setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type based on the extracted stop type (15R certainty big jackpot, 15R normal big jackpot, 2R certainty big jackpot) To execute.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), it means that the first fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process of S1606 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S1602).

In the processing of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the processing of S1503 of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223. Then, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte structure is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol Is configured to indicate that

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is received, in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the first special symbol (third symbol).

With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with (display setting was performed), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the previous holding area. It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7. Using the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i, measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started (S1605).

It is determined whether the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). Then, when it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the first variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to off (S1607). In the process of S1506 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and the second A variable pattern command for displaying a special symbol is generated (S1608).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received, in the right display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol (third symbol). With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the one holding area before. It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7.

Using the sub second variation time storage area 223j, measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started (S1610).

It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S1611: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S1611: Yes), when the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, When the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to OFF and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to OFF (S1612).

In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S1613). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). A first stop type command for display for notifying (whether there is) is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). Then, a second display stop type command for notifying whether or not) is generated (S1614). It should be noted that the first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. .. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

With such a configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

Further, based on that the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, by also shifting the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110. The control load of main controller 110 can be reduced without the need to control the transmission of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is changed. During the jackpot game, a process for temporarily stopping is executed.

In the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is determined whether the first subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. When it is determined that the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

A first temporary stop command for display is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 sets the first temporary stop command for display, after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol (main symbol on the left middle right) is slightly shaken to be displayed. Then, the player is informed that the variable display is temporarily stopped. Further, by displaying the character "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left side display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand and the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is configured to notify.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being displayed variably was temporarily stopped because a big hit occurred, and the lottery that was being displayed variably disappeared or became invalid. You can play games with peace of mind by preventing anxiety when it happens.

Further, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left display area Dm, and the temporary stop may be informed only by the characters. However, other configurations are naturally possible.

When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol measured in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the subordinate first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (that is, off) (S1701: No), is the subordinate second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second display temporary stop command is displayed. Is generated (S1707). The second temporary stop command for display, similarly to the first temporary stop command for display, controls the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a command to do. Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of temporary stop.

When the display second temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol measured in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

It is determined whether the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709: Yes), the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1710).

It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711: Yes), the first short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1712). When the display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed lottery result of the variation display!" in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the sub-first variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3s (S1711: No), the display first normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode resuming command displays the character "temporarily changing the variation display which is changing!" in the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols. The main symbols (three symbols on the left middle right) are variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, and then, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is a symbol showing the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub first fluctuation time storage area 223i is restarted (S1714).

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the subordinate second variation restart flag 223h is set to on (S1715). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1716).

It is determined whether the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed variation display lottery result!" in the right side display area Dm2 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3s (S1717: No), the display second normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1719). When the display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second normal variation mode resuming command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display is changing!" in the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining change time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After the main symbol (three symbols in the left middle right) is variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the second special symbol is shown in the symbol indicating the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub second fluctuation time storage area 223j is restarted (S1720). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted, the fact is informed to the player by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice is not limited thereto. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, like the display mode in which the player knows that the change has been resumed (for example, it is displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display in which the character etc. has been interrupted is displayed) Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode only for restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the suspended variable display is restarted.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern according to the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when the main control device 110 restarts the temporary stoppage of the fluctuation timetable, the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time or the fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time is used depending on the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls by delaying the difference between the remaining variation time and the variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time to display the variation. , It is possible to perform a variation table time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the remaining variation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pending rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this reservation rearrangement processing processing (S1413). The hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is a hold symbol displayed in the hold establishment order on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid period. The process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

In the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), first, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (S1801). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the holding areas in which the holding data of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is stored are set to ON. (S1804).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1801: No), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), the process ends.

With such a configuration, when the player wants to sort, it is possible to sort only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be played evenly and efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the holding symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new holding is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order by the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, even when a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode are displayed together. By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store data that is rearranged. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data necessary for rearrangement (winning judgment result, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.) by a winning command. The voice lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform rearrangement.

With this configuration, the main control device 110 backs up various data necessary for rearrangement in the RAM 203 even when a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored, the various types of data are restored in the startup process (FIG. 32). By outputting the data to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 rearranges the data based on the various data, so that it is possible to easily recover from the power failure.

In the present embodiment, by the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the start of variation and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the first special symbol or the first reserved symbol The fluctuation start time of 2 special symbols was calculated, and the fluctuation start order was calculated. Not limited to this, at the time of winning a game ball, by determining whether or not the variation mode is a reach, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is longer than a certain time (time information), and the time information and the variation The variation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. With such a configuration, at the time of winning, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is a reach (whether the long-time variation mode or the short-time variation mode), and the accurate variation time (variation mode) is determined. Even with the pachinko machine 10 that is determined by information such as the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation, the player can be notified of the rough fluctuation start order.

Therefore, the player may not be in the exact change start order, but the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term change mode (reach change mode) being held. , You can play games with the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is determined by the game state, but is not limited thereto, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (for example, the state where the pending symbol display is displayed), It may be configured to notify that rearrangement is possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to flexibly set the period during which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to sort.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710). Then, a case has been described in which the special winning variation pattern table or the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is selected based on the jackpot determination result, and various variation patterns are selected.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (the present embodiment. In the example, 3 or more), and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (this implementation In the form, it is determined whether there is more than two), and if there is more, a fluctuation pattern that is out of the short time and is configured with a fluctuation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) shorter than other fluctuation patterns is selected. It Regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, similarly to the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the difference between the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is more than a predetermined number, and the fluctuation pattern out of the short time is selected.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol, respectively, the states of the reserved balls are judged to be special. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a variation pattern (in the present embodiment, a variation pattern that deviates for a short time) is selected.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e in the special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table commonly selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

This special deviation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) is a later-described first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) and second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (not shown), It is a fluctuation pattern table to be selected. Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern is three or more, and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the other special symbol (the second special symbol if the first special symbol) is two. If there are more than the above, this special deviation pattern pattern for adjustment is selected. The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table that is selected only when the judgment result is incorrect, and is composed of only one type with a variation time of 0.5 seconds. There is. Therefore, regardless of the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter CS3, a variation pattern (variation time of 0.5 seconds) that is out of the short period is selected.

In this way, by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of the short time, the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the difference from the reserved balls of the other special symbol is 2 or more, and the number of reserved balls is equal to each other. Even if it is not, it is possible to speed up the digestion of the holding ball of the more one, it is possible to hold the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol evenly, only the other The upper limit number (4 in this embodiment) is set, and it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring.

In addition, by determining whether or not there are three or more holding balls of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern, the variation pattern that is out of the short time is frequently selected in the state where the number of holding balls is small, and the effect of the game ( It is possible to prevent a loss of interest due to fluctuations in special symbols).

Further, in the present embodiment, the adjustment special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) has only one kind of fluctuation pattern with a short time deviation (change time of 0.5 seconds). Alternatively, it may be configured by a variation pattern that is deviated for a short time and is configured by the variation time. In this way, by configuring, when the other special symbol is changing, by changing the remaining variation time, the type of variation pattern (variation time) that is out of the selected short time, variation of the holding ball The numbers can be even with each other. Further, the variation time of the reserved ball of the other special symbol may be predicted, and the variation pattern of the short time deviation to be selected may be changed. By doing this, even if there is a special pattern with a smaller number of reserved balls, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C) is selected. , By selecting a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment for a short time, it is possible to adjust the holding balls of the special symbols to be more uniform.

In the present embodiment, the difference between the reserved balls is determined, and the variation pattern for adjustment is determined. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the difference between the special symbols is selected without determining the difference between the reserved balls. The pattern may be discriminated and the variation pattern may be selected so that the variation time difference becomes small. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation pattern selected by the second special symbol is determined, and if the variation pattern having the long variation time is selected, the variation of the relatively long variation time is changed. The patterns (variation time in accordance with the variation end of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, etc.) may be determined so that the holding balls have the same digestion speed.

With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the number of reserved balls to be equal to each other without determining extremely short or long fluctuation patterns.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 assists the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64b alternately so that the game balls can be easily won. Therefore, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, due to the difference in the variation pattern (variation time) that is selected, the digestion speed of the reserved ball is different, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the reserved ball There is a case where the numbers are unbalanced, or the distribution device 630 does not alternately distribute the game balls to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b, which may cause the deviation. However, if a bias occurs, if there are two or more differences between the holding balls in the three states before the number of holding balls reaches the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), it will take a short time. Since the variation pattern of deviation is selected, the player can continue the game without worrying that an overflow will occur in the holding ball of one special symbol.

Referring to FIG. 42, in the second embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 43, in the second embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 2 (S320) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S320). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, in the case where the hit determination result is out, it is a process for selecting a variation pattern that is out of time for a short time depending on the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot ( S511). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S511: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S512). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

The big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is determined based on the big hit type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S513). The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(c)) is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table. In the case of the 15R probability jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot, the 15R jackpot table is the 2R probability jackpot. The 2R jackpot table is determined.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S511: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514). The number of holding balls of the first special symbol is determined based on the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514: Yes), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. It is determined whether the value is 2 or more (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) (S515). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (S515: Yes), the special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) is set. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 3 (S514: No), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. When it is determined that the result is less than two (S515: No), the special deviation variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the gaming state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S518). Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command is generated (S519). Here, the first variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S520). After that, the measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S521).

In this way, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, and further, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, The special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the variation pattern with a short deviation is selected, the variation of the first special symbol ends in 0.5 seconds, and the next first special The holding ball is digested by the start of the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the holding ball of the symbol. Therefore, the reserved ball of the first special symbol will be digested one after 0.5 seconds, the digestion speed of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is increased, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol It can be adjusted to reduce the difference between the holding balls.

Also, if a large number of game balls are won in the first starting opening 63a in a short time and the difference between the reserved balls becomes large, or if the first special symbol has a relatively long variation pattern (for example, variation pattern of super reach C, etc.). ) Is selected, a relatively short variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern of the normal deviation A) is continuously selected in the second special symbol, and the difference between the reserved balls becomes large (eg, the first variation pattern). 1 special symbol reserve ball is 4 and the second special symbol reserve ball is 1), etc., each time the variation of the first special symbol starts Since the process of whether or not to select, is performed, in the first special symbol, a fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short period of time is continuously selected, and it is necessary to quickly adjust to reduce the difference between the reserved balls. You can Therefore, in the first special symbol, the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment) is reached, and in the second special symbol the number is less than the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment) (for example, one or the like), When the reserved balls of the second special symbol are also to be reserved up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), the game balls are distributed to the first winning opening 63a by being alternately distributed by the distribution winning device 630. It is possible to prevent a problem that a prize is won and an overflow occurs.

Further, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, by determining the difference between the holding balls of each other, the holding balls of the first special symbol is the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) Until the remaining one, the variation pattern that is out of the short time is not selected, and the variation pattern that is out of the short time is frequently selected, and the player cannot fully enjoy the effect due to the variation of the special symbol, and the game It is possible to prevent getting tired. It is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is missed before the special symbol is stopped by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short time, and does not have the expectation for a big hit. be able to.

In addition, even if a difference between the holding balls occurs by selecting a relatively long fluctuation pattern (such as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C), a fluctuation pattern that is out of position for a short time is selected thereafter, so that It can be adjusted to reduce the difference. Therefore, the overflow can be reduced, and many variation patterns having a relatively long variation time (variation patterns of Super Reach C, etc.) are selected to make the player enjoy the production by the variation of the special symbol, It is possible to prevent getting tired of playing games. Therefore, it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects, and to suppress the problem that the selection of the variation pattern can be limited (for example, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern such as the spear reach C is extremely reduced). it can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the distribution winning device 630 alternately distributes the game to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. Therefore, the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the difference is one, so as not to select the fluctuation pattern out of the short time, the reserved ball and the first of the first special symbol It is determined whether or not the difference between the two special symbols and the reserved ball is two or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation pattern that is out of the short time from being frequently selected even when the distribution winning apparatus 630 is evenly distributed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hit determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, the variation pattern for adjustment is not selected. With such a configuration, as the variation pattern to be a hit, a variation pattern showing a normal hit can be selected, and an effect of the variation pattern to be sufficiently hit to the player can be produced. In addition, if the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a hit, since the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation stop, it is not necessary to deal with problems such as overflow without selecting a fluctuation pattern for adjustment. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, but not limited to this, it may be two or more, or may be appropriately set by another number. Further, it may be configured to directly determine the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol without determining the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but the number may be three or more, and other numbers are appropriately set. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern for a short time deviation is one type having a variation time of 0.5 seconds, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be different for each 0.5 seconds. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided for selection. About selection, you may make it select by a counter value like selection of other variation patterns, and the state of the reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls, the difference between the reserved balls, and those that are reserved). For example, it may be selected based on the previously determined variation time), or if the second special symbol is changing, it may be configured to select based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference with the holding ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of a variation pattern that is out of order for a short time and allow the player to play a game with the effect of the normal variation pattern, and prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with a short time deviation is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern with normal deviation A) is selected from the normal time deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may comprise. With such a configuration, the player can change the special symbol in a normal variation pattern, and the player can reduce the feeling of strangeness that the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

As for the second special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment as in the first special symbol. And the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process, is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S203). ..

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first is the second, the second However, since the detailed description and the effect to be achieved are the same, the description and the illustration are omitted.

In the present embodiment, when the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (two or more in the present embodiment), a variation pattern of a short time deviation However, it is not limited to this, but it is not limited to the case where the result of the judgment is wrong, the variation pattern selected by the other special symbol is determined, and the difference in the number of reserved balls is eliminated. The variation pattern may be selected. In detail, the holding balls of the first special symbol are two more than the holding balls of the second special symbol, and if the variation pattern selected by the retaining balls of the second special symbol is a relatively short variation pattern, it is more than that. Select a short fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds), and if it is a relatively long fluctuation pattern, select a fluctuation pattern that is shorter than the fluctuation pattern and that can adjust the difference in the holding balls. You can do this.

With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the difference between the reserved balls while performing a more natural variation of the special symbol. Therefore, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table, a variation pattern table dedicated to deviation for a short time is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in a normal variation pattern (both hit and deviation), A fluctuation pattern (for example, a short time fluctuation of 0.5 seconds) is set for the address, and the leading address is selected according to the difference of the holding balls to select the fluctuation pattern for the adjustment. May be.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but the distribution device 630 is not provided and the first start opening is provided. Even with a configuration in which game balls randomly win the 63a and the second start opening 63b, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 45. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the reserved balls, a fluctuation pattern that is out of the range for a short time is selected, and the difference is adjusted to be small. I explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern of the smaller number of holding balls is first set among the holding balls of the larger number of holding balls under the same condition of the holding balls as in the first embodiment. A variation pattern in which the variation time is the time until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that starts to vary is selected.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 adjusts the variation time of the special symbol with the smaller number of holding balls, thereby reducing the difference between the holding balls of the second embodiment. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) of the third embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the third embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 45, in the third embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 3 (S330) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (S330). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, if the result of the hit determination is out, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than a predetermined number than the holding balls of the second special symbol. In this case, it is a process for selecting a variation pattern for adjusting the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), each process from S534 to S536 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), if it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S531: No), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 It is determined whether the number is equal to or more (S534). The number of holding balls of the second special symbol is determined based on the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is three or more (S534: Yes), the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the second special symbol. It is determined whether or not the value is 2 or more (that is, the number of reserve balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of reserve balls of the first special symbol) (S535). Here, it is determined by the value obtained by subtracting the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (S535: Yes), based on the rearrangement storage area 203u, the second special symbol from the present time. Of the 1st hold (in the holding area of the second special symbol, the holding area where the changing order is the earliest) the change until the end of the change of the special symbol is the first adjustment special deviation change The pattern command is set.

Here, among the values of the second variable time storage area 203t and the reserved areas of the second special symbols in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u, the variable pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reserved area having the earliest variation order is stored. The fluctuation time is calculated by adding the value of the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern. When the first adjustment special deviation variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern selection in the processing of S539 is skipped, and the processing of the next S540 is executed.

Thus, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (three or more in the present embodiment), and the difference between the holding balls is 2 or more. In the case of (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less), among the holding balls of the second special symbol, the change order is the earliest in the order of change. The selected fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the holding ball of the second special symbol is digested, and until the second is about to be digested, the retaining ball of the second special symbol is not digested, so the digestion speed of the retaining ball of the first special symbol is It becomes late, and it can be adjusted so that the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reduced.

In addition, by determining whether there are three or more holding balls of the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the variation pattern for adjustment is frequently selected and the performance of the game is impaired.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hit determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, the variation pattern for adjustment is not selected. With such a configuration, as the variation pattern to be a hit, a variation pattern showing a normal hit can be selected, and an effect of the variation pattern to be sufficiently hit to the player can be produced. In addition, if the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a hit, since the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation stop, it is not necessary to deal with problems such as overflow without selecting a fluctuation pattern for adjustment. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is three or more, but not limited to this, it may be two or more, or may be appropriately set by another number. In addition, it is of course possible to directly determine the difference between the reserved balls of the second special symbol and the first special symbol without determining the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the first special symbol, but the number may be three or more, and other numbers are appropriately set. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first special symbol is completed is selected, but the invention is not limited to this, and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol that is being varied is more than that. It may have a long fluctuating time. Moreover, you may make it select the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol held first.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first special symbol is finished is selected, but the variation pattern of the variation time close to the variation time or the variation time longer than that May be selected from the out-of-normal fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B). With such a configuration, the player can change the special symbol in a normal variation pattern, and the player can reduce the feeling of strangeness that the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

Moreover, you may combine the structure of 2nd Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment. With this configuration, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be smaller at the timing when the two special symbols change, and it is possible to respond more quickly.

As for the second special symbol, as in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330). In the above, only the first is changed to the second and the second is changed to the first, and since the detailed description and the effect to be achieved are the same, the description and the illustration are omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but the number may be three or more, and other numbers are appropriately set. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern for a short time deviation is one type having a variation time of 0.5 seconds, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be different for each 0.5 seconds. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided for selection. About selection, you may make it select by a counter value like selection of other variation patterns, and the state of the reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls, the difference between the reserved balls, and those that are reserved). For example, it may be selected based on the previously determined variation time), or if the second special symbol is changing, it may be configured to select based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference with the holding ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of a variation pattern that is out of order for a short time and allow the player to play a game with the effect of the normal variation pattern, and prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with a short time deviation is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern with normal deviation A) is selected from the normal time deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may comprise. With such a configuration, the player can change the special symbol in a normal variation pattern, and the player can reduce the feeling of strangeness that the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but the distribution device 630 is not provided and the first start opening is provided. Even with a configuration in which game balls randomly win the 63a and the second start opening 63b, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the reserved balls, a fluctuation pattern that is out of the range for a short time is selected, and the difference is adjusted to be small. I explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game balls have been consecutively won in either one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, and the winning is continuously performed. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the person who successively won the prize is selected for a short time, and the variation pattern is adjusted so as to reduce the difference between the reserved balls.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, the second embodiment is performed in that a variation pattern of a short time deviation is selected based on the fact that the game balls successively win one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

The first winning flag 203v1 is a flag indicating that a game ball has won in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, the first winning flag 203v1 is a game ball winning the first starting opening 63a, and the first winning flag 203v1 is off in a first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) described later. This is a flag that is set to ON in the case. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, it is set to off.

The second winning flag 203v2 is the same as the first winning flag 203v1 with respect to the second starting opening 63b, and is the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

With such a configuration, when the distribution winning device 630 does not alternately distribute the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, for example, when the game balls successively win the first starting opening 63a. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a for the second time, the first winning flag 203v1 has already been set to ON, and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening 63a has been continuously won. It is configured to be able to.

The first continuous winning flag 203v3 is a flag indicating that the game balls have won in succession in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, in the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), which will be described later, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, the first winning flag 203v1 is already set to ON. Is a flag that is set to ON. On the other hand, in a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), which will be described later, when the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set in the process of S526, it is set to OFF.

The second consecutive winning flag 203v4 is the same as the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 with respect to the second starting port 63b, and is the same, so a detailed description is omitted.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b has been continuously won. Therefore, based on that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 or the second winning flag 203v4 is set to ON, by selecting the variation pattern for adjustment, it is possible to easily hold the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be configured to reduce the sphere difference.

With reference to FIG. 47, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process of the fourth embodiment, a part of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) is changed from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the second embodiment, and the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) is replaced by the start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120).

Referring to FIG. 48, in the fourth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 48, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) of the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the fourth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 49, in the fourth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process that is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 4 (S340) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (S340). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, if the result of the winning/disapproval determination is out, it is determined whether or not the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON (that is, whether the game balls have continuously won in the first starting opening 63a), and if it is ON, This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern that is out of time for adjusting the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), each process from S554 to S556 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S551: No), is the first continuous winning flag 203v3 on? (That is, whether the game balls have won the first starting opening 63a continuously) is determined (S554). When it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on (S554: Yes), the adjustment special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set to off. (S556).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is off (S554: No), the value obtained by subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is 2 It is determined whether the number is more than one (that is, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol) (S555). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (S555: Yes), the process of S556 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 2 (S555: No), the special deviation variation according to the gaming state. The pattern table 202e is set. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

With this configuration, when the prize-winning device 630 does not distribute the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b alternately, and continuously wins one of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b, a short-term deviation occurs. Since the variation pattern is selected, the player who wins the prizes in succession can more quickly complete the hold, and the state in which the prizes are distributed alternately can be made almost the same. Therefore, it can be adjusted so as to reduce the difference in the reserved balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (the holding ball of the first special symbol is 2 If there are more than a predetermined number, and if the number is more than a predetermined number, a fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short time is selected. As a result, in the distribution winning device 630, even if the distribution is made alternately, the difference in the number of holding balls of a predetermined number or more due to the difference in the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if (for example, two or more) occur, it is possible to make an adjustment so as to reduce the difference between the reserved balls by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of the short time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, the same as in the second embodiment. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a variation pattern that is frequently out of place for a short time from being frequently selected, so that the player cannot fully enjoy the effect due to the variation of the special symbol and get tired of the game. It is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is missed before the special symbol is stopped by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short time, and does not have the expectation for a big hit. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the flag 203v is on, the process of S555 is executed, and if the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, the special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) may be set. With this configuration, even when the first starting opening 63a is continuously won, if the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not more than a predetermined number, a normal variation pattern is obtained. It can be configured to be selected, and it is possible to prevent frequent and short-term deviation pattern selection.

As for the second special symbol, as in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340). In the above, only the first is changed to the second and the second is changed to the first, and since the detailed description and the effect to be achieved are the same, the description and the illustration are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 50, a start winning process 2 (S120) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120). The start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) of the fourth embodiment is different from the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S906) in comparison with the starting winning process of the second embodiment (FIG. 24, S108). The continuous winning determination process (S980) is added. Each processing of S901 to S914 in the fourth embodiment is the same as each processing of S901 to S914 in the second embodiment. In the processing of S901, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), the first continuous winning determination processing (FIG. 51, S960) is executed.

In the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), first, it is determined whether the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON (that is, whether the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a last time). (S961). When it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is on, the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set to on (S962). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is off (that is, the game ball has won the second starting opening 63b last time) (S961: No), the first winning flag 203v1 is set to on. Yes (S963). After that, the second winning flag 203v2 is set to OFF (S964).

With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether the game balls have successively won in the first starting opening 63a without alternately winning the game balls in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. You can

In the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on, the variation pattern that is out of the short period is selected. However, it is determined whether the second continuous winning flag 203v4 is on, If it is on, as in the third embodiment, among the suspension of the second special symbol, the variation pattern composed of the variation time until the variation of the special symbol for the earliest variation start sequence is stopped. You may make it select. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be small.

The second consecutive winning determination process (S907) is different from the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) in that the first is changed to the second and the second is changed to the first. Detailed illustration and description are omitted.

In the present embodiment, the first winning flag 203v1 and the second winning flag 203v2 are provided respectively, but only one of them may be provided and the determination may be made according to the ON/OFF state. .. Specifically, in the case of only the first winning flag 203v1, if the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON, the first starting opening 63a is won, and the first winning flag 203v1 is OFF. If it is set, it is determined that the second start opening 63b is a winning. With this configuration, the number of flags and the like can be reduced, and the required capacity of RAM can be reduced. The same applies to the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 and the second consecutive winning flag 203v4.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which, when two consecutive winnings are made in one of the starting openings, a variation pattern for adjustment is determined and the difference between the reserved balls is adjusted, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the special symbol, the other is configured to determine the variation pattern for adjustment when the variation of the special symbol is finished twice or more in a row until the other starts and ends the variation of the special symbol once. You may. Further, by combining the continuous winning and the continuous fluctuation, it is possible to adjust the difference of the reserved balls to be more equal.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but the distribution device 630 is not provided and the first start opening is provided. Even with a configuration in which game balls randomly win the 63a and the second start opening 63b, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the hold symbol displayed in the lower display area Ds is displayed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 by the number-of-holds display update process (FIG. 37, S1406). Has been operated, and the case where the hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned on is rearranged and displayed in the order in which the fluctuation starts is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in the pending quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area is rearranged in the order of starting fluctuation, and the background (reserved symbol display is displayed) of the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON. Blinking background (flashing).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8 any one of Ds1 to Ds8) in which the rearranged reserved symbol display (reserved display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) is displayed. ) Is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the background screen of) is displayed in a blinking manner (flash display) indicating that rearrangement has been executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing displays from before the rearrangement to after the rearrangement of the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. Before the rearrangement, the reserved display symbols corresponding to the winning order of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b in the lower display area Ds (if the holding symbol display based on winning the first starting opening 63a "○", "●" is displayed in the case of a reserved symbol display based on winning in the second starting opening 63b. In the present embodiment, since the distribution prize winning device 630 alternately distributes the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is easy to alternately display the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

After that, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed, and the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed in the order of starting the fluctuation. Then, the background is displayed in a blinking manner (indicated by hatching in FIG. 52) with respect to the pending symbol display that was displayed at that time (in FIG. 52, the pending symbol displays that were displayed in Ds1 to Ds5). After that, with respect to the reserved symbol display for the game balls newly won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order (the order in which the winning is established), and the holding is performed. For the symbol display area (Ds6 to Ds7 in FIG. 52), the blinking display is not performed, and a normal background symbol (for example, a blue background color) is displayed.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, the background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed in a blinking manner with respect to the displayed reserved symbol display, so that the player executes the rearrangement. The pending symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, with respect to the order in which the reserved symbol display is displayed, it is possible to easily identify whether it is the winning order or the order in which the fluctuation starts. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, for the reserved symbols that have been won after the rearrangement is executed, the reserved symbols are displayed in the winning order, and the background of the reserved symbols display area is also the normal background, so the player , It is possible to easily identify that the displayed reserved symbol display is before sorting. Further, with respect to the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement has been executed, since the background display is kept blinking, the player recognizes the reserved symbol display before the rearrangement and after the rearrangement at once. be able to.

Also, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, the reserved symbol display is erased (digested), and each displayed retained symbol display is shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area on the right side and displayed. However, since the blinking display of the background is also shifted and displayed accordingly, even if the reserved symbol display is exhausted, the player easily identifies the reserved symbol display that has been rearranged. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the background is displayed as blinking as a notification mode indicating the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement has been executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background color is changed (for example, normally, blue is rearranged. It may be configured to change to red when executed), or the display may be changed as appropriate, such as blinking the reserved symbol display, changing the color, or adding a pattern instead of the background. Furthermore, it may be configured to notify by voice or characters (for example, the voice and characters “The reserved symbols up to the third order have been sorted.” are displayed).

With reference to FIG. 53, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 53, S1400). The main process of the fifth embodiment (FIG. 53, S1400) is different from the main process of the first embodiment (FIG. 35, S1400) in place of the hold quantity display update process (FIG. 37, S1406). In place of the process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) and the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), the pending rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is added. Each process of S1401 to S1405 in the fifth embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1405 is completed, the reserved quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 54, in the fifth embodiment, the pending quantity display update process 2 (S1440) which is one of the main processes (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the reserved quantity display update processing 2 (S1440). The reserved number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is a process for setting a command for displaying the reserved symbol display in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds.

In the reserved number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated (S1441). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is turned on is a variable display start order, and is held corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off. As for the symbol display, the held symbol display is displayed in the order in which the hold is established (S1442).

The rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON. The background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area of the subordinate rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is displayed is blinked (flash) and the rearrangement flag 223k7 is displayed. A background display change command to be displayed on the display control device 114 is generated with a normal background (for example, blue in the present embodiment) as the background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which is off is displayed. Yes (S1443).

In this way, by displaying the background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in a blinking manner, the player has performed the rearrangement on hold. It can be informed that it is a symbol display. Therefore, the player can recognize that the displayed pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the variation, by the notification mode.

Further, the background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed blinking, and the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to OFF. The background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to (that is, the hold that has been established after the sorting is executed) is displayed as a normal background, so that the player can sort It is possible to easily recognize the executed pending symbol display and the pending symbol display that has not been rearranged.

In addition, a new background display change command is generated each time this reserved quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed, so a new pending occurs or a special corresponding to the pending symbol display. Even when the symbols start changing and the hold is exhausted, the hold symbol display and the blinking display indicating that the rearrangement has been executed can be updated appropriately according to the state.

Further, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is operated by the frame button 22 during the rearrangeable period in the pending rearrangement processing 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the button is pressed), it is set to ON in all hold areas in which hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed hold symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the hold variable display start order from the hold hold order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF for the newly stored hold, the order established without rearrangement, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol displays displayed at that time are rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter. Also, the rearranged hold symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the newly stored (reoccurring) hold symbol display is displayed in the established order first. Since it is displayed at the end without being displayed by interrupting the pending symbol display that has been displayed, the player can suppress a problem in which the current display is confused as to which sequence is displayed. You can

Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol displays that are displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to notify the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

Also, in the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display, when the reserved symbol having a slower establishment order is displayed before the reserved symbol having a faster establishment order is displayed. Of the pending symbols displayed before the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt, the pending generated by winning in the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt is a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with the expectation of a big hit. In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated, a sound is output, so that it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation for the jackpot.

Returning to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400), the description will be continued. Each process of S1407 to S1412 in the fifth embodiment is the same as each process of S1407 to S1412 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1412 is completed, the pending rearrangement processing 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 55, a hold rearrangement process 2 (S1450) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement process 2 (S1450). The reservation rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) notifies that the rearrangement has been executed (executed) when the frame button 22 is operated during the rearrangeable period of the reservation symbol display. This is processing for setting the rearrangement notification sound command and setting the rearrangement flag 223k7 of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k to ON.

In the pending rearrangement processing 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), first, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (S1451). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1451: Yes), the display button operation display command is generated (S1452). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1453). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1453: Yes), the rearrangement notification sound command is set (S1454). As the rearrangement notification sound command, the sound output device 226 outputs a notification sound indicating that the rearrangement is executed (executed) (in the present embodiment, a sound "rearrange").

In the present embodiment, the sound is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific sound effect (for example, fanfare music or the like) may be output. The output time may be set as appropriate according to the effect, and while the rearranged reserved symbol display is displayed, a dedicated melody or sound effect may be output. With such a configuration, the player can be strongly aware that the rearrangement has been executed, and can easily understand that the reserved symbol display is rearranged.

The rearrangement flags 223k7 of all the reservation areas in which the reservation data of the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k are stored are set to ON (S1455).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1451: No), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1453: No), this process is ended. With such a configuration, when the player wants to sort, it is possible to sort only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be played evenly and efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the holding symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new holding is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order by the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, even when a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode are displayed together. By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed in a blinking manner with respect to all the reserved symbol displays that were displayed in the reserved symbol display area. The case was explained.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the rearrangement is executed, and only the reserved symbol display in the variable start order, which is different from the established order, is displayed in the background of the reserved symbol display area. Blinks.

That is, the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, in the hold quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440), the hold area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON has a change start order different from the winning order. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that a background display change command for blinking the background is generated for the reserved symbol display area in which the symbol display is displayed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a state from before the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to after the rearrangement in the modified example of the fifth exemplary embodiment. Before the rearrangement, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol (“○” in the present embodiment) and the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol (“●” in the present embodiment) are displayed in the established order. .. The player has operated the frame button 22 to perform the rearrangement, so that the reserved symbol display "○" of the first special symbol that was displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 and the reserved symbol display area Ds4 were displayed. The reserved symbol display “●” of the second special symbol is rearranged, and the background is displayed in blinking, which is a display mode (notification mode) indicating that the rearrangement has been performed.

In the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It

Here, the establishment order and the variation start order are different, and the background is displayed in a blinking manner only for the reserved symbol display in which the display order is changed by executing the rearrangement. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the hold symbol display, the hold symbol having a late establishment order is interrupted before the hold symbol having an early establishment order and the order is changed. The displayed hold symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, of the pending symbols that are displayed before the interrupt symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, about the pending generated by winning the winning opening 63a, 63b different from the reserved symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, in the big hit You can have expectations as to whether or not you will.

In this way, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and operates the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation for a jackpot.

In addition, in order to indicate that the rearrangement has been performed, when the display order of the reserved symbol display is changed, the background is displayed in blinking, and further, with respect to the reserved symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is executed. As a result, the background may be displayed in a special color (for example, red) so that the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement has been executed can be identified. With this configuration, the player can identify both the reserved symbol display that was displayed when the rearrangement was executed and the reserved symbol display whose display order was changed by the rearrangement. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

Referring to FIG. 57, in the modification of the fifth embodiment, the reserved quantity display updating process 2 (FIG. 57, FIG. 57, which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. S1440) will be described.

The processes of S1441 to S1442 in the modification of the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1441 to S1442 in the fifth embodiment. In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1442 is executed, the winning order and the order of start of fluctuation are changed among the reserved areas of the subordinate rearrangement reserved storage area 223k in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there are different holding areas (S1445). Here, the holding area and the variation start order storage area 223k4 are discriminated to determine whether the order is different. Specifically, if the variation start order stored in the variation start order storage area 223k4 in the holding area 2 is the third, the winning order is the second, but the variation start order is the third. , And it is determined that the order is different.

When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the winning order is different from the starting order of the fluctuation among the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON (S1445: Yes). , Of the holding areas in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, the background of the holding symbol display area in which the holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area determined to have a different winning order and variation start order is displayed blinks. A background display change command for displaying (changing) is generated (S1446).

In this way, when the rearrangement is executed, the background is displayed blinking for the pending symbol display that has been displayed and the display order has been changed, so that the player can change the order. It is possible to identify the reserved symbols.

In addition, the notification mode for notifying the pending symbol display in which the display order is changed is not limited to the blinking display, and may be shown by a character display, may be notified by voice, or other display than the blinking display. Alternatively, the reserved symbol display may be displayed in a special color or pattern.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed in a blinking manner with respect to all the reserved symbol displays that were displayed in the reserved symbol display area. The case was explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, in the lower display area Ds, the reserved display area Dsa before the sorting and the reserved display area Dsa before the sorting in which the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order before the sorting The rearranged hold display area Dsb is provided in which the hold symbol display is displayed in the order of starting. Until the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved symbol displays are displayed only in the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa in the winning order, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved symbol display displayed at that time is changed. Are displayed in the reserved display area Dsb after rearranging in the order of starting.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. The sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that the reserved symbol displays are displayed in the winning order, and the reserved symbol displays are displayed in the order in which the fluctuation starts in addition to that.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing reserved symbol displays displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before sorting (sorting not executed) and after sorting (sorting executed) in the sixth embodiment. .. Before the rearrangement, the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds5) of the reserved display area Dsa before the rearrangement is the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol (in the present embodiment, "○") and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol. The displays (“●” in the present embodiment) are displayed in the winning order. At this time, the reserved symbol display is not displayed in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to perform the rearrangement, after the rearrangement, in the state where the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order in the pre-rearrangement hold display area Dsa, the rearrangement is performed. In the hold display area Dsb, the hold symbol display that was displayed in the hold display area Dsa before rearranging at that time is displayed in the order in which the fluctuation starts.

In this way, when the rearrangement is executed, the reserved symbol display before the rearrangement and the reserved symbol display after the rearrangement are displayed in parallel at the top and the bottom, so that the player can determine how the rearrangement is performed. The reserved symbol display in the pre-replacement reserved display area Dsa and the reserved symbol display in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb can be compared and recognized. Therefore, in the order in which the fluctuation starts, the reserved symbol display whose order is different from the winning order can be easily recognized.

In the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It

Here, with respect to the reserved symbol display in which the established order and the variation start order are different and the display order is changed by performing the rearrangement, the before-rearrangement reserved display area Dsa and the after-rearrangement reserved display area Dsb are compared. It can be easily recognized. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the hold symbol display, the hold symbol having a late establishment order is interrupted before the hold symbol having an early establishment order and the order is changed. The displayed hold symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, of the pending symbols that are displayed before the interrupt symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, about the pending generated by winning the winning opening 63a, 63b different from the reserved symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, in the big hit You can have expectations as to whether or not you will.

In this way, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and operates the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation for a jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol display that was displayed when the frame button 22 was operated was displayed in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb in the order in which the fluctuation starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reserved numbers may be rearranged in the winning order and then displayed in the reserved figure display area Dsb.

Further, it is of course possible to always display the reserved symbol display after rearrangement and before the rearrangement regardless of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. With such a configuration, the player can always visually check the pending symbol display that is displayed in the winning order and the order in which the fluctuation starts, so that the fluctuation starts in the order different from the winning order by rearrangement. It is possible to quickly recognize that there is a symbol display.

With reference to FIG. 59, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 59, S1400). The main processing of the sixth embodiment (FIG. 59, S1400) is different from the main processing of the fifth embodiment (FIG. 53, S1400) in that the reserved quantity display update processing 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is replaced with the reserved quantity display. Update processing 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is added. The processes of S1401 to S1405 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1405 is completed, the reserved quantity display update processing 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 60, in the sixth embodiment, the pending quantity display update process 3 (S1460) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 59, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing 3 (S1460). Reservation number display update processing 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), in the reservation symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds, the pre-rearrangement reservation display area Dsa and the rearranged reservation display area Dsb This is a process for setting a command for displaying a display.

In the reserved quantity display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated (S1461). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

It is determined whether or not the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 of the holding area 1 in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462). When it is determined that the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area 1 in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462: Yes), the rearrangement flag is turned on in the post-rearrangement reservation display area Dsb. The display hold display command for displaying the hold symbol display of the hold area set in No. 1 in the order of starting fluctuation is set (S1463).

By controlling in this manner, when the rearrangement is executed, only the reserved symbol display that has been displayed (the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) is displayed after the rearrangement display area Dsb. It is possible to display a hold symbol display on.

With respect to the holds stored in the hold area in the before-sort hold display area Dsa, a display hold display command for displaying the winning order is generated (S1464). As a result, the reserved symbol display can always be displayed in the winning display order in the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa. When the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned on, the reserved symbol display can be displayed in the rearranged hold display area Dsb and the before-rearrangement hold display area Dsa, respectively.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area 1 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to OFF (S1462: No), the processing of S1464 is executed. As a result, when the rearrangement flag is off in the holding area 1 (that is, all holding areas), the reserved symbol displays are displayed in the winning order only in the pre-sorting hold display area Dsa, and the rearrangement is executed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is not done.

Further, in the state where the rearrangement is not executed, the reserved symbol display is not displayed in the rearranged display area Dsb until the player operates the frame button 22, so the player operates the frame button 22. At times, it is possible to increase the change in the display when the hold symbol display is displayed in the rearranged hold display area Dsb, and to increase the player's motivation to execute the rearrangement.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is determined only in the holding area 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rearrangement flags of all the holding areas in which various data are stored may be determined, or either of them may be determined. Of course, it may be configured to determine whether is ON.

Further, in the present embodiment, the post-sorting hold display area Dsb is configured to be always displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the pre-sort hold display area Dsa is always displayed and the sorting is performed. When (the player operates the frame switch 22), the reserved display area Dsb is displayed after rearrangement, and when all the rearranged reserved symbol displays are exhausted (start of fluctuation), it is automatically hidden. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when it becomes the rearrangement possible period, it is configured to display the characters for notifying that the rearrangement is possible. Instead, when the rearrangement becomes possible, the rearrangement hold pending display area Dsb (holding symbol display is displayed. It may be configured such that a state (not performed) is displayed and the player is notified that the reserved symbol display can be rearranged. With this configuration, the reserved display area Dsb is not always displayed after rearrangement, and the space can be set as the upper display area Dm, and the variable display of the main symbol and the display of the effect symbol can be performed. It can be displayed in a large space. Therefore, the player can be notified of the lottery result that is easy to understand.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, there is no hold that is established during the jackpot game or at the different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there are no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). In the gaming states other than the above, the case of setting as the rearrangeable period has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is set to be included in the rearrangeable period even during the big hit game.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 recalculates the time when each pending fluctuation starts after the big hit game as a starting point when the big hit game starts. Then, the rearrangement data is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and in the voice lamp control device 113, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is set in that the rearrangement period is set even during the big hit game and the rearrangement is executed. Is different from.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 61, a description will be given of the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103) that is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. To do. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this large opening opening/closing processing (FIG. 61, S103). The large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103) of the seventh embodiment not only controls the opening/closing of the first variable winning device 65, but when the jackpot game is started, the fluctuation of each holding is started after the jackpot. This is a process for recalculating the start time and generating rearrangement data in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the recalculated data.

In the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started (S131). Whether the jackpot game is started or not is determined by the processing of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204) or the processing of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207). It is determined by whether the start of is set.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u Regarding the value, starting from after the big hit, it is recalculated in consideration of the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is temporarily stopped (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the variation start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. The value of is recalculated starting from after the big hit (S134).

A rearrangement data command is generated for each holding area based on the fluctuation start time stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5, which is recalculated in the processing of S133 or S134 (S135).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), a process of opening the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S137: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). When it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), a process of closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S142). When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is over (S144). When it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the jackpot game is over (S145). It is discriminated whether or not it was the probability variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot was a trigger for executing the jackpot game. The lottery result is determined to be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is hit (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S144: No), or if it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S146: No), this process is ended.

In this way, when the big hit game is started, the variation start time in each holding area starting from after the big hit game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the big hit game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. The data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k can be updated, and the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of starting the variation after the big hit game.

In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for the suspension of the special symbol, after the remaining variation time elapses, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the pending symbol display in a more accurate order of starting the fluctuation based on the fluctuation start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

With reference to FIG. 62, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 62, S1400). The main processing (S1400 in FIG. 62) of the seventh embodiment is different from the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 35) of the first embodiment in place of the command determination processing (S1414 in FIG. 36). 63, S1470) is added. Each process of S1401 to S1413 in the seventh embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 62, in the seventh embodiment, a command determination process 2 (S1470) that is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S1470). The command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is performed in the main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) of the seventh embodiment, the processes of S1520 and S1521 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. Each process of S1501 to S1518 in the seventh embodiment is the same as each process of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. When it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command is not received in the process of S1517 (S1517: No), the process of S1520 is executed.

In the process of S1520, it is determined whether the rearrangement data command output by main controller 110 has been received. When it is determined that the rearrangement data command is received (S1520: Yes), the data in the variation start time storage area 223k5 of the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k is updated based on the received rearrangement data command. Here, the rearrangement data command is data indicating the recalculated fluctuation start time. The rearrangement data command is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may be generated based on each data in the rearrangement storage area 203u. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement data command has not been received (S1520: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S1519).

In the present embodiment, although the description is omitted, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during the jackpot game, the first prefetching process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 25, S907) S923 or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) S942, the fluctuation start time is calculated starting from after the jackpot game.

In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the fluctuation start time record of each hold is recalculated starting from after the jackpot game is finished, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a rearrangement data command, and the secondary rearrangement hold storage is performed. Since the value of the variation start time storage area 223k5 of each holding area of the area 223k is also updated, even if the jackpot game is set as the sortable period, the holding symbol display can be sorted in the variation start order.

Further, even if the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b during the big hit game, the data indicating the variation start time after the big hit game is transmitted by the prize command, so the voice lamp control device 113 can be rearranged in the variation start order based on the operation of the frame button 22 even for the newly held reserved symbol display. Therefore, even during a jackpot game that tends to be monotonous, the player can perform an operation of rearranging the reserved symbol displays, and can enjoy the game by rearranging the reserved symbol displays.

In the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It

Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display even during the jackpot, so that the reserved symbol displayed before the interrupted reserved symbol is interrupted. It is possible to have an expectation that it is a big hit, with respect to the hold generated by winning in the starting openings 63a and 63b different from the hold symbols displayed in.

In this way, the player operates the frame button 22 during the big hit, and there is a big jackpot in the holding symbol display, and it is expected that the arrangement order will change depending on whether the big jackpot is continuously obtained. Then, the frame button can be operated, and the fun during the big hit game can be increased.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 72. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the first prefetch process (907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 or In the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the winning commands, which are numbered in the order of the variation start time and indicate the order, are output to the voice lamp control device 113b, and the sorting is executed based on the order. I explained about the case.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, even if the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25). , 907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the winning command is generated for various counter values acquired based on the winning, without being numbered in the variation start order. Upon receiving the winning command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 calculates the variation start time based on each counter value indicated by the winning command, assigns the variation start order, and operates the frame button 22. Based on what has been done, the reserved symbol display is rearranged in that order.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighth embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 executes the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display by calculating and numbering the variation start order based on the received winning command, and thus the first embodiment It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. The ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a big hit random number table 222a, a big hit type table 222b, a special hit variation pattern table 222c, and a special out-of-range variation pattern table 222d. It should be noted that these tables are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the special winning variation pattern table 202d, and the special outlier variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. , The description is omitted.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is deleted. Illustration of this is omitted.

As described above, since each table is stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 as well as the ROM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the winning command from the main control device 110 will be described later, although it will be described later. Based on each counter value, before the special symbol corresponding to the pending symbol display starts to fluctuate, the jackpot is determined in advance and the fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation start time is calculated, and the fluctuations are arranged in the order in which they start. The change start order can be numbered based on the change start time so as to be exchangeable. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to execute each control process for determining the fluctuation start order in advance, and the control load can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 65, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the eighth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in place of the start prize process (FIG. 24, S108), and the start prize process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). Has been added.

With reference to FIG. 66, a start winning process 3 (S150) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). The start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) of the eighth embodiment is different from the first winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment in place of the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907). The pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) is replaced with the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914), and the second pre-reading process 2 (S1060) is added.

With reference to FIG. 67, the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) which is one process of the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. explain. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch processing 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). In the first prefetching process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) of the eighth embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the gaming ball winning the first starting opening in the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). Is a process for generating a winning command based on.

In the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), first, in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150), each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (random number per special) The counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern determination counter C4) are read (S1051).

Based on each counter value (the value read in S1051) newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a winning command is generated (S1052). The winning command indicates each counter value, and the voice lamp control device 113 is a command that can determine the winning order based on the winning command.

Further, regarding the second prefetch process 2 (S1060), the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) only changes the first to the second, and therefore the illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted. To do.

Thus, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), based on the acquired counter value, jackpot determination, selection of the variation pattern, calculation of the variation start time, the variation start. Since the order numbering and the like are not performed, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning command is generated only for the newly established hold, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and for all the holds stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. It may be configured to generate again. With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 can update all the data in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k each time a game ball wins, and the data is corrupted by noise or the like. Also in this case, processing such as rearrangement can be performed by updating.

With reference to FIG. 68, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 68, S1400). The main processing (S1400 in FIG. 68) of the eighth embodiment is different from the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 35) of the first embodiment in place of the command determination processing (S1414 in FIG. 36). 69, S1490) replaces the pending rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) with the pending rearrangement processing 3 (FIG. 70, S1480).

Referring to FIG. 69, a command determination process 3 (S1490) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S1490). The command determination processing 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment is the same as the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment except that the processing of S1530 is added instead of the processing of S1513 and S1514. There is. For other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 36, S1414) is executed.

In the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, it is determined whether the winning command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command is received (S1512: Yes), each counter value (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1, fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) is received from the received winning command. ) Is extracted and stored in the other memory area 223m in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1530). Here, in the other memory area, the winning order indicated by the winning command (the winning order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined) is stored in a distinguishable manner for each counter value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1512: No), the process of S1517 is executed. The subsequent processing has already been described in the first embodiment, and will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, each counter value extracted from the winning command is stored in the other memory area 223m, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the counter value may be stored in the corresponding holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223m. Good. With this configuration, the winning order of each counter value can be determined by the holding area, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 70, a hold rearrangement process 3 (S1480) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 68, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this reservation rearrangement processing 3 (S1480). In the pending rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1811 and S1812 are added to the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment. For other processing, the same processing as the pending rearrangement processing (S1413 in FIG. 40) of the first embodiment is executed.

In the hold rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480), first, in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490), the winning command is received and each counter value is stored in the other memory area 223m (that is, It is determined whether or not a winning command has been received (S1811). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1811: Yes), the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is executed. The reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) will be described later in detail, but is a process for determining the variation start order of the reserved symbol display based on each counter value indicated by the received winning command. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1811: No), the process of S1801 is executed. Since the processing from S1801 is the same as the processing from S1801 of the reservation rearrangement processing (S1413 in FIG. 40) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 71, in the eighth embodiment, a reservation rearrangement order determination process (S1812) which is one process of the reservation rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement order determination processing 3 (S1812). The reservation rearrangement order determination processing 3 (S1812 in FIG. 71) of the eighth embodiment is processing for determining the variation start order based on each counter value indicated by the winning command.

In the reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), first, each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, The variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter C4) are read (S1821).

The read data is stored in the reservation area of the rearrangement storage area 223k corresponding to the winning order indicated by the winning command. (In the present embodiment, since the winning commands are output in the winning order, of the vacant storage areas, May be stored in the area with the smallest winning order). A variable display start time at which variable display is started based on the newly stored hold data (counter values) is calculated (S1822).

This fluctuation start time is, as shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol in the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reservation data (if the reservation data is based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second special symbol. If the hold data is based on the special symbol 63b, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol) and each hold data previously stored are determined based on the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the newly stored hold data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation times. Here, the remaining variation time is determined based on the secondary first variation time storage area 223i or the secondary second variation time storage area 223j.

Here, each of the hold data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored hold data means that the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first starting port 63a. Hold data based on the first starting port 63a (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored on the other hand, on the other hand, if the newly stored hold data is hold data based on the second starting port 63b, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 63b that has been done.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order is renumbered in the ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k (S1823). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, However, if the newly stored variable display start order of the pending data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is obvious that only the changed order is renumbered. Good.

It is determined whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (S1824). Here, by the time the special symbol corresponding to this newly established hold becomes the variation start, the variation is stopped and the special symbol determined is determined to determine the game state at the time of the variation start.

The gaming state at the start of fluctuation, when it is determined that the high probability gaming state (S1824: Yes), based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, the first special symbol Is predicted, and the judgment result is stored in the judgment result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the corresponding subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k (S1825). On the other hand, the game state at the start of fluctuation, when it is determined to be a low probability game state (normal game state) (S1824: No), to the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability Based on this, the win/fail of the first special symbol is predicted, and the judgment result is stored in the hit/no hit judgment result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the corresponding subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k (S1826).

Next, the subordinate hold rearrangement storage area update processing (FIG. 72) is executed (S1827). The subordinate rearrangement storage area update processing (FIG. 72, S1827) will be described later in detail, but is based on the result of the judgment of the pending data stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Then, the jackpot type (whether it is a probability change or not) and the variation pattern (variation time) are determined based on each counter value and stored (updated).

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a sub-reservation rearrangement storage area update process (S1827) which is one process of the reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the subordinate suspension rearrangement suspension storage area update processing (S1827).

In the sub-reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827), first, it is determined whether or not the hit/non-judgment result predicted in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) was a big hit. (S1831). When it is determined that the winning/failing determination result predicted in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the reservation rearrangement order determination processing (FIG. 71, S1812) is a big hit (S1831: Yes), the predicted big hit is a sure change big hit (15R probability change). It is determined whether it is a big hit or a second R probability variation big hit) (S1832). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (S1832: Yes), the slave read probability variation flag 223k6 of the slave rearrangement suspension storage area 223k corresponding to the newly stored suspension data is set to ON ( S1833). When the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area, the slave read probability change flag 223k6 is set to OFF because the data in the reserved area before the shift is cleared to 0. In other words, the slave read probability change flag 223k6 that has been set to ON once is sequentially shifted in the holding area, and is overwritten (cleared to 0) when the next new data is shifted in the storage area of the changing data. Set off.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the probability variation jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S1832: No), the process of S1834 is executed.

From the special winnings variation pattern table 222c corresponding to the game state (whether it is in probability variation or shortening time) at the start of variation display, the special winning type counter C2 and variation pattern determination counter C3 of newly stored pending data are stored. The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S1834).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning/failing determination result predicted in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination processing (FIG. 71, S1812) is out (S1831: No), the gaming state at the start of variable display Start of variation display based on the values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 of newly stored pending data from the special deviation variation pattern table 222d corresponding to (whether the probability variation or the time is being shortened) The fluctuation pattern that is determined at some time is predicted (S1835).

The predicted win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in each storage area (corresponding to the newly stored suspension data) corresponding to the suspension area corresponding to the winning order of the secondary rearrangement suspension storage area 223k (S1836). ). It is determined whether or not the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k is stored by interrupting (changing the order) the previously stored variable display start order (S1837). ). When it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k is stored by being interrupted (changing the order) to the previously stored variable display start order. (S1837: Yes), with respect to the pending data after the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data, the winning/prohibiting, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted and updated again (S1838).

In this way, in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, based on each counter value indicated by the winning command output by the main control device 110, it is possible to judge the winning/disapproval, select the variation pattern, and determine the rearrangement order (variation start order). Since each is performed, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, even when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and the processing such as the selection of the variation pattern are concentrated, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 surely executes the processing. You can

Further, since the winning command output from the main control device 110 only indicates each counter value, even if the command is intercepted by a hanging board or the like, it is difficult to determine whether the determination is a big hit. Yes, fraud can be suppressed.

Further, since the data amount of the winning command output from the main control device 110 can be configured to be small, the load of command transmission/reception between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the command transmission/reception can be performed. The time required for can be shortened.

Further, if the value of each counter value is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 does not need to output each counter value again even when the power supply is restored from the power failure, and the pachinko machine 10 can be operated. The startup time at power-on can be shortened.

In the present embodiment, each time the change is held, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the order of fluctuation start (interrupted and stored in the order), and again the game state at the start of fluctuation (high probability or low probability). ), and whether or not the winning judgment is executed in advance. However, if there is a hit among the holdings, the holding that is the winning is held first among the holdings established later. The variation may not be stopped before the winning is held. With such a configuration, the game state at the start of the change is not changed in the change start order, and it is not necessary to perform the advance success/failure determination again, and the control load in the game can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 78. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630 next time, the game ball is directed to either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. A prize notification lamp 660 is provided for notifying whether the operation is performed so as to be distributed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that when a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630, it is notified which one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is distributed. To do.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 and 74, the distribution winning apparatus 630 provided in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the distribution winning device 630 according to the ninth embodiment, a prize notification lamp 660 is added to the front side of the distribution winning device 630 according to the first embodiment that is visible to the player. The winning notification lamp 660 is a lamp for notifying which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in a state where a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630.

As shown in FIG. 73B, the winning notification lamp 660 includes a left root winning notification lamp 660a and a right root winning notification lamp 660b. The left route winning notification lamp 660a is in a state in which the passive distribution member 640 is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the accommodating portion 640a is arranged at a position where the game ball entered in the distribution winning device 630 can be received. When the game ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a, it is controlled to light up.

In addition, the right route winning notification lamp 660b is disposed at a position where the passive sorting member 640 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the accommodating portion 640b can receive the game ball that has entered the sorting winning device 630. When it is in a state (that is, a state in which the game ball is guided to the second starting opening 63b), it is controlled to light up.

The distribution winning device 630 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670 for detecting the rotation of the passive distribution member 640 on the rotation shaft portion of the passive distribution member 640, and detects the rotation angle when the passive distribution member 640 rotates. Is configured. The rotation angle sensor 670 is set such that the position at which the passive distribution member 640 is rotated at the position where the magnet 640c provided on the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a overlap is the origin (rotation angle 0 degree). ing. When the passive distribution member 640 rotates clockwise from the original position in the front view (see FIG. 74(a)), the rotation angle becomes a positive angle, and conversely, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise in the front view from the original position (see FIG. It is set to have a negative rotation angle when it is turned to (a).

Here, the position where the passive distribution member 640 is rotated to the position where the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a overlap is the origin position of the rotation angle sensor 670, so that the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a. Since they are arranged with magnetic poles that repel each other, the passive distribution member 640 does not stop at this origin position, but stops at a position rotated in either the left or right direction in front view, and the rotation angle sensor is positive. Can be a negative value or a negative value. Therefore, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the game ball can be guided to the first starting opening 63a. On the other hand, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a negative value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is in a position where the game ball can be guided to the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, by controlling the lighting of the prize notification lamp 660 based on the determination result, when the player next enters the sorting prize device 630, the game ball is divided into the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. It is possible to determine in advance which one will be assigned.

In addition, since the position where the passive distribution member 640 stops is a position where the rotation angle sensor 670 has a value that is negative or positive (that is, other than the origin), the left route winning notification lamp 660a or the right of the winning notification lamp 660 is always displayed. The route winning notification lamp 660b is turned on, and the player can be constantly notified of the winning route.

In this way, when a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630, it is possible to determine in advance which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is to be distributed. When the number of holding balls corresponding to the mouth 63a is the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) and the number of holding balls corresponding to the second starting port 63b is 3 that is 1 less than the upper limit number (3 in the present embodiment). Then, if the game balls enter the distribution winning device 630 and are distributed to the first starting opening 63a, an overflow occurs and the game balls are consumed unnecessarily. , If the player does not know which one of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b the state is in, the problem that the game ball cannot be fired always occurs.

However, in the present embodiment, the prize notification lamp 660 allows the player to know in advance whether it is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b that is to be sorted next. Only when it is determined, it is possible to stop the firing of the game ball and play the game efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A prize notification lamp 660 and rotation sensors 670 are added to the main controller 110. The winning notification lamp 660 is connected via an input/output port so that lighting control is performed based on a command from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, the rotation angle sensor 670 is connected so that the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can acquire the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 via the input/output port.

With reference to FIG. 76, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the ninth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in place of the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), and the starting prize process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). Has been added.

With reference to FIG. 77, a start winning process 4 (S160) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). In the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment, the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is added to the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. .. The processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the first embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 78, a description will be given of a winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment. To do. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the winning route notification processing (FIG. 78, S1070). The winning route notification processing of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 78, S1070) is divided into the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b when the game ball is next entered into the distribution winning apparatus 630. This is a process for executing lighting control for notifying whether or not to be performed.

In the winning route notification processing (FIG. 78, S1070), first, it is determined whether the rotation angle sensor 670 has a positive value (that is, whether the game ball is guided to the first starting opening) (S1071). ). When it is determined that the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (S1071: Yes), the left route winning notification lamp 660a is controlled to be turned on (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation angle sensor has a negative value (S1071: No), the right route winning notification lamp 660b is controlled to be turned on (S1073).

In this way, by determining the state of the passive distribution member 640 by the value of the rotation angle sensor 670, when the game ball next wins the distribution winning device 630, the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b It is possible to accurately discriminate to which the game is distributed, and the player can be notified of accurate information.

In the present embodiment, the lamp is used for notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and notification may be made by voice or the like, or in the third symbol display device 81, characters or symbols may be used for notification. You may. With this configuration, the player can be notified more easily. In addition, if the third symbol display device 81 informs by characters or symbols, the player can also check the winning route of the distribution winning device 630 while visually confirming the variable display of the special symbol, which makes it easier to play the game. ..

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described ninth embodiment, the state of the passive distribution member of the distribution winning device 630 is determined by the rotation angle sensor 670, and the game ball is either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. The case where it is determined whether to be distributed has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, the distribution winning apparatus 630 is in a state of guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, the distribution winning device 630 determines that the game ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in the following points. In the tenth embodiment, when a game ball wins the distribution winning device 630 based on that the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b is won, which one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is won. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is assigned to.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the ninth embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, each rotation sensor 670 is deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the ninth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 80, a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the tenth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) of the ninth embodiment in place of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) and the starting prize process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). ) Has been added.

With reference to FIG. 81, a start winning process 5 (S170) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). The start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) of the tenth embodiment is different from the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment in that the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is deleted. The processes of S1080 and S1090 are added. The processes of S901 to S914 in the tenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment.

When it is determined whether the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), the lighting control for turning on the right route winning notification lamp is executed (S1080). Here, since the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is detected that the game balls have won in the first starting opening 63a. In this case, it is possible to determine that the distribution winning device 630 is in a state of distributing the next game ball to the second starting opening 63b. With this configuration, it is possible to predict and determine the state of the passive distribution member 640 without detecting the state of the passive distribution member 640, and it is necessary to provide a sensor or the like for detection. It is possible to simplify the structure. Similarly, when the game ball is won in the second start opening 63b (S908: Yes), the lighting control for lighting the left route winning notification lamp is executed (S1090).

As described above, since the lighting display of the prize notification lamp 660 is switched every time the game ball is won in the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the player wins the game ball in the distribution winning apparatus 630. In this case, it is possible to confirm in advance which one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the distribution state, and when a game ball is entered, it is not a reserved ball, A game can be played by determining whether or not it will overflow.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 640 is configured to rotate by contact with the game ball, but the structure is not limited to this, and may be configured to be movable by a motor, a solenoid, or the like.

In such a configuration, the passive distribution member 640 is moved (rotated) so as to be alternately distributed to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Further, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the state of the holding ball between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, and the first symbol corresponding to the one of the special symbols that is less reserved. The movement may be controlled so as to be distributed to the starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b. By configuring in this way, in one special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow exceeding the upper limit number of reserved balls, and the upper limit number of times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol evenly. Can be put on hold.

In addition, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, when an error or injustice (abnormal winning etc.) is detected in the game, the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b of the passive distribution member 640 is , The game ball is moved to the position on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 (that is, the position where the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a overlap) so that the game ball is the first starting opening. It may be configured so as to prevent winning of a prize in the 63a and the second starting opening 63b. With this configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is fraudulent, it can be controlled so that the lottery game is not performed, and the damage on the game shop side can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) to FIG. 84. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the power is cut off, the data in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the data in the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 are backed up (backup from the power supply unit 115). Data is retained when power is supplied). Then, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, it is confirmed whether each data in the RAM 23 and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not, the data is loaded (used) as it is, and the power is cut off. The case of returning from the state immediately before and starting the game has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs rearrangement suspension in the startup process (FIG. 83) that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. A rearrangement return data command is generated based on each data in the storage area 203u and output to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 compares the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command with the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223, and if they match, it returns and the game is continued. If it does not match, the data in each holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223k is updated to the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command, and the game is started.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eleventh embodiment, the first embodiment is performed by collating each data of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k which are backed up at the time of power-on, and executing a process of determining whether or not they match. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

82(a) and 82(b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the held symbol displays immediately before the power is turned off are displayed in the established order and returned. In the upper display area Dm, the characters "Holding is displayed in the established order" indicating that the held symbol display is displayed in the established order are displayed. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and the newly established pending symbol display is displayed. Although details will be described later, when the hold symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the established order and is returned, the rearrangement storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are described. This is the time when the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223 are collated and not matched.

FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the held symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the variation start order and then restored. In the upper display area Dm, the characters “Holding is being displayed in the variation start order” indicating that the pending symbol displays are rearranged and displayed in the variation start order are displayed. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and the newly established pending symbol display is displayed. Although the details will be described later, when the hold symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the variation start order and returns, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This is the time when the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223 are collated and matched.

With such a configuration, the gaming shop side, a contractor for maintenance and inspection, etc. can confirm whether or not the data does not match due to some cause when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, since the player normally displays the information, it is not possible to know that the pachinko machine 10 has some trouble, and it is possible to prevent the player from having anxiety or doubt.

In addition, at the time of initial setting when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, data collation is performed, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be restored with a more accurate reserved symbol display. Furthermore, when the data do not match, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is updated, so the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k should match the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u at the time of startup. It is possible to prevent the problem that an incorrect reserved symbol display is displayed at the time of restoration.

In the present embodiment, the notification is made by displaying characters in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of return, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be sound or the like, or a dedicated lamp or the like is turned on. Alternatively, the hold symbol display may be displayed in a special display mode (for example, blinking or a special pattern) at the time of return to notify the user.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are the backup power supply (power stored in the capacitor) from the power supply device 115. ) Is supplied even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, so that the contents of the RAM 203 and the RAM 223 are not initialized and are retained for a certain period (one week in this embodiment).

With reference to FIG. 83, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. The startup process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment has the process of S1120 added to the startup process (FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. Each process of S1101 to S1114 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as each process of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S1109 or S1112 is executed, the processing of S1120 is executed. In the process of S1120, a rearrangement return data command is generated based on each data in each reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. This rearrangement return data command is generated for each holding area, data indicating each holding area (holding areas 1 to 8) is added, and each data of each holding area (correction determination result storage area 203u1, jackpot type storage) Area 203u2, variation pattern type storage area 203u4, variation start time storage area 203u5, prefetch probability variation flag 203u5).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and before the normal game (main process (FIG. 33, S1200)) is executed, in the startup process (FIG. 83) executed, the rearrangement storage area Since the data of 203u is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a rearrangement return data command, the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are initialized at power-on. Data can be collated with the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k, and the data of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp controller 113 matches the data of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the main controller 110. Can be made.

Here, for example, even if the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 stores correct data, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is incorrect or is initialized. In the case where the power supply is restored, even if the reserved symbol display is displayed on the basis of the data in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k at the time of power restoration, there is a possibility that the incorrect reserved symbol display is displayed. However, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the voice lamp controller 113 are collated, so that It is possible to prevent such problems.

With reference to FIG. 84, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment, each process of S1320 to S1325 is added to the startup process (FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. The respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the first embodiment.

When the process of S1131 is executed in the startup process (84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, the process of S1320 is executed. It is determined whether the rearrangement return data command is received from main controller 110 (S1320). When it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1320: No), this process is repeatedly executed. That is, the state is in a standby state until the rearrangement return data command is received.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement return data command is received (S1320: Yes), it is determined whether the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command. (S1321). When it is determined that the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match (S1321: Yes), all the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the reserved area in which the data is stored are turned on. Is set to (S1322). To display the characters "Holding is being displayed in the variation start order" indicating that the pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed in the variation start order in the left side display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for instructing is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1323).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command do not match (S1321: No), the rearrangement return data command output by the main control device 110 is Based on the data shown, the data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is updated, and the rearrangement flags 223k7 in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k are all set to OFF (S1324). The reserved symbol display indicates that the letters "holding is displayed in the established order" indicating that they are displayed in the established order are displayed in the left side display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1325).

Note that the startup process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is executed by the process of the wait time (S1102), so that S1311 of the startup process (FIG. 84) of the voice lamp control unit 113 is executed. The main process (S1200) is executed after the processes up to and the display control device 114 startup process (not shown) are completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the startup processing (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 is output before the rearrangement return data command is output from the main control device 110. In the startup process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of FIG. 84, the process of S1320 is executed and the main control unit 110 waits for the rearrangement return data command to be output.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from missing the rearrangement return data command. Further, in the startup process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, after the process of setting interrupt permission (S1311) is executed, the process of receiving the rearrangement return data command and performing the collation is executed. Therefore, even if the main control device 110 first starts the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) and transmits a command, the main control device 110 should perform the process corresponding to the command after executing the process for collating the process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the control process necessary for the normal game cannot be performed and the game is frozen.

In this embodiment, when the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is initialized by operating the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) when the power is turned on, the rearrangement return data command is This is a command indicating that there is no data in the replacement pending storage area 203u. This command may be replaced with a dedicated initial value setting command or the like.

In the present embodiment, when the collation matches, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the variation start order, and when the collation does not match, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the established order. Instead, when they match, they may be displayed in the established order, and when they do not match, they may be displayed in the fluctuation start order. In addition, the reserved symbols are displayed in the state immediately before the power is cut off (arranged in order), and the third symbol display device 81, a dedicated lamp, or the like is used to display the collation result in the patterns, characters, or lighting mode of the lamps. You may comprise so that it may notify. With such a configuration, even if a momentary power failure or the like occurs, it is possible to more accurately return to the state of the reserved symbol display before the power failure, and play the game again with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, a modified example of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(c) and 85. In the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, when the matching results do not match, the reserved symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol as shown in FIG. 82(c).

FIG. 82(c) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, the reserved symbol display is displayed with a temporary symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is restored. In the upper display area Dm, the characters “temporarily displaying the hold” indicating that the hold symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol are displayed. The provisional reserved symbol display and the characters for informing it are restarted, the game is newly established, and the winning command is generated based on each reserved area of the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u of the main controller 110. Is displayed and is displayed until each holding area of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is updated. Although details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display is displayed as a temporary reserved symbol display and returns, the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113. This is the time when the data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is collated and not matched.

With such a configuration, when the data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 and the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 do not match, a temporary reservation symbol display is displayed. As a result, a game shop side or a trader who performs maintenance and inspection of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has some abnormality and the data does not match. In addition, until the new winning command is received, by displaying the temporary reserved symbol display, it is possible to prevent the player from displaying an incorrect reserved symbol display.

In the present embodiment, the temporary reserved symbol display is displayed, but not limited to this, the temporary reserved symbol display is not displayed, and the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to 8 are displayed in a special color or display mode (for example, yellow). Or blinking display mode).

With reference to FIG. 85, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 85) of the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, the processes of S1330 to S1331 are added to the startup process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) instead of the processes of S1324 to S1325. ing. The processes of S1301 to S1323 in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1323 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1321, the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match. If it is determined not to do so (S1321: No), the data in each holding area of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is cleared to 0 (initialization) (S1330). A display command for displaying the temporary reserved symbol display for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, until a new winning command is received and a newly displayed pending symbol display is displayed), on the display control device 114 ( A temporary symbol command) is generated and output (S1331).

In this way, if the collation of the data does not match, a temporary pending symbol display is displayed, and by delaying the regular pending symbol display until a new winning command is received, a more accurate pending symbol is displayed. The display can be informed to the player.

Further, since the regular reserved symbol display is configured to be restored at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the player starts the game, and thus the reserved symbol display. Also, it can be recognized that the display has been resumed again, and the game can be played with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, backup power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 so that data is backed up even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. I explained about the case.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, backup power is not supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, based on the rearrangement return data command from the main controller 110, the data in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is updated, and the hold symbol display is returned to the state immediately before the power is turned off.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the twelfth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 when the data is not backed up when the power is turned off and the power is turned on again. Thus, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that processing for returning the held symbol display to the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Although not shown, in the twelfth embodiment, the backup power from the power supply device 115 is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

With reference to FIG. 86, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). In the main process (S1400 of FIG. 86) of the twelfth embodiment, the respective processes of S1417 to S1419 are deleted from the main process (S1400 of FIG. 35) of the eleventh embodiment. Each process of S1401 to S1416 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1416 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the main processing (FIG. 86) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information (S1415: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 waits for power-off without executing any processing. Ready to go.

With reference to FIG. 87, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 87) of the twelfth embodiment, the processes of S1340 to S1343 are added to the startup process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. Each process of S1301 to S1311 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as each process of S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

When the process of S1311 is executed, it is determined whether the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 is received (S1340). When it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1340: No), the process of waiting until the rearrangement return data command is received is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has been received (S1340: Yes), the data in each holding area of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is updated based on the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command. (S1341). The rearrangement flag 223k7 of each holding area is set to OFF (S1342). The display control device 114 generates a display command for displaying the character "displaying the hold in the order of establishment" on the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, which indicates that the hold symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment. Is output to (S1343).

As described above, even if the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113, the main control unit 110 sends the voice lamp control unit 113 to the rearrangement storage area 203u even when backup power is not supplied. A rearrangement return data command based on the data stored in is output. Therefore, even when the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved symbol display when the power is turned off can be restored and displayed when the power is turned on again. Therefore, the capacity of the backup power supply of the power supply device 115 can be reduced, and the size of the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be made compact.

Also, when the power is turned on again, regardless of the state when the power is turned off, the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of success, and it is notified that it is displayed in the order of success, so it is restored. The order in which the reserved symbol display is displayed can be easily determined.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, a modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the modification of the twelfth embodiment, when the rearrangement return data command is received from the main control device 110 in the startup process (FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is received. The data is updated, all the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the holding area in which the data is stored are set to ON, and the holding symbol display after the return is displayed in the variation start order.

With reference to FIG. 88, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 88) of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the processes of S1350 to S1351 are added to the startup process of the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 87) instead of the processes of S1342 to S1343. Has been done. The processes of S1301 to S1341 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1341 in the twelfth embodiment.

When the process of S1341 is executed in the start-up process (88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment, in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k, the pending area in which the data is stored is stored. All the rearrangement flags 223k7 are set to ON (S1350). A display command is generated to display the characters "Holding is displayed in variable start order" in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, which indicates that the reserved symbol displays are sorted and displayed in the variable start order. Then, the data is output to the display control device 114 (S1351).

In this way, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10 from the power-off state and the hold symbol display is restored, the hold symbol display is displayed regardless of the order displayed immediately before the power is turned off. Sorted and displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the player has returned from the power-off state and forcibly rearranged.

Also, when the power is restored, the reserved symbol display is automatically rearranged and displayed, so it is recognized that the reserved symbol display rearranged and displayed is the one that was established before the power was cut off. Even if a power failure occurs during a normal game, the game can be restarted with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 sets all the rearrangement flags 223k7 to ON, and in the main processing executed thereafter, The pending symbol display is arranged and displayed in the order of variation start. However, not limited to this, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the value to the value indicated by the variable order storage area 203u4 of the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u indicated by the rearrangement return data command. On the basis of this, a display command for rearranging and displaying the reserved symbol display may be generated and output. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control addition for rearranging the pending symbol display during the startup process. Therefore, when the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 is received, the reserved symbol displays can be rearranged and displayed. In this case, all the rearrangement flags 223k7 may be set to ON, and the reserved symbol display may be configured to be maintained in the rearranged state even after the start-up process, or may be displayed during the start-up process. The rearrangement-reserved symbol display may be configured such that the display is maintained in a rearranged state until it is consumed.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 90. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, in the startup process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device is based on the data in the rearranged storage area 203u that is backed up. For 113, the rearrangement return data command is output, the data indicated by the output rearrangement return data command is collated with the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, and the power supply of the reserved symbol display is cut off. The case of returning to the immediately previous state has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is supplied with backup power from the power supply device 115 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, in the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the subordinate rearrangement hold backed up is not received without receiving the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110. Based on the data in the storage area 223k, the reserved symbol display is displayed and restored.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the thirteenth embodiment, the main control device 110 is backed up in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 without outputting the rearrangement return data command to the voice lamp control device 113. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that a process for restoring the reserved symbol display is executed based on the data.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, is supplied with backup power when the power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is supplied. Each data stored in the RAM 223 is held.

With reference to FIG. 89, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 89) of the thirteenth embodiment, the process of S1120 is deleted from the startup process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment. Each process of S1101 to S1114 in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment. That is, the same process as the startup process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment is executed.

With reference to FIG. 90, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. The startup process (FIG. 90) of the thirteenth embodiment is different from the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment in that the processes of S1360 are added instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the thirteenth embodiment are the same as the respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

When the process of S1310 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, based on the data stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k, A display command for causing the display control device 114 to display the reserved symbol display is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1360).

Here, the displayed hold symbol display is displayed based on the data of each hold area stored in the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k immediately before the power is turned off. Since the state of the rearrangement flag 223k7 of each holding area is stored, the holding symbol display is displayed in the order displayed immediately before the power-off.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing performed when the power of the main control device 110 is turned on, and it is possible to shorten the rise time (time until the normal game is executed) when the power is turned on.

Further, in the state immediately before the power is cut off, the pending symbol display can be restored, and the player can restart the game with peace of mind even after the power is turned on again.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the variation patterns are respectively selected at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started, and the case where the variation is started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the first special symbol or the second special symbol has a high probability of being selected when it becomes a big hit such as super reach at a timing at which fluctuation start is possible. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, a notification mode for notifying the player is displayed so as to look at the display area on the side where the fluctuation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fourteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected, the player notifies the display area displayed with the variation pattern so as to pay attention. The point is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c). FIG. 91A is a diagram schematically showing that the background image in the right side display area Dm2 is displayed in a blinking manner when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2.

FIG. 91(b) shows the second special symbol displayed in the right side display area Dm2 when the variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2. It is the figure which showed typically that the size of (the symbol which exists) was displayed by the symbol larger than usual.

In FIG. 91(c), when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2, the player is informed to see the right side display area Dm2 in the left side display area Dm1. It is the figure which showed typically that the character of "" was displayed.

With such a configuration, the player plays the game while gazing at the display area on the side where the background image is displayed in blinking, so that the player can display the variation pattern that is easy to be selected when a big hit such as super reach occurs. It is possible to play a game while preventing the variation mode being performed from being overlooked.

In addition, the player can easily understand which display area should be seen, and can always enjoy the game without paying attention to both display areas at all times. Therefore, the player's fatigue can be reduced even after playing the game for a long time.

In the present embodiment, by the above notification, the special symbol to be noticed is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left display area Dm1 or the right side of the upper display area Dm that displays the special symbol to be noticed. The size of the display area of the display area Dm2 may be variable. Specifically, when attention is paid to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the left display area Dm1 is enlarged and displayed on the right display area Dm2 side, and the size of the right display area Dm2 is reduced. Alternatively, the display may be changed so as to be eliminated (all the upper display area Dm is changed to the left display area Dm1). With such a configuration, the player can be notified of the variation mode of the special symbol to be noticed. Further, the player can play the game while expecting that the left side display area Dm1 or the right side display area Dm2 can be largely changed, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A first delay time storage area 203v5 and a second delay time storage area 203v6 are added to the other memory area 203v.

In the first delay time storage area 203v5, in the second special symbol, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected, the same time as the selected variation time is for delaying the variation start of the first special symbol. This is a storage area that is stored as a delay time.

The details of the first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described later, but in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the variation pattern selected is a jackpot. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern or the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out of alignment, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

When the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated every time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed. .. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

The second delay time storage area 203v6, in the first special symbol, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected, the same time as the selected variation time, for delaying the variation start of the second special symbol. This is a storage area that is stored as a delay time.

The second delay time storage area 203v6 will be described in detail later, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the variation pattern selected is a jackpot. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern or the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out of alignment, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

When the delay time is stored in the second delay time storage area 203v6, the time is updated every time the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S750 in FIG. 96) is executed. .. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), is subtracted.

In this way, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the variation start of the other special symbol that is the variation start after that is delayed. Therefore, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation pattern having a high probability of being selected when a big hit is variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a complicated game state in which the player needs to pay attention to both the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2.

In the present embodiment, the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5 and the second delay time storage area 203v6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the count value and the like may be stored. May be. With this configuration, each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the count value is decremented by 1, so that the number of times the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed is counted. Of course, it may be configured to measure time.

Referring to FIG. 93, in the fourteenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the fourteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 94, in the fourteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 5 (S350) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S350). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. If the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment, a delay time for delaying the variation start of the second special symbol is set, and the first special pattern is set. It is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the pattern variation mode.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, a variation that becomes a big hit) It is determined whether the pattern or the outlying super reach is variably displayed (S571). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S571: No), the first delay time is decremented by 2 ms and updated (S584). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S571: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot. (S572). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S572: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S573). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S572: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S575). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S576).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S577).

The fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S577 is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an outlying super reach (S578). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment (S578: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern is the delay time. Is set in the second delay time storage 203v5 (S579). The first caution notice command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the left display area Dm1 in which the first special symbol is displayed is set (S580).

A second mute command is set to mute the sound effect or sound that changes the second special symbol (the sound effect or sound that is set in the changing pattern in which the second special symbol is changed) (S581). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S582). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S583).

In this way, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the notification mode that focuses on the variation mode of the first special symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can easily play the game.

Also, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, attention is paid to the variation mode of the first special symbol, which is related to the variation of the second special symbol. Sound effects and voice are muted. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which of the special symbols should be noted. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the sound and the sound effect of the first special symbol, and the game can be more enjoyed.

Further, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, if the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the variation start of the second special symbol is delayed, so that the left display area Dm1 and the right display are simultaneously displayed. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the noticeable variation mode from being displayed, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, by displaying the variation mode that the player expects to be a jackpot at different times (states where they are not displayed at the same time), it is possible to play a game for a longer time while maintaining the expectation of a jackpot. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, by setting the variation pattern command and starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time can be measured in time with the variation start of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately calculated. Can be measured.

In addition, as a notice mode for notifying the player so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the first special symbol may be configured to be large (see FIG. 91(b)). Further, in order to pay attention to the first special symbol, the right side display area Dm2 may be configured to display the character "Look at the left!!" which indicates that attention is paid to the first special symbol (Fig. 91(c)). Further, the above contents may be combined with each other. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the second special symbol is paid attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol. The effect sound and voice related to the fluctuation of the design are muted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two speakers, and is configured to output a voice or sound effect related to the first special symbol on the one hand, and a voice or sound effect related to the second special symbol on the other hand. It is configured to output etc., and in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when a variation pattern that is a big hit or a super-reach that is out of line is selected, a sound or a sound effect related to the second special symbol is output. You may make it pay attention to the variation mode of a 1st special symbol by setting it as a structure which makes a speaker non-operation or low output. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily switch between voices and sound effects (which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be output such as voices and sound effects).

Referring to FIG. 95, in the fourteenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is a second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is added. Each process of S701 to S709 in the fourteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 96, in the fourteenth embodiment, a second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 95, S206) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 5 (S750) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (S750). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. If the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment, a delay time for delaying the variation start of the first special symbol is set, and the second special symbol is set. It is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the pattern variation mode.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750), first, whether the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (that is, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, a variation that becomes a big hit) It is determined whether the pattern or the out-of-range super reach is variably displayed (S751). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (S751: No), the second delay time is decremented by 2 ms and updated (S764). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second delay time is not set (S751: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot. (S752). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S752: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S753). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to set the variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S752: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S755). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S756).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected variation pattern is It is generated (S757).

The fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S757 is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an outlying super reach (S758). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern or a deviating super-reach variation pattern (S758: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern is the delay time. Is set in the first delay time storage 203v5 (S759). A second caution notice command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the right display area Dm2 in which the second special symbol is displayed is set (S760).

A first silencing command for silencing a sound effect or voice that changes the first special symbol (a sound effect or voice that is set in a variation pattern in which the first special symbol changes) is set (S761). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S762). The start of measurement of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S763).

In this way, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the notification mode that focuses on the variation mode of the second special symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can easily play the game.

Further, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, attention is paid to the variation mode of the second special symbol, which is related to the variation of the first special symbol. Sound effects and voice are muted. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to easily understand which special symbol should be paid attention to. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the sound and the sound effect of the second special symbol, and the game can be more enjoyed.

Also, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the variation start of the first special symbol is delayed, so that the left display area Dm1 and the side display are displayed at the same time. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the noticeable variation mode from being displayed, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. Also, by displaying the variation mode that the player expects to be a jackpot at different times, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the jackpot for a longer time, and to get tired of the game early. It is possible to prevent it.

Further, by setting the variation pattern command and starting the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time can be measured in time with the variation start of the second special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately calculated. Can be measured.

In addition, as the notification mode of informing the player so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol, the size of the second special symbol may be configured to be large (see FIG. 91(b)). Further, in order to pay attention to the second special symbol, a character "Look right" can be displayed in the left side display area Dm1 to notify that the second special symbol is to be noticed (Fig. 91(c)). Further, the above contents may be combined with each other. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 98. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the variation patterns are respectively selected at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started, and the case where the variation is started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, at the timing when the fluctuation can be started, the probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is high is high. When the variation pattern is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of displaying a notification mode for informing the player so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected, and a command indicating the variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, a voice is output. The lamp control device 113 differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the player gives notice so that the player pays attention to the display area displayed in the variation pattern.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 97, a variable display setting process (S1411) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) of the fifteenth embodiment has the processes of S1630 and S1640 added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) of the first embodiment. The processes of S1601 to S1614 in the fifteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1601 to S1614 in the first embodiment.

When the process of S1603 is executed in the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifteenth embodiment, the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is executed. It The details of the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) will be described later, but in the main control device 110, the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol is a variation pattern that is a big hit, or is out of order. In the case of reach, for the variation mode of the first special symbol, to set a command to execute a notification to bring the player's attention and a command to mute the sound or sound effect relating to the variation mode of the second special symbol. Processing.

In the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is a fluctuation pattern that is a big hit or an outlying super reach. (S1631). When the received first fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern that is a big hit or it is determined that it is out of reach (S1631: Yes), the background of the left display area Dm1 that displays the first special symbol A first caution notice command for instructing the display controller 114 to blink the image (see FIG. 91A) is generated and output to the display controller 114 (S1632).

A second silencing command for silencing the voice and the sound effect relating to the variation mode of the second special symbol is generated and output (S1633). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that is a big hit or that it is not out-of-range super reach (S1631: No), this process ends.

Returning to the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the description is continued. When the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1411) is executed, the processes from S1604 to S1608 are executed. When the process of S1608 is executed, the process of the second caution notice process (S1640) is executed. Regarding the second caution notice process (S1640), the process of the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is such that the first caution notice command is the second caution notice command, the second mute command is the first mute command, Since only the respective changes are made and the others are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the type of the variation pattern output from the main control device 110 is determined and the player expects the jackpot to be a jackpot, when the variation pattern is a jackpot or out of reach, the variation mode is played. Since the notification mode that allows the player to pay attention is set, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the fluctuation mode. Therefore, the player can determine which special symbol variation mode should be noted, and can easily play the game. Therefore, the player's fatigue can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the first caution command or the second caution command, the background image of the display area on the side where the special symbol is displayed is displayed in a blinking manner. However, the size of the special symbol on the attention side is not limited to this. The height may be increased (see FIG. 91(b)). In addition, as in the case of a notification mode in which attention is paid to the second special symbol, for example, a character “” that notifies the second special symbol in the left side display area Dm1 so as to pay attention to the special symbol on the attention side You may comprise so that the character "Look right" may be displayed (refer FIG.91(c)). Further, the above contents may be combined with each other. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the special symbol having a high probability of being selected when the jackpot is hit.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the variation patterns are respectively selected at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started, and the case where the variation is started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern in the first special symbol, the variation pattern to be a jackpot or the out-reach super reach (that is, the probability of being selected when the jackpot is high is high. When the variation pattern) is selected, it is determined whether the same variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol as well, and if it is selected, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol is used. Delay the start of fluctuations in.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the sixteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big hit is selected, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started. , Is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the process of delaying until the variable display with the second special symbol is completed is executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. 99, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 99, in the second special symbol (left display area Dm2), in the state in which the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out is selected and displayed, the first special symbol ( In the right side display area Dm1) also, the super-reach that is out of the way is selected, the start of fluctuation in the first special symbol is delayed, and the second special symbol (left side display area Dm2) is noticed in the notification mode. A certain word, "Look at the right!" is displayed. Then, when the variation pattern of the super reach displayed with the second special symbol ends, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 99, the variation pattern of the delayed super reach of the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is the figure which showed typically.

Thus, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when it is a big hit (for example, super reach) is selected, the variation pattern in the first special symbol Since the start of variation of No. is delayed, the player can concentrate on the variation mode of one special symbol and can play the game calmly.

Further, the player has a variation pattern having a large expectation for the jackpot in succession, and the variation starts in order with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the player has a long expectation for the jackpot. It is possible to play, and it is possible to prevent getting tired of the game early.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, a first delay time storage area 203v5 is provided in the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This first delay time storage area 203v5, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected, a second special symbol The same time as the time until the fluctuation pattern that is selected or fluctuatingly displayed fluctuates is a storage area that is stored as a delay time for delaying the fluctuation start of the first special symbol.

The first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described in detail later, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the variation pattern selected is a jackpot. Is a variation pattern that is, or is a variation pattern of the super-reach that is out, if the variation pattern is also selected in the second special symbol, the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol ends variation The same delay time as the time until it is stored is stored.

Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated every time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed. .. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

Referring to FIG. 100, in the sixteenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 100, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) of the sixteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the sixteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 101, in the 16th embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 6 (S360) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 6 (S360). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. If the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment, it is determined whether or not a similar variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and the variation pattern is selected. If it is, the delay time for delaying the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set, and the process for setting the notification mode or the like for notifying the player to pay attention to the second special symbol Is.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) In step S621, it is determined whether a variation pattern that is a jackpot or a variation pattern of out-of-range super-reach is selected). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S621: No), the first delay time is decremented by 2 ms and updated (S635). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S621: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot. (S622). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S622: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S623). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S622: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S625). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S626).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S627).

The variation pattern selected in the process of S627 is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern or an outlying super reach (S628). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a jackpot or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out (S628: Yes), a variation pattern that is a jackpot in the second special symbol, or It is determined whether or not the out-of-range super-reach is selected or changing (S629).

In the second special symbol, if it is determined that the variation pattern to be a jackpot or the out-of-order super reach is being selected or varied (S629: Yes), the variation that is a jackpot being selected or varying in the second special symbol. The time until the pattern or the out-of-range super-reach ends is stored as the delay time in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S630).

In the left side display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed, the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed so as to display the character "Look at the right!" that notifies the second special symbol (the right side display area Dm2) to pay attention. The second caution notice command for instructing is set (S631). On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when it is determined that the variation pattern to be a big hit or the outlying super reach is not being selected or varied (S629: No), the process of S632 is executed. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S632). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S633).

In this way, in the variation mode of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started. Is delayed until the variation pattern that is variably displayed with the second special symbol is changed, so that the variation pattern that the player has a great expectation for the jackpot is variably displayed in both display areas at the same time. It can be suppressed. Therefore, with a feeling of expectation for the jackpot, it is possible to concentrate on the display of the variation pattern of one special symbol, and the game can be played easily. Also, by being displayed in both display areas, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fluctuation of one special symbol.

Also, in the second special symbol, while the variation pattern is displayed, a notification mode for notifying the second special symbol is displayed, so that the player can easily determine the special symbol to be noticed. It is possible to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the second special symbol, when the variation pattern with the expectation for a jackpot ends, then the variation pattern of the delayed first special symbol is displayed in a varying manner, and the player continuously hits the jackpot. It is possible to enjoy the variation mode having a great sense of expectation, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the notification mode for notifying that attention is paid to the second special symbol, the notification is made by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image in the left display area Dm2 may be displayed in blinking or a special color. good. Further, the size of the symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed large. Further, it is of course possible to combine them for notification.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation start of the first special symbol is delayed, but it is not limited thereto, and the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is added to the time until the variation of the second special symbol is finished. By starting the fluctuation, until the second special symbol ends the fluctuation, the first special symbol is not displayed in the right display area Dm1, or the small symbol is variably displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol ends. , The selected variation pattern (super reach, etc.) may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to change the timing of start of fluctuation, and the control load can be suppressed as compared with the case of delaying.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is configured to be delayed, but it may be configured to delay the second special symbol, or from the first special symbol and the second special symbol, later. It may be configured to delay the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is notified has been described in the case of being notified by the display mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and becomes the reserved ball, it becomes possible to start changing before the variation starts. When the winning/judging determination is made and, as a result, it is a big hit, the player is informed in advance that the winning/judging result will be a big hit due to the change due to the suspension, or it is decided by a lottery.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventeenth embodiment, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot in a state where it is displayed as a reserved ball as a reserved ball before the fluctuation is started (hereinafter, one-shot notification and Point) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. 102(a), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, among the reserved symbol displays of the second special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is usually "●". Where, is displayed in "▲" which is a special reserved symbol display, the display mode informing the player in advance that it will be stopped and displayed in the display mode of the special symbol showing the big hit is schematically FIG.

Further, in FIG. 102(b), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, among the reserved symbol displays of the first special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is usually " Where "○" is displayed, it is displayed as "△" which is a special reserved symbol display, and the display mode informing the player in advance that it will be stopped and displayed in the display mode of the special symbol indicating the big hit will be displayed. It is the figure which showed typically.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize the winning/disapproval determination result in advance by displaying the reserved symbol, and every time the reserved symbol display is displayed, the special reserved symbol display for notifying the big hit is displayed. You can have expectations and be more interested in games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is notified in advance by the pending symbol display (notice of one shot), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be notified by voice, or a dedicated lamp or the like may be used. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may of course be configured to notify by characters or symbols.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A first notification flag 203v7, a second notification flag 203v8, and a notification timer storage area 203v9 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first notification flag 203v7 is a flag indicating that a reserved symbol display (in the present embodiment, “Δ”) is displayed in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol informing that a big hit has occurred. The details of the first notification flag 203v7 will be described later, but in the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is possible to display a special reserved symbol display for notifying a big hit. , Is set to ON based on the instruction to the voice lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, when the jackpot game is started, the first notification flag 203v7 is set to off, based on the pending symbol display notifying that the jackpot is to be won. The flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

The second notification flag 203v8 is a flag indicating that a special reserved symbol display (“▲” in the present embodiment) that indicates a big hit is being displayed in the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol. This second notification flag 203v8 will be described later in detail, but in the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is possible to display a special reserved symbol display for notifying a big hit. , Is set to ON based on the instruction to the voice lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, the second notification flag 203v8 is set to off when the jackpot game is started, which is based on the special reserved symbol display notifying that the jackpot is to be won. The flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

Notification timer storage area 203v9, on the other hand, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when it is displayed as a pending symbol display (single notification) to notify that it is a big hit, after being displayed, the reserved symbol display It is a storage area in which the time until the change of the special symbol based on is stopped is stored. When one notification is made with one special symbol, if the variation pattern that is a hit with the other special symbol is selected, than the set time stored in this notification timer storage area 203v9 Long fluctuation times are selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring before the jackpot due to the one-announced pending symbol display, and to prevent the player from being confused.

In addition, after one notification is given, a special symbol different from the special symbol that has been notified (for example, when one notification is made in a reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, the second The hold corresponding to the special symbol) is established, and the fluctuation is stopped before the one-announced hold symbol display, and when the jackpot is reached, the gaming state may be changed. In detail, we predicted that it would start changing in a high probability game state, determined in advance that it would be a big hit, and made one notification, but due to the hold held after that, due to the difference in the change start order, If it starts to fluctuate first and then stops at 15R jackpot, then it will be changed to a game in the normal probability (low probability) game state, and the result of judgment whether or not the reserved symbol display is announced There is a problem that it is not a big hit, but a miss.

However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when one notification is performed, the variation pattern is selected so that the jackpot game does not occur before that. Therefore, the above-described problem can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notification that would confuse the player.

FIG. 104 is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k in the seventeenth embodiment, a pending notification flag 223k8 is added to the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k in the first embodiment.

The hold notification flag 223k8 is provided in each hold area, and when the first notification command or the second notification command is received from the main control device 110, the hold notification flag 223k8 of the hold area indicated by the command is turned on. Is set. Further, the hold notification flag 223k8 resets each data in the hold area to the initial value when the hold is exhausted and the hold area is shifted, and when the hold data storage area is shifted to the changing data storage area. When it is cleared to 0, it is turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 105, S926) in the seventeenth embodiment, the first announcement lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is added to the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The first extension variation look-ahead processing (FIG. 107, S1160) is added. Each process of S931 to S939 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S931 to S939 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S931, when it is determined that the predicted hit determination result is a big hit (S931: Yes), the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is executed. The first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) will be described later, but if one notification has not been executed, a process of performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute one notification is executed.

In the first announcement lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150), first, it is determined whether the first announcement flag 203v7 or the second announcement flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1151). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1151: No), in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the change order is first, and the winning one is stored. It is determined whether it has been done (S1152).

If it is determined that there is a winning order in the rearrangement storage area 203u and there is a winning order (S1152: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the rearrangement storage area 203u, when it is determined that all the change order is out of order (S1152: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1153). The notification count value is a value obtained from the value of the special winning type counter C2. In the present embodiment, the special winning type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (any of 0 to 30 in the present embodiment) (S1154). When it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a win (S1154: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of a big hit of the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol for which the determination is made. A first notification command for instructing display with a symbol display (single notification) is generated (S1155). The first notification command is a command indicating which reserved area is the command for the reserved symbol display.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to this reserved symbol display is changed is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1156). The first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S1157). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out of range (S1154: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S1151: Yes), 2 ms is subtracted from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 to update the notification timer. Is performed (S1158).

In this way, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for whether to make one notification is not performed, so once one notification is made, Until the jackpot game is over, the next one-shot notification is not performed, and the one-shot notification is performed multiple times, so that the player can be prevented from being confused.

In addition, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to give one notification, it is possible to prevent one notification from being given even with a pending symbol display that is a big hit every time, and expectation to the big hit if one notification is not made Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player does not hold.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a counter value or the like may be stored and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

Referring to FIG. 105, the description is continued by returning to the processing of the first prefetch update processing (FIG. 105, S926). When the processing of S934 or S935 is executed, the first extension variation look-ahead processing (FIG. 107, S1160) is executed.

In the first extension variation look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160), first, it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161: Yes), the second notification flag 203v8 is stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u that triggered the setting of the second notification flag 203v8 to ON. With respect to the data of the holding area, the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 when the second special symbol corresponding to the holding area starts to change is calculated (predicted), and the selected change pattern (change time) ) Is determined (predicted) (S1162). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF (S1161: No), this process ends.

With this configuration, in the pending symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, one notification is made, and even when the variable display of the second special symbol is extended and displayed, the variation pattern (variation) By determining (predicting) the time) in advance, the reserved symbol displays can be rearranged in the correct variation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Next, the second prefetch update process (S946) which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch update processing (S946). In the second prefetch updating process (FIG. 108, S946) in the seventeenth embodiment, the second announcement lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is added to the second prefetch updating process (FIG. 28, S946) in the first embodiment. The second extension variation look-ahead processing (FIG. 108, S1180) is added. Each processing of S951 to S959 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each processing of S951 to S959 in the first embodiment.

In the processing of S951, if it is determined that the predicted win/no determination result is a big hit (S951: Yes), the second notification lottery processing (FIG. 109, S1170) is executed. The second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) will be described later, but if one notification has not been executed, a process of performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute one notification is executed.

In the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1171). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1171: No), in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the change order is first, and the winning one is stored. It is determined whether it has been done (S1172).

In the rearrangement storage area 203u, when it is determined that the variation order is earlier and there is a winning order (S1172: Yes), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the rearrangement storage area 203u, when it is determined that all of the change orders are out of order (S1172: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1173). The notification count value is a value obtained from the value of the special winning type counter C2. In the present embodiment, the special winning type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (any of 0 to 30 in the present embodiment) (S1174). When it is determined that the acquired notification count value is a win (S1174: Yes), the special notification is performed to notify the jackpot of the reserved symbol display of the determined second special symbol to the voice lamp control device 113. A second notification command for instructing to display the reserved symbol display (single notification) is generated (S1175). The second notification command is a command indicating which reserved area is the command for the reserved symbol display.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to this reserved symbol display is changed is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1176). The second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1177). On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out of range (S1174: No), this process ends. Further, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON (S1171: Yes), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9. 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of (1), is subtracted and the notification timer is updated (S1178).

In this way, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for whether to make one notification is not performed, so once one notification is made, Until the jackpot game is over, the next one-shot notification is not performed, and the one-shot notification is performed multiple times, so that the player can be prevented from being confused.

In addition, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to give one notification, it is possible to prevent one notification from being given even with a pending symbol display that is a big hit every time, and if one notification is not made, it will be a big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the player does not hold expectations.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a counter value or the like may be stored and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

With reference to FIG. 108, the description returns to the process of the second prefetch update process (FIG. 108, S946). When the processing of S954 or S955 is executed, the second extension variation look-ahead processing (S1180) is executed. The second extension variation prefetching process (S1180) is the same as the other processes except that the second announcement flag 203v8 is changed to the first announcement flag 203v7 in the first extension variation prefetching processing (FIG. 107, S1160). Therefore, illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With such a configuration, in the pending symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, one notification is made, and even when the variable display of the first special symbol is extended displayed (delayed), By determining the variation time, the reserved symbol displays can be rearranged in the correct variation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Referring to FIG. 110, in the seventeenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) of the seventeenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 111, in the seventeenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 7 (S370) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S370). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol, when one notification is made, a variation pattern longer than the time until the variation mode of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the one-announced pending symbol display is changed Is set.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S651). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S651: Yes), it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S652). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S652: Yes), the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is the first alternative fluctuation pattern and is the first alternative fluctuation pattern. It is set as a command (S653).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the game state at that time from the normal time special hit variation pattern table 202d or the special short-term/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 202d, The fluctuation pattern of the closest fluctuation time is selected from the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. For example, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), if the jackpot type is 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is Selected.

If the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than all the fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table, the value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is set as the fluctuation time. An alternative fluctuation pattern is set. In this alternative variation pattern, after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time, they are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit. Also, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of 2R probability variation, an alternative variation pattern in which the variation time is a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 instead of the normal variation pattern for 2R probability variation Selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S652: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S654). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to set the variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S655).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S651: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S656). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S657).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S658).

The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S659). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S660).

Referring to FIG. 112, in the seventeenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 112, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) of the seventeenth embodiment is a second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S26) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is added. Each process of S701 to S709 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 113, in the seventeenth embodiment, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 7 (S770) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S770). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Further, in the first special symbol, when one notification is performed, the variation time until the variation mode of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the one-announced pending symbol display is set is set.

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot (S771). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S771: Yes), it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S772). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is on (S772: Yes), the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is the second alternative fluctuation pattern and the second alternative fluctuation pattern. The command is set (S773).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the game state at that time from the normal time special hit variation pattern table 202d or the special short-term/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 202d, The variation pattern having the closest variation time is selected with the variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. For example, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), if the jackpot type is 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is Selected.

If the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than any of the fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table, an alternative fluctuation pattern is set with the fluctuation time being the value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. It In this alternative variation pattern, after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time, they are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit. Also, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of 2R probability variation, an alternative variation pattern in which the variation time is a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 instead of the normal variation pattern for 2R probability variation Selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is off (S772: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S774). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to set the variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S775).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S771: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S776). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S777).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected variation pattern is It is generated (S778). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S779). The start of measurement of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S780).

In this way, when the one-shot notification is executed in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, the one-shot notification is executed in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol, which corresponds to the first special symbol. In this case, the variation mode of the second special symbol, in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit, is delayed until the special symbol corresponding to the one-off specially reserved symbol display stops fluctuating. It is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring before the jackpot game based on the special reserved symbol display.

Therefore, assuming a lottery in a high-probability gaming state, even if one notification is given, the jackpot does not occur before that, so the game state cannot change and one notification is given. It is possible to prevent a problem that the lottery game based on the display of the held symbols does not become a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and play the game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the alternative variation pattern is selected to delay the occurrence of the big hit, but it is of course possible to delay the variation start. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent another jackpot from occurring before the jackpot triggered by the display of the held symbols for which one notification has been made.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the jackpots are delayed, but only the 15R normal jackpot may be delayed. With such a configuration, the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the 2R certainty variation jackpot occur before the jackpot based on the pending symbol display that has made one notification, but the gaming state is changed from high probability to low probability. That can be prevented, and the lottery game based on the display of the held symbols which has been notified one time can be made a big hit. In addition, even before the big hit based on the one-off notification of the pending symbols, a big hit occurs, and a lot of big hit games can be provided to the player, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

With reference to FIG. 114, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 114, S1400). The main processing of the seventeenth embodiment (FIG. 114, S1400) is different from the main processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 35, S1400) in the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) and the reserved quantity display update processing (FIG. 37). , S1406), a command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) and a pending number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) are added. Each process of S1401 to S1413 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, the command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 115, the command determination process 4 (S1560) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 4 (S1560). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is performed in the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

In the command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1470) of the seventeenth embodiment, the processing of S1561 and S1562 is added to the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. Each process of S1501 to S1518 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. When it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command is not received in the process of S1517 (S1517: No), the process of S1561 is executed.

In the process of S1561, it is determined whether the first notification command or the second notification command output by main controller 110 has been received (S1561). When it is determined that the first notification command or the second notification command is received (S1561: Yes), the hold notification flag 223k8 in the hold area of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k indicated by the received notification command is set to ON. Yes (S1562).

Referring to FIG. 116, in the seventeenth embodiment, the reserved quantity display updating process 4 (S1550) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing 4 (S1550). Reservation number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), the reservation symbol display is rearranged flag 223k7 is set in the on-hold symbol display is the fluctuation start order, the off-set reserved symbol display is in the established order. Display, further, special hold symbol display the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (in the present embodiment, if the first special symbol is "△", the second special symbol If so, it is a process for displaying with “▲”).

In the reserved quantity display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated (S1551). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

Display the reserved symbol display of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in the order in which the fluctuation starts, and for the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF, the reserved symbol display in the order in which the reservation is established. The display hold display command for displaying is set (S1552).

By controlling in this manner, when the rearrangement is executed (when the frame switch 22 is operated), the displayed pending symbol display (the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) is displayed. Only for this, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged and displayed in the variation start order.

It is determined whether or not there is a holding area in which the holding notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553). When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: Yes), the hold symbol display in which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is displayed as a special hold symbol display (this implementation). In the form, a hold display command for display to be displayed with “Δ” for the first special symbol and “▲” for the second special symbol is generated (S1554). A voice command for generating a voice (in the present embodiment, a voice “big hit!!”) indicating that one notification has been issued is generated (S1555). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no holding area in which the holding notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: No), this processing ends.

In this way, when the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, the hold symbol display is set to be displayed as a special hold symbol display for notifying that the jackpot has been hit, so that the player has a new hold. Every time the symbol display is displayed, whether or not the special reserved symbol display is displayed, it is possible to play the game with expectation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, when the special reserved symbol display is displayed, the fact that it is a big hit is also notified by voice, so that the player's ambition can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game earlier.

Further, the hold symbol display is updated and displayed every time the hold symbol display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) is executed, so that the hold symbol display or the special hold symbol is accompanied by the completion of the hold. The display can also be moved and displayed, the player can be made to display an accurate reserved symbol display, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

In the present embodiment, the voice notifying that one notification has been issued is repeatedly notified while the hold notice flag 223k8 is set to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be output.

Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the reserved symbol display as a special reserved symbol display, it is configured to notify one notification, but it is not limited thereto, the background is a different color or display mode (for example, blinking display) It may be notified by displaying it, or may be configured to notify by displaying characters on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) and the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) to win the voice lamp control device 113. The command, the first notification command, the second notification command, and other various commands are output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 sends a command indicating various count values (special winning random number counter C1 and the like) acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. In the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) that outputs to the voice lamp control unit 113 and is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the main control unit 110 and the first process The configuration may be such that the 2 prefetch processing (FIG. 27, S914) is executed. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to perform the game processing (winning detection of various winning openings, etc.) without omission. Note that this configuration can be similarly applied to the first to sixteenth embodiments described above, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are separately selected for the variation patterns, and the case where the determination result is notified is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment, when displaying the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the left display area Dm1 and the second special symbol that variably display the first special symbol are displayed. With the right side display area Dm2 that displays the symbols in a variable manner, effects that are respectively related to each other are displayed, and the result of each judgment is notified.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighteenth embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when a specific condition is satisfied, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are associated with the variable display mode (hereinafter , Fusion effect) is displayed and the player is informed of the result of the hit/miss determination, which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117(a), a display mode of the fusion effect variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. When it is determined by the first special symbol or the second special symbol that the fusion effect variation pattern is selected, the variation display of the special symbol by the fusion effect variation pattern is synchronized with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (Fusion production) is started. As shown in FIG. 117(a), the fusion effect is displayed on the left side display area Dm1 for displaying the first special symbol and the right side display area Dm2 for displaying the second special symbol. To be done. In detail, in the left display area Dm1, as a red group, it indicates that the result of the determination of the first special symbol is notified, and in the right display area Dm2, as a white group, the result of the determination of the second special symbol is notified. It is shown that. If the red group wins the white group with a ball throw, it indicates that the first special symbol is a big hit, and if the white group beats the red group, it is a second special symbol. On the other hand, in the case where the result of the coin throw is a draw between the red group and the white group, it indicates that both the winning and losing determination results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are out.

In this way, normally, in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the judgment result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, but the fusion effect is determined. Then, different from the normal time, the change display mode (fusion effect) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are related to each other, the result of the judgment is notified and the player is given a fresh feeling. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, the fusion effect is configured to be easily determined when the hit determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit, so that the player expects the jackpot when the variable display of the fusion effect is started. You can play with a great feeling. Therefore, the player can expect the normal display (the period when the fusion effect is not displayed) whether the variable display of the fusion effect is started or not, and can enjoy the game for a long time. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is the effect by the coin purse, but is not limited thereto, if the main character (player) wins the enemy without distinguishing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The effect may be a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In such a case, when the fusion effect is started, the division between the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 disappears, and in the upper side display area Dm, a one-to-one car race with the enemy is performed. Is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can easily play the game by knowing that if the car of the main character finishes earlier than the car of the enemy, it will be a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol (main symbol) as a number is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be displayed in small variations in each display area. With such a configuration, the player can confirm the winning/disapproval determination result even by looking at the main symbol, and can easily recognize whether the production is notified of the deviation or the notification of the hit. ..

Further, the main symbol may be configured to be displayed by changing it to a numeral and changing it to a temporary symbol such as "○" or "x". With this configuration, the area for displaying the main symbol can be reduced, and the display area that can be used for the fusion effect can be configured to be larger.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118(a), the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment will be described. In the rearrangement storage area 203u, each of the holding areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (the changing data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the adjustment effect flag 203u10 and the fusion effect execution Flags 203u11 are added respectively.

The adjustment effect flag 203u10, which will be described later in detail, indicates that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time, so that a variation pattern for time adjustment is selected and is held. It is a flag. This adjustment effect flag 203u10 performs time adjustment in order to execute the fusion effect when it is decided to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The holding area corresponding to the special symbol that changes is set to ON. On the other hand, the holding area is shifted by the use of the holding, and when the change of the special symbol is finished, it is set to OFF by being overwritten by the data of the newly shifting holding area. The fusion effect is a fusion effect variation pattern in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started at the same time, and the variation display with which the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 are related is performed. Shows the contents that are variably displayed as the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is a flag indicating that the fusion effect execution is on hold. Although details will be described later, the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 executes the fusion effect when it is determined to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Then, it is set to ON for the hold area corresponding to the determined hold. On the other hand, each data in the holding area is shifted by the use of the holding, and when the change of the special symbol is completed, the data in the holding area to be newly shifted is overwritten and set to OFF.

With reference to FIG. 118(b), the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to this embodiment will be described. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k, like the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main controller 110, the storage areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (while the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing). Data), an adjustment effect flag 223k10 and a fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are added respectively. The adjustment effect flag 223k and the fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are adjusted in the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main control device 110, except that the adjustment effect flag 223k and the fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are set to ON based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Since the effect flag 203u10 and the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, FIG. 119(a) is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. A fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is added to the other memory area 203v. The fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value acquired when it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed by the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) described below. In the main process (FIG. 33), the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is incremented by 1 in the process of updating the variation type counter CS1 (S1209), and is incremented to the upper limit value of 99, and then is incremented to 100. Then, the counter value is updated to 0 which is the initial value.

Next, FIG. 119(b) is a diagram showing a fusion effect variation pattern list stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. This fusion effect variation pattern list is a diagram collectively showing the fusion effect variation patterns added to the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The fusion effect variation pattern is stored by being assigned to a specific address in the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e. Specifically, the result determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as the fusion effect variation pattern selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol is out. At the top address of the special winning variation pattern table 202d, the variation pattern in which the first special symbol wins in the coin-placing effect is stored. Further, at the head address of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation pattern in which the second special symbol is lost in the coin putting effect is stored.

Moreover, the first special symbol is removed, and the second special symbol is a winning combination result variation pattern selected as the fusion effect variation pattern, the start address of the special outlier variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In, the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is lost in the coin throwing effect is stored. Further, at the head address of the special winning variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation pattern in which the second special symbol wins in the coin-placing effect is stored.

Furthermore, the first special symbol is disengaged, and the second special symbol is also selected as a fusion effect variation pattern to be selected in the case of a hit determination result, the special outlier variation that selects a variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At the last address of the pattern, the variation patterns that are drawn in the ball-placing effect are stored.

By configuring in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined to execute the fusion effect, the fusion effect can be easily obtained based on the result of the hit/miss judgment between the first special symbol and the second special symbol for executing the fusion effect. Can be selected, and the control load can be reduced as compared with the case where selection is performed using a counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, in the fusion effect, a fusion effect variation pattern is selected for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the display mode for variably displaying the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2 is voiced. Although the notification is given to the lamp control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 based on the combination of the hit/miss determination results is one fusion effect variation pattern. May be configured to be selected as. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display modes displayed on the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 from deviating from each other. Further, it is possible to reduce the control load of the display control device 114 as compared with the case where the fusion effect is displayed separately.

Moreover, the main control device 110 respectively selects the fusion effect variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as in the present embodiment, and outputs the variation pattern command to the voice lamp control device 113, respectively. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that receives the variation pattern command or the display control device 114 that receives a display command based on the variation command from the voice lamp control device 113 may perform display control as one variation mode. .. With this configuration, main controller 110 selects the fusion effect variation pattern by the same control as when selecting the normal variation pattern when selecting the fusion effect variation pattern, and the voice lamp control device. It can be output to 113, and it is possible to prevent the control executed by main controller 110 from being complicated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect variation pattern is configured to be stored in the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e, respectively, but the invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to set and store the configured dedicated variation pattern table.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, in the eighteenth embodiment, a special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) of the eighteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the eighteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 121, in the eighteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 8 (S380) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 8 (S380). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, when it is determined to execute the fusion effect, the synchronization variation pattern or the fusion effect variation pattern for executing the fusion effect is selected.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S671). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S671: Yes), the special hit change pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S672). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is set to the special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S673).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S671: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S674). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is set to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

It is determined whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u corresponding to the hold that starts to change is on (S675). When it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is ON (S675: Yes), the synchronous fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the holding area is selected and selected. A first fluctuation pattern command indicating the synchronized fluctuation pattern is generated (S676). Here, this synchronization variation pattern is a fusion effect lottery process (not shown) executed in one process of a fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) or a second prefetch update process (not shown) described later. When it is determined to execute the fusion effect, the fluctuation start time is adjusted so that the suspension of the first special symbol and the suspension of the second special symbol that are determined to execute the fusion effect start the variation display at the same timing. This is a variation pattern for Specifically, among the suspension of the first special symbol and the second special symbol determined to execute the fusion effect, the variation start time is the variation start time of the later, the variation start time of the earlier variation start time In order to match with, the fluctuation time obtained by adding the time of the difference to the selected fluctuation time is stored for the suspension that starts fluctuation immediately before.

Note that the synchronization fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the result of win/fail judgment is dislocated, and is variably displayed so that the main symbol is variably displayed for a set variability time and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating disengagement. It is a fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is OFF (S675: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 in the reservation area of the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponding to the start of fluctuation is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is present (S677). When it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S677: Yes), the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the rearrangement storage area 203u in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to on. A fusion effect variation pattern is selected on the basis of the hit/no decision result and a first variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fusion effect variation pattern is generated (S678).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S677: No), the variation pattern type is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c. It is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S679).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S680). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S681). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S682).

In this way, by determining whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON when selecting the variation pattern, normally, the variation pattern is selected based on each counter value. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the fusion effect, a variation pattern selection method different from the normal one becomes possible, and the variation pattern can be flexibly executed according to the situation.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (not shown) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) Select a variation pattern of a special symbol, generate a second variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern, for the processing of S681, change to a second stop type command, for the processing of S682 Since the same processing is executed except that the variation time of the second special symbol is started, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 of FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first look-ahead update processing (FIG. 122, S926) in the eighteenth embodiment, the fusion effect lottery processing (FIG. 123, S1220) and S1240 are different from the first look-ahead update processing (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. ~ The processing of S1241 is added. Each process of S931 to S935 in the 18th embodiment is the same as each process of S931 to S935 in the first embodiment.

When the processing of S934 or S935 ends, the fusion effect lottery processing (FIG. 123, S1220) is executed. The details of the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) will be described later, but when the selected variation pattern is a winning variation pattern or a super-reach that is out of alignment, a process of determining whether to execute the fusion effect. To execute.

Next, after the process of S936 is executed, it is determined whether the sorting order is interrupted and renumbered or whether the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240). When it is determined that the sorting order has been interrupted and renumbered or that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 has been set to ON (S1240: Yes), the hit determination result storage area stored in each holding area. 203u1, the big hit stop type storage area 203u2, the variation pattern type storage area 203u4, the variation start time storage area 203u5, and the prefetch probability variation flag 203u6 are updated, and the rearrangement order is renumbered based on the variation start time (S1241). Here, when the fluctuation start order changes due to the newly generated hold, the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is normal or normal) may change, but even in such a case, fluctuation start again It is possible to recognize the correct rearrangement order (change start order) by re-execution of the hit determination in the game state at that time and updating the selected change pattern.

In addition, even if it is decided that the fusion effect is executed, by selecting the synchronous fluctuation pattern, the order in which fluctuation starts is changed, but in that case also, in the gaming state when the fluctuation starts again. Since the hit/no hit judgment and the variation pattern are updated, the accurate variation start order can be recognized. For the holding area for which the synchronous fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation pattern is not reselected, and the fluctuation start is started based on the selected synchronization fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern. Time etc. are calculated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order is not interrupted and renumbered and the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S1240: Yes), the process of S939 is executed.

With such a configuration, when it is decided to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), re-execution of the winning/absence determination and the variation pattern of each holding area are performed again. Since the reselection is performed, the exact fluctuation start order can be redetermined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a fusion effect lottery process (S1220) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 122, 926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the fusion effect lottery process (S1220).

In the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), first, it is determined whether or not there is a holding area in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON among the holding areas of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main controller 110. (S1221). If it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off in all the holding areas (S1221: No), the winning/judging determination result of the holding areas of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is hit. It is determined whether or not there is a reserved area (S1222).

When it is determined that the win/fail judgment result is out of all the holding areas (S1222: No), the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is the fluctuation pattern to which the win/fail judgment result hits (ie, It is determined whether the variation pattern is selected in the S934 process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 122, S926) (S1223). When it is determined that the variation pattern predicted to be selected is a winning variation pattern (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether the fusion effect can be executed (S1224). Here, in the present embodiment, the condition of whether the fusion effect can be executed is that there are two or more reservations corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. In addition, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is a number including the newly generated reservation.

In this way, by setting the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be two or more, one is a holding for executing the fusion effect variation pattern, and the other is a synchronization variation. It can be set as a hold for executing the pattern, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can synchronize the start of execution of the fusion effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a deviation fluctuation pattern (S1223: No), the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a super reach where the judgment result is wrong. Is determined (S1225). When it is determined that the variation pattern expected to be selected is the outlying super reach (S1225: Yes), the process of S1224 is executed.

When it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed (S1224: Yes), the value of the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is acquired (S1226). It is determined whether the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227). In the present embodiment, the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 has a counter value of "0 to 99", and a counter value of "0 to 19" is set as a winning counter value.

When it is determined that the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON for the holding area in which the fusion effect is executed (S1228). ). Here, for the holding area for performing the fusion effect, the first special symbol is a holding area corresponding to the newly generated holding. On the other hand, for the second special symbol, of the stored reserved areas of the second special symbol, the reserved area with the latest variation start order is set as the reserved area for executing the fusion effect.

By comparing the variation start times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the reservation area in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON, the fusion is performed among the reservation areas corresponding to the special symbols whose variation start time is earlier. The adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON for the holding area before the holding area in which the effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1229).

The difference between the fluctuation start times of the holding areas for which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON is calculated. The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is a synchronization variation pattern indicating a time obtained by adding the calculated variation start time difference to the variation time of the variation pattern expected to be selected in the holding area in which the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON. (S1330).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S1221: Yes), and if it is determined that there is a hit holding area (S1222), the selected variation pattern is out of the supermarket. When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the reach (S1223: No and S1225: No), the fusion effect cannot be executed (that is, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is two or less). When it is determined (S1224: No), when it is determined that the value of the acquired fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a deviation counter value (S1227: No), this process is ended in any case.

In this embodiment, if the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON in any of the holding areas (that is, it is already determined to execute the fusion effect), whether or not to execute the fusion effect. Since the processing is not performed, it is possible to prevent the fusion effect from being continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the fusion effect early because the fusion effect frequently occurs.

Further, in the present embodiment, if any of the holding areas (excluding the holding area corresponding to a newly generated holding) has a holding area with a hit/miss determination result, the fusion effect is not executed. did. With this configuration, the jackpot game is sandwiched, and it is possible to prevent the execution start time of the fusion effect from being shifted due to the restart timing of the special symbol that was temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern expected to be selected is a winning fluctuation pattern or an out-of-range super-reach, it is configured to decide whether to execute the fusion effect by lottery, so that the fusion effect fluctuation pattern is correct. When the determination result is a win, the variation pattern is easily selected, and when the fusion effect is executed, the player can be greatly expected to win. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the fusion effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the fusion effect is determined by satisfying a predetermined condition, further obtaining a counter value and performing a lottery, so that the fusion effect is frequently executed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the fusion effect at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the condition that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 2 or more, respectively, is set as the condition that the fusion effect can be executed, so that the fusion effect is executed. It is possible to set a synchronization variation pattern that matches the timing, and it is possible to easily match the timing of executing the fusion effect with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is configured to be executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be configured to be executed at another timing. The timing for executing the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) may be set as appropriate, but specifically, for example, an RTC or the like may be provided and configured to be executed at a predetermined set time. ..

With such a configuration, the fusion effect will be executed by lottery every predetermined time, and by adjusting the execution start time and the lottery probability, it is possible to provide a game that does not make the player tired. it can. In addition, by notifying the player of the time for the lottery of the fusion effect by the third symbol display device 81 or the like in advance, the player can play the game in anticipation of the time, so that the game can be played for a long time. It can be enjoyed by the player.

As a condition capable of executing the fusion effect, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is two or more, respectively, but it is not limited thereto, and may be three or more, or the like. It may be configured to determine whether the fusion effect can be executed at the synchronized timing instead of the number of holdings. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities to execute the fusion effect, and to further entertain the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, one of the reserved balls is set to the synchronous fluctuation pattern to synchronize the timing of executing the fusion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is changing. May be extended or shortened for synchronization.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to synchronize the fluctuation start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to this, the fluctuation start time is not synchronized, the fluctuation start The variation of the earlier special symbol is displayed until the other special symbol begins to vary, such as displaying a blackout screen or displaying the delay variation mode such as continuing to vary the main symbol during the other, and the other. The special symbol (the special symbol for performing the fusion effect of which the fluctuation start is later) may be configured to execute the fusion effect at the timing when the fluctuation starts. With this configuration, the process for synchronizing the fluctuation start times is not required, and the control load on the main controller 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to start execution of the fusion effect at the synchronized timing, it is configured to synchronize with the synchronization variation pattern, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation start timing may be delayed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control processing for synchronization and reduce the control load on main controller 110.

Further, the fusion effect of the present embodiment is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to display the respective related variation modes, so that the player does not win the jackpot with either one of the special symbols. On the other hand, you can play with great expectations. Further, the effects of both special symbols can be seen in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can be provided with an easily understandable game effect.

Even in the second prefetch updating process (not shown) which is one process of the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first prefetch updating process (only in that it is the process relating to the second special symbol) is different. The same processing as that of FIG. 122, S926) is executed. Detailed description is omitted.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to be executed when it is predicted that the variation pattern of the hit or the variation pattern of the outlying super reach is selected, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and may be the following configurations. .. When the variation pattern per hit or out of reach is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) of the first embodiment, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first variation pattern command. 117(b), the display control device 114 is controlled so that the area of the display area for displaying the variation pattern of the hit or the variation pattern of the outlying super reach is enlarged and displayed. ..

With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the display area to be noticed and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, when the variation pattern that is easy to select when it is a big hit, the display area is enlarged, so that it is easy to see the variation mode, and pay attention to the variation of the other special symbol, and miss the variation mode that is a hit. It is possible to prevent problems that occur. In the present embodiment, when the winning variation pattern or the out-of-range variation of the super reach is displayed in both display areas, control is performed to prohibit the enlargement of the display area when the variation starts simultaneously. Also, if the timing of the start of variation is different, by changing the size of the display area that has been enlarged first to the size of the normal time (the area of the uniform display area) It is possible to recognize that the variation pattern that is easy to select is selected. Therefore, if the player changes to the normal display area after the display area is enlarged and before the fluctuation stops, the player can expect a larger jackpot (expected to obtain two consecutive hits). It is possible to play the game with a feeling, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Based on the time stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5, the fluctuation start order of each reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is renumbered again. With this configuration, even during the probability change chance game, the player can rearrange the reserved symbol displays in the order in which they start changing by operating the frame button 22, and the player can start changing accurately. The order can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation chance game is executed, it can be executed when there is no probability variation jackpot or the like hitting the holding area first. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by another big hit when the probability variation chance game is started.

In the present embodiment, since the synchronization variation pattern is selected for the hold stored immediately before the holding area in which the fusion effect is executed, the fusion effect is produced by the player by the effect of the synchronization variation pattern. It can be recognized that it is started, and it is possible to prevent missing the fusion effect. Therefore, the player can prepare in advance for watching the fusion effect.

In the present embodiment, since the probability variation chance game is executed in the high-probability game state, it is more advantageous for the player in the structure in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are individually drawn. It can be set to shift the game to. Therefore, the player can increase the enjoyment in the higher-probability gaming state as compared with the gaming machine in which one special symbol is sequentially displayed in a variable manner.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to determine whether or not to execute based on the fact that the variation pattern of the jackpot or the variation pattern that is out of reach is selected in one of the special symbols. The configuration is not limited to the above, and may be the following configurations. For example, when the jackpot is determined, the fusion effect may be configured to be executed, and the type of the jackpot may be determined in the variation mode of the fusion effect. Specifically, based on the fact that the 15R normal jackpot is determined in the first special symbol, the fusion effect is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in the coin putting effect shown in FIG. 117(a). If the red group in the left display area Dm1 wins, the 15R regular jackpot, while if the white group in the right display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed wins, the 15R probability variation jackpot is notified, and the red group wins the performance. To configure.

With this configuration, the player can easily recognize the fusion effect. Further, not only the expectation for the jackpot, but also the expectation for the probability variation jackpot can be greatly given to the player. In such a configuration, jackpots with different numbers of rounds may be set, and for example, the jackpot may be awarded when either the 15R jackpot or the 5R jackpot wins, or the amount of profit given to other players. You may comprise so that it may alert|report so that whichever thing with a different height may be given.

In the second prefetch updating process (not shown) which is one of the second prefetching processes (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 129, S926). ), the same process is executed except that the process is changed to the process related to the second special symbol, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a modified example of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are synchronized so as to start the fusion effect, but in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timing is Not particularly synchronized. Specifically, first, in the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts changing, the fusion effect is executed first, and when the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts later is started, the fusion that has started first The fusion effect is started so as to interrupt the effect, and the winning/decision determination result is notified by the variable display mode in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are involved.

Specifically, in the fusion effect, the player in the red corner displayed in the left side display area Dm1 and the player in the blue corner displayed in the right side display area Dm2 are competing for boxing competition. In the first look-ahead update process (not shown) or the second look-ahead update process (not shown) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, if either one of the holding holds is determined to be a win, the fusion effect is produced. It is decided to execute. Next, the suspension for executing the fusion effect is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one is the suspension notified as a win). Here, if the type of hit that has been determined is 15R probability big jackpot, if the player in the display area corresponding to the special symbol (for example, the player in the red corner if the first special symbol) wins, 15R probability variation The player is notified that the jackpot will be awarded.

In the variable display mode in which the variation start is earlier among the suspensions determined to execute the fusion effect, first, the character “Challenger Want!” is displayed until the other special symbol starts variation, and the boxing Fusion production is started with the players displayed. On the other hand, when the variation of the special symbol for executing the fusion effect that starts later is started, the boxing player is also displayed, and the effect of starting the boxing match is executed. Then, in accordance with the variation ending time of the winning special symbol, the boxing player corresponding to the winning special symbol wins.

As a result, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not require a process for executing a process for synchronizing the fluctuation start time in order to execute the fusion effect, so that the control load of the main control device 110 is reduced. Can be reduced.

In addition, all the variation modes performed by the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the display mode of the fusion effect. In such a configuration, if they are out of alignment with each other, the production in which the boxing game continues is displayed, and when the fusion production variation pattern determined to be a hit is selected, the player corresponding to the special symbol wins. It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, the player can recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a more understandable manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 selects the fusion effect, but in the main control device 110, the fluctuation time is determined, and a signal indicating the fluctuation time and a signal indicating the win/fail judgment result are respectively voiced. It may be configured to output to the lamp control device 113, determine whether the voice lamp control device 113 is in a state in which the fusion effect can be executed, and display the fusion effect based on the variation time and the result of the judgment. With such a configuration, the main control device 110 does not need to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the fusion effect, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Moreover, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the fusion effect, by looking at the state of the number of holdings. Specifically, when the reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are evenly stored, the fusion effect is configured to be executed. Furthermore, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the fusion effect based on the fact that the variation patterns of the same variation time are stored alternately, respectively, the first special symbol It is easy to match the execution and end of the fusion effect with the symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the mutual judgment result, the variation pattern is determined by lottery, and the case of executing each lottery game explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) If it is predicted that a jackpot (hereinafter, a regular jackpot) that triggers the transition to a low-probability game state with one of the special symbols will be won (if it is determined in advance before the fluctuation starts), until the jackpot starts The game is executed with the effect of whether or not the player can win the probability variation jackpot in the other special symbol in the meantime.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the nineteenth embodiment, in the high-probability game state, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the normal jackpot is won, delay until the jackpot occurs, meanwhile, the other special symbol When the jackpot is won in, a difference from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the jackpot is controlled so as to be extended after the normal jackpot.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, an effect display mode in the probability variation chance game of whether or not the high-probability game state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment can be extended will be described. During the high probability game state, in the first special symbol (left side display area Dm1), it is determined that the normal jackpot has been won by the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) described below, and the countdown effect command is set. Then, the effect display mode indicating the start of the probability variation chance game is displayed in the left display area Dm1. In the present embodiment, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 124, balloons are displayed in the left display area Dm1 and are variably displayed so as to inflate with the passage of time. In addition, if the balloon is broken, it is indicated by letters that the high-probability game state (probability change) ends.

When the effect display mode showing this probability change chance game is displayed, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has been won in the special symbol on which the balloon is displayed. By the time the jackpot game is started, I think that I will be able to win the probability variation jackpot and play the game. By configuring in this way, unlike in the past, the player can play not only the jackpot but also the probability variation jackpot in a short time, which is different from the usual time. You can play a game with a goal.

The variable display of the first special symbol is displayed small at the position on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to know that the first special symbol is variably displayed according to the completion of the reserved symbol display, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the lottery game is being executed. Also, each time the reserved symbol display is exhausted, it can be recognized that the start of the normal jackpot is approaching, and each time the displayed first special symbol fluctuates and stops, the player is excited. Since the player can enjoy the feeling, the taste of the game can be increased.

Without being able to win the probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol, if the normal jackpot is confirmed in the first special symbol, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 124, the balloon will be in the effect display mode, and the stop symbol of the special symbol showing the normal jackpot. Is displayed. Although not shown, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the second special symbol, the balloon is not broken and the stop symbol of the special symbol indicating the normal jackpot is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the probability variation jackpot is started with the second special symbol after the normal jackpot because the special symbol showing the jackpot is stopped and displayed without breaking the balloon. You can Therefore, the player plays the game in the hope that the balloon will not be broken, and can be more interested in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notification for winning the probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol is not to break the balloon, but is not limited thereto, for example, a character such as "the probability variation still continues!" is displayed. Then, the player may be informed. Further, it is not limited to the effect of whether or not the balloon is broken, and naturally, other effect display modes may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A first variation change flag 203v11 and a second variation change flag 203v12 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first fluctuation change flag 203v11 is predicted that the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (determined before the fluctuation starts. ) Is a flag indicating that. The first fluctuation change flag 203v11 is set to ON in the process of S1254 of the fluctuation change process (FIG. 130, S1250) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) described later. On the other hand, the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is set to off based on the start of the game. In the initialized state when the power is turned on, it is set to off. The flag is also backed up by the backup that accompanies the power-off, is loaded in the startup process (FIG. 34), and returns to the state before the power-off.

Further, the second variation change flag 203v12, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state), it was predicted that the normal jackpot was won in the second special symbol (determined before the variation start It is a flag indicating that. This second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON in the same manner as the first variation change flag 203v11 in the variation change processing (not shown) of the second look-ahead update processing (not shown), and the jackpot game that normally accompanies the jackpot is played. Set to off when started. Others are different from the first variation change flag 203v11 only in respect of the second special symbol, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a part of the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.

The upper diagram of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a special winning fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability variation of the special winning fluctuation pattern table 202d. The hit variation change pattern and the hit extension variation pattern are added to the special reduction variation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability variation in the first embodiment.

The winning variation change pattern is a variation pattern that is selected on the condition that the winning/disapproving determination result is a winning when the normal jackpot is won when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. The fluctuation time is set to 180 seconds, which is longer than the other fluctuation times. Therefore, since it takes time to be stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating a hit, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to make a success/failure determination a plurality of times with the other special symbol during that time. Therefore, in the meantime, it is possible to make the player expect that the other special symbol will also be a probability variation jackpot. Further, for example, it is possible to give more jackpots to the player even if the jackpot is a regular jackpot instead of the probability variation jackpot, and the player can enjoy the game more.

In the high probability game state, the winning extension fluctuation pattern is already selected in the case where it is predicted that the other special symbol will win the regular jackpot, and the variation selected when one of the special symbols wins the regular jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. It is a pattern. This extended fluctuation pattern is composed of a fluctuation time of 300 seconds, which is longer than other fluctuation patterns. Further, the time until the normal jackpot won with the other special symbol during the probability variation chance game is definitely stopped is a maximum of 240 seconds in the fluctuation of the special symbol being held. This is because when the normal jackpot is the 4th holding of the special symbol, the holdings 1 to 3 are variably displayed in a deviation change pattern of 20 seconds which will be described later, and the normal jackpot has a fluctuation time of 180 seconds. Is.

By configuring in this way, in the high probability game state, if you win the regular jackpot with one special symbol, then win the jackpot with the other special symbol, the jackpot is always one of the regular jackpot game The jackpot game will be started later. Therefore, when the hit in the other special symbol is the probability variation big hit, the normal big hit is executed and the low probability game state is entered. After that, it is possible to shift to the high-probability game state again by the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, a high probability game state can be given to the player for a longer time.

The lower diagram of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for time reduction/probability variation of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e. The special deviation variation pattern table 202e for time saving/probability variation of the present embodiment has a deviation variation changing pattern and an extension deviation variation pattern added to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for time saving/probability variation of the first embodiment. ..

The deviation change pattern is, in the high probability game state, when it is predicted that the regular jackpot is won, the hold determination stored in the holding area corresponding to the special symbol that was won for the regular jackpot is the result of the win/fail judgment. This is a variation pattern that is selected when the variation starts under the condition of being present. This deviation variation change pattern is composed of a variation time of 20 seconds and is composed of a relatively long variation time as compared with other variation patterns. Therefore, when there is a lot of hold balls corresponding to the special symbol when the hold that is expected to be won in the normal jackpot is established, this deviation change pattern is executed for the hold. Therefore, the variation change pattern is executed up to 3 times, and the start of the normal jackpot is delayed by up to 60 seconds. Therefore, the delayed time can increase the possibility of winning the jackpot with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more opportunities to win the big hit.

In the high-probability game state, the out-of-range extension variation pattern is a variation pattern selected in the case where it is predicted that one of the special symbols has been won in a normal jackpot case, and one of the special symbols has a non-eligibility determination result. This out-of-range extension fluctuation pattern is composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, which is relatively shorter than other fluctuation patterns. Therefore, one lottery cycle can be shortened, and more lottery games can be executed with one special symbol. Therefore, more lottery games can be played in a short time during the probability variation chance game, and more chances of winning the jackpot can be given to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, in the nineteenth embodiment, a special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) which is one process will be described. 127 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the nineteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 128, in the nineteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 9 (S390) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 (S390). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, in the high-probability game state, when it is predicted that the second special symbol will usually be a big jackpot, the winning extension variation pattern or the out-of-range extension variation pattern is selected based on the hit/miss determination result. On the other hand, in the high-probability game state with the first special symbol, when it is predicted to be a normal jackpot, select the hit variation change pattern or the out-of-range variation change pattern based on the hit determination result.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S821). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S821: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S822). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is set to the special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the game state is a high-probability game state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (the upper diagram of FIG. 126) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S823).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S821: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S824). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is set to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (the lower figure in FIG. 126) is set.

It is determined whether or not the second fluctuation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, it is predicted that the second special symbol is usually a big jackpot during the high-probability game state) (S825). When it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is ON (S825: Yes), the extension variation pattern of the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the extension variation pattern is notified to the voice lamp controller 113. The first fluctuation pattern command of is generated (S826).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S825: No), the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to on (that is, the high probability game state with the first special symbol). It is determined whether or not it is usually predicted as a big hit) (S827). When it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to ON (S827: Yes), the variation change pattern in the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the variation change pattern is set in the voice lamp control device 113. A first variation pattern command for notifying is generated (S828).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is off (S827: No), the variation pattern type is stored based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. Is selected (determined) from the fluctuation pattern table selected by (S829).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S830). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S831). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S832).

In this way, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the high-probability game state, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot will be hit, the probability variation chance game is executed. During the probability variation chance game, if it is predicted that the second special symbol will usually be a big jackpot, the variation determination result of the first special symbol is out, and the out extension variation pattern is selected, so 3 It becomes a lottery game of a short time, and the cycle for starting the lottery game can be shortened. Therefore, more lottery games can be executed in the first special symbol, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to obtain a lottery game that is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the player wins the jackpot.

Also, in the second special symbol, since the normal jackpot that transitions to the low probability game state is won, if it is possible to win the probability variation jackpot in the first special symbol, the probability variation jackpot will be Since it is executed after the normal jackpot of the two special symbols, it is possible to shift the gaming state transitioned to the low-probability gaming state again to the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play for a long time in the high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a chance to win more jackpots.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the variation time of 300 seconds is used as the winning extension variation pattern, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the time until the normal jackpot of the second special symbol is started is calculated, and based on that. The variable time may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time until the big jackpot of the first special symbol is started, and it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily showing an effect with a long variable time.

In addition, when it is predicted that the first special symbol will usually be a big hit, with respect to the suspension of the first special symbol that has been suspended until then, the deviation variation change pattern is selected, but not limited to this. Alternatively, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time such as one of out-of-range super reach may be selected. With this configuration, the same variation pattern as usual is displayed during the probability variation chance game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Further, since the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced, the capacity of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start of the big jackpot is usually delayed by selecting a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, but the invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation start may be delayed by a predetermined time. Specifically, in the high-probability game state, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot is won, the time to delay the fluctuation start may be determined by lottery, and the fluctuation start may be delayed during that time. .. With such a configuration, the player wants to make a lottery jackpot by making more lottery games with the other special symbol while the variation of the special symbol is stopped (delayed). You can play and concentrate on the game. Further, in the probability variation chance game, the variation start of one special symbol is stopped (delayed), and it is possible to indicate to the player that a more special game is being performed.

In addition, also in the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the same process is executed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 only with respect to the second special symbol, and thus the detailed description will be given. Is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 129, S926) in the nineteenth embodiment, the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S926) and S1130 are different from the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. Each process up to S1131 is added. Each process of S931 to S932 in the nineteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S931 to S932 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S932, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the normal jackpot (S932: No), the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) is executed. The variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) will be described later, but is a process for setting the probability variation chance game if the probability variation game is not in progress when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state.

The processing of S933 of the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S933 of the first embodiment. When the process of S933 ends, it is determined whether or not the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, in the second special symbol, it is predicted that a normal big hit will occur) (S1130). When it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1130: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted probability variation jackpot is a hit even in the normal gaming state (S1131). ). When it is determined that the winning is achieved even in the normal game state (S1131: Yes), the countdown effect avoidance command is generated (S1132).

This countdown effect avoidance command is a command for allowing the balloons displayed in the probability variation chance game to continue to be displayed without being broken. In the second special symbol (right side display area Dm2), a balloon is displayed, and in the first special symbol (left side display area Dm1), when the probability variation chance game of whether a probability variation jackpot can be obtained is being performed, When it is predicted that the probability variation will be a big hit in one special symbol, in the probability variation chance game, in order to notify that the probability variation has been obtained, the balloon is switched to an effect display mode in which the balloon is not broken. Thereby, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has been obtained in the probability variation chance game.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S1130: No), or if it is determined to be out of the normal gaming state (S1131: No), the process of S1132 is skipped. Then, the process of S934 is executed.

Thus, in the processing of S1131, by determining whether or not it is a win even in the normal game state, during the probability variation chance game, the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed after the normal jackpot in the second special symbol. It may be the case. In that case, a lottery may occur in a low-probability game state, which may result in no jackpot, but in such a case, the countdown effect avoidance command is not set, and thus the player has a first chance of winning a sudden variation jackpot. It does not indicate that you have won the symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of incorrect information.

Since each process of S934 to S939 in the nineteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S934 to S939 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the certainty chance jackpot is held as a certainty variation jackpot. Since it is configured to set whether or not it is established, it is possible to change the effect based on the establishment of the hold, and it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of incorrect information.

The countdown effect avoidance command may be set by the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the winning command, based on the winning command. With this configuration, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, description will be given of the change changing process (S1250) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the change processing (S1250).

In the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (S1251). Whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag 203m of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 is set to ON in the main controller 110.

When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is off (S1251: No), based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter from the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the time of variation start. Then, the variation pattern is predicted and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S1252).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is on (S1251: Yes), whether the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to on (that is, during the probability variation chance game). It is determined whether there is any (S1253). When it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1253: Yes), the process of S1252 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (that is, the probability variation chance game is not in progress) (S1253: No), the first variation change flag 203v11 is turned on. (S1254). The hit variation change pattern is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reservation area of the corresponding rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1255).

The time until the set variation change pattern ends changing is calculated (S1256). It should be noted that the time until the variation change pattern of this perturbation ends is the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is currently fluctuating, the number of holdings of the first special symbol (this time, the number that does not include the holding that is a normal winning). ) Is multiplied by the variation time of the deviation variation pattern, which is 20 seconds, and the result is added with the variation time of the variation variation pattern of 180 seconds.

A countdown effect command is set based on the time calculated in the process of S1256 (S1257). When the countdown effect command set here is output to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 so that the effect display mode in which the balloon is broken is displayed after the calculated time. .. With this configuration, in the probability variation chance game, even if the probability of the probability variation jackpot is not established in the second special symbol, the main control device 110 executes an effect that the balloon is broken at the end of the probability variation chance game. It is not necessary to notify the command again, and the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, is it determined in the process of S1131 that the normal game state (low probability game state) is also a win? (I.e., whether it is a big hit random number value in the low probability game state), but not limited to it, the big hit random number value (judgment value) that is determined as a big hit in the normal game state and the probability variation game state, respectively May be configured to be discriminated as the value of (no common value). With such a configuration, in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926), it is possible to generate the countdown avoidance command by determining whether the random number value is determined to be a win in the low probability game state. Therefore, the control processing amount of main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the high-probability game state, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the normal jackpot is won, the start is delayed, and the balloon that notifies that delay is cracked However, the time until the big hit is usually executed (determined) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the countdown may be performed. With such a configuration, the player can be informed easily of the remaining time in the high-probability game state. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game while determining the time.

In addition, usually the jackpot is delayed, after the production of the countdown is started, the number of executions of the lottery game of the other special symbol is counted, and when the countdown is 0 or the balloon is broken, the number of times is given to the player. You may comprise so that it may notify. With such a configuration, it is possible to evaluate how effectively the high probability game state is played by the player. In addition, after the countdown effect is started, each reference value (for example, 0 to 10 times, 11 to 20 times, etc.) is set in advance for the number of times the lottery is performed with the other special symbol, and each reference value is supported. The rank may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily evaluate the game in the high-probability game state based on the displayed rank.

In the present embodiment, the normal jackpot is delayed during the high-probability game state, and the countdown effect (whether or not the balloon is broken in the present embodiment) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the regular jackpot is delayed. The special symbol that is different from the other special symbol different (for example, if the start of the normal jackpot is delayed in the first special symbol, the second special symbol) to execute the lottery game (starting slot of the corresponding special symbol Target). Specifically, if the normal jackpot is delayed in the first special symbol, in the left side display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, "start more fluctuations of the second special symbol!" Aiming at the starting opening (second starting opening 63b)!" may be displayed to notify the player.

Next, a modified example of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are configured to be alternately established by the distribution device 630. However, in the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment, the first starting port 63a is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second starting port 63b is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. With this configuration, the player operates the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, the game ball reaches the upper center position of the variable display device unit 80, and the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is reached. By firing the game balls so that the game balls are distributed to the right side and flow down, respectively, it is possible to win the game balls to both start ports. Further, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 and launching the game ball with such strength that the game ball reaches the upper left side of the variable display device 80, the game ball easily flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Since (the amount of the game ball flowing down to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 increases), it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to win the first starting opening 63a (or reduce the winning to the second starting opening 63b). be able to). Further, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 and launching the game ball with such strength that the game ball reaches the upper right side of the variable display device 80 (or the return rubber 69), the game ball is displayed in the variable display device unit. Since it becomes easy to flow down the right side of 80 (the amount of flow of the game ball to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 increases), it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to win the second start opening 63b (or the first start). It is possible to reduce winnings to the mouth 63a).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the notification as shown in FIG. 124 is executed by setting the countdown effect command in the process of S1257 of the fluctuation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The configuration has been described. On the other hand, in the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment, the main control device 110 does not set the countdown effect command, but outputs the determination result of the established win/loss determination condition and the information of the selected variation pattern as a winning command. .. In the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 performs control for determining whether or not the winning variation change pattern is selected based on the winning command and setting the notification mode as shown in FIG. The MPU 221 of FIG. In addition, as the notification mode, a special symbol different from the special symbol for which the variation change pattern is selected (for example, if the variation alteration pattern is selected in the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is given priority to the player. Notify to start fluctuation. As a specific notification mode, for example, the character "Aim at the left side starting opening (first starting opening 63a)!!" is displayed in the right side display area Dm2.

By performing a lottery on whether or not to set the notification mode, it is possible to set a case where the player is notified and a case where the player is not notified, and it is possible to suppress an excessive advantage for the player. it can. Regarding the lottery, it may be based on the setting value of the setting means that can be set by the game shop side, or it may be possible to obtain a random number value and perform a lottery with a predetermined probability, or the state of winning of the gaming machine so far. The lottery may be performed based on the number of jackpots, the difference ball, the number of changes from the current previous jackpot, and the like. By doing so, the profit to be given to the player can be adjusted based on the state of the gaming machine and the profit obtained by the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a profit to the player within a range of profit that is assumed in advance.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify that the normal jackpot to be transitioned from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state has been won, but is not limited thereto, and when the jackpot with a small number of rounds is determined, it is set. It may be notified, or when a win without a reduction in time is won, it may be notified. Further, without being limited to the hit, it may be configured to notify in advance based on that it is determined that the state advantageous to the player is shifted to the disadvantageous state.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 140. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, in the case of executing the respective lottery games, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined by a lottery pattern regardless of the mutual judgment result. I explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment, when the holding balls determined to be the big hits overlap among the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big hit is usually a big hit. Whether or not the probability variation jackpot is determined, the control is executed so that the normal jackpot is started before the probability variation jackpot.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the twentieth embodiment, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have overlapping jackpots, if one is a regular jackpot and the other is a probability variation jackpot, the probability variation jackpot is later than the regular jackpot. Different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the control for selecting the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is executed so that the jackpot game is started.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the notification effect during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. The upper diagram of FIG. 131 shows one of the rounds during the jackpot game. As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 131, each time each round is started, the characters “Please hit the button repeatedly!”, which is a notification prompting the player to hit the frame button 22 repeatedly, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed in. This is, by hitting the button repeatedly, whether or not there is a hit among the holding balls currently stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Is an effect for notifying the player in advance.

When the player operates (presses down in this embodiment) the frame button 22 a predetermined lottery is executed, the lottery is won, and if the reserved ball to be won is stored, the result is shown in FIG. 131(a). As shown in the figure, the characters "another big hit" are displayed indicating that the winning ball is stored in the reserved balls. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated and the predetermined lottery is not won, or when the lottery is won but the winning ball is not stored in FIG. 131(b) even if the lottery is won. ) Characters such as "Sorry!!" are displayed.

By operating the frame button 22, the player can know in advance whether another big hit will be obtained early. In addition, since the player who does not want to know in advance does not operate the frame button 22, the information about whether or not there is a hit in the reserved ball is not displayed, so that the player can set it according to his or her preference. You can choose the game.

This notification effect is displayed each time the round starts. In addition, once it is notified that there is a hit in the reserved ball, it is not notified from the next round. With such a configuration, until the final round, the player can play the game with the expectation that there is a hit in the reserved ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the big hit game.

Next, the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this rearrangement pending storage area 203u, an overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is added to the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the first embodiment.

The overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is a special symbol of the reserved ball that is the probability variation jackpot, which is usually a big hit, when the holding balls that are hits with the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are overlapped. It is a flag indicating that the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is a reserved ball selected so that the jackpot game is started later than the special symbol of the reserved ball.

The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is the holding area of the sorting holding storage area 203u in which it is decided to select the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern in the processing of S1280 of the first duplication hit processing (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. Set to on. On the other hand, in the duplication adjustment flag 203u12, when the holding ball is exhausted, the holding area is shifted to the changing data storage area where the changing data is stored, and when the change ends, the next change is started. It is sometimes set to off by being overwritten with new data. The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is restored to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. In the state where the gaming machine is initialized, the flag is set to off. Although the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is not described and illustrated this time, the first duplication hit process (not shown), which is a process of the second prefetch update process (not shown), is also performed. The difference is that the overlapping adjustment flag 203u12 of the reserved area for the second special symbol is set to ON, but it is set to ON similarly.

With reference to FIG. 132(b), the other memory area 223m set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 132B is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 223m. A confirmation notification flag 223m1 and a confirmation notification counter 223m2 are added to the other memory area 223m in the first embodiment.

The confirmation notification flag 223m1 is a flag indicating that in the notification effect during the big hit, it is notified that there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding balls. In detail, in the jackpot mid-stage effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, a confirmation notification display for notifying that there is a winning holding ball among holding balls is displayed. After that, it is turned on in the process of S1581. In addition, it is set to off as the jackpot ends.

The confirmation notification counter 223m2 is a storage area for storing a counter value that is incremented by 1 each time the big hit medium effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) is executed. The confirmation notification counter is set to "0" which is an initial value when the power is turned on, is added up to "255" which is an upper limit value, and is set to "0" which is an initial value when 1 is added next. .. This confirmation notification counter is a counter value for determining whether or not to notify whether or not there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding balls in the notification effect of the big hit. The hit counter value is set for each big hit round. In the present embodiment, a value of "0 to 1" is set as the hit counter value for 1R to 10R, and a value of "0 to 9" is set to the hit counter value for 11R to 15R.

With such a configuration, a lottery is performed each time the player operates the frame button 22, so that the timing of notification can be different for each jackpot, and the player can be given a feeling of mannerism. Can be suppressed. Also, if you do not win the lottery, notification will not be executed even if there is a hit in the reserved ball, so you can create a state where it is not always notified, you can surprise the player with a big hit later, You can continue to have expectations even without it. In addition, since the lottery is selected every time the frame switch 22 is operated, the more the frame switch 22 is operated, the higher the probability of being notified, and the player operates the frame switch 22 to be ambitious. You can participate in the game.

Furthermore, since the round progresses and the lottery probability becomes 5 times after 11R, it is easy to win even if you have not been able to win the lottery up to 11R, and it is possible to prevent players from giving up if they are not hit (not notified). it can. Therefore, the player can participate in the notification effect with the expectation that it may be notified after 11R.

In the present embodiment, the hit count value is configured to be variable between 1R to 10R and 11R to 15R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed for each round, or the winning probability is determined by lottery at each start of each round. It may be configured to determine. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the player will be put on hold at an unexpected timing, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, in the twentieth embodiment, of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 134, in the twentieth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 10 (S410) will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (S410). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, if the result of the judgment of the special symbol to start changing is a hit, and if there is a hit to the holding ball of the second special symbol, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is selected so that the normal jackpot game is started first. To do.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S840). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S840: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S841). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is set to the special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S842).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S840: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S843). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is set to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

It is determined whether the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 of the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponding to the suspension that starts to change is set to ON (S844). When it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S844), the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the rearrangement storage area is selected and based on the variation pattern. Generate a first variation pattern command.

Here, the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation set in the first overlapping hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. It becomes a pattern. The extended variation pattern and the shortened variation pattern are display modes in which the main symbols are variably displayed during the set variation time, and based on the lapse of the set variation time, the result of the judgment is notified. This is a variation pattern that is stopped and displayed at.

The shortened variation pattern is a variation pattern for controlling (adjusting) so as to start the normal jackpot of the first special symbol that starts to vary this time, before the probability variation jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol. is there. On the other hand, the extension variation pattern is a variation for controlling (adjusting) so as to start the probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol that starts variation this time, after the normal jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol. It is a pattern.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S844: No), the variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. The selected variation pattern table is selected (determined) (S846). Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S847). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S848). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S849).

By configuring in this way, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start changing is a probability variation jackpot, after the normal jackpot of the second special symbol, adjust so that the jackpot game is started. You can On the other hand, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start changing is a normal jackpot, it can be adjusted so that the jackpot game is started before the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the reserved ball, even when the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot are overlapped, the probability variation jackpot is executed after the normal jackpot is executed, so it is high. The probability game state can be maintained longer. Therefore, more jackpots can be given to the player.

In the present embodiment, the variation time of the extension variation pattern or the shortening variation pattern is determined in the first overlapping hit process (S136 of FIG. 136) executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a. Although configured in this manner, the invention is not limited to this, and in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410), variation time may be calculated and determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the fluctuation time, the probability variation jackpot is configured to be executed after the normal jackpot, but not limited to this, by delaying the fluctuation start of the probability variation jackpot by a predetermined time, You may adjust so that the probability variation jackpot starts later. With such a configuration, the variation start is delayed, so that the player can recognize that the jackpot will be further executed, and can recognize the subsequent jackpot early.

Further, in the present embodiment, the extended variation pattern and the shortened variation pattern are newly set, respectively. However, from the existing variation pattern table, a variation pattern in which the normal jackpot is usually displayed first may be selected. You may comprise. In such a configuration, a variation pattern with a short variation time or a variation pattern with a long variation time may be set in advance in the existing variation pattern table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment, each process of S1260 to S1261 and the first overlap hit process are different from the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. (FIG. 136, S1270) is added.

In the processing of S1260, it is determined whether or not the winning area corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u (S1260). In this determination, it may be determined whether or not a big jackpot is stored among the holds stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When it is determined that there is a big jackpot due to the second special symbol being held (S1260: Yes), the first overlapping hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) is executed.

The details of the first overlapping hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) will be described later, but when the holdings to be hits overlap among the holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the normal big hit is started. The processing for selecting the extension variation pattern or the shortening variation pattern as the hit variation pattern of the first special symbol is executed so that it comes before the start of the probability variation big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that all of the second special symbols are held off (S1260: No), or after the first overlap hit process (FIG. 135, S1270) is executed, the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON. If not, the fluctuation pattern is newly stored based on the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 from the special winning fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state at the time of fluctuation start. It is predicted (determined in advance) and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 (S1261).

In addition, each process of S931 to S933 and S935 to S939 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment is S931 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. -S933, S935-S939 and the same processing as each processing are performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the first duplication hit process (S1270), which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the first duplicate hit processing (S1270). In the first overlap hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) in the twentieth embodiment, it is determined whether a hit hold is stored in the hold corresponding to the second special symbol, and when a hit hold is stored, Is for determining the type of each hit and for selecting the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern as the variation pattern of the first special symbol so that the normal jackpot start is executed before the probability variation jackpot start. Processing.

In the first overlap hit process (FIG. 136, S1270), first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold area in which the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON in any of the hold areas of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. If the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S1271: Yes), this process ends. In this way, if the jackpot has already overlapped with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and there is a pending change in which the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the process in the case of overlapping again is performed. It is configured not to do. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the control load of main controller 110 from becoming excessively large. Further, in a state in which three or more jackpots are held, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling performance by not performing control such that the jackpot is given to the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S1271: No), the probability change probability of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stored in the reservation area of the rearrangement storage area 203u is It is determined whether or not it is a hit even if it is a low probability game state (normal game state) (S1272). In the normal gaming state, if it is determined that the game is out of play (S1272: No), this process ends. In this way, by determining whether the probability variation jackpot is a hit even in the normal game state, if the probability variation jackpot is delayed from the actual fluctuation start time, the one that starts changing in the high probability game state is a low probability game. Even if the fluctuation starts in the state, only the big hit can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being damaged.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is determined even in the normal gaming state (S1272: Yes), is the prefetching probability change flag 203u6 in the reserved area of the newly stored rearrangement reserved storage area 203u ON (ie,? , Is the newly stored hold a probability variation jackpot?) (S1273). When the newly stored hold is determined to be the probability variation big hit (S1273: Yes), it is determined whether the hit of the hold area corresponding to the second special symbol is a normal big hit (S1274). When it is determined that the hit of the holding area corresponding to the second special symbol is a normal jackpot (S1274: Yes), the time until the normal jackpot of the holding area of the second special symbol stops fluctuating is calculated ( S1275).

The time until the fluctuation of the normal jackpot of the second special symbol is stopped, the remaining fluctuation time of the currently changing second special symbol and the second special symbol that is stored before the second special symbol of the normal jackpot. It is calculated by adding the variable time of suspension of the special symbol, respectively.

After the time until the variable stop calculated in the process of S1275, the variable time is calculated so that the newly-stored probability of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation jackpot, stops variable, and the variable time is changed. The extended variation pattern constituted by is set (selected) and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding holding area (S1276). Here, the variation time of the extended variation pattern is currently stored in the remaining variation time of the first special symbol that is currently varying, before the newly stored first special symbol, which is a probability variation jackpot, is reserved. The variation time of the suspension of 1 special symbol is added, and the variation start time of the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol is calculated. Then, the time obtained by subtracting the fluctuation start time from the time calculated in the process of S1275 and adding 3 seconds is determined as the fluctuation time. If the fluctuation start time is later than the time calculated in the process of S1275, an extended fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning in the holding of the second special symbol is the probability variation big hit (S1274: No), this process is ended. When it is determined that the pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 of the newly stored holding area is off (S1273: No), the hit of the holding area corresponding to the second special symbol is determined whether it is a probability variation jackpot. (S1277). When it is determined that the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (S1277: Yes), the time until the probability variation jackpot of the reserved area of the second special symbol stops fluctuating is calculated (S1278). The calculation of this time is performed by the same method as the process of S1275.

Based on the variation start time of the hold that is the normal jackpot of the first special symbol, the newly stored normal jackpot of the first special symbol is started before the probability variation jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol. It is determined whether it is possible (shortened) (S1279). Here, the determination of whether or not possible, when the variation time of each holding area corresponding to the first special symbol is configured with a shortened variation time of 1 second, can it be started before the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol? To determine.

When it is determined that the normally stored big jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol can be started before the probability variation jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol (S1279: Yes), newly. The shortened variation pattern is stored in the variation pattern type storage area of the reserved area corresponding to the stored special area and the first special symbol stored earlier than the reserved area. The shortened fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern composed of a fluctuation pattern of 1 second.

The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 of the holding area storing the extension variation pattern or the shortening variation pattern is set to ON (S1281). Reservation areas are renumbered in order of variation start time (S1282).

With such a configuration, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the big hits overlap, the variation time can be adjusted so that the probability variation big hits start after the normal big hits. .. Therefore, after the normal jackpot is executed, it is transitioned to or maintained in the low-probability game state (normal game state), but after that, the probability variation jackpot is executed, resulting in a high-probability game state (probability variation game state). The gaming state can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play in a high-probability game state for a long time. Moreover, more jackpots can be given to the player.

In addition, when the big hit which is overlapped with the 1st special design and the 2nd special design is the probability variation big hit in both sides or the normal big hit in both sides, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is not selected (the selection is prohibited. ), the player can enjoy the game with a normal variation pattern.

In addition, after the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the variation start time of each holding area is updated, and the variation start time is renumbered again in order of the variation start time. Alternatively, even if the fluctuation start order changes due to the shortened fluctuation pattern, it is possible to update the correct fluctuation start order. Therefore, the winning command can be generated based on the correct variation start order, and even when the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct variation start order.

In the present embodiment, the extended variation pattern is calculated based on the time until the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, stops changing and is determined based on the time. However, the extension variation pattern is not limited to this, and is the most common variation pattern. It is also possible to assume a maximum variation time when combined in a long variation pattern and to preset and select a variation pattern having a variation time longer than that as an extended variation pattern.

In addition, the newly stored first special symbol until the probability of a sudden change jackpot is all configured with a shortened variation pattern of 1 second, but it is not limited to this, and the time until the normal jackpot of the second special symbol fluctuates stops It may be configured so that it is calculated and appropriately set so as to be shorter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern for adjusting the variation time is set, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variation start may be delayed or the suspension of the deviation may be invalidated. It may be configured to adjust. With this configuration, main controller 110 can reduce the control load for adjusting the fluctuation time.

Incidentally, in the second prefetch updating process (not shown) which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 63b, Although it is different from the process for the reserved ball of the two special symbols, the same process as the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) is executed, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 137, in the twentieth embodiment, the large opening opening/closing process (S103) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this large opening opening/closing processing (S103). The large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 137, S103) of the twentieth embodiment controls opening/closing of the first variable winning device 65.

In the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 137, S103), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started (S131). Whether the jackpot game is started or not is determined by the processing of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204) or the processing of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207). It is determined by whether the start of is set.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u Regarding the value, starting from after the big hit, it is recalculated in consideration of the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is temporarily stopped (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the variation start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. The value of is recalculated starting from after the big hit (S134).

A rearrangement data command is generated for each holding area based on the fluctuation start time stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5, which is recalculated in the processing of S133 or S134 (S135).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), a process of opening the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S137: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). When it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), a process of closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S142). When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is over (S144). When it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the jackpot game is over (S145). It is discriminated whether or not it was the probability variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot was a trigger for executing the jackpot game. The lottery result is determined to be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is hit (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S144: No), or if it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S146: No), this process is ended.

In this way, when the big hit game is started, the variation start time in each holding area starting from after the big hit game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the big hit game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. The data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k can be updated, and the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of starting the variation after the big hit game.

In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for the suspension of the special symbol, after the remaining variation time elapses, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the pending symbol display in a more accurate order of starting the fluctuation based on the fluctuation start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

With reference to FIG. 138, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). In the main process (S1400 of FIG. 138) of the twentieth embodiment, the effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) of the big hit is added to the main process (S1400 of FIG. 35) of the first embodiment, and the command determination process ( 36, S1414) is changed to the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). Each processing of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, S1415 to S1419 in the twentieth embodiment is the same as each processing of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, S1415 to S1419 in the first embodiment. .. When the processing of S1413 is completed, the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 139, in the twentieth embodiment, the command determination process (S1414) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 138, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1414). In the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment, each processing of S1565-S1566 is added to the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment. The processes of S1501 to 1519 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1501 to 1519 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment. Is executed.

In the process of S1517 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) of the twentieth embodiment, when it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command is not received (S1517), during the jackpot game. It is determined whether the round number command output from main controller 110 is received (S1565). When it is determined that the round number command is received (S1565: Yes), the jackpot round number and the round valid time are set based on the received round number command (S1566). The round effective time is set to 5 seconds, during which the notification effect during the big hit game is executed.

Next, returning to the main processing (S1400) in FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the main process of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 138, S1400), after the process of S1410 is executed, or when it is determined in the process of S1401 that the time is less than 1 ms (S1401: No), a big hit medium effect process ( 140 and S1570) are executed.

With reference to FIG. 140, in the twentieth embodiment, a big hit medium effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) that is one process of the main process (FIG. 138, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the effect processing during the big hit (FIG. 140, S1570). In the big hit medium effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) of the twentieth embodiment, in the notification effect during the big hit game, a lottery is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, and a big hit occurs in the reserved ball. A process of notifying the player whether there is a reserved ball is executed.

In the big hit medium production process (FIG. 140, S1570), first, the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is read, "1" is added to the value, and the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is updated (S1571). Next, it is determined whether the round valid time is in progress (S1572). Whether or not it is the round valid time is determined whether it is the round valid time (5 seconds from the start of the round in this embodiment) set in the process of S1566 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid time (S1572: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round valid time is in progress (S1572: Yes), it is determined whether the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (that is, the confirmation notification has already been made) (S1573). .. When it is determined that the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is on (S1573: Yes), this process ends.

When it is determined that the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is off (S1573: No), the display confirmation effect command is generated (set). The display confirmation effect command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display a background screen for notification effect on the third symbol display device 81.

A display button operation display command is generated (set) (S1575). This display button operation display command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters “Please hit the button repeatedly!” on the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the notification effect has started and start operating the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can easily participate in the notification effect.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576). Here, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) once. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1576: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576: Yes), the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is acquired (S1577). The value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 acquired with a winning probability based on the number of rounds is judged to be right or wrong (S1578). Here, when the number of rounds is 1R to 10R, "0 to 1" is set as the hit determination value, and when the number of rounds is 11R to 15R, "0 to 9" is set as the hit determination value. Is set.

It is determined whether or not the obtained determination result of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is a win (S1579). When it is determined that the hit determination result is a hit (S1580), it is determined whether there is a hit hold in any of the hold areas of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u (S1580). If it is determined that there is a winning hold (S1580: Yes), a display confirmation notification command for instructing confirmation notification display is generated (set) (S1581). The confirmation notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (S1582). Here, the display confirmation notifying command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters “another big hit!” on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 131(a). .. From this display, the player can recognize that there is a big hit in the hold. Therefore, the player can operate the frame button 22 in the expectation of this display. Therefore, even during a big hit, the player can play the game without getting tired of the game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning/disapproval determination result is out (S1579: No), or when it is determined that all the holding areas are out (S1580: No), a display for instructing the non-confirmation notification display A non-confirmation notification command is generated (set) (S1583). Here, the non-confirmation notification command for display is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the character "sorry!!" on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 131(b). When the character "Sorry!!" is displayed, the player can recognize that the notification has not been given because the reserved ball has not been hit or the number of consecutive hits is insufficient. Since the notification effect is configured to be executed every round until the confirmation notification is displayed, even if the player displays "Sorry!!" in one round, the player still actually hits the holding ball. Hoping that there may be, you can participate in the notification production in the next round.

In this way, when the big hits overlap with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern is adjusted so that the probability variation big hit starts after the normal big hit. Furthermore, during a jackpot, by performing an effect as to whether or not there is a jackpot in the holding ball, if the jackpot being informed that there is a jackpot in the holding ball, the jackpot being executed is usually a jackpot. Even so, the player can play the game with the expectation that the hit that has been put on hold is a probability variation big hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to continue playing with high expectations even during a big hit.

Further, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpots overlap, and the shortened variation pattern is selected in order to start the normal jackpot before the probability variation jackpot. As a result, when the normal jackpot is started via the shortened variation pattern, the player can participate in the notification effect, expecting that the probability variation jackpot should be stored in the hold.

In addition, since the notification effect is not notified unless the lottery indicating whether or not to perform the notification is won even if the jackpot which is a big hit is stored, the player is made to operate the frame button 22 multiple times. It is possible to participate in the notification production for a longer time.

In addition, since the lottery for notifying is performed every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing of notifying each time (the number of operations, etc.) is not constant, and the player is surprised. You can

In addition, since the lottery probability of whether or not to notify by the round is changed, it is possible to change the easiness of being notified by the round and set the round in which the player is expected to be notified more. .. In the present embodiment, since the hit probability is set to be high after 11R, even if the notification effect continues until 11R, if the hold is hit after 11R, it is possible to easily display the confirmed effect. Therefore, the player can continue to participate in the notification production with the expectation that the notification may be made after 11R even if the notification is not made for many rounds.

In the present embodiment, in the case where the normal jackpot or the probability variation jackpot is already established in one special symbol, if the other special symbol is established later, by adjusting the variation time to be the hit, Although it was configured that the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot is started after the jackpot game of the regular jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the regular jackpot and the bonus jackpot are among the reserved first special symbol and second special symbol. It is also possible to control whether or not the probability variation jackpot is usually started after the jackpot, by determining whether or not and are stored, and adjusting the variation time of the special symbols held on both sides. With this configuration, the fluctuation time can be adjusted more efficiently. Also, even when there is only a short time before the probability variation big hit starts, the variation pattern can be selected so that the normal big hit is started first.

Further, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), when it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit, the variation pattern is forced to have a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time. It may be configured to be selectively selected. By configuring in this way, the start of the probability variation jackpot will be further delayed, during which the expectation that the usual jackpot will be held with the other special symbol, by playing the game, more The jackpot can be given to the player.

Further, the configuration described in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined to configure the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the notification.

In the present embodiment, the notification effect is configured such that the frame button 22 can be operated many times during the round valid time and the lottery is executed each time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it can be performed only once in one round. You may comprise. Further, instead of executing the notification effect for each round, it may be configured to execute only one specific round. It may be configured to determine whether or not this particular round is a round for which the notification effect is performed by a lottery during a big hit. With such a configuration, the rounds in which the notification effect is executed are randomized, and when the notification effect is executed, it is possible to participate in the notification effect while feeling freshness. Further, when the notification effect is executed, it is possible to have more expectation that the holding area is hit.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started on the one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery game determined to be the other hit that has started to fluctuate, even after the one jackpot game. Regarding the case where the hit determination result is maintained, it has been described, but not limited to that, when the big hit is started in one special symbol, in the other special symbol, the fluctuation determined to be the variation started is It may be configured to be disabled. In such a configuration, when the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot are respectively determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the normal jackpot is started first, and until the jackpot ends, It is good to execute control to delay so that the probability variation jackpot does not start. With such a configuration, when the normal jackpot is started, it is possible to prevent the special symbol, which is the probability variation jackpot, from fluctuating and being invalidated.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 149. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eighth embodiment (see FIGS. 64 to 72), the variation pattern of the special symbol has been described as being determined regardless of the number of holding balls at the start of variation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute control for selecting each variation pattern based on the number of holding balls at the time of variation start. ..

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the following points. In the twenty-first embodiment, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the fluctuation can be started, the number of holding balls of the corresponding special symbol is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eighth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the twenty-first embodiment is different from the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 9B) in the reservation areas 1 to 8 respectively. 223k9 has been added.

The rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is performed when the reserved symbols are rearranged and the reserved symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the variation start order, It is a flag indicating that a change has occurred in the variation start order of the reserved symbol display. This rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON by the processing of S1895 of the subordinate suspension rearrangement display notification processing (FIG. 148, S1871) described later. On the other hand, when the hold is exhausted, the hold area is shifted, and the special symbol corresponding to the hold can start changing, and is turned off when shifting from the hold area 1 of the hold data storage area to the changing data storage area. Is set to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, in the twenty-first embodiment, the normal extraordinary deviation pattern table 202e (set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, respectively, will be described. 222d) will be described.

The normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and at the start of variation of the special symbol, the winning/disapproval determination result is out, and the gaming state is a low probability gaming state. It is a variation pattern table selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the case of (normal probability game state). MPU201 of the main controller 110, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), from the normal special deviation pattern table 202e, fluctuation The number of holding balls corresponding to the special symbol to be started (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol if changing the first special symbol is started), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern determination counter The variation pattern is determined based on the value of CS3.

The normal extraordinary deviation pattern table 222d in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 and has the same contents as the normal special deviation pattern table 202e of the main controller 110. .. The normal special deviation pattern table 222d is output from the main controller 110 in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113, which will be described later. Based on the command, it is used to determine (predict) the variation pattern selected at the start of variation before the variation starts with respect to the data in each retention area stored in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k. To be Specifically, the normal special deviation pattern table 222d is a fluctuation pattern to be selected when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a low-probability gaming state and the win/fail judgment result determined at that time is out. It's a table. The variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern determination counter CS3 stored in each of the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k based on the winning command, and the number of holding balls of the special symbol corresponding to the current state (of the first special symbol) If it is on hold, the change pattern is determined in advance based on (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol) and is stored in the change pattern type storage area 223k3 of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k.

Note that the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (222d) has different types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) selected when the number of reserved balls is "0", "1-2", and "3". Is configured as described above (each counter value is set). When the number of holding balls is “0”, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is configured to be easily selected as compared with the case of other numbers of holding balls. Specifically, it is configured so that the variation pattern that becomes the reach can be selected more easily than the case where the number of holding balls is other. When the number of holding balls is “1 to 2”, a variation pattern having a relatively longer variation time is set so that it is easier to be selected than when the number of holding balls is “0”. A variation pattern having a relatively shorter variation time than that in the case of "3" is set to be easily selected. When the number of holding balls is “3”, a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is configured to be easily selected as compared with the case of other numbers of holding balls. Although not shown in the drawing, the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (222d) is a special special deviation pattern table 202e (222d) that is dedicated to select the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. ) Are set respectively.

With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected, so that the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during that period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the reserved ball is gone and the first special symbol or the second special symbol does not change (the state where the lottery game is not performed). Therefore, the state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates and stops occurs, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, when the number of holding balls is "3" which is close to the upper limit value "4", a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, so that the holding digestion cycle becomes faster and It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b in a state where the number of balls becomes the upper limit value of "4" and overflowing as an invalid ball that does not become a holding ball. .. Therefore, it is possible for the player to shorten the time for which the reserved ball becomes the upper limit value “4” and stop the firing of the game ball, and to play the game efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the time reduction/probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the time reduction/setting set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The probability variation special deviation pattern table 222d will be described.

The special deviation variation pattern table for time saving/probability variation 202e is selected when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) with respect to the special deviation variation pattern table for normal time 202e described above. Different in points.

The special deviation variation pattern table 222d for time saving/probability variation selects a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time when the number of retained balls is “0” as compared with the case where the number of retained balls is “1 to 3”. It is configured to be easily handled. In addition, the special deviation variation pattern table for time saving/probability variation is configured so that a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is easily selected even when the number of holding balls is “1 to 2” as compared with the normal special deviation variation pattern. Has been done. Therefore, when in the time saving game state or the high probability game state, the digestion cycle of the reserve ball can be made faster. Therefore, in the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state, the winning/probability determination probability of the ordinary symbol is set to a high probability, so that the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are easily opened, and the opening time of one time is also increased. And since the number of times of opening increases, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but since the reserved ball is exhausted in a quick cycle, the game can be played at a good tempo.

Note that the special short-term/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 222d set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 has the same configuration as the special short-term/probability variation special deviation variation table 202e of the main controller 110. .. Further, the normal special deviation pattern table 222d is similarly used to determine the variation pattern in advance, except that it is a variation pattern selected for the time saving game state or the high probability game state. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

Further, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same as the normal special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special winning fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability change set in the ROM 201 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113. Are set as the normal time special hit variation pattern table 222c and the time reduction/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 222c. That is, when the hit/no hit determination result is a hit, the variation pattern is selected based on each counter value regardless of the number of reserved balls.

With reference to FIG. 144, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). The main processing of the 21st embodiment (FIG. 144, S1400) is different from the main processing of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 68, S1400) in the reserved quantity display update processing 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) and the reserved rearrangement processing 4. (FIG. 145, S1850) is added. Each process of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, S1414 to S1419 in the twenty-first embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, S1414 to S1419 in the eighth embodiment. .. When the process of S1412 is completed, the pending rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 145, in the twenty-first embodiment, the pending rearrangement process 4 (S1850), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement processing 4 (S1850). Each time the reservation rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) in the twenty-first embodiment is executed, based on the data of each reservation area stored in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the current number of reservation balls. Then, the selected variation pattern is updated to update the variation start order and the like.

In the pending rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) of the twenty-first embodiment, first, the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed. The reservation rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) will be described later, but based on the data of each reservation area stored in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the current number of reservation balls. This is processing for selecting and updating the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation again.

After the pending rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed, it is determined whether it is a rearrangeable period (S1852). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1852: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1853). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1854). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1854: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the holding areas in which the holding data of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k are stored are set to ON. (S1855).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1852: No) or if the frame button 22 is not operated (S1854: No), this process ends.

With such a configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game is played evenly, and the game can be played efficiently.

Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, the player executes the control to rearrange and display the pending symbol displays in the variable start order based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, it may be configured to be executed each time is stored. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the order in which the variable display is started by the reserved symbol display rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, even if a new pending symbol display is displayed, the pending symbol display and the display mode that has already been displayed before the pending symbol display are displayed together By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store data that is rearranged. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data necessary for rearrangement (winning judgment result, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.) by a winning command. The voice lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform rearrangement.

Next, referring to FIG. 146, in the twenty-first embodiment, the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 which is one process of the reservation rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. (S1851) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1851 in FIG. 146).

In the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1461 in FIG. 146) according to the twenty-first embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a winning command from the main control device 110 is received (S1861). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1861: Yes), each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern determination counter C4) are read (S1862). Each data read out in the process of S1862 is stored in the corresponding holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223k (the area with the smallest holding area among the holding areas in which no data is stored) (S1863). On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1861: No), the processes of S1862 to S1863 are skipped and the process of S1864 is executed.

Of each of the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k, each data such as the variation pattern and the variation start time is an unupdated holding area, and the variation start time is calculated in order from the holding area with the earliest variation start time, The change start time of the holding area is stored in the storage area 223k5 (S1864). In addition, for all the holding areas, if the holding area has not been updated, the fluctuation starting time is determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the currently changing first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the fluctuation starting time The storage area is recalculated from the earlier holding area and stored.

In the process of S1864, the gaming state when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved area for which the variation start time is recalculated can be varied is determined whether it is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (S1864). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of fluctuation start is a high probability gaming state (S1865: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, it is stored in the hit determination result storage area 223k1. The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is judged and the judgment result is stored in the judgment result storage area 223k1 (S1866). On the other hand, the game state at the start of fluctuation, when it is determined that the low probability game state (normal game state) (S1865: No), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability, The value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the hit determination result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the rearrangement hold storage area 223k is determined, and the determination result is stored in the hit determination result storage area 223k1 (S1867).

The slave hold rearrangement storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) is executed. The subordinate hold rearrangement hold storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) will be described later, but for each hold area, the variation pattern is determined in advance based on the result of the acceptance/rejection determination determined in advance based on the variation start time. Processing for updating. It is determined whether or not there is a pending area in which each data such as the fluctuation start time and the fluctuation pattern has not been updated in the pending area of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k (S1869). When it is determined that there is an unupdated holding area (S1869: Yes), the process returns to S1864 and the same process is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no unupdated holding area in the subordinate rearrangement holding area 223k (S1869: No), the change start order of each holding area is renumbered based on the change start time to change. The data is stored in the order storage area 223k4 (S1870). The slave hold rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) is executed. The subordinate hold rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) will be described later, but the hold symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is rearranged and displayed in the variation start order. When the order of the displayed reserved symbols is changed, the notification process for notifying the player that the rearrangement order has been changed is a process for executing the notification process.

With reference to FIG. 147, in the twenty-first embodiment, a sub-reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update which is one process of the sub-reservation rearrangement order determination processing (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The process 2 (S1868) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the subordinate suspension rearrangement suspension storage area update processing 2 (S1868).

In the subordinate suspension rearrangement suspension storage area update process 2 (S1478 of FIG. 147) according to the twenty-first embodiment, first, the success/failure determination result predicted in the processes of S1866 and S1867 of the suspension rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1461 of FIG. 146). Is determined to be a jackpot (S1881). When it is determined that the predicted hit determination result is a jackpot (S1881: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1882). Whether or not the probability variation is a big hit is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the big hit type storage area 223k2 in the holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223k.

When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (S1882: Yes), the slave read-ahead probability variation flag 223k6 of the rearrangement storage area 223k is set to ON (S1883). On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the normal jackpot (S1882: No), the processing of S1883 is skipped and the processing of S1884 is executed.

The game state at the start of variation is determined and selected at the start of variation based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 from the special winning variation pattern table 222c corresponding to the game state. The variation pattern is determined (predicted) in advance (S1884). On the other hand, when the predicted hit determination result is out (S1881: No), the game state at the start of fluctuation is determined, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined from the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 222d corresponding to the game status. And the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 and after the special symbol to select this variation pattern, the number of suspension of the corresponding special symbol (if predicting the variation pattern for the retention ball of the first special symbol, that suspension Based on the number of holding balls of the first special symbol which is established after the sphere), the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is determined (predicted) in advance (S1885). The predicted win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the corresponding storage area of the rearrangement storage area (S1886).

In this way, in the hold rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851), since the fluctuation start time and the fluctuation pattern of the hold area of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area are updated, the number of hold balls is increased or decreased and a new hold is performed. By the establishment of, even if the change start order of the hold symbol display that has already been sorted and displayed in the change start order occurs, each time, the hold symbol display is displayed in the change start order based on the updated data. it can. Therefore, the player can recognize the latest variation start order in the changing game state, and can easily play the game.

Further, the main control device 110 does not execute control for rearranging the reserved symbol displays, transmits a winning command, and executes the processing necessary for rearrangement in the voice lamp control device 113, so the main control device The control load on 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to frequently update the data in the holding area and always update to the latest variation order.

The fluctuation start time of each holding area changes depending on the holding fluctuation time of the same special symbol stored before that. Here, since the fluctuation pattern that determines the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holding balls, it changes when the number of holding balls increases while the balls are held. However, since the fluctuation start time, the fluctuation pattern to be selected, and the like are updated every time the number of reserved balls changes, the fluctuation start order can always be updated to the correct fluctuation start order. Further, the number of holding balls can be adjusted to an appropriate number by changing the selected variation pattern depending on the number of holding balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which there is no reserved ball and a time for which the special symbol is not drawn is generated, or the reserved ball reaches the upper limit value and overflow occurs.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the data in the holding area is always updated regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of holding balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the data in the holding area is updated when the number of holding balls increases or decreases. May be configured as follows. Further, the data in the holding area may be updated only when the number of holdings increases. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the update frequency of the holding area and reduce the control load of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, in the twenty-first embodiment, the subordinate hold rearrangement display which is one process of the hold rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The notification process (S1871) will be described. FIG. 148 illustrates this sub-holding rearrangement display notification processing (S1871).

In the subordinate hold rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871), first, it is determined whether or not there is an area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is on in any of the respective holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S1891). .. When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is on (S1891: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a change in the change order of the holding areas in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to on (S1892). ). Here, whether or not there is a change in the variation start order is determined when the renumbering is performed in the process of S1870 and whether or not the order has been updated in a different order.

When it is determined that the variation start order is changed (S1892: Yes), it is determined whether the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1893). When it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is ON (S1893: Yes), a notification command for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed is generated (set) (S1893). In the present embodiment, as a notification that the rearrangement order has been changed again, the characters "the rearrangement order has been changed again" are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1893: No), the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to on (S1895). A notification command for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed is generated (set) (S1896). Here, as a notification mode for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed, the characters "the rearrangement order has been changed" are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the player is informed that the reserved symbol displays have been rearranged.

By configuring in this way, due to the increase or decrease in the number of holdings, etc., by changing the fluctuation pattern that is previously determined to be selected at the start of fluctuation of each holding area, even if the fluctuation start order changes, It is possible to appropriately notify the player of a change in the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display that is rearranged and displayed in an easily understandable notification mode. Therefore, the player knows that the reserved symbol displays have been rearranged, and by identifying the reserved symbol displays, it is possible to prevent the reserved symbol displays from being rearranged and being confused. it can.

In addition, when the rearrangement is changed, if it is changed again, it is configured to give a different notification, so that the player can easily recognize that this change has been changed again. By recognizing, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the rearrangement order is changed again, the notification is made by characters. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol display device is displayed before the rearrangement order is changed and after the rearrangement order is changed. Alternatively, the lower display area Ds 81 may be displayed side by side. Further, the number of changes may be represented by a number or the like, or the background of the reserved symbol display or the reserved symbol display area in a color corresponding to the number of changes (for example, blue for the first change, red for the second change, etc.) May be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the number of times and the color change, so that the player can easily identify that the rearrangement order has been changed.

Further, when the rearrangement order of the holding areas for which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is changed, a dedicated flag indicating this may be set and set to ON. In this case, the flag may be set to OFF based on the execution of the process of notifying the rearrangement order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player operates the frame button 22 during the effective time to arrange and display the reserved symbol displays in the variation start order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is always in the variation start order. The hold symbol display may be displayed, and the variation start order may be changed every time it is changed.

Next, returning to the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400), the description will be continued. In the twenty-first embodiment, in the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the pending quantity display update processing 5 (FIG. 149, S1871) is executed after the processing of S1405 is executed. To be done.

Referring to FIG. 149, in the twenty-first embodiment, the pending number display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. explain. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the reserved quantity display update processing 5 (S1871). In the reserved quantity display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1871), the reserved symbols display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is changed in the variation start order, and the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to OFF. The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area is displayed in the order in which the hold is established. Further, with respect to the pending symbols displayed in the variation start order, the pending symbol display is blinked and displayed for the pending symbol display in which the variation start order is changed to notify that the variation start order has been changed. Execute the process.

In the reserved quantity display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840), first, the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to on is displayed in the variable start order, and the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned off. A hold display command for display is generated to cause the display control device 114 to display the hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area set in No. 1 in the hold establishment order (S1921).

It is determined whether or not any of the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k has a holding area whose rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1922). When it is determined that there is a reserved area in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1922: Yes), a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON. Blinks (S1923). A rearrangement order change notification sound command is set (S1924). Here, the rearrangement order change notification sound command outputs a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as ping pong) indicating that the rearrangement has been performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1922: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the rearrangement order is changed again, that portion is displayed in blinking, so that the player can easily recognize where the change has been changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by not knowing whether or not the displayed pending symbol display is changed again.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k7 is set to ON is repeatedly blinked and displayed, but the invention is not limited thereto. The order change flag 223k7 may be set to off, and blinking display may be executed for a predetermined time and ended.

Further, although it is configured to display the changed pending symbol display in a blinking manner, a notification such as a blinking display may be given to the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement order is changed. Further, as a notification mode for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed, it is configured to notify that the rearrangement order has been changed not only by blinking display but also by a notification mode such as rotating and displaying the pending symbol display. May be. Further, the notification mode may be changed based on the number of times the order is changed. Specifically, if the number of changes is one, the pending symbol display is shaken and displayed, and if the number of changes is two, the pending symbol display is repeatedly displayed by enlarging and reducing.

Further, the notification sound notified by the rearrangement order change notification sound command may be a voice saying "the rearrangement order has been changed!". Further, it may be configured to give a notification such as "the rearrangement order has been changed again!" or "the rearrangement order has been changed for the Oth time!", etc., based on the number of changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the variation pattern to be selected is determined by the number of holdings at the time of variation start, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 always determines the variation pattern based on the game state. Since the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is previously determined and updated, it is possible to always notify the correct fluctuation start order of the pending symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the holding area in which all the holding data is stored, the data is updated every time, but the holding area in which the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is fixed (for example, a special symbol With respect to the first holding area of the number of holding balls, up to four holding balls, which are the upper limit values, are stored), the update may be stopped or prohibited. Good. With this configuration, the control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, among the pending symbols displayed in the variation start order, the variation start order is determined with respect to the pending symbol display in which the variation start order has been determined (the future, the pending symbol display in which the variation start order is not changed) It may be displayed in a display mode informing that it is doing (for example, the display color of the hold symbol display is displayed in a specific color, or a changing order such as “HOLD” with respect to the confirmed hold symbol display. Is displayed to indicate that it has been confirmed).

In the present embodiment, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 controls the rearrangement has been described, but as shown in the first embodiment, the main control device 110 executes the rearrangement process. It may be configured to. In this case, each data (variation pattern, variation start time, etc.) in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u may be updated for each timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Then, each time updating is performed, an updating command may be generated based on the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, and the updating command may be output to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, a modification of the 21st embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment, each time the hold rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1851 in FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 is executed, a dynamic display of each hold area of the subordinate rearrangement hold area 223k is performed. By updating the mode on the basis of the current number of reserved balls, the player is notified of the case where the player is informed of the exact change start order at any time. However, in the modified example of the twenty-first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the variation patterns of various super reach are selected by the same value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the increase or decrease of the number of pending numbers. Further, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3 for selecting each super reach is also set to be constant regardless of the number of holding balls. With this configuration, in the case of out-of-range super reach, the variation pattern can be determined in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead processing (FIG. 27, S914) at the time of winning. Therefore, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, in the reservation rearrangement order determination processing (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the data is stored in each reservation area of the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k. If there is a variation pattern that does not change even if the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, it is set as a rearrangeable period. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern is changed by the increase or decrease of the hold is stored, the sortable period is canceled (or set as the sort prohibited period) so that the sort is not executed. A fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern does not change due to increase/decrease of the hold is composed of the fluctuation pattern that is stored up to the upper limit and is stored at the beginning, the fluctuation pattern of the hit, and the fluctuation pattern that is out of reach. It

With this configuration, when it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order, the player is notified that the sorting is possible, and the sorting is performed by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, confusion can be further suppressed for the player.

The configurations of the first to 21st embodiments may be combined as appropriate.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown below in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing the win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination means, the success/failure determination condition is established. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode related to time information of the corresponding second identification information, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the win/win judgment condition that is met is satisfied. Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information is started, the order of satisfaction of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is a combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, and the dynamic display mode determination means are The holding information storage means for storing the holding information having at least the information regarding the determined dynamic display mode, and the holding information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means are distinguished from each other. On the other hand, the hold display means for displaying the fulfillment order of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is a combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, for each hold information in a distinguishable hold display mode; Alternatively, when the second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and each hold stored previously. Time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined based on the dynamic display mode for each information, and is stored in the hold information storage means. Dynamic display start time information determination means, and that the predetermined conditions are met Based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the suspension information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is changed to the dynamic display. And a rearranging means for rearranging the rearrangement in the order of starting the game machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode relating to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/win determination condition is met, the first win/win determination condition that is satisfied and the first win/win determination condition that is satisfied are displayed until the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. (2) Suspension information having at least an order in which the success/failure determination conditions are combined and the information regarding the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The winning/losing result in which the first winning/failing determination condition and the second winning/failing determination condition are combined for each holding information while distinguishing the pending information of the first winning/failure judging condition and the second winning/failing judgment condition stored in the pending information storage means. The order in which the determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. When the first or second hit determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed is stored first. The dynamic display start time information determining means determines the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information becomes the dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode for each pending information. And stored in the holding information storage means. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display displayed on the hold display means based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time determination means. The display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order in which the dynamic display is started. Thereby, for example, the hold information for the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information for the first lottery game is stored in advance. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, the newly stored second lottery game. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of is more than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. Get faster However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 has a condition distribution means for assisting the establishment of the first win/win condition and the second win/win condition alternately.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the allocating means assists in that the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are alternately established. This makes it easier to equally establish the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be played in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rearrangement means, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the suspension information is stored in the suspension information storage means, the suspension information thereof. The first or second corresponding to the newly established hold information and the hold information previously stored based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each hold information previously stored in the storage means. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that a dynamic display start order of the identification information is determined, and the order is associated with the hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, the dynamic information corresponding to each pending information previously stored in the pending information storage means is stored. Based on the display start time information, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is set for each hold. The information is stored in the pending information storage means by the rearrangement means in association with the information. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the pending information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even if there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display modes in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and to notify the player of the accurate dynamic display start order. You can

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machine has operation means operable by the player, and the rearranging means satisfies the predetermined condition when the operation means is operated. As a game machine A4, the holding display modes are rearranged.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the player has an operating means that can be operated, and the rearranging means rearranges the hold display modes, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operating means is operated. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means as if the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to perform rearrangement in the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to inform the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the exact dynamic display start order. You can

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the rearranging means determines that the predetermined condition is met and newly displays the hold display when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly met. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that the hold display modes displayed on the means are rearranged.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly satisfied, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means. As a result, when a new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the exact dynamic display start order.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A5, the special game state in which it is easier to judge whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after the privilege game execution means has executed the privilege game is more likely to hit The lottery information for drawing whether or not to transfer is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second win/win determination condition, and the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied, and the established determination condition When storing the hold information corresponding to, the game information has a game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information, the winning/disapproval determination means, the hold information storage means Based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information deciding means, until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in , The dynamic display start time information corresponding to each hold information is the special game state is determined by the game state lottery means to perform advance determination to determine whether or not the result, the result is When the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed while being stored in the hold information storage means in association with each hold information. The formal determination is made based on the game state when the variation can be started, and the dynamic display mode determination means stores the hold information in the hold information storage means. Until the corresponding first or second identification information can be dynamically displayed, the win/fail determination unit determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the suspension information storage unit. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. A gaming machine B1 characterized by determining a dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine B1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5. In other words, in order to perform a lottery, whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to determine whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game The lottery information of is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss determination condition. Further, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the dynamic display start time determined by the dynamic display start time determination means. Then, the game state lottery means determines whether or not the game state at the start of dynamic display corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the advance/rejection determination means performs the advance/rejection determination in advance. Then, the result is stored in the hold storage means by the hit/miss determination means in association with each hold information. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, the win/no win determination is based on the game state in that case. Formally implemented by means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be displayed dynamically, based on the determination result of the advance determination by the hit/miss determination means stored in the hold information storage means. Then, the dynamic display time is determined. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. Thereby, even if the pending information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the success/failure determination is performed. .. Therefore, the dynamic display time can be determined in advance on the basis of the correct hit determination result, and the correct dynamic display start order can be determined even when a new hit determination condition is satisfied next.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on each of the second display means, and the hit/no hit determination result by the hit/no hit determination means are coincident, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Condition allocation means for assisting in alternately establishing a condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, and a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means. A gaming machine C1 having a holding storage means for storing as a right to play the first or second lottery game.

According to the gaming machine C1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The condition allocation means assists in that the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions are alternately established. When the first or second winning/disabling determination condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the pending storage means. As a result, the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition are easily established evenly, the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and the first lottery game is performed. It is possible to prevent one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored up to the upper limit number in advance. Therefore, although the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored up to the upper limit number, respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that one or more rights are generated and the right is invalidated. it can.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C1, a game area and a game ball flowing down in the game area that flows down in the game area enter a first starting opening that satisfies the first win/fail judgment condition, and a game that flows down in the game area. When the ball enters, it has a second starting port that satisfies the second win/fail judgment condition, and the condition distributing means has a game ball in the first starting port and the second starting port. A game machine C2 having a game ball guiding unit for assisting in alternately entering the ball.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first win/win condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second win/win condition is satisfied. It The game ball guiding section of the condition distribution means assists the game balls alternately entering the first starting port and the second starting port. This makes it easier for the player to alternately enter the game ball into the first start opening and the second start opening by letting the game ball flow down into the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Since the execution of and can be performed efficiently, many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C2, the rearrangement means stores the reserved information when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the reserved information is stored in the reserved information storage means. Of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established hold information and the hold information previously stored, based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each hold information previously stored. A game machine C3, wherein a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is associated with hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball guiding section receives the game ball from the ball entrance of the condition distributing means, rotates it in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and moves the game ball to the first starting port through the first guide path. After being guided, the game ball that has entered from the ball entrance is received in a state of being rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction that is the opposite direction to the first direction. Then, the game ball is guided by the game ball guide portion to the second starting opening via the second guide path. As a result, it becomes possible to alternately guide the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening by using the common member, and to distribute the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening, respectively. As compared with the case where the game balls are provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be configured compactly.

In the game machine of the game machine C3, the game ball guiding section of the condition distributing means is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the entrance, in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, the first passive portion that receives the entered game ball and rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction, and enters the ball entrance when it rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part, which is arranged at a position facing the game ball, receives the game ball and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance. After turning in the second direction, the game ball is prevented from turning in the first direction before entering the ball entrance, or the second passive portion enters the ball. After receiving the game ball entered from the mouth and rotating in the first direction, before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, a rotation restriction that prevents the game ball from rotating in the second direction. And a gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, the first passive portion receives the entered game ball and is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. The second passive portion receives the game ball that has entered, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. After the first passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may rotate in the first direction before the game ball next enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction, before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, it rotates in the second direction. This is hindered by the rotation restricting portion. As a result, after the game ball guiding unit rotates to guide the game ball to one guide path, the game ball will rotate in the other direction before the next game ball enters, and the next ball enters. It is possible to prevent a problem that the game ball is guided to the same guide path as the game ball that entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game balls entering the ball entrance to the first start opening and the second start opening more accurately and alternately, and equalize the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Can be stored in.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine C1 has a gaming area and a common starting opening that satisfies the first or second winning/disabling determination condition when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area. Condition distribution means, every time a game ball enters the common starting port, controllably alternately establishes the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition. Machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, every time a game ball flowing down in the game area enters the common starting port, the condition distributing means controlably distributes the establishment of the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition. As a result, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately played at the common starting port, and the game area can be made compact.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, after the rearrangement display of the reservation display mode on the reservation display means by the rearrangement means is executed, the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established. In this case, in the state where the display order of the rearranged display mode of the rearranged display is maintained, the newly displayed hold display mode indicating the first or second win/fail judgment condition is the hold order in the established order. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

The gaming machine D1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1. That is, if the first or second winning/judgment condition is satisfied after executing the rearrangement display of the reservation display mode on the reservation display means by the rearrangement means, the display order of the rearranged display mode of the reservation display is maintained. In this state, the hold display mode indicating the newly established first or second win/fail judgment condition is displayed on the hold display means in the order in which the hold display is established. As a result, even if the corresponding hold display mode is displayed after the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied after the rearrangement display is executed, the display order of the rearranged display mode of the hold display is maintained. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the order in which the dynamic display is started at the time when the rearrangement is performed. Therefore, the player can distinguish the rearranged display mode from the rearranged display mode and the rearranged display mode from the rearranged display mode before or after the rearrangement. You can Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize which order the hold display mode indicates.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine D1, the rearrangement is performed in a state in which the reserved display mode in which the rearrangement display has been executed and the reserved display mode in which the rearrangement display has not been executed are mixedly displayed in the reserved display means. When a predetermined condition that triggers execution of the means is newly established, the sorting means sorts all the hold display modes displayed on the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the state in which the suspended display mode in which the rearrangement display has been executed and the suspended display mode in which the rearrangement display has not been executed are mixedly displayed in the suspension display means, a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the rearrangement means is newly added. When it is materialized, all the reservation display modes displayed on the reservation display means are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display. As a result, even if the suspended display modes after the sorting is performed and when the sorting is not performed are displayed in a mixed manner, the sorting is performed again, so that the order in which the accurate dynamic display is started is changed. It can be identified by the hold display mode after the execution of the replacement.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the hold information storage means determines whether or not the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means on the basis of whether or not the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied. In the normal reserved storage area, the normal reserved storage area in which the normal reserved information having at least the judgment information used for determining and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored, and Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored normal hold information can be dynamically displayed, based on the normal hold information, the win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means and the dynamic display mode determination are made in advance. A rearrangement storage area in which the dynamic display mode by the means and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as rearrangement information. When the 2 win/fail judgment conditions are newly established, the newly established normal hold storage area is stored in the newly established normal hold storage area based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. Determines the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the stored normal suspension information and the normal suspension information previously stored in the normal suspension storage area is started. A gaming machine E1 having a sorting order determining means for storing the order in the sorting pending storage area.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 and D2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the first or second win/loss judgment condition is satisfied, the normal hold information having at least the win/fail judgment information used for the win/fail judgment and the dynamic display determination information used for the determination of the dynamic display mode is the hold information storage. It is stored in the normally reserved storage area of the means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal suspension information stored in the normal suspension storage area can be dynamically displayed, based on the normal suspension information, a win/fail judgment result and a dynamic display mode are provided in advance. The dynamic display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. When the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly satisfied, the newly held normal hold is newly established based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. Determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the normal pending information stored in the storage area and the normal pending information previously stored in the normal pending storage area is started, The order is stored in the sorting pending storage area by the sorting order determining means. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the sorting order can be processed separately, and the processing for determining the sorting order can be facilitated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement and to facilitate the development of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing control of the game in accordance with the sub-control signal output from the main control means, and the main control The means has the holding information storage means, the sorting information is stored in a sorting holding storage area of the holding information storage means, and the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determining means based on the sorting information. Each time it is determined, a winning signal indicating each sort order stored in the sort pending storage area is output to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means indicates the win signal based on the win signal. Based on the sorting order stored in the slave sorting pending storage area, and the sorting order stored in the slave sorting pending storage area, the sorting of the pending display mode is performed. An amusement machine E2 having the rearrangement means for executing.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. The rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement storage area of the main control means, and is stored in the rearrangement storage area every time the rearrangement order is determined by the rearrangement order determination means based on the rearrangement information. A winning signal indicating each sort order is output from the main control means to the sub control means. Further, in the slave control means, each sort order indicated by the winning signal is stored in the slave sort pending storage area of the slave pending information storage means. Then, based on the rearrangement order stored in the subordinate rearrangement storage area, the rearrangement means of the subordinate control means performs rearrangement of the hold display mode. Accordingly, the main control unit does not need to perform the process of rearranging the hold display modes even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load of the main control unit can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing control of the game in accordance with the sub-control signal output from the main control means, and the main control The means has the holding information storage means, and indicates each sort information stored in the sort holding storage area every time the sort information is stored in the sort holding storage area of the hold information storing means. The winning control signal is output to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means has a subordinate hold information storage means having a subordinate rearrangement hold storage area in which each sort information indicated by the win signal is stored based on the win signal. The sorting order determining means for determining a sorting order based on a dynamic display start time in each sorting information of the subordinate sorting pending storage area, and storing the sorting order in the subordinate sorting pending storage area. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that the gaming machine E3 includes: the sorting means that sorts the pending display mode based on the sorting order stored in the subordinate sorting pending storage area.

The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. Every time the rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement storage area of the main control means, a winning signal indicating each rearrangement information stored in the rearrangement storage area is output by the main control means to the sub-control means. Further, in the slave control means, each sort information indicated by the winning signal is stored in the slave sort pending storage area of the slave pending information storage means. Then, the rearrangement order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the rearrangement information stored in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area, and the rearrangement order determination means of the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area is used by the rearrangement order determination means. Remembered. Based on the stored rearrangement order, rearrangement of the hold display mode is executed by the rearrangement means of the secondary control means. As a result, the main control unit does not need to determine the rearrangement order, and the subordinate control unit can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load on the main control unit can be reduced. .. Therefore, the rearrangement of the hold display modes can be executed while suppressing the control load of the main control means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, the holding information storage means determines whether or not the hold is based on whether the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied. The normal hold storage area for storing the true/false judgment information used for the true/false judgment by the means and the dynamic display determination information used for the dynamic display manner determination by the dynamic display manner determining means, and the normal reserve storage area. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of information can be dynamically displayed, the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means and the motion by the dynamic display mode determination means are based on the information in advance. A dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored as rearrangement information as a rearrangement reservation storage area, the rearrangement means preliminarily When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting effective information is stored in the sorting pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the sorting valid information is stored in each sorting information of the sorting pending storage area. On the basis of the above, the game machine F1 is characterized in that the reservation display mode displayed on the reservation display means is rearranged.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, and E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second hit/miss judgment condition, the hit/miss judgment information used for hit/damage determination and the dynamic display determination information used for deciding the dynamic display mode are the normal hold storage area of the hold information storage means. Memorized in. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of information stored in the normal reserved storage area can be dynamically displayed, based on the respective pieces of information, the judgment result, the dynamic display mode, and the movement are determined in advance. The display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting validity information is stored in the sorting pending storage area by the sorting means for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and each of the sorting pending storage areas is stored. Based on the rearrangement information, rearrangement of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately rearrange the hold display modes that were displayed when the predetermined condition was satisfied, in the order in which the dynamic display was started.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine F1, the rearrangement means repeatedly updates and displays the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means at every predetermined update timing, and holds the hold display means. As for the display of the display mode, for the reserved display mode of the rearrangement reservation storage area in which the rearrangement valid information is stored, the rearrangement is displayed in the order in which the dynamic display is started, while the rearrangement valid information is stored. A game machine F2 characterized in that the reservation display mode of the rearrangement reservation storage area that has not been displayed is displayed in the order in which the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied.

The gaming machine F1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1. That is, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is repeatedly updated at every predetermined update timing and displayed by the rearrangement means. The reservation display mode of the rearrangement display area in which the rearrangement effective information is stored is rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started and displayed by the rearrangement means. On the other hand, the hold display mode in which the rearrangement valid information is not stored is displayed by the rearrangement means in the order in which the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied. Therefore, the suspended display mode in which the rearrangement has been performed can be displayed while maintaining the order in which the rearrangement has been accurately performed in the order in which the dynamic display is started. Therefore, it is possible to separately display the suspended display modes that have been sorted and unsorted, and even if a new suspended display mode is displayed after the sorting is performed, the dynamic display of the suspended display modes that have been sorted is performed. The player can easily recognize the order in which the display is started.

A first lottery game and a second lottery to be executed after the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game in any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2. Based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss judgment condition, lottery information for drawing whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the win/no hit judgment with the game is more likely to be won than the normal time is acquired, When the 1st or 2nd hit/absence determination condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied hit/absence determination condition is stored, the lottery information is stored in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information. The dynamic display start time information has a state lottery means, and when the win/fail judgment means newly stores the hold information in the hold information storage means when the first or second win/loss judgment condition is newly established. A game when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored suspension information can be started based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the determination means. The game state lottery means determines whether the state is the special game state, executes a preliminary determination to determine whether or not to win in advance, and stores the result in the holding information storage means, and the result of that determination is When it is about to shift to the special game state and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored suspension information is started is earlier than the suspension information stored earlier, the storage is newly stored. Whether or not the game state when the dynamic display is started again is the special game state with respect to the hold information in the order later than the order of the dynamic display start corresponding to the held information, The gaming state lottery means makes respective judgments, executes the pre-judgment for making the win/fail judgment in advance, and stores the results thereof in the holding information storage means, respectively. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be dynamically displayed, the winning/non-hitting is performed each time new pending information is stored in the pending information storage means. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the suspension information storage means by the determination means, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance and stored in the suspension information storage means, while the determination information is stored in the suspension information storage means. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored hold information can be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. To be Characteristic gaming machine G1.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, in order to perform a lottery, whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to determine whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game The lottery information of is drawn by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied win/loss determination condition is stored, the lottery result is held by the gaming state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. When the first or second hit determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the hold information is stored based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. The game state lottery means determines whether the game state is the special game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information can be dynamically displayed, and the game state lottery means determines in advance. Preliminary determination is performed by the hit/miss determination means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. If the result is about to shift to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored suspension information is started is earlier than the suspension information stored earlier, then With respect to the hold information in the order of, again, the game state lottery means determines whether the game state when the dynamic display is started is the special game state again, and the advance determination is performed in advance to determine whether or not the game is successful. It is executed by the judging means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be dynamically displayed, a preliminary determination is made each time new pending information is stored in the pending information storage means. Based on the determination result, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination means and stored in the pending information storage means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. As a result, even if the pending information is newly stored and the order in which the dynamic display is started is changed, and the hit determination result of the hold information stored earlier is changed, the hit determination result is also changed. It can be re-determined in advance as appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to determine the dynamic display mode again based on the latest result of the hit determination, and it is possible to correctly determine the order in which the dynamic display is started. Therefore, the pending display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started.

It has a main control means for performing the main control of the game, and a sub control means for executing the control of the game based on the sub control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is the first hit determination condition. Based on the establishment of, the first lottery game win/non-judgment is executed, and based on the establishment of the second win/win judgment condition, the second lottery game win/non-judgment means is executed. First display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means of the main control means, in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied, and the main control The second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means of the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied, the second display means and the first identification information. The first display means includes a display control means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit. A gaming machine to which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given when the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information on the first or second display means in a display mode indicating a hit. In the dynamic display mode, the main control unit determines a dynamic display mode in which the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display time based on the determination result of the hit determination unit. Determining means, display mode signal generating means for generating a display mode signal based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and outputting the display mode signal to the slave control means; and the first or second identification. When either one of the pieces of information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, and when the other first or second identification information is being dynamically displayed, a suspension signal for instructing suspension of the dynamic display On the other hand, the control signal generating means for generating a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display based on the end of the bonus game based on the The control means dynamically displays the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal on the first or second display means based on the reception of the display mode signal, and the slave control means, Dynamic display time measuring means for measuring the time of dynamic display based on reception of the display mode signal, and interruption of measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means based on reception of the interruption signal And a dynamic display state that is suspended based on the reception of the restart signal. The remaining dynamic display time is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the suspended first or second identification information remains according to the remaining dynamic display time. A subordinate dynamic re-display mode determining means for determining a dynamic re-display mode that is a dynamic display mode to be displayed at the dynamic display time of 1. A gaming machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Further, in the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the hit determination of the first lottery game by the hit determination means in the order in which the first hit determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is given. .. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determining means determines a dynamic display mode in which the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generation means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and is output to the slave control means. Then, when either one of the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, if the other first or second identification information is being dynamically displayed, the dynamic display An interruption signal for instructing interruption is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, on the basis of the end of the bonus game based on the hit, the management signal generation means generates a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display. Further, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the display mode signal, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means. The dynamic display time is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means. Upon receipt of the interruption signal from the main control means, the measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means is interrupted by the secondary time management means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the restart signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the remaining According to the dynamic display time of, the dynamic display mode which is the dynamic display mode to be displayed during the remaining dynamic display time of the interrupted first or second identification information is determined by the slave re-display mode determination means. To be done. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information that was interrupted during the bonus game is started, the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining time is determined, and the dynamic remaining display is given to the player. The lottery result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by the dynamic re-display mode according to the display time. Further, even if the main control means does not instruct the sub-control means by selecting the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining dynamic display time, the sub-control means performs dynamic re-display according to the remaining dynamic display time. Since the display mode is determined, the control load on the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even in a gaming machine that simultaneously executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is possible to suppress an increase in load on the main control means and perform various effects of the game.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine H1, the subordinate re-display mode determination means configures the dynamic display time within the reference time when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is less than or equal to the reference time. While determining the short dynamic redisplay mode that is the dynamic redisplay mode that has been performed, if it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, a dynamic time longer than the reference time is determined. A gaming machine H2 for determining a normal dynamic re-display mode which is the dynamic re-display mode configured by display time.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the slave control means, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is less than or equal to the reference time, the short dynamic re-display which is a dynamic re-display mode configured by the dynamic display time within the reference time. The display mode is determined by the driven redisplay mode determination means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the secondary redisplay determination means. Therefore, the dynamic re-display mode can be determined according to the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time becomes short, by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode, it is possible to inform the player of the determination result of the lottery game in an easy-to-understand manner.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, a predetermined upper limit number of times. And a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The means determines, when the number of times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the one of the ones having a higher number of hits. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is a dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the lesser one of the first or second win/fail judgment conditions. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is determined in a dynamic display mode.

According to claim I1, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. The number of times the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions stored in the hold storage means are satisfied is determined by the number-of-times judging means. When the number-of-times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/no judgment condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the number of wins is higher. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is dynamically displayed with a dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition with the smaller number of times of establishment. The short dynamic display mode, which is the mode, is determined. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss judgment condition with the larger number of wins is played in a short time. It can be adjusted so that the difference in the number of times of establishment from the two acceptance/rejection determination conditions becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, a predetermined upper limit number of times. And a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The means determines, when the number-of-times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the one of the smaller number of hits is satisfied. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition is a dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition of the longer one. A gaming machine I2 characterized by being determined to a dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I2, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. The number of times the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions stored in the hold storage means are satisfied is determined by the number-of-times judging means. When the number-of-times determining means determines that the number of times each of the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the number of times of winning is less. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is dynamically displayed with a dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition with the larger number of times of establishment. The long dynamic display mode, which is the mode, is determined. By determining the long-dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition with the smaller number of times established becomes longer, and the number of times the win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means is less likely to decrease. The adjustment can be made so that the difference in the number of times the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means are small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly enabled, the number-of-times judgment means is stored in the pending storage means. The determination means determines the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result determined by the number of times determination means. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second win/win judgment condition is newly enabled, the first win/win judgment condition and the second win/win judgment condition stored in the hold storage unit are displayed. The number of times of is satisfied is determined by the number of times determining means. Then, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result. Therefore, the dynamic display mode determination means can determine the dynamic display mode based on the latest information on the number of times of establishment stored in the hold storage means at the timing of starting the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the dynamic display mode determination means, when the determination result of the win/failure determination means is a hit, regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination means. On the other hand, when the determination result of the hit/miss determination means is out of alignment, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the number-of-times determination means. ..

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination result of the hit determination unit is a win, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination unit. On the other hand, when the determination result of the hit determination unit is out of order, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result of the number of times determination unit. Therefore, in the case of a win, it is possible to determine a normal dynamic display mode that indicates the win, and to make the player have a sufficient sense of expectation as to whether or not a bonus game will be given. By determining the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of times of establishment stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to prevent the production of the game from being impaired.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the gaming machine I5 is characterized in that it is determined that the predetermined number of times or more of the difference is two or more times.

According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, when it is determined that there is a difference of two times or more, it is stored in the pending storage means. Since the dynamic display mode for adjusting the established number of times is determined, it is often the case that the short dynamic display mode or the long dynamic display mode is determined and the effect of the game is difficult to understand. Can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines I1, I3 to I5, the dynamic display mode determination means has a predetermined number of times of establishment of the first or second winning/absence determination condition stored in the hold storage means, whichever has a greater number of establishment times. The gaming machine I6 is for determining the short dynamic display mode when the number of times determining means determines that there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1, I3 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times the first or second hit/miss determination condition stored in the hold storage means, which has the greater number of times of satisfaction, is satisfied a predetermined number of times or more, and the number of times determination means has a difference of a predetermined number or more. If it is determined that the short dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, when the number of times of establishment of the predetermined number of times or more is not stored, the short dynamic display mode is not determined even if the number of times determination means has a difference of the predetermined number of times or more. It is possible to prevent the aspect of the game from being determined and the game effect becoming monotonous.

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the dynamic display mode determination means is such that the number of times the first or second win/fail determination condition stored in the hold storage means is satisfied is a predetermined number or more, and A gaming machine I7, wherein the long dynamic display mode is determined when the determination means determines that there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times.

The gaming machine I7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5. That is, the number of times the first or second hit/miss determination condition stored in the hold storage means, which has the greater number of times of satisfaction, is satisfied a predetermined number of times or more, and the number of times determination means has a difference of a predetermined number or more. When it is determined that the long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, in the case where the number of times of establishment is not stored more than the predetermined number of times, the long-dynamic display mode is not determined even if the number-of-times determining means has a difference of a predetermined number of times or more. It is possible to prevent the aspect of the game from being determined and the game effect becoming monotonous.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the dynamic display mode determination means moves the identification information corresponding to the first win/loss judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means. Before the dynamic display can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and the one of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, which has the larger number of times of establishment stored in the pending storage means, is judged whether or not it is valid. A gaming machine I8, wherein one of the long dynamic display modes is determined based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the condition.

The gaming machine I8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7. That is, before the identification information corresponding to the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition stored in the holding storage means can be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is determined to be the dynamic display mode. It is determined in advance by each means. Of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, one of a plurality of long dynamic display modes is selected based on the dynamic display mode stored in the holding storage means and corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition with the larger number of times of establishment. The long dynamic display mode of is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, by determining the long dynamic display mode based on the previously determined dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition stored in the holding storage means, the difference in the number of times of establishment. It is possible to determine a longer dynamic display mode that is more suitable for reducing.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7, or I8, the dynamic display mode determination means is the identification information corresponding to the first win/loss judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means. Before the dynamic display of can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and one of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, which has the larger number of established times stored in the holding storage means, A gaming machine I9, characterized in that the dynamic display time of the long dynamic display mode is determined based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition.

The gaming machine I9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7, and I8. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined to be the dynamic display mode before the identification information can be dynamically displayed, which corresponds to the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the holding storage means. It is determined in advance by each means. Of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, the long dynamic display is performed based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition stored in the holding storage means, which has the larger number of times of establishment. The dynamic display time of the mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Therefore, since the long dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamic display time of the determined dynamic display mode having the larger number of times of establishment, the difference in the number of times of establishment can be adjusted to be smaller.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing the win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, a predetermined upper limit number of times. Hold storage means for storing up to, continuous succession monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination When the consecutive success monitoring means determines that one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, the continuously established one of the first and second ones. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition is changed to a short dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode having a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second win/loss judgment condition. A gaming machine I10 characterized by being determined.

According to the gaming machine I10, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. Then, the continuous establishment monitoring unit determines whether or not one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is continuously satisfied. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first win/defeat determination condition or the second win/defeat determination condition is continuously established, the dynamic display mode determination means is the first or the one of the continuously established ones. The short dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is a dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second win/fail judgment condition. To decide. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition of the one continuously established is performed in a short time, and thus the first win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means It can be adjusted so that the difference in the number of times of establishment from the second win/fail judgment condition becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, are each a predetermined upper limit number of times. Hold storage means for storing up to, continuous succession monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination The means, when the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first hit determination condition or the second hit determination condition is continuously satisfied, the first or the one that is not continuously satisfied. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/no judgment condition that is continuously satisfied. A gaming machine I11 characterized by determining a certain long-dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I11, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the first lottery determination by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. Then, the continuous establishment monitoring unit determines whether or not one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is continuously satisfied. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first win/defeat judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, the dynamic display mode determination means determines whether the first success/failure determination condition is the one that is not continuously satisfied. The dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition that is continuously satisfied. Is determined as the long dynamic display mode. By determining the long-dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition of the one not continuously established becomes longer, and the number of times the win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means is reduced. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to adjust so that the difference in the number of times of establishment between the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11 has a condition distributing means for assisting the establishment of the first win/win condition and the second win/win condition alternately, and a gaming machine I12.

The gaming machine I12 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11. That is, the condition distribution means assists the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition to be alternately established. Therefore, it is possible to make the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions substantially equal to each other, and to easily store the number of times the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied up to the upper limit number in the hold storage means.

In the gaming machine I10 or I12, the gaming machine I10 or I12 has a number determination means for determining the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means, The consecutive success monitoring means does not judge that either the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judging means determines the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. When it is determined that the respective numbers of times of establishment are greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second acceptance/rejection determination condition having the higher number of times of establishment is A gaming machine I13, which determines a dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I10 or I12, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number-of-times determining means determines the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The continuous success monitoring means does not judge that either the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number-of-times judging means determines the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. When it is determined that the number of times of establishment is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Short dynamic display mode is determined. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, even if the number of times of establishment is not continuous, if there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times of establishment, it corresponds to the acceptance/rejection judgment condition of the one with the greater number of times of establishment. Since the lottery game to be performed is performed in a short time, it is possible to make adjustment so that the difference in the number of times the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means are small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

In the gaming machine I11 or I12, the gaming machine I11 or I12 has a number determination means for determining the number of times the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means, The continuous success monitoring means does not determine that either the first win/win judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously met, and the number of times judging means determines whether the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are met. When it is determined that the number of times of each establishment is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition having a smaller number of times of establishment is set as the long-running motion. An amusement machine I14, which is characterized in that it is determined to be a dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine I14 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I11 or I12. That is, the number-of-times determining means determines the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The continuous success monitoring means does not judge that either the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number-of-times judging means determines the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. When it is determined that the number of times of establishment is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Short dynamic display mode is determined. By determining the long-dynamic display mode in this way, even if the number of times of establishment is not satisfied continuously, if there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times of establishment, it corresponds to the acceptance/rejection determination condition of the one with less number of establishments. Since the lottery game to be performed becomes long and the number of times the win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means is less likely to decrease, the difference in the number of times the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. Can be adjusted to be smaller. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1 is displayed at that time when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by having rearrangement notifying means for notifying an executed notification manner indicating that the rearrangement has been executed when the rearrangement is performed by the rearrangement means. J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, and G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the predetermined conditions are met, when the rearrangement display mode displayed at that time is executed, the executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement has been executed is displayed. It is notified by the replacement notification means. In this way, the player can identify, by the executed notification mode, whether the currently held display mode indicates the order of establishment or the order of starting the dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress confusion about the game of the player.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine J1, the rearrangement notifying means displays, as the executed notification mode, a display mode capable of identifying that the rearrangement has been executed on the hold display means. Playing machine J2.

The gaming machine J2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1. That is, as the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification means displays the pending display means in a display mode capable of identifying that the sorting has been executed. Therefore, the executed notification mode can be displayed closer to the suspended display mode by displaying the executed notification mode on the same suspended display mode, and the player misses the executed notification mode. The effect is that it can be prevented.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rearrangement notifying means indicates that the rearrangement display means displayed when the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means indicates that the rearrangement has been executed. While performing the notification in the executed notification mode, the pending display mode displayed after the sorting by the sorting means is performed in the unexecuted notification mode indicating that sorting is not executed. Amusement machine J3.

The gaming machine J3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, with respect to the hold display mode displayed when the rearrangement is performed by the rearrangement means, the rearrangement informing means informs of the executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement has been executed. On the other hand, with respect to the hold display mode displayed after the sorting by the sorting unit, the sorting notification unit reports the unexecution notification mode indicating that sorting has not been executed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to distinguish between sorting performed and sorting not performed, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the sorting order of the hold display mode, and it is possible to further prevent confusion about the game. ..

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, when the predetermined condition is met, the hold display modes sorted by the sorting means in a different order from the established order are individually displayed. The sorting notification means has a sorting identification means, and the sorting notification means is displayed in a sorting order different from the established order based on the information identified by the sorting identification means as the executed notification mode. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is informed in a display mode indicating that the display mode is the hold display mode.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display modes rearranged by the rearrangement unit in an order different from the established order are individually identified by the rearrangement identification unit. As the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification unit notifies the display mode indicating the hold display mode displayed in the rearrangement order different from the established order based on the information identified by the rearrangement identification unit. .. Thereby, the player can easily recognize the pending display mode in which the variation start order is different from the established order, and more easily recognize the order in which the pending display mode is displayed.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the hold display means, in addition to the formation order hold display area for displaying the hold display mode in the formation order, and the formation order hold display area, the dynamic display. And a start order hold display area for displaying the hold display mode in a display start order, and the hold display mode is displayed in the established order hold display area while the predetermined condition is satisfied. With this as a trigger, in a state in which the display of the hold display mode in the establishment order hold display area is maintained, the dynamic display rearranged in the start order hold display area is started in the order of starting the dynamic display. A gaming machine J5, characterized in that a hold display mode is displayed.

The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4. That is, they are displayed in the established order hold display area of the hold display means in the order in which the hold display mode is established. In addition to the established order hold display area, the hold display modes are displayed in the start order hold display area of the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. While the hold display mode is displayed in the succession order hold display area, the display of the hold display mode in the succession order hold display area is maintained when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the start order hold display area is displayed. The hold display mode is displayed in the order sorted by the sorting means. As a result, the player can simultaneously identify the hold display mode before the rearrangement and after the rearrangement is performed, and can easily determine how the rearrangement is performed.

On any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, J1 to J5, the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit. On the basis of the fact, the temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed, and the remaining dynamic of the first or second identification information being temporarily stopped after the privilege game is finished. Re-dynamic display start means for dynamically displaying the display mode again, and based on that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the dynamic display start time information The deciding means dynamically sets time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes a dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that the time information until the start of display is determined again and stored in the holding information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, and J1 to J5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first or second identification information in the dynamic display is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating the hit. Then, after the bonus game is finished, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information which is temporarily stopped is dynamically displayed again by the re-dynamic display starting means. The first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information display means starts the dynamic display based on the display of the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit. The time information until the dynamic display start from the end of the privilege game as the starting point is redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, and is stored in the pending information storage means. In this way, when the privilege game is started, the time information until the dynamic display is started is re-determined as the time information starting from the end of the privilege game. Even when the specified conditions are satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started accurately.

In the gaming machine K1, the dynamic display start time information determination means is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit. Corresponding to the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the stored suspension information, with respect to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information. Based on the dynamic display mode, the time information until the dynamic display starts from the end of the privilege game as a starting point is respectively redetermined, while the first or second identification displayed in the display mode showing the hit For the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the information, based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored hold information, a dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game A gaming machine K2, characterized in that the time until the start is redetermined.

According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1. That is, when the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating a hit, it is stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means. Based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored suspension information, the pending information is dynamically set from the end of the privilege game. The time information until the display is started is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. On the other hand, with respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage unit corresponding to the first or second identification information displayed in the display mode showing the hit, the corresponding dynamic display based on the stored hold information. Based on the aspect, the time until the dynamic display starts from the end of the privilege game as the starting point is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. Therefore, the hold information corresponding to the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information that is not temporarily stopped are distinguished from each other, and the time information until the start of the dynamic display is determined. Time information until the start can be determined.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the holding information storage means determines the win/loss determination information and the dynamic display mode determination used in the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/loss determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information having at least dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the means is stored, and the first or the first corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area Before the second identification information can be dynamically displayed, based on the normal hold information, the win/fail judgment result by the win/fail determination means, the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the dynamic display start in advance. The time information is determined by the time information determining means and stored as the rearrangement information, while the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, and the rearrangement information is displayed as the rearrangement information. The stored time information has a rearrangement storage area that is updated and stored with the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, and the first or second hit determination When the condition is newly established, the normal hold stored in the newly established normal hold storage area is based on the time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. The order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the information and the normal suspension information previously stored in the normal suspension storage area is started is determined, and the sequence is arranged in the order. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that it has a sorting order determination means for storing it in a replacement pending storage area.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second win/loss judgment condition, the win/no judgment information used for win/no judgment by the win/fail determination means and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means. The normal pending information having at least and is stored in the normal pending storage area of the pending information storage means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal suspension information stored in the normal suspension storage area can be dynamically displayed, the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is determined based on the normal suspension information. The dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means and the time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored in the rearrangement storage area of the reservation information storage means as rearrangement information. On the other hand, the time information stored as the rearrangement information is changed to the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating the hit. It is updated and stored in the rearrangement pending storage area. When the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly satisfied, it is stored in the newly established normal hold storage area based on the time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. The rearrangement order determining unit determines the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal suspension information and the normal suspension information previously stored in the normal suspension storage area is started. The order is stored in the rearrangement pending storage area. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the sorting order can be processed separately, and the processing for determining the sorting order can be easily performed. Further, even when the privilege game is started, the time information starting from the end of the privilege game is updated, so that the rearrangement can be easily executed even during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine K3, the sort order determining means corresponds to each sort information stored ahead of the sort pending storage area when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied during the privilege game. Based on the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time determination means, the normal hold information stored in the newly established normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area are stored. The order in which the dynamic display is started from the end of the privilege game of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to each of the normal hold information is determined, and the order is determined. A gaming machine K4, which is stored in the rearrangement storage area.

According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3. That is, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied during the privilege game, the time re-determined by the dynamic display start time determining means corresponding to each sort information stored in the sort reservation storage area ahead. First identification information and second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the newly established normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area based on the information. The order in which the dynamic display is started, starting from the end of the privilege game with, is determined by the sorting order determining means, and the order is stored in the sorting pending storage area.

Therefore, even with respect to the first or second win/loss determination conditions established during the privilege game, the order of starting more accurate dynamic display is determined, and the suspended display mode is set in the order of starting accurate dynamic display. Can be rearranged. Therefore, even if the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied during the bonus game, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the display means, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first win/fail judgment condition. Based on the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined, and based on the fulfillment of the second win/loss determination condition, the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is dynamically set. Until the display is started, the main judgment information is win/fail judgment information about the win/fail judgment by the win/no judgment means and the dynamic display determination information about the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Main hold information storage means that distinguishably stores the order information in which the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the hold information and the win/loss determination condition that is satisfied are the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition, and A main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means, The sub-control information storing means stores the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the sub-hold information, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, First hit/miss judgment stored in the sub-hold information storage means While distinguishing the subordination hold information between the decision condition and the second propriety decision condition, the order of establishment of the propriety decision condition that is the combination of the first propriety decision condition and the second propriety decision condition is identified for each subordinate hold information A dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means based on the pending display means displayed in a possible pending display mode and the secondary pending information stored in the secondary pending information storage means. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate display mode discriminating means for discriminating the subordinate hold information storage means, the first or second identification being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means. Based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the information and the dynamic display mode determined by the slave dynamic display mode determining means for each slave holding information previously stored in the slave holding information storage means, a new slave is displayed. Dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information is the dynamic display start, and storing the time information in the secondary suspension information storage means, Based on each of the time information stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is triggered when the condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L1 having a sorting means for sorting in an order of starting dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine L1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. The first hold determination information and the second hold determination condition are combined for each slave hold information while distinguishing the hold information from the first hold determination condition and the second hold determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the subordinate hold information storage means are stored in the subordinate hold information storage means first. The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining unit for each slave hold information. The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the slave holding information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit on the display means is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first or second win/fail. On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are distinguished from each other, and a succession signal for notifying that the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied is generated, On the basis of the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the succession signal generating means for outputting to the slave control means in the order of satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode, and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition;
In the case where the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/loss determination condition is started to be dynamically displayed, the win/loss determination means relates to win/loss determination. The win/fail judgment information and the dynamic display determination information relating to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means are used as the main hold information, and the win/fail judgment conditions corresponding to the main hold information are satisfied and the order information is satisfied. Main hold information storage means that stores whether the win/fail judgment condition is the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition, and that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means. Based on the stored main hold information, a main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information stored therein, the slave control means having received the establishment signal. On the basis of the above, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/absence determination condition that triggered the generation of the success signal becomes dynamically displayable, information on the number of the success signals received is displayed. , It is possible to distinguish the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition indicated by the win signal, and to identify the win order of win/win judgment conditions that is the combination of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the sub-holding number storage means and the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means. While distinguishing each sub-holding number information, the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions that combine the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition for each sub-hold number information are displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode Hold display means, a sub-hold information storage means for storing information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as sub-hold information based on the reception of the main hold information signal, and the sub-hold information. A slave display information discriminating means for discriminating the dynamic display manner determined by the dynamic display manner deciding means of the main control means based on the slave holding information stored in the storage means, When the sub-hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and first stored in the sub-hold information storage means. The first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information is dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining unit for each of the slave hold information that has been set. Decide the time information until Then, the dynamic display start time information deciding means to be stored in the subordinate hold information storing means and the subordinate hold information storing means by the dynamic display start time information deciding means upon the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a rearrangement means for rearranging the hold display modes displayed on the hold display means in the order in which the dynamic display is started based on the stored time information. Gaming machine L2.

According to the description of the gaming machine L2, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The main control means distinguishes between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met. The establishment signal for notifying is generated by the establishment signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the order of establishment of the first or second hit/miss determination condition. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the sub-control unit, based on the reception of the establishment signal, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/miss determination condition that triggers the generation of the establishment signal can be dynamically displayed. The information regarding the number of the received establishment signals distinguishes the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition from the establishment signal, and the acceptance/rejection determination condition obtained by combining the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition. Are stored in the sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so as to be identifiable. The slave control means distinguishes the slave hold number information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition on the basis of the slave hold number information stored in the slave hold number storage means, and for each slave hold number information. In addition, the order of satisfaction of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, is performed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the secondary display mode determination means based on the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means. In the slave control means, when the slave hold information is newly stored in the slave hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the slave hold information storage means first. The first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining means for each slave hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

The gaming machine L1 or L2, further comprising a condition distribution means for assisting the establishment of the first win/win judgment condition and the second win/win judgment condition alternately.

The gaming machine L3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2. That is, the allocating means assists in that the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are alternately established. This makes it easier to equally establish the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be played in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, when the rearrangement means receives the main hold information signal and the hold information is stored in the subhold information storage means, the rearrangement information is stored in the subhold information storage means. Based on the time information corresponding to each sub-hold information previously stored, of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established sub-hold information and the sub-hold information previously stored. A gaming machine L4, characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the sub-hold information storage means in association with the sub-hold information.

The gaming machine L4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3. That is, when the main holding information signal is received and the holding information is stored in the sub-holding information storage means, based on the time information corresponding to each sub-holding information previously stored in the sub-holding information storage means. Then, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is related to each slave hold information. It is stored in the subordinate holding information storage means by the rearrangement means. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated every time the subordinate hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even if there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display modes in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and to notify the player of the accurate dynamic display start order. You can

Any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rearranging means, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operating means is operated, A gaming machine L5 characterized by rearranging the hold display modes.

According to the game described in the gaming machine L5, the following effect is produced in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means as if the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to perform rearrangement in the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to inform the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the exact dynamic display start order. You can

The rearrangement means rearranges the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means when the predetermined signal is satisfied when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received. The gaming machine L6 according to any one of claims 1 to 4.

According to the game described in the gaming machine L6, the following effect is produced in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4. That is, when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received from the main control means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when a new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the exact dynamic display start order.

In order for the main control means to carry out the lottery whether or not to judge whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after executing the privilege game are shifted to the special game state which is more likely to hit than usual. Of the lottery information is acquired based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, and the main hold information corresponding to the met judgment condition is stored. In this case, there is a game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the main hold information storage means in association with the main hold information, and the slave control means is stored in the slave hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each slave hold information can be dynamically displayed, each slave hold information is supported based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. Perform a pre-judgment in which the gaming state when the first or second identification information becomes dynamically displayable is judged according to the lottery information in advance to judge whether or not it is the special gaming state, It has pre-engagement determination means for storing the result in the slave hold information storage means in association with each of the slave hold information, and the driven display mode determination means of the slave control means stores it in the slave hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the subordinate hold information that has been registered can be dynamically displayed, the pre-engagement determination unit stores the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the subordinate hold information storage unit and the dynamic determination. 7. The gaming machine L7 according to claim 1, wherein the dynamic display mode is determined based on display determination information.

According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to hit the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after executing the privilege game than in the normal time The lottery information of is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss determination condition. Further, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and the main hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is associated with the main hold information, and the lottery information is the gaming state lottery means. Is stored in the main holding information storage means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display start time information determination means determines until the first or second identification information corresponding to each slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means can start dynamic display. Based on the time information, the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to each subordinate hold information can be dynamically displayed is the special game state by the game state lottery means according to the lottery information. A preliminary judgment is performed by the preliminary judgment means to make a judgment and to judge whether or not the judgment is successful. Then, the result is stored in the sub-holding storage means by the pre-determination means in association with each sub-holding information. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, the pre-engagement determination means stores the pre-determination determination in the sub-hold information storage means. Based on the result and the dynamic display determination information, the dynamic display mode is discriminated by the subordinate display discriminating means of the subordinate control means. As a result, the new follow-up information is stored, and even if the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the success/failure determination is performed. Be seen. Therefore, the dynamic display time information can be determined in advance on the basis of the correct hit determination result, and the dynamic display start order can be determined even when a new hit determination condition is satisfied next.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Condition distribution means for assisting in alternately establishing a condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, and a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means. Until the holding storage means for storing as a right to play the first or second lottery game and the condition distribution means, next, it is assisted to establish which of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. And a discrimination result notifying means for notifying the player of information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result of the discriminant discrimination means. Characteristic gaming machine M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The condition allocation means assists in that the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions are alternately established. When the first or second winning/disabling determination condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the pending storage means. Further, the established condition identifying means identifies which of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is in a state in which the condition sorting means is in a state in which the condition assigning means is in a state of assisting the satisfaction. Based on the identification result of the satisfaction condition identifying means, the identification result informing means informs the player of information indicating the identification result. As a result, the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition are easily established evenly, the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and the first lottery game is performed. It is possible to prevent one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored up to the upper limit number in advance. Therefore, although the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored up to the upper limit number, respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that one or more rights are generated and the right is invalidated. it can. In addition, the identification result notifying means notifies the state of the sorting means to the next condition to be fulfilled. Even if the win/loss determination condition is satisfied, if the win/loss determination condition causes overflow, the player can play the game so that the win/loss determination condition is not satisfied, and the overflow can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, a game area and a game ball flowing down in the game area enter a first starting opening that satisfies the first win/fail condition and a game ball flowing down the game area. By having a ball, a second starting port that satisfies the second win/fail judgment condition is established, and the condition distributing means alternately inserts game balls into the first starting port and the second starting port. The game machine M2 according to claim 1, further comprising a game ball guide portion that assists in ball play.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first win/win condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second win/win condition is satisfied. It The game ball guiding section of the condition distribution means assists the game balls alternately entering the first starting port and the second starting port. This makes it easier for the player to alternately enter the game ball into the first start opening and the second start opening by letting the game ball flow down into the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Since the execution of and can be performed efficiently, many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine M2, the condition distribution means causes the game ball that flows down the game area to enter a ball entrance and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance through the game ball guide section. It has a first guide path for guiding to a first starting opening and a second guide path for guiding to the second starting opening through the game ball guiding section, and the game ball guiding section is provided with the After receiving the game ball that has entered from the ball entrance and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first guide path, the game ball that entered from the ball entrance is then described above. It is received in a state of being rotated in the first direction, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in a second direction which is the opposite direction to the first direction to guide the game ball to the second guide path. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball guiding section receives the game ball from the ball entrance of the condition distributing means, rotates it in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and moves the game ball to the first starting port through the first guide path. After being guided, the game ball that has entered from the ball entrance is received in a state of being rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction that is the opposite direction to the first direction. Then, the game ball is guided by the game ball guide portion to the second starting opening via the second guide path. As a result, it becomes possible to alternately guide the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening by using the common member, and to distribute the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening, respectively. As compared with the case where the game balls are provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be configured compactly.

In the gaming machine M3, the game ball guiding section of the condition distributing means is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. A first passive portion that receives a game ball that has entered the ball and rotates in a second direction to a predetermined angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance when rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. The second passive portion, which is arranged at a facing position, receives the game ball and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance, and receives the game ball. After rotating in two directions, before the game ball enters the ball entrance, it prevents the game ball from rotating in the first direction, or the second passive unit enters from the ball entrance. A rotation restricting portion that prevents the game ball from rotating in the second direction after receiving the ball in the first direction and rotating in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance. A gaming machine M4 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, the first passive portion receives the entered game ball and is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. The second passive portion receives the game ball that has entered, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. After the first passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may rotate in the first direction before the game ball next enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction, before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, it rotates in the second direction. This is hindered by the rotation restricting portion. As a result, after the game ball guiding unit rotates to guide the game ball to one guide path, the game ball will rotate in the other direction before the next game ball enters, and the next ball enters. It is possible to prevent a problem that the game ball is guided to the same guide path as the game ball that entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game balls entering the ball entrance to the first start opening and the second start opening more accurately and alternately, and equalize the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Can be stored in.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the establishment condition identifying means causes the condition distributing means to enter the next ball based on the game ball entering the first or second starting opening. A gaming machine M5 characterized by identifying a starting opening to assist.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine M5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines M2 to M4. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first or second starting opening, the starting opening that assists the condition distributing means to enter the next opening is identified by the establishment condition identifying means. Therefore, the player can recognize the starting opening to be assigned next, and the player can play the game while suppressing the invalid balls due to the overflow.

The establishment condition identifying means detects a state in which the game ball guiding section is rotated, and based on the detection result, the game ball guiding section causes the game ball to enter through a guide path to be guided next. A gaming machine M6 characterized by identifying a starting opening to be assisted.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine M6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M3 or M4. That is, the state in which the game ball guiding unit of the condition distribution means is rotated is detected, and based on the detection result, the game ball guiding unit guides the game ball next, so that the game ball enters the ball. The starting port assisted by is identified by the satisfaction condition identifying means. Therefore, the state of the condition distribution means can be accurately identified and notified, and the player can be notified of accurate information and the game can be played so as to suppress overflow.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the display means, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first win/fail judgment condition. Based on the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined, and based on the fulfillment of the second win/loss determination condition, the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is dynamically set. Until the display is started, the main judgment information is win/fail judgment information about the win/fail judgment by the win/no judgment means and the dynamic display determination information about the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Main hold information storage means for distinguishably storing the order information in which the win/loss judgment condition corresponding to the hold information and the win/no win judgment condition that are met are the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition; When the main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the above-mentioned Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main hold information is dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display determination information for each main hold information stored in the main hold information storage means. Main dynamic display start time stored in the main holding information storage means by determining the time information of Based on the information deciding means and the new main holding information stored in the main holding information storing means, the sub-control means stores information about the stored main holding information and time information corresponding to the main holding information. A main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the main hold information signal, and the sub-control means relates to information indicated by the main hold information signal based on the reception of the main hold information signal. Each sub-holding information while distinguishing the sub-holding information storage unit that stores information as sub-holding information and the sub-holding information of the first win/fail determination condition and the second win/fail determination condition stored in the sub-hold information storage unit. For each of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment condition, the order of satisfaction of win/fail judgment conditions is displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode, and a predetermined condition is met. On the basis of that, based on each time information determined by the main dynamic display start time information determining means indicated by the slave holding information stored in the slave holding information storage means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is displayed. A gaming machine N1 having a sorting means for sorting in the order of starting the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine N1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, when the main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the main hold information storage means first. The time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display determination information for each main hold information stored in It is determined by the display start time information determining means and stored in the subordinate holding information storage means. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of the stored main hold information and the time information corresponding to the main hold information. Is generated by the main holding information signal generating means. Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. The first hold determination information and the second hold determination condition are combined for each slave hold information while distinguishing the hold information from the first hold determination condition and the second hold determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are met is performed by the hold display means as a display in an identifiable hold display mode, and in the slave control means, the slave hold information storage means is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. Based on each time information determined by the main dynamic display start time information determining means indicated by the stored subordinate hold information, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means by the rearranging means in the order of starting the dynamic display. Sorted. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the display means, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first win/fail judgment condition. Based on the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined, and based on the fulfillment of the second win/loss determination condition, the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is dynamically set. Until the display is started, the main judgment information is win/fail judgment information about the win/fail judgment by the win/no judgment means and the dynamic display determination information about the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The order information in which the win/loss judgment condition corresponding to the hold information is satisfied and the win/fail judgment condition that is satisfied are the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are stored in a distinguishable manner, and are stored even when the power is off. And a main hold information for notifying the slave control means of the information about the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means. A main hold information signal generating means for generating a signal, and the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, holds the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal in the slave hold state. Subordinate hold information storage means for storing as information and its subordinate While distinguishing the sub-hold information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means, the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are set for each sub-hold information. Based on the hold display means for displaying the combined success/failure determination conditions in a distinguishable hold display mode and the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, the main control means is dynamically displayed. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate hold information storage unit and the subordinate display information discriminating unit for discriminating the dynamic display form decided by the form deciding unit, in the first or second display unit. Remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the motion discriminated by the slave display mode discriminating unit for each slave suspension information previously stored in the slave suspension information storage unit. Dynamic information stored in the slave hold information storage means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information is dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode. On the basis of the display start time information determining means and the establishment of the predetermined condition, the hold display is performed based on the time information stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means. A gaming machine N2, comprising: a rearrangement means for rearranging the hold display mode displayed on the means in an order in which the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine N2, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub-control means in accordance with an instruction from the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. The first hold determination information and the second hold determination condition are combined for each slave hold information while distinguishing the hold information from the first hold determination condition and the second hold determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the subordinate hold information storage means are stored in the subordinate hold information storage means first. The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining unit for each slave hold information. The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the slave holding information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/no win determination condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal includes a win/loss determination signal generating unit that generates a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination unit. The sub-control means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game on the basis of the first determination signal, and the second display of the determination result. A second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the second lottery game, and the win/no win judgment result by the win/loss judgment means is a hit, and the first or the second 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit on the display means is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first or second win/fail. On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are distinguished from each other, and a succession signal for notifying that the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied is generated, On the basis of the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the succession signal generation means for outputting to the slave control means in the order of satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and the identification information of the first identification information corresponding to the success/failure judgment condition that has been met Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition; When the 1st or 2nd hit/absence determination condition is satisfied, until the 1st or 2nd identification information corresponding to the satisfied hit/absence determination condition is dynamically displayed, the hit/damage determination related to the hit/miss determination by the hit/miss determination means. The information and the dynamic display determination information relating to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means are used as the main suspension information, and the order information and the success/failure determination that the success/failure determination conditions corresponding to the main suspension information are satisfied. Based on a main hold information storage unit that stores whether the condition is the first hit determination condition or the second hit determination condition, and the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage unit. Obey information about its stored main pending information A main holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying the controlling means, and the sub-control means is an opportunity to generate the establishment signal based on the reception of the establishment signal. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/miss determination condition can be dynamically displayed, information about the number of received success signals is provided as the first win/fail determination condition indicated by the success signal and the information. A secondary hold number storage means that distinguishes from the second win/fail judgment condition and stores the establishment order of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, as distinguishable hold number information in a distinguishable manner. And based on the slave hold number information stored in the slave hold number storage means, while distinguishing the slave hold number information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, each slave hold number. Receiving the main hold information signal and hold display means for displaying the order in which the match determination conditions, which are the first match determination condition and the second match determination condition for each information, are displayed in an identifiable hold display mode. On the basis of that, based on the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means for storing information about the main hold information indicated by the main-hold information as sub-hold information, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, When the secondary display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means, and the secondary suspension information is newly stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, The remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the slave display mode for each slave hold information previously stored in the slave hold information storage means. Based on the dynamic display mode determined by the determination means, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined, and the slave hold information is determined. The dynamic display start time information determining means to be stored in the storage means, and the respective times stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means upon the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine N3, comprising: a sorting means for sorting the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means in the order in which the dynamic display is started based on the information.

According to the gaming machine N3, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub-control means in accordance with an instruction from the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The main control means distinguishes between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met. The establishment signal for notifying is generated by the establishment signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the order of establishment of the first or second hit/miss determination condition. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the sub-control unit, based on the reception of the establishment signal, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/miss determination condition that triggers the generation of the establishment signal can be dynamically displayed. The information regarding the number of the received establishment signals distinguishes the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition from the establishment signal, and the acceptance/rejection determination condition obtained by combining the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition. Are stored in the sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so as to be identifiable. The slave control means distinguishes the slave hold number information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition on the basis of the slave hold number information stored in the slave hold number storage means, and for each slave hold number information. In addition, the order of satisfaction of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, is performed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the secondary display mode determination means based on the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means. In the slave control means, when the slave hold information is newly stored in the slave hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the slave hold information storage means first. The first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining means for each slave hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the main holding information storage means is configured to be able to retain data even when the power is off, and the main control means is the gaming machine when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. Main initial control execution means for executing the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of, and as one processing of the main initial control processing, based on the main hold information and the time information stored in the main hold information storage means. , A return data signal generating means for generating a return data signal and outputting it to the subordinate control means, the subordinate control means initializing the gaming machine when power is turned on to the gaming machine. In the secondary initial control executing means for executing the secondary initial control processing, and the secondary initial control processing executed by the secondary initial control executing means, the return data signal indicates based on the return data signal from the main control means. A gaming machine N4, further comprising: sub-holding information restoring means for storing information as sub-restoring holding information in the sub-holding information storage means.

The gaming machine N4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1. That is, the main hold information storage means of the main control means retains data even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation unit based on the main hold information and the time information stored in the main hold information storage unit, Is output. In the secondary control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the secondary initial control processing, which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the secondary initial control executing means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control executing means, the information indicated by the return data signal is returned as the secondary return pending information based on the return data signal from the main controlling means. Stored by the means. As a result, when the power is reapplied to the gaming machine after the power is cut off, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the sub-hold is held. The return storage information is stored according to the information storage means. Therefore, the data stored in the sub-hold information storage means can be returned to the state immediately before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the player can display the hold display mode that was displayed immediately before the power was turned off. Since the secondary return pending information is stored as the information based on the main pending information and the time information, even when the power is restored and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display modes are arranged in the order of starting to change. It can be displayed instead.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the main hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold data even when the power is off, and the main control means is provided when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A main initial control execution unit that executes a main initial control process that is an initial setting of the gaming machine; and as one process of the initial control process, stored in the main hold information storage unit with respect to the sub control unit. And a return data signal generating means for generating a return data signal based on the main holding information and outputting the return data signal to the slave control means, and the slave control means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the sub initial control execution means for executing the sub initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, and the sub initial control processing executed by the sub initial control execution means, based on the return data signal from the main control means. And a sub-hold information restoring means for storing the information indicated by the return data signal as sub-hold holding information in the sub-hold information storing means, a gaming machine N5.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine N5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N1 to N3. That is, the main hold information storage means of the main control means retains data even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation unit based on the main hold information stored in the main hold information storage unit and output to the sub control unit. In the secondary control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the secondary initial control processing, which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the secondary initial control executing means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control executing means, the information indicated by the return data signal is returned as the secondary return pending information based on the return data signal from the main controlling means. Stored by the means. As a result, when the power is reapplied to the gaming machine after the power is cut off, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the sub-hold is held. The return storage information is stored according to the information storage means. Therefore, the data stored in the sub-hold information storage means can be returned to the state before the power is cut off in the state immediately before the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the player can display the hold display mode that was displayed immediately before the power was turned off.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the sub-hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power is off, and the sub-hold information return means is provided from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is collated with the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and if it is determined that they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not coincide with each other, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the auxiliary hold information storage means as the auxiliary return hold information, the gaming machine N6.

According to the game described in the game machine N6, the following effect is produced in addition to the effect produced by the game machine N4 or N5. That is, the subordinate holding information storage means of the subordinate control means retains data even when the power is off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information restoring means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the auxiliary hold information storage means as the auxiliary return hold information. Therefore, the data in the pending information storage means can be updated according to more correct data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the correct hold display mode when the power is turned off.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the sub-hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power is off, and the sub-hold information return means is provided from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is compared with the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and if they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained, A game machine N7, characterized in that, when they do not match, the subordinate holding information storage means is initialized to be displayed in a holding display mode showing a temporary holding display mode.

The gaming machine N7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4 or N5. That is, the subordinate holding information storage means of the subordinate control means retains data even when the power is off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information restoring means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the secondary hold information storage means is initialized, and a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode is displayed. Therefore, by displaying the temporary hold display mode, the clerk of the gaming shop or the like can recognize that the data stored in the sub-hold information storage means is abnormal. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from displaying the hold display mode on the basis of incorrect information, and prevent the player from being confused.

In any of the gaming machines N5 to N7, the dynamic display start time information determining means corresponds to the stored slave return holding information based on that the slave return holding information is stored in the slave holding information storage means. A gaming machine N8, which determines time information to be stored and stores it in the sub-hold information storage means.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine N8 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N5 to N7. That is, in the slave control means, the time information corresponding to the stored slave return holding information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means based on the storage of the slave return holding information in the slave holding information storage means. Are stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Therefore, after returning from the power failure, it is possible to rearrange and display the hold display modes corresponding to the stored subordinate return hold information in the order in which they start changing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by notifying the player of the order in which the fluctuation starts even after the power is cut off.

In any of the gaming machines N4 to N8, the rearrangement means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the subordinate return suspension information is stored in the subordinate suspension information storage means, and A gaming machine N9, characterized in that the hold display modes are rearranged and displayed.

The gaming machine N9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N4 to N8. That is, in the slave control means, when the slave return suspension information is stored in the slave suspension information storage means, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the suspension display mode is in the order of starting the dynamic display. It is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means. Therefore, by returning from power-off and rearranging the display modes in the order in which the dynamic display is started, the order in which the dynamic display is started can be recognized as soon as the game is restarted, and the game can be understood. It can be done easily.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is determined from a group of dynamic display modes composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes, and the second determination of win or failure is made. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition based on the establishment of the means, from a dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes. A notification for determining, based on the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means, which one of the first identification information and the second identification information that is dynamically displayed should be notified to the player. A gaming machine O1 characterized by having a destination determining means and a visual notifying means for notifying the player of the identification information determined by the notification destination determining means so as to be visually recognized by the player.

According to the gaming machine O1, based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. On the basis of the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes. Determined by means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is dynamically displayed from a dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes. It is determined by the mode determining means. Of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed, which of the identification information is notified to the player to be visually recognized is determined by the notification destination determination means based on the result of the hit determination. The identification information determined by the notification destination determining unit is notified by the visual notifying unit so that the player can visually recognize the identification information. As a result, the identification information to be visually recognized is determined based on the result of the judgment, so that the player can easily discriminate the identification information to be visually recognized, and can easily play the game. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine O1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the win/fail judgment result of the win/fail determination means, and the dynamic display mode group includes the win/fail determination means. The result of the judgment is configured to include a high-expectation degree dynamic display mode that is more easily determined in the case of a hit than in the case of a deviation, and the notification destination determination unit is the dynamic display mode determination unit. Based on the determination of the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined as the notification destination of the first or second identification information for which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine O2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode group is configured to include a high-expectation degree dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined when the hit determination result of the hit determination unit is a hit than in the case of a deviation. Based on the determination that the high-expectation dynamic display mode has been determined by the dynamic-display-mode determining means, the first or second identification information on which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed is the notification destination. It is determined by the notification destination determining means. Therefore, by notifying the player to visually recognize the high-expectation dynamic display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the high-expectation dynamic display mode. On the basis of the above, the dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the determined high expectation dynamic display mode is completed. A gaming machine O3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is made based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determination means determines that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode. The dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the displayed high-expectation dynamic display mode ends. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high expectation dynamic display mode. Based on the above, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed, the dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended. A gaming machine O4 having a dynamic display extending means.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determining means determines that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determination is made. The dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended by the dynamic display extension means until the dynamic display of the displayed high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, a voice output unit that outputs a preset voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode, and the identification information notified by the notification destination determination unit are the first identification information. Volume change means for mute the voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information or to set the volume to a volume lower than the normal volume based on the determination of either one of the second identification information. A gaming machine O5 characterized by having one.

The gaming machine O5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4. That is, the voice output means outputs the voice preset in correspondence with the dynamic display mode. Based on that the identification information notified by the notification destination determining means is determined to be either the first identification information or the second identification information, the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is muted or The volume changing means sets the volume to a volume lower than the normal volume. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being more concentrated on the identification information determined by the notification destination determination means, and to miss the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination On the basis of the satisfaction of the condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is based on the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means, and when the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means is successful , Determined based on a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more easily determined than in the case of deviation, and established based on the establishment of the second win/defeat determination means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition based on the win/no judgment result of the win/no judgment means from the dynamic display mode group; 2 When the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the satisfaction of the win/fail judgment condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode is set. For identification information different from the identification information that is dynamically displayed, duplication determination means that determines whether or not the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined, and the duplication determination means, Also when it is determined that the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined, the high-expectation dynamic display mode corresponding to either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed. A dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of the dynamic display, and a gaming machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is more likely to be determined when the win/loss judgment result by the win/loss determination means is hit than when it is out. The dynamic display mode determination means determines from a dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail determination condition from the dynamic display mode group. When the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition is the high expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high expectation dynamic For the identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the display mode, the duplication determination unit determines whether the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the high-expectation dynamic display mode has been determined for different identification information, it corresponds to either the first identification information or the second identification information. The start of the high-expectation dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Thereby, even when the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the start of one high-expectation dynamic display mode is delayed, At the same time, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode from being started. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the high-expectation degree dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed first and can play the game. As a result, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine O6, the dynamic display delay means is longer than the end of the high expectation dynamic display mode in which the identification information of the one whose start of dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed, A gaming machine O7, which delays the start of the dynamic display of the high-expectancy dynamic display mode in the identification information of the one whose start is delayed.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the high expectation in the identification information of which the start of the dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed, and the high expectation in the identification information of the one that delays the start of the dynamic display longer than the end of the dynamic display mode. The start of the dynamic display in the dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the delayed high-expectation dynamic display mode is started after the dynamic display of one of the high-expectation dynamic display modes is finished, so that the player It is possible to play a game by focusing on the high-expectation dynamic display mode. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

In the gaming machine O6 or O7, there is provided visual recognition notifying means for notifying the player of the identification information different from the identification information whose start of dynamic display has been delayed by the dynamic display delay means. A gaming machine O8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O6 or O7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the visual notification means notifies the player of the identification information different from the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Therefore, the player can easily determine which identification information should be focused on the dynamic display. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a hit, the first or second game machine. 2 When the win/fail judgment condition is satisfied, the first or second corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition that has been satisfied until the first display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is started. Suspension information storage means for storing suspension information having at least judgment information of success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means executed when identification information can be dynamically displayed. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed based on the hold information being stored, whether the hold information is valid or not. Based on the advance hit determination means for performing the judgment in advance and the hit determination result by the advance hit determination means, the advance notification for determining whether or not to notify that the result of the advance judgment was hit A gaming machine P1 characterized by having a deciding means and a pre-reading notifying means for notifying the player of the winning/non-judgment result of the prior winning/non-winning judgment means when the prior notification deciding means decides ..

According to the gaming machine P1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the first or second identification information corresponding to the win/fail determination condition that has been satisfied corresponds to the win/fail determination condition that has been satisfied until the dynamic display is started. Suspension information having at least the success/failure determination information of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination unit executed when the first or second identification information becomes dynamically displayable is stored in the suspension information storage unit. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed based on the fact that the hold information is newly stored in the hold information storage means. The advance/rejection determination means determines in advance whether or not the hold information is valid. Based on the hit/nozzle determination result by the pre-win/no-judgment means, the pre-notification determination means determines whether or not to notify that the pre-judgment result is a win. When the advance notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the preliminary determination is a win, the look-ahead notification means notifies the player of the win/fail judgment result of the advance win/failure determination means. As a result, since the notification result is notified in advance before the result of the determination result is notified by the identification information, the result of the determination result can be notified to the player earlier and the expectation for the jackpot can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined based on the fulfillment of the first win/loss determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second win/loss determination means, The holding information storage means has a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition, and the suspension information storage means holds the first or second win/loss determination condition. In addition, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the established hit/miss determination condition is dynamically displayed, the suspension information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second hit/absence determination condition is satisfied and new holding information is stored, the remaining dynamic display of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display is stored. The time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined based on the time and the previously stored dynamic display mode of each hold information. Then, the dynamic display start time information determining means to be stored in the holding information storage means, and the determination of whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after the privilege game execution means has executed the privilege game, The lottery information for lottery whether or not to shift to a special game state that is more likely to be won than usual is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second win/win determination condition, and the first or second win/loss determination condition. When the hold information corresponding to the established determination condition is stored, the game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information is provided. , The prior win determination means, based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, whether the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each hold information is the special game state. A gaming machine P2, characterized in that the judgment is made based on the lottery information, and whether or not the game is won is made in advance.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/loss judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determining means determines until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail determination condition is dynamically displayed. Suspension information having at least information regarding the dynamic display mode is stored in the suspension information storage means. When the first or second hit determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed is stored first. The dynamic display start time information determining means determines the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information becomes the dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode for each pending information. And stored in the holding information storage means. A lottery for selecting whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to hit the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game. The information is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss determination condition. Further, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, it is determined by lottery information whether the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the advance winning/disabling determination means is determined. According to the above, the acceptance/rejection determination is executed in advance. As a result, the game state at the start of fluctuation is determined in advance, and based on the result, the win/fail determination is performed in advance, so that more accurate advance/non-win determination can be performed. Therefore, the player can be notified of accurate information in advance, and the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine P2, when the result of the prior determination is determined to be notified by the prior notification determining means, and the result of the success/failure determination executed based on the established success/failure determination condition is a success. In the above, the dynamic display mode determination means has notified that the notification determination means has been hit as a dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition. A gaming machine P3, characterized in that the first or second identification information corresponding to the information determines an extended dynamic display mode that is longer than the start of dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the advance notification determination means that the result of the preliminary determination is a hit, and the result of the success/failure determination executed based on the established success/failure determination condition is a success, The display mode determination means, as the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition, is the first or the first corresponding to the hold information which notifies that the notification determination means has hit. The extended dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, which is longer than the period in which the 2 identification information starts the dynamic display. Here, after being notified that the result of the pre-determination is a hit by the look-ahead informing means, the lottery game based on the win/loss determination condition that has been established thereafter, the identification information is stopped and displayed earlier than the informed lottery game. Then, when the game state is changed, the result of the preliminary determination may change. Then, as a result of changing the result of the pre-determination, there may be a problem that the pre-reading notification means does not result in a hit even though the hit is notified. However, since the extended dynamic display mode is determined, the identification information corresponding to the suspension information notified in advance of the winning is dynamically displayed first. Therefore, since the dynamic display is started in the same gaming state as the gaming state determined when the preliminary determination is performed, the result of the preliminary determination and the determination at the time of starting the dynamic display can be matched. Therefore, there is an effect that the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means and the second identification information for indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means are dynamic. Second display means to be displayed, display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit, the player A privilege game execution means for giving an advantageous privilege game, and when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the win/win condition determination condition that has been met is Until the dynamic display is started, a reservation information storage unit that stores reservation information including at least judgment information relating to the judgment of the established first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition, and the hold information storage unit. The first and second identification information and the second identification information are stored in the holding information, respectively, and the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in relation to each other. And a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a fusion dynamic display mode for notifying the result of judgment of the first lottery game and the second lottery game by dynamically displaying in a mode. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine Q1, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the first win/no judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. When the first or second win/win judgment condition is met, the first win/win judgment condition or the first win/win judgment condition that is satisfied until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is started. (2) Hold information having at least hit/miss determination information related to the hit/no hit determination is stored in the hold information storage means. The holding information storage means stores the holding information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, and the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically associated with each other. The dynamic display mode determination means determines a fusion dynamic display mode for notifying the result of the determination whether the first lottery gaming machine and the second lottery game are played by dynamically displaying in the display mode. Thus, the fusion dynamic display mode makes it possible to easily determine at a time the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player that the determination result cannot be identified by the dynamic display of the win/loss determination results of the first lottery game and the second lottery game independently.

In the gaming machine Q1, the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed when the hold information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are respectively stored in the hold information storage means. Fusion determination means for determining whether the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied is provided, and the dynamic display mode determination means is configured to perform the fusion when the fusion determination condition is determined to be satisfied. While determining the dynamic display mode, when the fusion determination condition is determined to be unsatisfied by the fusion determination means, the determination result corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is met based on the satisfaction of the first win/defeat determination condition A dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode of the first identification information and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition are independent of each other A gaming machine Q2 characterized by being determined as.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the fusion dynamic condition for dynamically displaying the fusion dynamic display mode has been established when the suspension information storage means stores the suspension information of each of the first win/defeat determination condition and the second win/defeat determination condition. It is discriminated by the fusion discriminating means. When the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, the fusion dynamic display mode is determined by the fusion dynamic display mode determination means. On the other hand, if the fusion determination unit determines that the fusion dynamic condition is not satisfied, the first display of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first win/win determination condition. And the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition are determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as independent dynamic display modes based on the satisfaction of the second win/no decision condition. It Accordingly, even when the fusion dynamic display mode cannot be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display modes of the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed, respectively, and thus the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Until it becomes possible, it is possible to prevent the problem that the lottery game is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the dynamic display according to the state of the game to the player.

In the gaming machine Q1 or 2, the fusion dynamic display mode is composed of a first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode, respectively, in synchronization with each other, respectively. ..

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the fusion dynamic display mode is configured by the first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and the second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. The first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are synchronously determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. As a result, the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are determined in synchronization, so that the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are started at the same timing. Easy to configure. Therefore, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in a dynamic display mode in which they are associated with each other, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of each other from deviating from that set. Therefore, the fusion dynamic display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be dynamically displayed, and the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q3, when it is determined by the fusion determination means that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold information storage means are set. It has a synchronization adjusting means for assisting the dynamic display mode determining means to determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode based on the corresponding hold information at the synchronized timing. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the fusion determination means that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, the first determination result based on the hold information corresponding to the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The synchronization adjusting means assists the dynamic display manner determining means to determine the first fusion dynamic display manner and the second fusion dynamic display manner at the synchronized timing. Accordingly, the dynamic display mode determination means can more easily determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode at the synchronized timing. Therefore, by dynamically displaying the first dynamic display mode and the second dynamic display mode at the synchronized timing, the dynamic display related to the first lottery game and the second lottery game was started at the same time. This can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition The first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means and the second identification information for indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means are dynamic. Second display means to be displayed, display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit, the player A privilege game executing means for giving an advantageous privilege game, and based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, the game state after the privilege game given by the privilege game executing means is set. A game state determining means for determining whether to shift to a normal game state or a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; The lottery monitoring means for determining whether or not the first or second win/loss determination condition is determined to be transferred to the normal game state by the game state determining means, and the lottery monitoring means for satisfying the condition. When it is determined that the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied, a bonus delay means for delaying the start of the bonus game corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition that is determined to satisfy the condition, A gaming machine R1 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine R1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, the gaming state after the bonus game given by the bonus game executing means is the normal gaming state and the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The game state determining means determines to which of the following. When the special gaming state is in effect, the lottery monitoring means determines that the first or second win/loss determination condition is determined by the win/loss determination means and the game state determination means determines to shift to the normal gaming state. It When it is determined by the lottery monitoring means that the first or second win/loss determination condition that satisfies the condition is satisfied, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition that is determined to satisfy the condition. It is delayed by the bonus game delay means. As a result, even if the player wins the game when shifting to the normal game state, the game is executed in the special game state until the bonus game is executed, so that the player can play the game in the special game state for a longer time. Can be done. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine R1, while one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being dynamically displayed, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means with the other identification information, the one of the one is displayed. Privilege game carry-over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the identification information until the other privilege game is completed, and the result of judgment whether or not the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the completion of the privilege game A gaming machine R2, characterized in that, regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game, a winning/unwinning determination maintaining means for maintaining the winning/unwinning determination result determined in the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display.

The gaming machine R2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1. That is, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means with the other identification information during the dynamic display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining movement of the one identification information is performed. The special display is carried over by the special game carry-over means until the other special game is finished. Then, the result of the judgment of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the end of the privilege game is judged by the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game. The judgment result is maintained by the judgment determination maintaining means.

As a result, during the special game state, while the start of the privilege game that is a transition to the normal game state is delayed, the determination in the special game state is maintained for the lottery game whose dynamic display is started. Therefore, even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage that would be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new winning while the bonus game is delayed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, at least the normal dynamic display mode and the normal mode. Determined according to the establishment of a dynamic display start condition from a dynamic display aspect group configured by an extended dynamic display aspect having a dynamic display time longer than that of the dynamic display aspect, and based on the establishment of the second hit/absence determining means. And a dynamic display mode deciding means for deciding a dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition in accordance with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group, and the privilege delaying means, The gaming machine R3, which delays the start of the privilege game by causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine R3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2. That is, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, and at least the dynamic display time is longer than the normal dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. Is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group configured by the long extended dynamic display mode. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by means. Then, by causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode, the start of the privilege game is delayed by the privilege delay means. Therefore, since the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed even while the start of the bonus game is delayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the delayed time.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the first established condition is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is satisfied. On-hold information storage means for storing on-hold information having at least the win/fail judgment information related to the hit/no hit judgment of the first or second hit/no hit judgment condition and the game status information related to the game status determined by the game status determination means; Based on the fact that the hold information is newly stored in the storage means, the game state determined as the result of the judgment of hitting corresponding to the holding information is determined before or after the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. It has a preliminary judgment means for judging from information and the game state information, and the lottery monitoring means, based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means, the first or second winning/judging judgment condition which satisfies the condition. The privilege delay means stores, in the reserved information storage means, the hold information corresponding to the first or second winning/disabling judgment condition which is determined by the lottery monitoring means to satisfy the condition. On the basis of the fact that the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, with respect to the same hit/damage determination condition stored in the holding information storage unit prior to the judged hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine R4, wherein the extended dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means.

The gaming machine R4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R3. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is met, the win/fail judgment of the met first or second win/loss judgment condition is made. On-hold information storing means stores at least hold information having at least a hit/miss determination information related to the above and a game state related to the game state determined by the game state determining means. Based on the fact that the hold information is newly stored in the hold information storage means, the game state determined as the result by the critic corresponding to the hold information is the hit/miss judgment information before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. And the game state information is used for determination by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result of the advance determination means, it is determined by the lottery monitoring means whether the first or second win/fail determination condition that satisfies the condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the hold information corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition that the lottery monitoring means determines that meets the conditions is stored in the hold information storage means, the hold information precedes the determined win/loss determination condition. The privilege delay means causes the dynamic display manner determination means to determine the extended dynamic display manner according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition for the same hit/absence determination condition stored in the storage means. As a result, even when the pending information to be dynamically displayed is stored prior to the stored pending information that is to be transferred to the normal gaming state, when the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, the pending information is also stored before the pending information. Since the extended dynamic display mode is determined as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the held information being held, it is possible to delay the start of the privilege game corresponding to the held information, which is a point of shifting to the more normal gaming state. Therefore, even when the winning/disabling determination condition for shifting to the normal game state is established during the special game state and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the player is in the special game state for a longer time. A game can be played.

In the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the privilege delay means corresponds to one of the first and second winning/disabling determination conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means. Is stored in the holding information storage means, if the result of the judgment is hit by the pre-judgment means, and if the other judgment condition of the other is judged to be decided in the special game state is newly established. , The start of the privilege game corresponding to the suspension information of the other winning/disabling determination condition which is the transition to the newly established special game state, and the transition to the normal game state stored in the suspension information storage means. The gaming machine R5, which is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the pending information.

The gaming machine R5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4. That is, while the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second win/fail judgment conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means is stored in the hold information storage means, the win/fail judgment result is judged by the pre-determination means. In the case where the other winning/judging determination condition that is determined to determine the special gaming state is newly established, the privilege corresponding to the hold information of the winning/discarding determination condition that is a transition to the newly established special gaming state The start of the game is delayed by the privilege delay means rather than the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information that is to be transferred to the normal game state stored in the hold information storage means. As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the normal game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the special game state is executed, and thus even after the two privilege games are executed. The player can be allowed to play a game in the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and it is possible to suppress the expectation for the jackpot.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/no win determination condition. On the basis of the result, the first win/loss determination signal has win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating second win/loss determination signals based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means, The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the first lottery game, and based on the second win/loss judgment signal. , A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game, and the result of the determination of the result of the determination of success is a hit, and hits the first or second display means. When the first or second identification information indicating is displayed in a stopped state, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is given, and the main control unit determines that the win/loss determination unit determines that the winning combination is a win. Whether the gaming state after the bonus game is the first jackpot for shifting to the first gaming state or the second jackpot for shifting to the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state Based on whether the first or second win/win determination condition is met, whether the hit is the first jackpot or the second jackpot. Predetermination means for determining whether or not it is a hit before the dynamic display start condition, which is the condition for starting the dynamic display, by the identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition, and the predetermination means Based on the result of the determination, the preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information regarding the determination result, and the preliminary determination signal generation means for outputting to the secondary control means. , The sub-control means, on the basis of receiving the advance determination signal, until the dynamic display start condition of the win/fail determination condition corresponding to the advance determination information indicated by the received advance determination signal is satisfied, Based on the sub-hold information storage unit that stores the pre-determination information and the pre-determination information stored in the sub-hold information storage unit, it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information indicating that the first big hit is stored. The secondary monitoring means and the secondary monitoring means Whether or not to notify the player of the game state transition information related to the preliminary determination information determined to be the first jackpot based on the determination that the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot is to be stored is stored. And a notification means for notifying the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information when it is determined that the player is notified by the advance notification determination means. And a gaming machine S1.

According to the gaming machine S1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, when the hit determination means determines a hit, the gaming state after the bonus game is set to the first jackpot to be shifted to the first gaming state, or the player is more than the first gaming state. The second jackpot to be shifted to the second gaming state, which is advantageous to, is determined by the hit type determining means. Based on the fact that the first or second win/loss judgment condition is met, whether the hit is the first jackpot or the second jackpot is met. The identification information corresponding to the hit determination condition is determined by the pre-determination unit before the dynamic display start condition that is the condition for starting the dynamic display is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information regarding the determination result is generated by the preliminary determination signal generation means and output to the secondary control means. .. Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the preliminary determination signal, until the dynamic display start condition of the hit determination condition corresponding to the preliminary determination information, the preliminary determination information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Remembered. Based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information indicating that the first big hit is stored. Based on the fact that the secondary monitoring means determines that the pre-determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be stored, the game state transition information relating to the pre-determination information that is determined to be the first jackpot is provided to the player. Whether or not to notify is determined by the advance notification determining means. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notification means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information. As a result, the player is notified of the game state transition notification mode, and if the current game state is the second game state, the player determines that the remaining time of the second game state is short, and the remaining time. A game can be played by effectively utilizing time. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine S1, the pre-determination signal generating means of the main control means generates the pre-determination signal capable of discriminating a win/fail judgment condition corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured in a notification mode capable of distinguishing whether the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the advance determination information is the first win/loss determination condition or the second win/loss determination condition. A gaming machine S2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1. That is, in the main control means, with respect to the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, the pre-judgment signal generating means generates a pre-judgment signal capable of discriminating the hit/miss judgment condition corresponding to the judgment result. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured as a notification mode in which it is possible to identify whether the win/failure determination condition corresponding to the advance determination notification mode is the first win/failure determination condition or the second win/fail determination condition. Thereby, the player can play the game so that the first jackpot is not satisfied by the game state transition notification mode, and the winning/deciding condition is preferentially satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to play the game more effectively using the second game state. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, when the main control unit determines that the first or second win/loss determination condition that is the first jackpot is satisfied during the second game state. The gaming machine S3, further comprising: a privilege delay means for delaying the start of the privilege game corresponding to the determined first or second win/loss determination condition.

According to the gaming machine S3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined by the pre-determination means during the second game state that the first or second win/loss determination condition that is the first jackpot is satisfied, the determined first or second win/loss When it is determined that the determination condition is satisfied, the start of the determined privilege game is delayed by the privilege delay means. As a result, the second game state is given to the player for a longer time, and more profit can be given to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the operating means that can be operated by the player, and the first operating of the operating means by the player, the first win/win judgment condition is satisfied rather than the second win/win judgment condition. Variable means for changing the first advantageous state that is easy to perform and the second advantageous state in which the second win/loss determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first win/loss determination condition by performing a second operation that is different from the first operation. A gaming machine S4 characterized by having.

The gaming machine S4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3. That is, the first advantageous state in which the first win/win judgment condition is more easily established than the second win/win judgment condition by the player first operating the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first operation which is different from the first operation By performing two operations, the variable means changes the state to the second advantageous state in which the second win/loss determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first win/loss determination condition. Thereby, based on the delay information notified by the notification means, by operating the operation means, it is possible to change to a state in which the win/loss determination condition different from the win/loss determination condition in which the privilege game is delayed is easily established. More lottery games can be played by the player during the second game state. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, when the main control means is dynamically displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the bonus game is given by the other identification information. Includes a bonus game carry-over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the bonus game for the other is finished, and the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the bonus game is finished. A win/loss judgment maintaining means for maintaining the win/no judgment result of the identification information with the win/no judgment result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the bonus game. Gaming machine S5.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, when one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, when the privilege game is given by the other identification information, the remaining movement of one of the identification information is performed. The special game carry-over means carries over until the special display of the other special game ends. Then, the result of the judgment of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the end of the privilege game is judged by the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game. The judgment result is maintained by the judgment determination maintaining means.

As a result, during the second game state, the lottery game whose dynamic display is started is delayed in the second game state while delaying the start of the privilege game that is a transition to the first game state. Since it is maintained, even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent a problem that would be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new win while the bonus game is delayed.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss judgment condition, at least the normal display mode of the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win condition. Determination based on the establishment of a dynamic display start condition from a dynamic display mode group configured by a dynamic display mode and an extended dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time longer than that of the normal dynamic display mode, and the second winning/absence determination Dynamic display mode determining means for determining, based on the establishment of the means, a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; A pre-dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition. Generating a pre-dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the determination means and the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determination means; A preliminary dynamic display mode signal generating means for outputting to the slave control means, and the slave monitoring means determines the extended dynamic display mode based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal. A gaming machine S6 for determining whether or not the pre-determination information for the first jackpot is stored.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition is based on at least the normal win/win state and the normal dynamic display mode based on the fulfillment of the first win/loss determination condition. Is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from the dynamic display mode group configured by the extended dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display time according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by means. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition. Is determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means. A preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means and output to the slave control means. It Based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal, the secondary monitoring unit determines whether or not the preliminary determination information that is the first jackpot for determining the extended dynamic display mode is stored. As a result, the player is informed in the gaming state transition notifying mode that the winning/judging determination condition for the first jackpot, in which the delayed start during the second gaming state is delayed, is satisfied. Therefore, by being notified of the game state transition notification mode, the player can more quickly determine that the remaining second game state is short and can effectively use the remaining second game state.

In any of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the main control means is based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/loss judgment condition, and is a first jackpot against the hit win/fail judgment condition that has been established, or a positive change. The main holding information storage means stores the holding information for determining whether or not to be a big hit until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the pre-determination means of the main control means is a main holding information storage means. The determination is made based on the stored hold information, and the privilege delay means of the main control means has the hold information corresponding to one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the state where the pre-article determination means has determined that the first big hit, the holding information corresponding to the other is newly established, and when the holding information determines that it is the second big hit, The start of the privilege game corresponding to the newly established hold information of the other win/fail judgment condition is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the first jackpot hold information stored in the hold information storage means. A gaming machine S7 characterized by being present.
According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the following effect is produced. That is, in the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second hit/miss determination condition, a hold for determining whether the hit/win determination condition that has been satisfied is the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. The information is stored in the main pending information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, the advance determination means makes a determination. In the main control means, while the holding information corresponding to one of the first winning/disagreement judging condition and the second winning/damage judging condition is judged to be the first jackpot by the preliminary judging means, the holding information corresponding to the other is newly added. When the hold information is determined to be the second jackpot, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the newly held hold information of the other hit/miss determination condition is stored in the hold information storage means. The privilege delay means delays the start of the privilege game corresponding to the stored first jackpot holding information. As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the first game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the second game state is executed, so that two privilege games are executed. After that, the player can be allowed to play a game in the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and it is possible to suppress the expectation for the jackpot.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. First display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means, and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means Second display means to be displayed, display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit, the player And a bonus game execution means for giving an advantageous bonus game, and when the result of the determination by the determination means is a win, the game state after the bonus game given by the privilege game execution means Is a normal jackpot for shifting to a normal gaming state or a special jackpot for shifting to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a hit type determining means, and the first hit/absence determination condition. On the basis of the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination means, the success/failure established. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the determination condition according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and the dynamic display mode determination means is already established before the dynamic display start condition is established. Pre-judgment means for judging whether the normal big hit or the special big hit is achieved before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, with respect to the first or second hit/absence judgment condition, and the dynamic display start condition In one of the first hit determination conditions and the second hit determination conditions before the above is satisfied, it is determined by the pre-determination means when the normal jackpot, in the other hit determination conditions, When the pre-judgment means determines that the special jackpot is to be made, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition that is determined to be the normal jackpot corresponds to the win/loss determination condition that is determined to be the special jackpot. A gaming machine T1 comprising: a privilege start adjusting means for adjusting the start time of the privilege game so as to precede the start of the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine T1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. When the hit/no hit determination result by the hit/no hit determination means is a win, the player is more advantageous than the normal jackpot and the normal game status in which the gaming state after the bonus game given by the bonus game execution means is shifted to the normal gaming state. Either the special jackpot to shift to the special game state is determined by the hit type determining means. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied depending on whether the normal or special jackpot is achieved with respect to the already established first or second win/loss determination condition. Before, it is judged by the preliminary judgment means. Before the dynamic display start condition is established, one of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions is usually judged by the pre-judgment means as a jackpot, and the other win/win judgment condition is: When it is determined by the pre-judgment means that the special jackpot is reached, the start of the bonus game is adjusted by the bonus start adjustment means so that the start of the bonus jackpot game of the normal jackpot is preceded by the start of the bonus jackpot game of the special jackpot. It As a result, the normal jackpot is started, and after shifting to the normal gaming state, the special jackpot is executed and shifted to the special gaming state, so that the player can have a great expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine T1, the privilege start adjusting means is a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined by the pre-determination means when the normal jackpot is achieved, and the advance determination is performed when the special jackpot is achieved. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the shortened dynamic display mode that has a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined by the means. Or a dynamic display mode determining means as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the special jackpot, as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the normal jackpot. A gaming machine T2, characterized in that the dynamic display mode determining means determines an extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode determined by.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are produced. That is, as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition determined to be a normal jackpot, a dynamic display mode determination means determines as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition determined to be the special jackpot. The privileged start adjustment means causes the dynamic display mode determination means to determine a shortened dynamic display mode that has a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode. Alternatively, as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined to be the special jackpot, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined to be the normal jackpot. The privilege start adjustment means causes the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode that has a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode. Thereby, by adjusting the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode that is a normal jackpot or the dynamic display mode that is a special jackpot, the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot is easier than the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot. It can be adjusted to come first. Therefore, a lot of profits can be given to the player while entertaining the dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine described in the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the first or second win/win determination condition is met, it is established before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is met. The holding information storage unit that stores the holding information having at least the hit determination information relating to the hit determination of the first or second hit determination condition, and the first information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storing unit. Alternatively, the preliminary display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means for the second identification information before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the determination by the preliminary display mode determining means. Based on the result and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information which is being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means, a first information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means. End time discriminating means for discriminating time information related to the time until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information is terminated, and the privilege start adjusting means comprises the first win/fail judgment condition and the second For either one of the hit determination conditions and the hit determination conditions, when the holding information corresponding to the hit determination conditions determined by the pre-determination unit when the normal jackpot is stored in the holding information storage unit, Regarding the other newly established hit determination condition, if it is determined by the pre-determination means that the jackpot is a special jackpot, the normal jackpot holding information determined by the end time determination means The adjustment dynamic display mode configured by the dynamic display time such that the dynamic display corresponding to the pending information to be the special jackpot ends after the time when the dynamic display corresponding to The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pending information, which is one of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions. When the pending information corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined by the pre-judgment unit when the special jackpot is stored in the reservation information storage unit, the other pre-determined win/fail judgment condition newly established. When it is determined by the determination means that the winning/decision condition is normally a big jackpot, before the time when the dynamic display corresponding to the special jackpot holding information determined by the end time determination means ends. , The adjustment dynamic composed of the dynamic display time such that the dynamic display corresponding to the normally-held jackpot information ends. A gaming machine T3, characterized in that the dynamic display mode determining means determines a display mode as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the normally held jackpot holding information.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is met, the win/fail judgment of the met first or second win/loss judgment condition is made. The holding information storing means stores the holding information having at least the hit/miss determination information related to the. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means. Then, it is determined by the prior aspect determination means. The first or second corresponding to the suspension information based on the determination result in the preliminary aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display aspect of the first or second identification information during the dynamic display in the first or second display means. The time information relating to the time until the dynamic display of the identification information is ended is judged by the ending time judgment means. With respect to either one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition, when the pending information corresponding to the hit determination condition determined by the pre-determination means to be a normal jackpot is stored, Regarding the other win/fail judgment condition established in step 1, when the pre-judgment means determines that the win/judgment condition is a special jackpot, the dynamic display of the normally held jackpot holding information determined by the end time determination means is displayed. An adjusted dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display time such that the dynamic display of the holding information that is a special jackpot ends after the time until the end is a dynamic display mode of the holding information that is a special jackpot. As a result, the dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the privilege start adjusting means. On the other hand, with respect to either one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition, when the pending information corresponding to the hit determination condition determined by the pre-determination unit when the special jackpot is determined is stored. For the newly established win/loss judgment condition, if the pre-judgment means determines that the win/judgment condition is a normal jackpot, the end time determination means dynamically determines the pending information to be a special jackpot. The adjustment dynamic display mode configured by the dynamic display time such that the dynamic display of the normally-held jackpot information ends before the time until the display finishes is displayed. As the dynamic display mode, the dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the privilege start adjustment means. Thus, if the dynamic display time of the adjusted dynamic display mode is set so as to reduce the difference between the start of the special jackpot bonus game and the start of the special jackpot bonus game, the player performs the bonus game at a good tempo. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can play more lottery games.

Based on the satisfaction of the win/loss judgment condition, a win/loss judgment information acquisition means for acquiring the win/loss judgment information of the game, a win/loss judgment means for judging the win/loss judgment information acquired by the win/loss judgment information acquisition means, and a win/loss judgment means therefor. Based on the result of the hit determination, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and an operation means operable by the player, and within a preset effective period. An operation lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the operation means, and an informing means for informing a player of information related to a game when the operation lottery means determines a hit And a lottery probability changing means for setting the lottery probability that the operation lottery means determines to be a win, to different lottery probabilities in the first effective period and the second effective period different from the first effective period within the effective period. A gaming machine U1 characterized in that it has.

According to the gaming machine U1, the win/loss judgment information of the game is acquired by the win/no judgment information acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the win/no judgment condition. The hit/damage determination information acquired by the hit/damage determination information acquisition means is judged by the hit/miss determination means. The bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the hit determination being made by the hit determination means. A predetermined lottery is performed by the operation lottery means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player within a predetermined effective period. When the operation lottery means determines that the player has won, the notification means notifies the player of the information related to the game. The lottery probability determined by the operation lottery means to be a win is set by the lottery probability changing means to different lottery probabilities in the first valid period and the second valid period different from the first valid period within the valid period. With this, when the player operates the operation means within the valid period, the probability of being notified of the information related to the game can be changed depending on whether it is the first valid period or the second valid period. It is possible to improve the motivation to operate the operating means. Therefore, since the information related to the game can be notified by the operation of the player himself, it is possible to suppress the boredom of the game.

In the gaming machine U1, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games, and the first valid period is a period during which one of the plurality of small privilege games is executed. The second effective period is set during a period during which any of the plurality of small privilege games, which is different from the small privilege game set during the first effective period, is executed. A gaming machine U2 characterized by being set.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games. A first valid period is set during a period in which any one of the small privilege games is executed. Further, among the plurality of small privilege games, the second effective period is set during a period during which a small privilege game different from the small privilege game for which the first effective period is set is executed. This makes it possible to change the probability of informing the information related to the game during the first valid period and the second valid period during the privilege game, and improve the motivation to operate the operation means even during the privilege game. it can. Therefore, even during the bonus game, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, based on the satisfaction of the win/fail judgment condition, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the win/win judgment condition is satisfied, the win/no judgment is made. Before the start of the dynamic display start condition, based on the pending information storage unit that stores the pending information having at least the hit/miss judgment information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and the pending information stored in the pending information storage unit. The pre-judgment information is determined by the pre-judgment means in the holding information stored in the holding information storage means. A gaming machine U3, which is information relating to whether or not the hold information is stored.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are produced. That is, on the basis of the satisfaction of the hit determination condition, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the hit determination condition is satisfied, it is acquired by the hit determination information acquisition means. The pending information having at least the hit determination information is stored by the pending information storage means. Based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means, the pre-judgment means judges the win/fail judgment result before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The information related to the game notified to the player is composed of information related to whether or not the holding information stored in the holding information storage means is stored as the holding information determined to be hit by the pre-determination means. ing. Therefore, by operating the operation means, the player can know the hit/miss determination result for the hold information stored in the hold information storage means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can know the result of winning/judging earlier by his/her operation. In addition, even if the hold information to be won is not notified by the operation of the operation means, with the expectation that there is actually hold information to be won just by being out of the lottery by the operation means, the identification information You can enjoy the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

In the gaming machine U2, with respect to the hit determined by the win/loss determination means, a normal jackpot that shifts the game state after the privilege game is executed to the normal game state and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state The special jackpot to be moved to the special game state is to have a hit type determination means for determining either one, and the information related to the game is the normal jackpot that is the trigger for the privilege game being executed. A gaming machine U4, which is information relating to whether or not it is the special jackpot.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effect described in the game machine U2, the following effect is achieved. That is, with respect to the hit determined by the hit determination means, a normal jackpot that shifts the game state after the privilege game is executed to the normal game state and a special game state that is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Either one of the special jackpots to be transferred is determined by the hit type determining means. Information relating to whether the hit that triggered the execution of the privilege game being executed is a normal jackpot or a special jackpot is notified as information relating to the game.

Thereby, the player can recognize the game state after the privilege game is executed during the privilege game at an early stage by operating the operation means. Further, even during the bonus game, the lottery probability based on the operation of the operating device is changed, so that it is possible to change the lottery probability depending on the period of operating the operating device during the bonus game. Therefore, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game during the bonus game.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. The first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a hit, and a privilege game execution means for giving a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is established, and the first hit determination condition is satisfied. On the basis of the above, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is established, the right to execute the first lottery game is suspended, and the first lottery game is held. (2) The right to execute the second lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is met based on the satisfaction of the win/loss determination condition. And a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit/absence determination condition, with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition as a trigger, The dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is determined based on the number of holdings held in the holding means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Dynamic display mode deciding means to be decided according to the above, and for each hold held by the holding means every time a predetermined judgment condition is met, the holding means holds the holding means when the judgment condition is met. Preliminary dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode based on the number, and when the first or second determination condition is satisfied, is satisfied until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The holding information including at least the order of satisfaction of the winning/judging determination conditions, which is the combination of the first winning/failure judging condition and the second winning/damage judging condition, and the information on the dynamic display mode judged by the advance dynamic display mode judging means is stored. Hold information storage means, first win/fail judgment condition and second win/fail judgment stored in the hold information storage means While distinguishing the hold information from the determination conditions, the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions that combine the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions for each hold information are displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode. Each time the judgment conditions of the holding display means and the preliminary dynamic display mode judging means are satisfied, the preliminary dynamic display mode judging means for each holding information stored in the holding information storage means is judged. Based on the dynamic display mode and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed, until the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed for each hold information. The time information is determined or updated, and the start time information updating means for storing the time information in the holding information storage means, and the start time information updating means stores the time information in the holding information storage means upon the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a rearrangement means for rearranging the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the respective time information thus obtained. Gaming machine V1.

According to the gaming machine V1, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the first win/no judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The right to execute the first lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition. Is held by the holding means. Also, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the second lottery game is executed until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the win/win judgment condition is satisfied. The right to do is reserved by the reservation means. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first win/fail judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the number of reservations held in the holding means upon the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. It is determined. Further, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is based on the number of reservations held by the holding means upon the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by the determining means. Each time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, for each of the holds held by the holding means, the dynamic display mode is based on the number of holds when the determination condition is satisfied, the pre-dynamic display mode determination means. Is determined by. When the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied, until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the win/fail judgment condition is fulfilled by combining the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition that are satisfied. Suspension information having at least information regarding the dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The winning/losing result in which the first winning/failing determination condition and the second winning/failing determination condition are combined for each holding information while distinguishing the pending information of the first winning/failure judging condition and the second winning/failing judgment condition stored in the pending information storage means. The order in which the determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. Each time the determination condition of the advance dynamic display mode determination means is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means for each hold information and the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed Based on the remaining dynamic display mode, the time information until the first or second identification information becomes the dynamic display start is determined or updated by the start time information updating means for each holding information, and stored in the holding information storage means. Remembered. Then, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is dynamically displayed based on each time information stored in the hold information storage means by the start time information updating means. Are sorted by the sorting means in the order of starting. Thereby, for example, the hold information for the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information for the first lottery game is stored in advance. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. In addition, the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information is determined based on the number of holdings of the holding means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. When the increase/decrease is determined, the dynamic display mode determined in advance changes. Therefore, the order in which the dynamic display starts is changed, but the time information for starting the dynamic display is also determined or updated every time the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, so that a more accurate dynamic display can be obtained. The player can be notified of the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine V1, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged and displayed in the order in which the dynamic display is started, the hold display mode is rearranged and displayed. As a result of the time information of the corresponding hold information being updated by the start time information updating means, an order monitoring means for determining whether the order displayed by rearrangement has been changed, and the order monitoring means changes the order. When it is determined that the occurrence has occurred, the reserving display mode that is rearranged and displayed is rearranged in an order in which a new dynamic display is started, and a rearrangement updating means, and a game characterized by the above. Machine V2.

The gaming machine V2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1. That is, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, the time of the hold information corresponding to the hold display mode rearranged and displayed. As a result of the information being updated by the start time information updating means, the order monitoring means determines whether or not there is a change in the order in which the information is rearranged and displayed. When it is determined by the order monitoring means that the order has been changed, the rearranged display means rearranges and displays the reserved display mode by the rearrangement updating means in the order of starting a new dynamic display. As a result, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied and the hold display modes are rearranged and displayed, and then the order in which the dynamic display is started changes due to increase or decrease of the hold, etc. Since it is performed, the player can recognize the correct rearrangement order. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, when the rearrangement updating means rearranges the dynamic display in the order in which the new dynamic display is started, the change start order of the suspended display mode displayed in the rearrangement is changed. A gaming machine V3 having a notifying means for notifying a player of

The gaming machine V3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2. That is, when the rearrangement updating means rearranges the dynamic display in the order in which the new dynamic display is started, the player is informed that the change start order of the suspended display mode displayed in the rearrangement has been changed. Will be notified by. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the change start order of the hold display mode displayed by rearranging has been changed. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, In any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z1 characterized by. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, In any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z2. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, In any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion of and. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
51 Operation handle (operation means)
81 Third symbol display device (first display means, second display means)
112 Firing control device (variable means)
114 display control device (display control means)
201 MPU (eligibility determination means)
202b Big hit type counter (part of hit type determining means)
203u Sort reservation storage area (part of reservation information storage means)
223k Subordinate rearrangement storage area (part of subordinate information storage means)
S390 (Dynamic display mode determination means)
S603 (privilege game carryover means, part of privilege game carryover means)
S826 (privilege delay means)
S926 (preliminary determination means)
S939 (preliminary determination signal generation means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the game balls to a plurality of ball entrance means provided on the game board is ball entrance is a predetermined judgment, the dynamic display of FIG pattern for notifying the determination result It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, for each of ball entrance means, is the predetermined judgment separately, after the determination result is dynamically displayed a graphic pattern corresponding to each of the ball entrance means, the determination result is informed It Thus a plurality of FIG patterns have been proposed that are dynamically capable of displaying, respectively.

JP, 2005-319221, A

By the way, such gaming machines have been required to further enhance the interest of the game.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 performs a first determination based on the satisfaction of a first determination condition, and a determination means to perform a second determination based on the satisfaction of a second determination condition. , First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the first determination result of the first determination, and second display information for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination When the second display means and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed. When the first privilege game execution means and the second display information are stopped and displayed on the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result, the second privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed. And a second privilege game executing means for performing, and when the determination means determines the specific first determination result, as a game state set after the first privilege game, a first game state In the case where the second game state is set, a game state determining means for determining one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The period information discriminating means capable of discriminating the period information corresponding to the period until the first identification information for which the first gaming state is set is stopped and displayed, and the period information discriminating means. The production performed by the production execution means for producing the production based on the period information determined by the suggestion execution means suggests the period information determined by the period information determination means to the player. The suggested mode is included at least, and the suggested mode is configured in advance in such a manner that it is variable according to the passage of the period and the period corresponding to the period information ends .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition, and the second determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition, and the first determination. First display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result, and second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination. And, when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game execution for executing the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Means and a second privilege game for executing a second privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display device. And a first game state and a first game state thereof as a game state set after the first privilege game when the determination unit determines the specific first determination result. Game state determining means for determining one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player, and the first game state when the second game state is set. Period information discriminating means capable of discriminating period information corresponding to a period until the first identification information for which a gaming state is set is stopped and displayed, and the period information discriminating means discriminated by the period information discriminating means. The effect executed by the effect execution means for executing an effect based on the period information, and the effect executed by the effect execution means is at least a suggestion mode for suggesting the period information determined by the period information determination means to the player. It is included, and the suggestive aspect is variable in accordance with the passage of the period, and is configured in advance in a manner until the period corresponding to the period information ends.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which looked through the inside from the front side of the sorting apparatus in 1st Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which looked through the inside from the back side of the sorting apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment typically, and (b) is a reserved symbol display displayed with a 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display mode before rearrangement and after rearrangement. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment, a special design reservation sphere storage area, a special design reservation sphere execution area, a normal design reservation sphere storage area, and a normal design reservation sphere execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the jackpot random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random symbol per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement reservation storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. .. (A) is the figure which showed typically the normal time special hit variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) showed typically the normal time special deviation|variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is the figure which showed typically the special reduction fluctuation pattern table for time reduction / probability change in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a model of the special deviation fluctuation pattern table for time reduction / probability change in 1st Embodiment FIG. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation quantity display renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a temporary fluctuation stop process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a reservation rearrangement process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the adjustment special deviation change pattern table in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically some other memory areas of RAM of MPU of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st continuation winning a prize judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the large opening opening and closing processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st prefetch processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordinate reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A) is the figure which looked through the inside from the front side of the sorting apparatus in 9th Embodiment, and (b) is the figure which looked through the inside from the back side of the sorting apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning route notification process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 11th Embodiment, (c) is the display of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the area|region typically. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 11th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 14th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 14th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 15th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st caution advance notice process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 16th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st notice lottery processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st extension change look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd announcement lottery processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 17th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 18th Embodiment, (b) is the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the modification of 18th Embodiment. It is not shown schematically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement reservation storage area in 18th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 18th Embodiment typically. .. (A) is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of the main controller in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a time reduction / probability change special contact (off) in 18th Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a part of a variation pattern table and a normal special hit (off) variation pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pre-reading update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fusion production lottery process performed by MPU in the main controller in 18th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically some other memory areas of RAM of the main control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of time saving/probability change special hit variation pattern table of ROM of the main controller in 19th Embodiment, and time saving/probability change special hit deviation pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation change process performed by MPU in the main controller in 19th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 20th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement pending storage area in 20th Embodiment, (b) is a part of other memory area in RAM of MPU of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st duplication hit processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the large opening opening and closing process performed by MPU in the main controller in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit middle production process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of normal extraordinary deviation pattern table in 21st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of special deviation change pattern table for time reduction / probability change in a 21st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordinate reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subordinate hold rearrangement display alerting|reporting process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation number display update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 21st Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front surface area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front surface area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls and rails 61 and 62, a first starting opening 63a, and a first starting opening 63a. The second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

A distribution winning apparatus 630 is provided in the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the distribution winning apparatus 630 as viewed from the back.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the sorting winning device 630 is provided with the ordinary electric accessory 64 at the upper part. In the normal state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is arranged in a state where the opposing blades 64a and 64b are erected upward at an interval (the diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm) in which one game ball can enter. .. In the normal state (the state in which the blades 64a and 64b are erected upward), the route in which the game ball enters the distribution device 630 is only the route that passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. First, the player shoots a game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64.

When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the passive distribution member 640 is arranged, and the entered game ball is received by the accommodation portion 640a or 640b of the passive distribution member 640. When the game ball is received in the accommodation portion 640a, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 4A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is the first starting opening. Lead to 63a. Here, the passive distribution member 640 is configured to be rotatable about the left and right sides by about 90 degrees, and the magnet 640c is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b.

In the base body 900 provided on the back side of the distribution winning apparatus 630, the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 is provided with the base-side magnet 900a at a position on the center line between the blade 64a and the blade 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. Has been done. As shown in the top view of the distribution winning apparatus 630 shown in FIG. 4C, the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have repulsive polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 900a is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip portion. The base-side magnet 900a is arranged and fixed so that its tip end faces the passive distribution member 640 side.

The magnet 640c of the passive distribution unit 640 is also configured by a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive distribution member 640 so that the tip end faces the base-side magnet 900a side. At a position where the passive distribution member 640 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 640a and the accommodating portion 640b is directly above (the facing blades 64a and 64b are on the center line of the space where about one game ball can enter). The base-side magnet 900a and the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 come to the position where they are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), the repulsive coupling may occur and the passive distribution member 640 may stop at a position where the boundary wall faces directly upward. Instead, it will be maintained at the position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 640c reaches the position on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 (the position above), the passive distribution member 640 separates the magnet 640c from the base-side magnet 900a. By the repulsion, the passive distribution member 640 rotates to the left or right, and one of the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b receives the game ball entering the distribution device 630 (upper side of the gaming machine). Will turn to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b and causing the ball clogging.

Further, the repulsion of the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c causes, for example, the accommodation portion 640a to receive the game ball and rotate about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first starting opening 63a, and then to be passive. It is possible to prevent the sorting member 640 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first starting opening 63a, the accommodation section 640b is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the distribution device 630 is received by the accommodation section 640b and the game ball is received. The weight of the passive distribution member 640 rotates about 180 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the second starting opening 63b. In this way, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b to win the prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as the first lottery) to be described later, which is caused by winning the first starting opening 63a. It is possible to efficiently execute a game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) caused by a winning of the second start opening 63b.

On the left side of the center of the game board 13, a normal symbol starting port 67 is provided. The normal symbol starting port 67 is composed of a gate type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

When the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display section 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "x" are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped (lighted). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. Displayed by.

When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88. When a symbol that is a hit is displayed, the normal electric accessory 64 operates, and the blades 64a, 64b of the normal electric accessory 64, which are normally maintained in an upright position, are erected substantially vertically. By moving in a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape) and guiding the game balls by the blades 64a, 64b, it becomes easy to enter the game balls into the distribution device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been off, is lit on the second symbol display portion 88.

The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a lights the number of reserved balls which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which variable display has not been executed among the balls won in the first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, and the normal symbol starting opening 67. This is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display are also indicated by a corresponding lighting state.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The left 7 segment LED, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, the variable display is displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first start opening 63a elapses (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the 7 segments is displayed in blinking). After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, a symbol "-" indicating that the central one segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Further, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a variation pattern with reach and a variation pattern with non-reach, a long-term variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short-term variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. In this way, even when sorting is performed based on a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic information regarding the time information is determined. It corresponds to the display mode.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time also corresponds to the time when the accurate fluctuation starts, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern or not) Information about time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined based on whether or not) is also applicable.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determination of the big hit type. To do. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R regular jackpot, 15R certainty variation jackpot, and 2R certainty variation jackpot are prepared. The jackpot pattern displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "9" for the 15R normal jackpot, "7" for the 15R certainty jackpot, and "3" for the 2R certainty jackpot, for example. Is displayed).

Here, the "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, in a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(b)) for low probability described later. It is about the game being set. The "15R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set. That is. The "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set. That is.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 79 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol (first symbol). A special symbol, a second special symbol) is provided with a third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the left side as shown in FIG. In the display area Dm1, three symbol rows of left, middle and right showing the first special symbol which is one of the third symbols are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ( Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, also in the second special symbol which is one of the third symbols, it is displayed in the right side display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying before and after rearrangement of the reserved symbol display on the actual display screen.

The third symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777"), a variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the end of.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the upper display area Dm. It is composed of a display area for displaying and a display area for displaying a holding symbol (the number of held first lottery game and second lottery game) in the lower display area Ds. The upper side display area Dm is divided into a left side display area Dm1 and a right side display area Dm2 so as to be displayed. Mainly, the left display area Dm1 variably displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol showing the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning of the second starting opening 63b is variably displayed.

In the left side display area Dm1, three symbol columns L1, L2 and L3 are displayed respectively on the left, middle and right sides. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with the periodicity for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol column L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, the symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

In the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line U1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further divided in the left-right direction into eight small area reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of three main symbols of the special symbol (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display region Dm, the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2, respectively. It

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b is withheld up to four times, respectively. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a during the variable display of the first special symbol, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds. In the display area of (), the reserved symbol display area of the smallest number among the areas where the reserved symbol is not displayed (the reserved symbol display area on the left side), "○", which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game, is displayed. ..

In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 63a, the "●" which is the reserved symbol of the second lottery game is lower. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the side display area Ds.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. When the game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630, the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4) distributes the game ball to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b in order. In a state where the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and there is no hold in the first lottery game, and if the first start opening 63a is won, whether or not the second special symbol is being variable displayed. Regardless, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the left display area Dm1 and then stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously and simultaneously displayed in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2, respectively. Therefore, by the distribution winning device 630, the game balls that alternately win the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are distributed, so that the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. it can. As will be described later, in the first lottery game and the second lottery game, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the jackpot game is to be executed. Therefore, the lottery opportunity for the jackpot game is executed only in the first lottery game. By comparison, it is possible to increase the number of times of lottery, and it is possible to increase the chances that the player can win the jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 constituted by the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and three, four, or more lottery games and corresponding start. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that each lottery result can be variably displayed at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning apparatus 630 has a mechanical structure (the structure of distributing the game balls by the passive distribution member 640), but only one starting opening is provided and the game balls are won every time. Naturally, it may be configured to be alternately allocated to the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing the game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively utilized.

When a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, a first starting opening switch or a second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, the main control device 110 makes a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big hit, and if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display is temporarily interrupted, and the jackpot game ( For example, in the case of 15 rounds of regular jackpots, after the 15 rounds of jackpot games) are finished, the variable display of the special symbols is continued for the remaining variable time.

The variation display for the remaining variation time is displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display so that the player can recognize that the variation display that has been interrupted is the remaining variation display. Also, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, the variation display mode that matches the remaining variation time is selected. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or less than the reference time (3 seconds or less in the present embodiment), the word "Lottery result of fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped is displayed!" After being displayed for the remaining fluctuation time on the three-symbol display device 81, it is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the determination result. Then, in conjunction with the determination result being stopped and displayed, the text "The temporary display of the floating display lottery result has been displayed!" is displayed and continues to be displayed until the next change is started.

On the other hand, when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), all the main symbols constituting the special symbol are variably displayed at a constant speed, and the characters “temporarily stopped variation The notification mode indicating that the display is changing! After that, when the remaining variation time elapses, the main symbols are stopped and displayed all at once with the symbols indicating the determination results.

With this configuration, the player can recognize that it is a continuation of the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted midway, and can recognize that it is the lottery result of the interrupted variable display. it can. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted on the way, the player can be prevented from playing the game with dissatisfaction or doubt that the lottery may have disappeared on the way.

Further, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, if the other special symbol is in a state where the variable display is stopped, a new variable display Is prohibited from starting. When the jackpot game ends, the variable display is set to start again based on the winning of the corresponding start openings 63a and 63b.

As a result, during the jackpot, the other special symbol, the lottery game is executed, it is possible to prevent the problem that the occurrence of the jackpots overlap, and the problem that the player can not concentrate on the jackpot game.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted, the fact is informed to the player by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice is not limited thereto. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, like the display mode in which the player knows that the change has been resumed (for example, it is displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display in which the character etc. has been interrupted is displayed) Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode only for restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the suspended variable display is restarted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is suspended. Although it was configured to stop the variable display, but not limited to it, during the big hit game, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued as it is, and the remaining fluctuation time is measured after the big hit game. May be restarted, and the variable display of the special symbol may be adopted.

With such a configuration, the special symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner even during the jackpot game, so the player can confirm that the other variable display will continue without disappearing, You can play jackpot games with peace of mind.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display may be continued without interruption, and the lottery game may be executed as usual.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further perform the lottery game even during the jackpot game, it is possible to make more lottery games in a short time, and many lottery games can be played by the player. It becomes possible to do it. In such a configuration, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit during the jackpot game, the execution of the jackpot game is delayed until one jackpot game ends (stock. By doing so, the player can continuously perform a jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable symbol or the second variable symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the variable mode exclusively for the remaining variable display with respect to the interrupted variable display mode. Not limited to that, the remaining variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variable display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed while blinking. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed by lighting and displaying the remaining variable display-dedicated color (for example, blue). By doing so, not only the third symbol display device 81, but also the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, the remaining variable display is displayed to the player. Can be notified.

Further, similarly to the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may be changed depending on the remaining variation time.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner in a state of being stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, the letter h" in a predetermined cycle. By thus configuring, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (during suspension).

On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally elongated rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the jackpot of the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, it becomes a big hit stop symbol. While turning on the symbol display device 37, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed in the corresponding display area (left display area Dm1 or right display area Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. .. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined jackpot type. For example, in the case of the 15R regular jackpot, it can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a privileged game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning a prize device 65, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit based on winning the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, The opening/closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). To be done.

The variable winning device 65 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. .. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as required.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display portion 88 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, etc., the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol per random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special jackpot type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. In addition, a normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1000) (see FIG. 17). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning for the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 and the second starting port 63b in which each counter value for the winning for the first starting port 63a is stored. A second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are each provided with up to four holding balls, and a total of up to eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol is not jackpot game, the gaming ball wins during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, and the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 63a, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1, and when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, during a period during which the special symbols cannot be selected by lottery, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball has the first starting opening 63a or In the case where the second starting opening 63b is won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired, and the winning opening is won. Is stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 game balls in this embodiment) ) Only is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b, but is not limited to this, and may be four for each, or the upper limit value. You may not make money.

Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning). At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning opening of the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 8B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table 202a. When the value of the generated random number that becomes a jackpot (in the present embodiment, "7" when the probability is low and "0-9" when the probability is high) is determined as a jackpot.

The special random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hit values) to be a big hit is 1 when the probability is low, the value "7" is 10 when the probability is high, and the value "0-9" is a big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching. The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning). At the timing, the first special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserve ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning opening is stored.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is not a big hit random number, that is, a random number that is out of the range. For example, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere executing area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding sphere executing area 203c2 is a big hit, a variation pattern or stop in the variation display effect The type will be that of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, various tables are stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8C is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the big hit type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 15 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) for low probability after the jackpot game is set to "15R normal jackpot", the maximum. The number of rounds is 15 rounds and after a jackpot game a high probability special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) is set "15R probability variation jackpot", the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds and there is a high probability after a jackpot game. There is a "2R probability variable jackpot" in which the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for time (see FIG. 8B) is set.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8C, the value “60 to 99” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, and the value “0 to 49” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot. And the value “50 to 59” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a big hit, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 The jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 stored in. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “20”, the 15R certainty variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “80”, the 15R normal jackpot is the jackpot type. It is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the 15R regular big hit is selected with a probability of about 40%, the 15R probability variation big hit is selected with a probability of 50%, and the 2R probability variation big hit is selected with a probability of 10%. The jackpot type table 202b is defined so as to be selected.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters will be continued. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Further, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 100, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

The values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening. At the timing of winning the prize in 63b (starting prize), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not being variably displayed, and is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. If the various counter values of the reserved balls are not stored, they are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203.

FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the special bonus fluctuation pattern table 202d in the normal time is a case where the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a (hereinafter, referred to as a normal gaming state. ), 15R regular big jackpot and 15R certainty variation big jackpot (hereinafter, 15R jackpot) and 2R certainty variation jackpot referred to when the 15R jackpot is decided 15R jackpot dedicated and 2R certainty variation jackpot Are classified into groups (groups) based on the 2R certainty variation jackpot exclusive reference that is referred to, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the classified groups. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (hit value), it is stored in the execution area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area. The fluctuation pattern group is selected from the fluctuation pattern groups corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 thus selected. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

The 15R jackpot has various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premier reach. Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for various types of normal reach, 11 to 95 for various types of super reach, and 96 for various types of premier reach. It is ~100. Nole reach various is a reach with a short variation time, after the short reach, the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned (so-called, the pattern is aligned at the end of the bite) is a variation pattern, and the super reach various , A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach with a variation time longer than that of the normal reach (for example, reach that develops from the long reach or the normal reach), and various types of premier reach are even longer variation than the super reach. The 1st symbol (or 3rd symbol) is aligned after the reach of time (for example, the reach that develops further after super-reach or the special reach where the development destination from normal reach is different from super-reach) is a fluctuation pattern and the judgment result is out In the case of, the fluctuation pattern is not selected.

It should be noted that "various reach" means that there are many things with different effects even in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, or a certain character is displayed. There is a reach that is suddenly displayed, and in addition to that, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as a notice effect added before the start of variable display and an effect that is a big hit in the re-variation display.

In the case of the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the 2R certainty variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation exclusive variation pattern is, for example, a special variation pattern for stopping the special symbol at “341” and notifying that the 2R probability variation has been won.

FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal special deviation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10B, the normal-time special deviation variation pattern table 202e is a normal reach in which the variation time is relatively short among various types of normal deviation and normal reach deviation which are completely disengaged as a stop type at the time of disengagement in the normal game state. It consists of various normal reach (short) that will be out of the normal reach, normal reach (long) that will be out of the normal reach, and various super reach that will be out of the super reach.

Correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and each fluctuation pattern group is such that when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 29", it is usually out of the normal range, and when it is "30 to 60", the normal reach (short ) Various kinds of normal reach (long) are selected in the case of "61 to 89", and various kinds of super reach are selected in the case of "90 to 100".

The normal deviation A and the normal deviation B are set for the various kinds of normal deviation in which the variable display is completed in a short time and the reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the normal deviation A is selected, and when the value is "101 to 198", the normal deviation B is selected. Further, a variation pattern of normal reach short A to C is set for each of the normal reach (short) types which are out of reach but have a short variation time. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", the normal reach short A is "71 to 128", and the normal reach short B is "129 to 198". , A normal reach short C variation pattern is selected. Similarly, the variation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach.

FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing a special reduction variation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability variation stored in the ROM 202. Further, FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing the special out-of-order variation pattern table 202e for time saving/probability variation stored in the ROM 202. When the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a, the special short hit/probability change special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special short hit probability change special hit deviation pattern table (hereinafter, game This is a table for selecting a variation pattern that is selected when the state is a probability variation game state) and when the time saving counter 203k is set to a value of "0" or more (hereinafter, the game state is referred to as a time saving game state). ..

The selection of the variation patterns is the same as that of the normal special variation pattern table 202d and the normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e, and the description thereof will be omitted. As for the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e, only one type is explained here, but the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special special variation pattern table 202d and the special special symbol, respectively. The deviation variation pattern table 202e is set, and for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the distribution of the variation pattern determination counter C3 is changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Thus, even if the same value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same fluctuation pattern is not selected. With this configuration, different variation patterns can be easily selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and various effects can be produced.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters will be continued. The ordinary hit random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8D) is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number which is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 8(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is set. When the value of the random number that is a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit.

Also, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) in the present embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 (through gate). .. The number of random number values to be won is 24 in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Further, in the high-probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that the winning value is the normal random number counter C4 in the range of "5-28", in the high probability game state, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired. Is determined to be in the range of "5-204", the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display portion 88, and the normal electric accessory 64 In the normal game state, the blades 64a and 64b are opened twice for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment), and in the high probability game state for a predetermined time (1 s in this embodiment). The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable state, and if each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i, and is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Further, in the case where the normal symbol (second symbol) is being variably displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved sphere stored in the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Is stored in the ordinary hit random number counter storage area 203h1 corresponding to the number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value obtained from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous one is held because the holding is exhausted. It is set to OFF when data is shifted into the area. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether or not data is stored in the holding area, or whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed is executed depending on which holding area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, about the lottery of the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery With the game (second special symbol), set various dedicated counters, and update different counters by changing the update timing and initial values of the various counters of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter values may be configured.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same trigger, it is possible to acquire the counter value of a different value. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, and a problem that the determination result of the winning or hitting is synchronized.

Even if the variation patterns are selected from the common variation pattern tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern to be selected is prevented from being synchronized with each other, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, it is possible to suppress the storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and to have an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area).

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 32). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

RAM203, 1st special design reservation sphere storage area 203a, 2nd special design reservation sphere storage area 203b, 1st special design reservation sphere execution area 203c, 2nd special design reservation sphere execution area 203d, 1st special design reservation sphere number Counter 203e, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, the normal symbol flag 203j, the time saving counter 203k, the probability variation flag 203m, First big hit flag 203o, second big hit flag 203p, first fluctuation stop flag 203q, second fluctuation stop flag 203r, first fluctuation time storage area 203s, second fluctuation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, etc. It has at least a memory area 203v.

The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning the first starting opening 63a up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that the game sphere has won the second starting opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for

The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, the first special symbol When various counter values are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. ..

The first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c, the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d, for the counter with the detection of the start winning Values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 7) are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won the first starting opening 63a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, The special winning random number counter storage area 203a1, the special winning type counter storage area 203a2, the variation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 are stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the corresponding values are obtained, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is similarly stored in each area (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, it performs the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37 or the process of setting the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the like described above. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, it corresponds to one starting winning. Data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37. Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 32, S1112) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the winning a prize for start is detected and the number of balls held in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of holding balls) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 63a. When is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main controller 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserve balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting opening 63b. When is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is incremented by 1. Is.

MPU201, when the respective values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, respectively, The data stored in the 1 special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d is referred to in the first variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) or the second variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206). Then, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, by the control of the main control device 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, by the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a game ball passing through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, "start prize"). Based on that), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times each. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in association with the detection of the starting winning into the normal symbol starting opening 67 is stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the normal hit random number counter C4 of the counter buffer is detected. The value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h has four holding areas so that the data corresponding to one starting winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h, the data of the holding spheres in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant in the earliest order to be consumed. To be done.

Further, the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the starting winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hit lottery or the first. It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 are executed. In the data (value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding sphere storing area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is the ordinary symbol holding sphere. Shift to execution area 203i. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data for the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored and is held, and is also a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. Further, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next holding area (the holding area corresponding to the holding number obtained by reducing the holding number by one when the holding is exhausted), the value of the holding area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the variable display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

The hour/hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour/hour count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time saving number is set, until the time saving number is set to 0, the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability is set in the normal symbol per random number table 202c. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 have a longer opening time than in the normal gaming state (in the present embodiment, 1s) The opening operation is repeated twice. This gaming state is hereinafter referred to as a time saving gaming state.

The time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and stopped, and when the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes 0, the time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol. The normal symbol per random number table for low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set, and when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the opening time is 0.2 s. The blades 64a, 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are opened by setting the number of times of opening once.

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 15R certainty variation jackpot game is won, and when the 15R certainty variation jackpot game is executed, based on the fact that the jackpot game is finished, a flag that is set to ON Is. On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON, and is set to OFF when the symbols (all types) showing the jackpot in the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game, depending on the jackpot type, If it is a 15R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot, it is set to ON.

The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a hit on the basis of winning the first starting opening 63a. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off.

The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired is a hit based on winning the second starting opening 63b. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off.

The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol has been determined to be a hit, while the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S603), the variable display of the first special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process.

The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol has been determined to be a win, while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S407) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S803), the variable display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process is executed.

The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area in which the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first fluctuation time storage area 203s counts the fluctuation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol starts variable display, and the fluctuation time (2 ms for one interrupt) is measured.

The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area in which the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variation time storage area 203t counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt) is measured.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is measured by counting the number of interrupts in the first fluctuation time storage area 203s and the second fluctuation time storage area 203t. However, the invention is not limited to this, and time measurement data is acquired at the start of fluctuation from the RTC. The configuration may be such that the time measurement data is acquired at any time thereafter and the fluctuation time is measured. Further, it is of course possible to store the variable time for variable display in advance and subtract the value at any time.

The rearrangement storage area 203u is a first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or a second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). It is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of the holding areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the rearrangement storage area 203u. The rearrangement storage area 203u corresponds to a pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each of the numbers of holdings in the holding areas 1 to 8 is stored, and a first special symbol and a second special symbol that are being variably displayed. And a changing data storage area in which each determination data to be stored is stored.

In each of the holding areas 1 to 8 of the pending data, there is a win/fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, and a prefetch probability variation flag 203u6. Are provided respectively. It should be noted that the holding areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the holding area 1 in the order in which the respective holding balls are established (a total order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined). That is, the holding areas 1 to 8 show the order in which the holding balls are established in the pachinko machine 10 by combining the holding balls of the first special symbol and the holding balls of the second special symbol.

In the variable display data storage area, a win/fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a jackpot type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 are provided in correspondence with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Has been.

The hit determination result storage area 203u1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

The jackpot type storage area 203u2 is the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). It is a storage area in which the big hit type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the types of fluctuation patterns determined based on the various data stored in are stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable display order storage area 203u4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in. The fluctuation display start order is specifically determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of a newly stored holding ball and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each previously stored holding ball. ..

The fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area for storing the time until each of the calculated data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually starts to be displayed on a variable basis based on the various data stored in. When the variable display start time is stored in the holding area, it is updated at any time in the other process (S112) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The prefetch probability variation flag storage area 203u6 predicts that the type of the jackpot type storage area 203k2 stored in the first prefetch update process (S933 in FIG. 26), which will be described later, is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (determined in advance). Is a storage area that is set to ON and stored. Further, the pre-read probability change flag storage area 203u6 is set to OFF because the area before the shift is stored to 0 every time data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag storage area 203u6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the changing data storage area, and new data is overwritten (shifted) in the changing data storage area to be set to OFF. .. Further, when the game machine is powered on and the RAM clear process is executed, it is set to OFF as an initial value.

Each data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

In this way, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and a holding ball is generated, each holding ball is formed by combining the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of the reserved ball is stored. Therefore, the winning command is generated based on the rearrangement storage area 203u, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, the holding of the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is established. It is possible to generate a command to be output to the display control device 114 so as to display the reserved symbols in order. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also discriminated and stored in association with the established order, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the winning command by generating the winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the received winning command, it is possible to determine the order of establishment of each hold and the actual start order of variable display.

In addition, since the variable start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and that time is managed (updated as time passes), the change display start order of newly stored hold data can be easily performed. Can be determined.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display part 88, and the opening/closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled so that the displayed reserved symbol display is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning of the winning hole is an important factor that determines the gaming state, it is necessary to prevent the player from intentionally winning the winning hole by changing the flow of the ball by vibration. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the command storage area 223a, the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b2, the first variation start flag 223c1, the second variation start flag 223c2, the second 1st stop type selection flag 223d1, 2nd stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary 1st fluctuation stop flag 223e, secondary 2nd fluctuation stop flag 223f, secondary 1st fluctuation restart flag 223g, secondary 2nd fluctuation restart flag 223h, secondary 1st At least a variation time storage area 223i, a secondary second variation time storage area 223j, a secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

The first special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b1 is, similarly to the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, the first special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The second special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b2 is, like the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, the second special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, when the variable display is set on the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (FIG. 38, S1612).

The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, when the variable display is set on the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (FIG. 38, S1612).

The subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1702).

The second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1706).

The subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the temporarily stopped first special symbol is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1710).

The second subordinate variation restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the variable display of the temporarily stopped second special symbol is resumed. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control device 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1714).

The subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value that is synchronized with the first fluctuation time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added for each 1 ms, and the fluctuation time of actual fluctuation display is stored.

The sub second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value in synchronization with the second fluctuation time storage area 203t in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added for each 1 ms and the actual variable display variable time is stored.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k has the same data as the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area that is stored based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113.

FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k stores a variety of data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the holding area of the pending data from the holding area 1 to the holding area 8. And a storage area for data during variable display. Each of the holding areas includes a win/fail judgment result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a subordinate reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a rearrangement flag 223k7. And each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding holding area. Also, every time a display variation pattern command for starting the variable display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the previous reservation area. The reserved data in the reserved area 1 is a storage area for the changing data of the first special symbol in the case of the first special symbol, and a changing data of the second special symbol in the case of the second special symbol. Each is shifted and stored in the storage area.

The hit determination result storage area 223k1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored is extracted from the received winning command and stored. The information on the hit/miss judgment result extracted from the winning command is one of the hit/no hit judgment result storage areas of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

The jackpot type storage area 223k2, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special winning type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable order storage area 223k4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is extracted from the received winning command and stored based on various stored data.

The fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). Is a storage area in which the calculated time until each data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is extracted from the received winning command and stored. .. The variable display start time, when stored in the holding area, is updated at any time in the holding number display processing (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated respective data of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start the variable display. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in fluctuation (interruption count, etc.)), and fluctuation display start It may be a command corresponding to the time until.

The subordinate read probability variation flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is 15R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot.

The rearrangement flag 223k7 indicates that the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display (a reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). It is a flag.

In this way, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a reserved ball occurs, based on the data extracted from the winning command, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of each reserved ball is stored according to the order of establishment of the reserved balls including the above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, the display control device to perform the hold symbol display in the order of establishment of the hold, which is the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, based on the winning command, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is updated with the data synchronized with the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main controller 110, and the suspension data is changed (new suspension is established). Also, the data can be sequentially synchronized and updated.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). The RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

When a power failure occurs, MPU 201 of main controller 110 stores each data in rearrangement storage area 203u in the backup area of RAM 203 as backup data. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and the respective pending areas corresponding to the rearrangement pending storage area 203u or in transition. It is stored in the data storage area.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), based on the rearrangement-reserved storage area 203u in which the backed-up data is read and stored, as in the winning command generated in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S939). All winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, so that data that is synchronized with the same rearrangement pending storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k.

Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k can be restored even after a power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 backs up each data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs. Of course, it may be configured to be stored as.

The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to main controller 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or normal symbol, and various lottery such as selection of winning or variation pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery on whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed as a sub-control. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) which is called a board box and is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method of leaving an unopened mark such as breaking the member forming the through hole or breaking the sealing member. ..

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same design as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, is distributed by the passive distribution member 640, and the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired. Based on each counter value, after the determination of the lottery and the variation pattern, etc., the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Variable display (dynamic display). Further, during the variable display of the first special symbol, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) for the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery machine, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the right 7 In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed in the left display region Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. ..

When the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a during the variable display of the first special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winning. Since the first lottery game which variably displays the lottery result cannot be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, a mode showing the number of reserved "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37 (for example, one The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding spheres is incremented by 1).

When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. The winning command can identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is the winning, and the number of reserved balls (reserved number) can be identified.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, it extracts holding information such as the number of holdings and information about the winning opening from the received command, and based on the holding information, the third symbol display device. A process of displaying the reserved symbol in the corresponding reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds at 81 is executed. As for this reservation design, as shown in Figure 5 (b), if it is the reservation design which corresponds to the reservation information of the 1st special design (1st starting mouth 63a), “O”, 2nd special design (the 2nd starting) If it is a hold symbol corresponding to the hold information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each hold information (one hold symbol for each hold).

Similarly, during the variable display of the second special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), each counter value is acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol reserve ball storage area It is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is updated. Then, the hold symbol indicating that the hold information is stored in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined. The example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. This is, first, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, the first special symbol has a variation time of 10s remaining, the second special symbol has a variation time of 5s remaining Showing. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the holding symbol indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds1 (holding information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b). "", the holding symbol "○" indicating that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol, the holding symbol "○" indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds3 "," is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4, which is a reserved symbol "○" indicating that it is the reserved information of the first special symbol. In this case, it is shown that the order of winning in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the order of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 from the reserved symbol display area Ds1 in ascending order.

In other words, after the game ball is won in the second starting port 63b, the first starting port 63a is won, then the second starting port 63b, then the first starting port 63a is won. It shows that it did.

As shown in FIG. 12, in each hold data, the change time of the change pattern selected when the hold is started to change is predicted and stored in advance (the determined change pattern type is stored. Has been). Then, since the second special symbol is stored in the first winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 1 corresponds), the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variably manner remains. When the variable time (5 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, so the variable display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. Also, since the first special symbol is stored in the second winning order (the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponds to the retaining area 2), the remaining of the first special symbol which is currently displayed in a variable manner. When the variable time (10 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, and the variable display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the second special symbol is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 3 corresponds), the second special symbol is currently displayed. When the variation time (40 s) of the pending data stored in the first winning order has elapsed in the remaining variation time (5 s), the variation display starts, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since the first special symbol is stored in the fourth winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 4 is applicable), the first special symbol currently being displayed is changed. When the fluctuation time (10s) of the pending data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated as 20 seconds later.

In this way, in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, the variable display start times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are calculated in the order in which they are established, and the variable display start time is in the descending order based on the variable display start time. In, the variable display order is assigned.

At this timing, when the player operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in the rearrangement display mode shown in FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the winning order is reserved. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol of the third winning order (the reserved symbol display of the fourth winning order is interrupted before the reserved symbol display of the third winning order).

FIG. 13 shows a case where the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a after 1 s from the state of FIG. 12, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining a variable display start order of newly stored reserved symbols.

Since FIG. 13 is a state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the variable display has a remaining variation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining variation time of 4 s. Further, the fluctuation start time of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u is also updated.

The newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is reserved in the fifth winning order, and in the rearrangement storage area 203u, each data is stored in the storage area 5. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol in the variable display, the variation time of the suspension of the first special symbol of the winning order 2 and 4 are added respectively, and newly. The time when the hold of the established (stored) first special symbol becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the rearranged order (variable display start order) is rearranged in the order in which the variable display is started based on the variable display start time of each holding area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 and requests the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after rearrangement of FIG. 13, the fourth and fifth reserved symbols in the winning order are displayed. Is displayed in rearrangement with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the winning symbol display of the fourth and fifth winning symbols is interrupted before the displaying of the third winning symbol in the winning order).

In this way, each time a hold occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sorting order is determined in advance, so that the player can perform an operation (operation of the frame button 22) requesting sorting. In this case, the reserved symbol display after rearrangement can be promptly displayed.

Further, the variation patterns of the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot are likely to be longer than the variation pattern selected when the variation time is out of sync. As shown in FIG. 13, the variation time of the first winning order hold is as long as 40 seconds. Therefore, the hold of the same second special symbol that is established after that, the variable display start time is later than the hold of the first special symbol that was established later, and when rearranged, a long variable time is selected. Behind the pending symbol display that is present, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that is different from the pending that the long variation time is selected is collectively displayed. Therefore, the greater the number of reserved symbol displays that are displayed by being interrupted in the subsequent reserved symbol display area of the reserved symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of a big hit for the previous reserved symbol display, and the player is You can rearrange with the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, interest in the game is increased and the game can be continued without getting tired.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 40. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (FIG. 32) started when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 33, S1200) executed after the startup process, and periodically (in the present embodiment). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) which is activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 31) which is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 32) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) will be described.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are provided in the RAM 203. Once stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the holding ball number command set in the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large opening opening/closing process for executing is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated in the RAM 203. It is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1 and the normal winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (the In the embodiment, when reaching 399, 99, 100, 198, 239), each is cleared to 0. When the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C4, and the initial value is set in the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (S107), and then, a start winning process associated with winning the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the normal symbol starting process 67 is a normal symbol changing process that is a changing process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through (S109), and then the normal symbol starting port 67. A through gate process for the game ball passing through is executed (S10). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A firing control process is executed to control the game ball to be launched (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S111) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. Then, when the sphere is turned on, in order to send the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). Special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on each acquired counter value, various determinations and determinations are made, and the determined variable display by predetermined control. In the mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to enable variable display at the same time, or to be stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the determination result. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 17, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display has elapsed, the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game. With the process of stopping the variable display, the second special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol showing a big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not held, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the hold data is executed. ..

After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display. When the time has passed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the variable display stop of the first special symbol with the symbol indicating the big hit are performed, and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol which is being variably displayed is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed, the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but like the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), when the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. While the process for restarting the variable display is executed, if the temporary stop is not performed, and if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area 203b, The jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the pending data are executed. Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is provisionally stopped (S301). Whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, although the variation time (variation pattern) is set. .. When it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is restarted (S302). Regarding the variation time of this first special symbol, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), which will be described later, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started to be varied, a variation pattern or the like is selected. Then, the start of measurement of the fluctuation time is set. When the variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the main controller 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first display device 37 in accordance therewith. The variable display of the first special symbol (the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b) in the first symbol display device 37 is restarted (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to restart the variable display of the first special symbol that is temporarily stopped is set (S304). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e is acquired (S305). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306). When the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is determined to be larger than 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S308). .. The data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol holding number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the game that is set. Based on the state, the jackpot judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed. When the determination result is a big hit, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON. Thereby, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display, and it can be recognized that the jackpot game is started after the stop display, and the second special symbol in the variable display is temporarily stopped during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Can be made.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Processing for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (during probability change) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON. If the probability variation flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (during probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether or not the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is off (that is, the game state is a low probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S402: No), in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the big hit random value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S405). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). Thereby, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the determination result is a big jackpot, and when the variable display of the first special symbol that notifies the determination result is stopped and displayed, if the second special symbol is changing, if The variable display will be stopped.

In this way, before starting the variable display of the first special symbol, by setting the second fluctuation stop flag 203r to ON, at the time of the fluctuation table stop of the first special symbol, the temporary stop of the second special symbol is performed. Compared with the case of determining whether or not it is possible, it is possible to prevent a problem that the control processing is concentrated when the fluctuation stops.

Based on the acquired value of the special winning type counter C2, the jackpot symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37, and the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S408). Thereby, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the special winning type counter C2 (for example, "7" if the 15R probability variation big jackpot) is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is OFF (S405: No), the off symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S409). In the present embodiment, in the case of disengagement, "-" indicating disengagement is set in the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S310).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S310). ). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S502). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

The jackpot type table is determined based on the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot type table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, and a 15R jackpot table is determined for the 15R probability jackpot and a 15R regular jackpot, and a 2R jackpot table is determined for the 2R probability jackpot. .. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S505).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp controller 113 of the selected variation pattern is also set. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

Along with the setting of the variation pattern command, by starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time can be measured in time with the variation start of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately measured. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). When it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), the temporary first variation stop command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to temporarily suspend the first special symbol is set. , The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first fluctuation stop flag 203q is set to OFF (S603). Then, the measurement of the first fluctuation time is interrupted (S604).

With such a configuration, the first special symbol can also be temporarily stopped together with the timing at which the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the winning judgment symbol. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game in the second lottery game and play the game.

Moreover, since the measurement of the first fluctuation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, the remaining fluctuation time can be accurately measured after the big hit game.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops the first special symbol in a display mode that allows the player to know that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Specifically, a character such as "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" is displayed, or the three main symbols on the left, middle, and right constituting the special symbol are continuously variably displayed in a swaying display mode, whereby the player To notify that the vehicle is temporarily stopped. The display mode for notifying the temporary stop is not limited to this, and other notification modes may be used.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, variation display is being performed) (S602: No), the process of S605 is executed. When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the variation time of the first special symbol in the variation display is the end time (S605).

When it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606). When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various types of jackpot games are set based on the determined variation stop type (S608). Specifically, in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot and 15R normal jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30 seconds. It In addition, in the case of 2R certainty variation jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2s.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time saving counter 203k is greater than "0" (S609). When it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is larger than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is decremented by 1 (S610). That is, each time the first special symbol is variably displayed, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k has a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S609: No), the process of S611 is executed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is set with a first confirmation command for instructing that the variable display of the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S611). The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol showing the determined hit/miss judgment result (S612). The value of the first fluctuation time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first fluctuation time measured value is cleared to 0 (S613). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the above-mentioned first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), for each process from S301 to S310, the first special symbol , 1st variable time measurement restart, 1st symbol display 37, 1st special symbol fluctuation restart command, 1st special symbol reservation sphere number counter value (N1), 1st special symbol reservation sphere storage area, 1st special symbol Big hit determination process, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process in each process of S701 to S710, the second special symbol, the second variable time measurement restart, the second symbol display device 37, the second special symbol holding ball number counter Value (N2), the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area, the second special symbol jackpot determination process, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, since the same except that they are changed, the description thereof is omitted. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), for the process of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area In the process of S711, in the second special symbol holding sphere execution area, for each process of S407 to S408, the second fluctuation stop flag, the first jackpot flag in each process of S717 to S718, the first fluctuation The description is omitted because they are the same except that they are changed to the stop flag and the second jackpot flag.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S710).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 22, S710), the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310) described above, the first to each processing from S507 to S508 The processes of the stop type command and the first variation time measurement start from S727 to S728 are the same except that they are changed to the first stop type command and the first variation time measurement start, respectively. Omit it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207).

In the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the first variation stop for each of the processes from S601 to S604, with respect to the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 19, S204). Flag, 1st special design, temporary 1st fluctuation stop command, 1st fluctuation time measurement interruption each processing of S801-S804, 2nd fluctuation stop flag, 2nd special design, temporary 2nd fluctuation stop command, 2nd It is changed to variable time measurement interruption, and for each process from S611 to S613, the first commit command, the first special symbol, and the first commit command in each process from S811 to S813, the second commit command. , The second special symbol, since it is the same except that it is changed to the second fluctuation time measurement value, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. Can be made. Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

Moreover, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has a variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Relatively short, even in one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is easily executed, by increasing the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbols are not variably displayed becomes long.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in which either the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery game is executed, when the distribution device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, the variation time is relatively long. If it is not shortened, there will be many overflows that will not be reserved balls. However, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery game is performed with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, on the other hand, even if the variation with a long variation time is selected, the variation of the special symbol on the other side as well. As a result, lots of special symbols can be drawn in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of sufficient variation time as needed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In addition, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so that the player has confirmed that the lottery game that was in the middle of variable display has not disappeared. It is possible to grasp and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the distribution device 630, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b are likely to be alternately won, and the first start opening 63a or the second start. The prize is biased toward one of the mouths 63b, and the player tries to make the other starting mouth, which is less reserved, win the winning ball. It is possible to suppress the problem that many invalid balls occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) determines whether a game ball has won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and in the case of winning, the upper limit holding number (first starting opening 63a, It is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b, up to four in each of the 2 starting ports 63b). Moreover, each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding sphere storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a win/fail judgment result, a variation pattern to be selected, or the like is executed in advance. The starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 63a (start winning) (S901). Here, the winning of the first start opening 63a is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 63a (there is a starting winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether the number is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first starting opening 63a (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S904). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold number is set (S905). Various counter values, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding balls of the RAM 203 are stored. It is reserved (stored) in the special hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the execution area 203c (S906).

Next, the first prefetch processing is executed (S907). The first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special display in which the variable display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is stored. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what the order is, and from the variation display order and each of the stored counter values, the judgment result, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. The process of determining is executed.

Next, regarding each processing of S908 to S914, the same processing as the processing performed for winning the game ball into the first starting opening 63a executed in each processing of S901 to S907 is the second processing. The only difference is the process executed for the starting port 63b, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first prefetching process (S907) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch processing (S907).

In the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907), first, special counter random number counter C1, special counter type counter C2, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, fluctuation The respective values of the pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are read (S921). The read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the rearrangement storage area 203u, and the variable display is started based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value). The variable display start time is calculated (S922).

This fluctuation start time is, as shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol in the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reservation data (if the reservation data is based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second special symbol. If it is the hold data based on the starting opening 63b, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol) and the holding data previously stored based on the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored holding data is determined. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation times.

Here, each of the hold data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored hold data means that the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first starting port 63a. Hold data based on the first starting port 63a (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored on the other hand, on the other hand, if the newly stored hold data is hold data based on the second starting port 63b, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 63b that has been done.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203u (S923). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, However, if the newly stored variable display start order of the pending data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is obvious that only the changed order is renumbered. Good.

It is determined whether the game state at the time when the newly stored hold data starts changing is the high probability game state (S924). Regarding the game state when the fluctuation starts, although there is a thing that the prefetch probability change flag 203u6 is on although the stopped data is changed by the time when the newly stored hold data starts to change, and then the 15R normal jackpot is stopped. It is determined by determining whether or not there is. When it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts to change is the high-probability game state (S924: Yes), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high-probability case jackpot determination value On the basis of the above, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is valid, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts to change is the low-probability game state (normal game state) (S924: No), the special symbol jackpot for the low-probability case Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is valid, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S927).

The first prefetch update processing is executed (S926). The first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but it is determined whether or not the pending data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Based on, the jackpot type (whether it is a probable change) and the variation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated).

Next, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926), first, it is determined whether or not the win/no-judgment result predicted in the process of S925 or S927 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) is a big hit (S931). When it is determined that the hit determination result predicted in the processing of S925 or S927 in the first prefetch processing (FIG. 25, S907) is a jackpot (S931: Yes), the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or It is determined whether or not it is the second R probability variation big hit) (S932). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (S932: Yes), the pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 of the sorting reservation storage area 203u corresponding to the newly stored reservation data is set to ON (S933). .. The prefetch probability change flag 203u6 is set to OFF because the data in the reserved area before the shift is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the holding area in order, and is set to OFF by shifting and overwriting (clearing to 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area. To be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the probability variation jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S932: No), the process of S934 is executed.

The special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the start of variation display (whether it is in probability variation or shortening time) is newly stored from the special winning variation type counter C2 and the variation pattern determining counter C3 of the pending data. The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S934).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the win/no determination result predicted in the process of S925 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) is out (S931: No), the game state at the start of variable display (probable change or shortened time). Whether or not), the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e is determined at the start of fluctuation display based on the values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data. The fluctuation pattern is predicted (S935).

The predicted hit/miss, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponding to the winning order (corresponding to the newly stored suspension data) (S936). It is determined whether or not the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is interrupted (changed in order) to the previously stored variable display start order (S937). .. If it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u is interrupted (changed in order) to the previously stored variable display start order, (S937: Yes), about the pending data after the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data (the pending data in the order of starting to vary after the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data fluctuates and stops) Then, again, the success/failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted and updated (S938). Based on the hit/miss, stop type, variation pattern, winning order, variation display start order, and pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 corresponding to all the retention data stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the respective data is converted into a voice lamp control device. A winning command for notifying 113 is generated for each holding data (S939).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and is held until the variable display of the corresponding special symbol can be started, it is determined whether or not it is won before the variable display is started. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of variation start by the player's operation.

Further, when a new hold is stored and the order in which fluctuation starts is changed due to the new hold (the newly stored change start order of the reservation is interrupted and stored), the rearrangement storage area 203u is again stored. Of the stored hold areas, the newly stored hold is newly stored because the judgment of acceptance, stop type, and variation pattern are updated for the hold that starts changing after the newly stored hold is stopped. By doing so, even when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state) changes, it is possible to update it to accurate data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the newly stored hold start sequence is interrupted and stored, the hold data in the hold area (whether the judgment is correct, the stop type, or the fluctuation pattern) is updated again. Not limited to this, when a new hold is stored, the judgment may be performed again for all the hold areas every time. With this configuration, the data in the holding area can be updated each time new holding is stored, and more accurate data can always be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a second prefetching process (S914) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S914).

The second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) prefetches the pending data based on the winning of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) in the first starting opening 63a, and is stored in advance. In contrast to the process of determining the variable display start order of the pending data and making various determinations, the pending data based on winning the second starting opening 63b is prefetched in advance and the stored pending data is stored. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and various determinations are performed, and the detailed description is omitted.

Further, as for the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, 914) shown in FIG. 28, the above-described first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) is the first. While the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command based on the variation display start order of the pending data based on the winning of the first starting port 63a, the winning of the second starting port 63b is performed. Based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on the above, the same process is executed, only the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command, and detailed description is omitted. To do.

In this way, game balls are won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When the reserved data is stored (the hold data is stored), the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) is executed. The newly stored reservation data is stored in the rearrangement reservation ball storage area 203u in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) in which the order of the variable display start is sorted first. Since it is decided by comparing with the variable display start time of each held data that is stored, the gaming state (whether it is during the probable change) is accurately determined when the stored data stored is started to display. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the result of the judgment, the stop type, the fluctuation pattern displayed in a variable manner, and the like. Therefore, next, even when new pending data is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second The variable display start time of the newly stored pending data can be accurately predicted based on the variation time (variation pattern) of each pending data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variable display start order can be predicted.

In addition, when the variable display start order of newly stored hold data is stored by interrupting the variable display start order of previously stored hold data (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold display is performed. For each pending data in the variable display start order after the data, the game state at the start of variable display is predicted again by the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). Then, since the winning/prohibition, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted (look ahead), the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored hold data from the winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a normal symbol variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors' prize 64, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit. (S1001). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the hit indicating is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 to when the opening/closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S1001: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1001: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol that is being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1003). The variable time here is a time preset by the processes of S1017 and S1018, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 88.

In the processing of S1003, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, when it is determined that the variation time of the normally displayed variable symbol has elapsed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 88 is set (S1004). .. In the process of S1004, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is missed and the display mode at the time of disengagement is set by the processing of S1017, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) as the second symbol on the second symbol display unit 88. Display) is set. By the process of S1004, when the stop display is set, the variable display in the second symbol display unit 88 ends, the process of S1017, the display mode set in the process of S1018, the stop symbol (second symbol) is The stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display portion 88.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the regular design lottery this time is a win (S1005). When it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ordinary symbols this time is a win (S1005: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbols this time is out of alignment (S1005: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1007). After the processing of S1007, the processing of S1023 is executed.

Next, it is judged whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1009).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal symbol reserve 1 to the normal symbol reserve 4 of the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, ordinary symbol hold 1 → execution area, ordinary symbol hold 2 → ordinary symbol hold 1, ordinary symbol hold 3 → ordinary symbol hold 2, ordinary symbol hold 4 → ordinary symbol hold 4, etc. within each area Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

Next, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 0 (that is, not during hour/hour) (S1012: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability time (FIG. 8(d)) Based on, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1013). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is not 0 (that is, during hour saving) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (( S1014). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1014: Yes), the process of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big bonus of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1014: No), the normal judgment per random symbol table for high probability (FIG. 8 (d)) On the basis of this, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1015).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out) (S1016: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of disconnection is set. (S1017). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be winning (that is, it is winning) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode at the time of winning is It is set (S1018).

It is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during hour/hour (including a certain variation)) (S1019). When it is determined that the time is not shortening (S1019: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the opening frequency is set to 1 (S1020).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is shortening (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1021: Yes), the process of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 is 1 s and the number of times of opening is two times. It is set (S1020).

It is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during hour/hour (including probability variation)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is shortening (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

Next, the through gate passage processing (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67, and if the game ball has passed. , Is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 for ordinary hits.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1033).

Whether the sphere does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or even if the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt process, and the first normal symbol flag, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 empty holding area (ordinary symbol holding 1 to ordinary symbol) It is stored in the first area of the hold 4) (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol reserve 2, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol reserve 3, if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol reserve 4, first, respectively. Area.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed to start the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (11605). If not, it is not stored. (S1105: No), since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1110 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1110. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1111, S1112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1104: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1108). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1113). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process shifts to a main process (S1200) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), roughly, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

In the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is output to each sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). The display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display portion 88 is acquired. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, and when the hit state of the second symbol is reached, the normal electric auditors' prize 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1207). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1207: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201 and the above-described respective processes after S1201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1207: No), the initial period is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1208, S1209).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1202 (S1209).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, so that the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special random number counter C1 Of the random number counter C4 per ordinary number) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1206, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 31 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1210 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1211). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1206 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1205 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1201 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing (S1400) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the power-off process in S1418 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1302: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1418 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1418 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is executed, the process of S1308 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1304 to S1306 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1309, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1309 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304 when the processing of S1308 is reached through the processing of S1304 through S1306. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main processing (S1400) is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing (S1400) was started or since the processing of S1401 was executed last time ( S1401) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1410. In the process of S1401, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S1402 to S1410 that determines whether 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S1411 and the command determination processing of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the power supply notifying process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update process (S1406), which will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the pending symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. ..

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the rearrangeable period (a period during which the jackpot game and the state where there is no hold) are pressed, the hold symbol display that has been displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts variable display. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is then executed (S1408), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410). After this, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1411, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to the user, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), the temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) is a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped from the main control device 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Based on having received, the process for temporarily stopping the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. Details of this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the temporary fluctuation stopping process (S1412), the pending rearrangement process is executed (S1413). This reservation rearrangement processing displays the reserved symbol displays in a rearranged display start order from the winning order based on a player's button operation based on a winning command output from the main control device 110, based on the player's button operation. Execute the process. Details of the reservation rearrangement process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the reservation rearrangement process (S1413), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1414 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to the process of S1401 to repeatedly execute the main process (S1400). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process (S1400) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the command determination processing (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1414). The command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. To judge. Details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main controller 110 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command is received (S1501). Here, the first variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the first variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the first variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be distinguishable from the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the second variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the second variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the second variation pattern command is received (S1504: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the second variation pattern command is not received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1507). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command is received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to ON when the first stop type command is received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to ON. (S1508). The stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Is stored so that it can be identified.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter f (that is, the number of holding balls of the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a voice lamp. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113, the holding ball number of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 (S1511).

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning), every time there is a starting winning. , S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the second It can be adjusted to the value of the 2 special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, at the time of starting winning detection, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. However, the value can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e or the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203f of the main controller 110.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), information of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each holding area in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u that is extracted is the judgment result, jackpot type, change pattern type, change display order, and time until start of change display for each hold. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). When it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received (S1515: Yes), when the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received, the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received and set to ON, the secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol fluctuation restart command or the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received. It is determined whether or not it is (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation restart command corresponding to the received command is received. In this case, the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON. When the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received, the sub second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending quantity display update processing (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing (S1406). This reservation number display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the reservation symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each reservation area of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k. ..

In the reservation quantity display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the fluctuation display start time of the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is turned on is a variable display start order, and is held corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off. As for the symbol display, the held symbol display is displayed in the order in which the hold is established (S1432).

Here, in the rearrangement flag 223k7, the frame button 22 is operated during the rearrangeable period in the pending rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the button is pressed), it is set to ON in all hold areas in which hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed hold symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the hold variable display start order from the hold hold order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF for the newly stored hold, the order established without rearrangement, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol displays displayed at that time are rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter. Also, the rearranged hold symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the newly stored (reoccurring) hold symbol display is displayed in the established order first. Since it is displayed at the end without being displayed by interrupting the reserved symbol display that is being performed, the player can suppress the problem that the current display is confused as to which sequence is displayed. You can

Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol displays that are displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to notify the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

Also, in the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display, when the reserved symbol having a slower establishment order is displayed before the reserved symbol having a faster establishment order is displayed. Of the pending symbols displayed before the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt, the pending generated by winning in the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt is a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with the expectation of a big hit.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is based on the first or second variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, a process of setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type based on the extracted stop type (15R certainty big jackpot, 15R normal big jackpot, 2R certainty big jackpot) To execute.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), it means that the first fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process of S1606 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S1602).

In the processing of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the processing of S1503 of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223. Then, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte structure is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol Is configured to indicate that

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is received, in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the first special symbol (third symbol).

With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with (display setting was performed), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the previous holding area. It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7. Using the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i, measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started (S1605).

It is determined whether the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). Then, when it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the first variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to off (S1607). In the process of S1506 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and the second A variable pattern command for displaying a special symbol is generated (S1608).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received, in the right display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol (third symbol). With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the one holding area before. It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7.

Using the sub second variation time storage area 223j, measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started (S1610).

It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S1611: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S1611: Yes), when the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, When the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to OFF and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to OFF (S1612).

In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S1613). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). A first stop type command for display for notifying (whether there is) is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). Then, a second display stop type command for notifying whether or not) is generated (S1614). It should be noted that the first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. .. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

With such a configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

Further, based on that the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, by also shifting the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110. The control load of main controller 110 can be reduced without the need to control the transmission of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is changed. During the jackpot game, a process for temporarily stopping is executed.

In the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is determined whether the first subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. When it is determined that the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

A first temporary stop command for display is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 sets the first temporary stop command for display, after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol (main symbol on the left middle right) is slightly shaken to be displayed. Then, the player is informed that the variable display is temporarily stopped. Further, by displaying the character "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left side display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand and the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is configured to notify.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being displayed variably was temporarily stopped because a big hit occurred, and the lottery that was being displayed variably disappeared or became invalid. You can play games with peace of mind by preventing anxiety when it happens.

Further, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left display area Dm, and the temporary stop may be informed only by the characters. However, other configurations are naturally possible.

When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol measured in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the subordinate first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (that is, off) (S1701: No), is the subordinate second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second display temporary stop command is displayed. Is generated (S1707). The second temporary stop command for display, similarly to the first temporary stop command for display, controls the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a command to do. Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of temporary stop.

When the display second temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol measured in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

It is determined whether the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709: Yes), the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1710).

It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711: Yes), the first short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1712). When the display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed lottery result of the variation display!" in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the sub-first variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3s (S1711: No), the display first normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode resuming command displays the character "temporarily changing the variation display which is changing!" in the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols. The main symbols (three symbols on the left middle right) are variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, and then, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is a symbol showing the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub first fluctuation time storage area 223i is restarted (S1714).

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the subordinate second variation restart flag 223h is set to on (S1715). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1716).

It is determined whether the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed variation display lottery result!" in the right side display area Dm2 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3s (S1717: No), the display second normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1719). When the display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second normal variation mode resuming command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display is changing!" in the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining change time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After the main symbol (three symbols in the left middle right) is variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the second special symbol is shown in the symbol indicating the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub second fluctuation time storage area 223j is restarted (S1720). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted, the fact is informed to the player by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice is not limited thereto. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, like the display mode in which the player knows that the change has been resumed (for example, it is displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display in which the character etc. has been interrupted is displayed) Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode only for restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the suspended variable display is restarted.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern according to the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when the main control device 110 restarts the temporary stoppage of the fluctuation timetable, the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time or the fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time is used depending on the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls by delaying the difference between the remaining variation time and the variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time to display the variation. , It is possible to perform a variation table time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the remaining variation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pending rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this reservation rearrangement processing processing (S1413). The hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is a hold symbol displayed in the hold establishment order on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid period. The process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

In the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), first, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (S1801). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the holding areas in which the holding data of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is stored are set to ON. (S1804).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1801: No), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), the process ends.

With such a configuration, when the player wants to sort, it is possible to sort only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be played evenly and efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the holding symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new holding is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order by the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, even when a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode are displayed together. By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store data that is rearranged. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data necessary for rearrangement (winning judgment result, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.) by a winning command. The voice lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform rearrangement.

With this configuration, the main control device 110 backs up various data necessary for rearrangement in the RAM 203 even when a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored, the various types of data are restored in the startup process (FIG. 32). By outputting the data to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 rearranges the data based on the various data, so that it is possible to easily recover from the power failure.

In the present embodiment, by the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the start of variation and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the first special symbol or the first reserved symbol The fluctuation start time of 2 special symbols was calculated, and the fluctuation start order was calculated. Not limited to this, at the time of winning a game ball, by determining whether or not the variation mode is a reach, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is longer than a certain time (time information), and the time information and the variation The variation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. With such a configuration, at the time of winning, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is a reach (whether the long-time variation mode or the short-time variation mode), and the accurate variation time (variation mode) is determined. Even with the pachinko machine 10 that is determined by information such as the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation, the player can be notified of the rough fluctuation start order.

Therefore, the player may not be in the exact change start order, but the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term change mode (reach change mode) being held. , You can play games with the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is determined by the game state, but is not limited thereto, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (for example, the state where the pending symbol display is displayed), It may be configured to notify that rearrangement is possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to flexibly set the period during which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to sort.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710). Then, a case has been described in which the special winning variation pattern table or the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is selected based on the jackpot determination result, and various variation patterns are selected.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (the present embodiment. In the example, 3 or more), and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (this implementation In the form, it is determined whether there is more than two), and if there is more, a fluctuation pattern that is out of the short time and is configured with a fluctuation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) shorter than other fluctuation patterns is selected. It Regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, similarly to the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the difference between the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is more than a predetermined number, and the fluctuation pattern out of the short time is selected.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol, respectively, the states of the reserved balls are judged to be special. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a variation pattern (in the present embodiment, a variation pattern that deviates for a short time) is selected.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e in the special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table commonly selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

This special deviation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) is a later-described first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) and second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (not shown), It is a fluctuation pattern table to be selected. Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern is three or more, and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the other special symbol (the second special symbol if the first special symbol) is two. If there are more than the above, this special deviation pattern pattern for adjustment is selected. The adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table that is selected only when the judgment result is incorrect, and is composed of only one type with a variation time of 0.5 seconds. There is. Therefore, regardless of the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter CS3, a variation pattern (variation time of 0.5 seconds) that is out of the short period is selected.

In this way, by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of the short time, the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the difference from the reserved balls of the other special symbol is 2 or more, and the number of reserved balls is equal to each other. Even if it is not, it is possible to speed up the digestion of the holding ball of the more one, it is possible to hold the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol evenly, only the other The upper limit number (4 in this embodiment) is set, and it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring.

In addition, by determining whether or not there are three or more holding balls of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern, the variation pattern that is out of the short time is frequently selected in the state where the number of holding balls is small, and the effect of the game ( It is possible to prevent a loss of interest due to fluctuations in special symbols).

Further, in the present embodiment, the adjustment special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) has only one kind of fluctuation pattern with a short time deviation (change time of 0.5 seconds). Alternatively, it may be configured by a variation pattern that is deviated for a short time and is configured by the variation time. In this way, by configuring, when the other special symbol is changing, by changing the remaining variation time, the type of variation pattern (variation time) that is out of the selected short time, variation of the holding ball The numbers can be even with each other. Further, the variation time of the reserved ball of the other special symbol may be predicted, and the variation pattern of the short time deviation to be selected may be changed. By doing this, even if there is a special pattern with a smaller number of reserved balls, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C) is selected. , By selecting a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment for a short time, it is possible to adjust the holding balls of the special symbols to be more uniform.

In the present embodiment, the difference between the reserved balls is determined, and the variation pattern for adjustment is determined. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the difference between the special symbols is selected without determining the difference between the reserved balls. The pattern may be discriminated and the variation pattern may be selected so that the variation time difference becomes small. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation pattern selected by the second special symbol is determined, and if the variation pattern having the long variation time is selected, the variation of the relatively long variation time is changed. The patterns (variation time in accordance with the variation end of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, etc.) may be determined so that the holding balls have the same digestion speed.

With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the number of reserved balls to be equal to each other without determining extremely short or long fluctuation patterns.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 assists the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64b alternately so that the game balls can be easily won. Therefore, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, due to the difference in the variation pattern (variation time) that is selected, the digestion speed of the reserved ball is different, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the reserved ball There is a case where the numbers are unbalanced, or the distribution device 630 does not alternately distribute the game balls to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b, which may cause the deviation. However, if a bias occurs, if there are two or more differences between the holding balls in the three states before the number of holding balls reaches the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), it will take a short time. Since the variation pattern of deviation is selected, the player can continue the game without worrying that an overflow will occur in the holding ball of one special symbol.

Referring to FIG. 42, in the second embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 43, in the second embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 2 (S320) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S320). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, in the case where the hit determination result is out, it is a process for selecting a variation pattern that is out of time for a short time depending on the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot ( S511). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S511: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S512). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

The big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is determined based on the big hit type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S513). The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(c)) is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table. In the case of the 15R probability jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot, the 15R jackpot table is the 2R probability jackpot. The 2R jackpot table is determined.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S511: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514). The number of holding balls of the first special symbol is determined based on the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514: Yes), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. It is determined whether the value is 2 or more (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) (S515). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (S515: Yes), the special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) is set. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 3 (S514: No), the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. When it is determined that the result is less than two (S515: No), the special deviation variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the gaming state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S518). Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command is generated (S519). Here, the first variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S520). After that, the measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S521).

In this way, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, and further, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, The special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the variation pattern with a short deviation is selected, the variation of the first special symbol ends in 0.5 seconds, and the next first special The holding ball is digested by the start of the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the holding ball of the symbol. Therefore, the reserved ball of the first special symbol will be digested one after 0.5 seconds, the digestion speed of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is increased, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol It can be adjusted to reduce the difference between the holding balls.

Also, if a large number of game balls are won in the first starting opening 63a in a short time and the difference between the reserved balls becomes large, or if the first special symbol has a relatively long variation pattern (for example, variation pattern of super reach C, etc.). ) Is selected, a relatively short variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern of the normal deviation A) is continuously selected in the second special symbol, and the difference between the reserved balls becomes large (eg, the first variation pattern). 1 special symbol reserve ball is 4 and the second special symbol reserve ball is 1), etc., each time the variation of the first special symbol starts Since the process of whether or not to select, is performed, in the first special symbol, a fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short period of time is continuously selected, and it is necessary to quickly adjust to reduce the difference between the reserved balls. You can Therefore, in the first special symbol, the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment) is reached, and in the second special symbol the number is less than the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment) (for example, one or the like), When the reserved balls of the second special symbol are also to be reserved up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment), the game balls are distributed to the first winning opening 63a by being alternately distributed by the distribution winning device 630. It is possible to prevent a problem that a prize is won and an overflow occurs.

Further, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, by determining the difference between the holding balls of each other, the holding balls of the first special symbol is the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) Until the remaining one, the variation pattern that is out of the short time is not selected, and the variation pattern that is out of the short time is frequently selected, and the player cannot fully enjoy the effect due to the variation of the special symbol, and the game It is possible to prevent getting tired. It is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is missed before the special symbol is stopped by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short time, and does not have the expectation for a big hit. be able to.

In addition, even if a difference between the holding balls occurs by selecting a relatively long fluctuation pattern (such as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C), a fluctuation pattern that is out of position for a short time is selected thereafter, so that It can be adjusted to reduce the difference. Therefore, the overflow can be reduced, and many variation patterns having a relatively long variation time (variation patterns of Super Reach C, etc.) are selected to make the player enjoy the production by the variation of the special symbol, It is possible to prevent getting tired of playing games. Therefore, it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects, and to suppress the problem that the selection of the variation pattern can be limited (for example, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern such as the spear reach C is extremely reduced). it can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the distribution winning device 630 alternately distributes the game to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. Therefore, the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the difference is one, so as not to select the fluctuation pattern out of the short time, the reserved ball and the first of the first special symbol It is determined whether or not the difference between the two special symbols and the reserved ball is two or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation pattern that is out of the short time from being frequently selected even when the distribution winning apparatus 630 is evenly distributed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hit determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, the variation pattern for adjustment is not selected. With such a configuration, as the variation pattern to be a hit, a variation pattern showing a normal hit can be selected, and an effect of the variation pattern to be sufficiently hit to the player can be produced. In addition, if the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a hit, since the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation stop, it is not necessary to deal with problems such as overflow without selecting a fluctuation pattern for adjustment. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is three or more, but not limited to this, it may be two or more, or may be appropriately set by another number. Further, it may be configured to directly determine the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol without determining the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but the number may be three or more, and other numbers are appropriately set. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern for a short time deviation is one type having a variation time of 0.5 seconds, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be different for each 0.5 seconds. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided for selection. About selection, you may make it select by a counter value like selection of other variation patterns, and the state of the reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls, the difference between the reserved balls, and those that are reserved). For example, it may be selected based on the previously determined variation time), or if the second special symbol is changing, it may be configured to select based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference with the holding ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of a variation pattern that is out of order for a short time and allow the player to play a game with the effect of the normal variation pattern, and prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with a short time deviation is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern with normal deviation A) is selected from the normal time deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may comprise. With such a configuration, the player can change the special symbol in a normal variation pattern, and the player can reduce the feeling of strangeness that the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

As for the second special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment as in the first special symbol. And the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process, is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S203). ..

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first is the second, the second However, since the detailed description and the effect to be achieved are the same, the description and the illustration are omitted.

In the present embodiment, when the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (two or more in the present embodiment), a variation pattern of a short time deviation However, it is not limited to this, but it is not limited to the case where the result of the judgment is wrong, the variation pattern selected by the other special symbol is determined, and the difference in the number of reserved balls is eliminated. The variation pattern may be selected. In detail, the holding balls of the first special symbol are two more than the holding balls of the second special symbol, and if the variation pattern selected by the retaining balls of the second special symbol is a relatively short variation pattern, it is more than that. Select a short fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds), and if it is a relatively long fluctuation pattern, select a fluctuation pattern that is shorter than the fluctuation pattern and that can adjust the difference in the holding balls. You can do this.

With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the difference between the reserved balls while performing a more natural variation of the special symbol. Therefore, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table, a variation pattern table dedicated to deviation for a short time is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in a normal variation pattern (both hit and deviation), A fluctuation pattern (for example, a short time fluctuation of 0.5 seconds) is set for the address, and the leading address is selected according to the difference of the holding balls to select the fluctuation pattern for the adjustment. May be.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but the distribution device 630 is not provided and the first start opening is provided. Even with a configuration in which game balls randomly win the 63a and the second start opening 63b, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 45. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the reserved balls, a fluctuation pattern that is out of the range for a short time is selected, and the difference is adjusted to be small. I explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern of the smaller number of holding balls is first set among the holding balls of the larger number of holding balls under the same condition of the holding balls as in the first embodiment. A variation pattern in which the variation time is the time until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that starts to vary is selected.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 adjusts the variation time of the special symbol with the smaller number of holding balls, thereby reducing the difference between the holding balls of the second embodiment. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) of the third embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the third embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 45, in the third embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 3 (S330) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (S330). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, if the result of the hit determination is out, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than a predetermined number than the holding balls of the second special symbol. In this case, it is a process for selecting a variation pattern for adjusting the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), each process from S534 to S536 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), if it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S531: No), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 It is determined whether the number is equal to or more (S534). The number of holding balls of the second special symbol is determined based on the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f. When it is determined that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is three or more (S534: Yes), the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is subtracted from the number of holding balls of the second special symbol. It is determined whether or not the value is 2 or more (that is, the number of reserve balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of reserve balls of the first special symbol) (S535). Here, it is determined by the value obtained by subtracting the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (S535: Yes), based on the rearrangement storage area 203u, the second special symbol from the present time. Of the 1st hold (in the holding area of the second special symbol, the holding area where the changing order is the earliest) the change until the end of the change of the special symbol is the first adjustment special deviation change The pattern command is set.

Here, among the values of the second variable time storage area 203t and the reserved areas of the second special symbols in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u, the variable pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reserved area having the earliest variation order is stored. The fluctuation time is calculated by adding the value of the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern. When the first adjustment special deviation variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern selection in the processing of S539 is skipped, and the processing of the next S540 is executed.

Thus, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (three or more in the present embodiment), and the difference between the holding balls is 2 or more. In the case of (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less), among the holding balls of the second special symbol, the change order is the earliest in the order of change. The selected fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the holding ball of the second special symbol is digested, and until the second is about to be digested, the retaining ball of the second special symbol is not digested, so the digestion speed of the retaining ball of the first special symbol is It becomes late, and it can be adjusted so that the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reduced.

In addition, by determining whether there are three or more holding balls of the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the variation pattern for adjustment is frequently selected and the performance of the game is impaired.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hit determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, the variation pattern for adjustment is not selected. With such a configuration, as the variation pattern to be a hit, a variation pattern showing a normal hit can be selected, and an effect of the variation pattern to be sufficiently hit to the player can be produced. In addition, if the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a hit, since the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation stop, it is not necessary to deal with problems such as overflow without selecting a fluctuation pattern for adjustment. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is three or more, but not limited to this, it may be two or more, or may be appropriately set by another number. In addition, it is of course possible to directly determine the difference between the reserved balls of the second special symbol and the first special symbol without determining the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the first special symbol, but the number may be three or more, and other numbers are appropriately set. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first special symbol is completed is selected, but the invention is not limited to this, and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol that is being varied is more than that. It may have a long fluctuating time. Moreover, you may make it select the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol held first.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first special symbol is finished is selected, but the variation pattern of the variation time close to the variation time or the variation time longer than that May be selected from the out-of-normal fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B). With such a configuration, the player can change the special symbol in a normal variation pattern, and the player can reduce the feeling of strangeness that the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

Moreover, you may combine the structure of 2nd Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment. With this configuration, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be smaller at the timing when the two special symbols change, and it is possible to respond more quickly.

As for the second special symbol, as in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330). In the above, only the first is changed to the second and the second is changed to the first, and since the detailed description and the effect to be achieved are the same, the description and the illustration are omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, but the number may be three or more, and other numbers are appropriately set. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern for a short time deviation is one type having a variation time of 0.5 seconds, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be different for each 0.5 seconds. A plurality of fluctuation patterns (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided for selection. About selection, you may make it select by a counter value like selection of other variation patterns, and the state of the reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls, the difference between the reserved balls, and those that are reserved). For example, it may be selected based on the previously determined variation time), or if the second special symbol is changing, it may be configured to select based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference with the holding ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of a variation pattern that is out of order for a short time and allow the player to play a game with the effect of the normal variation pattern, and prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with a short time deviation is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern with normal deviation A) is selected from the normal time deviation fluctuation pattern table. You may comprise. With such a configuration, the player can change the special symbol in a normal variation pattern, and the player can reduce the feeling of strangeness that the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but the distribution device 630 is not provided and the first start opening is provided. Even with a configuration in which game balls randomly win the 63a and the second start opening 63b, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the state of the reserved balls, a fluctuation pattern that is out of the range for a short time is selected, and the difference is adjusted to be small. I explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game balls have been consecutively won in either one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, and the winning is continuously performed. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the person who successively won the prize is selected for a short time, and the variation pattern is adjusted so as to reduce the difference between the reserved balls.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, the second embodiment is performed in that a variation pattern of a short time deviation is selected based on the fact that the game balls successively win one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

The first winning flag 203v1 is a flag indicating that a game ball has won in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, the first winning flag 203v1 is a game ball winning the first starting opening 63a, and the first winning flag 203v1 is off in a first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) described later. This is a flag that is set to ON in the case. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, it is set to off.

The second winning flag 203v2 is the same as the first winning flag 203v1 with respect to the second starting opening 63b, and is the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

With such a configuration, when the distribution winning device 630 does not alternately distribute the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, for example, when the game balls successively win the first starting opening 63a. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a for the second time, the first winning flag 203v1 has already been set to ON, and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening 63a has been continuously won. It is configured to be able to.

The first continuous winning flag 203v3 is a flag indicating that the game balls have won in succession in the first starting opening 63a. Specifically, in the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), which will be described later, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, the first winning flag 203v1 is already set to ON. Is a flag that is set to ON. On the other hand, in a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), which will be described later, when the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set in the process of S526, it is set to OFF.

The second consecutive winning flag 203v4 is the same as the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 with respect to the second starting port 63b, and is the same, so a detailed description is omitted.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b has been continuously won. Therefore, based on that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 or the second winning flag 203v4 is set to ON, by selecting the variation pattern for adjustment, it is possible to easily hold the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be configured to reduce the sphere difference.

With reference to FIG. 47, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process of the fourth embodiment, a part of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) is changed from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the second embodiment, and the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) is replaced by the start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120).

Referring to FIG. 48, in the fourth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 48, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) of the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. Instead of 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the fourth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 49, in the fourth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process that is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 4 (S340) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (S340). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, if the result of the winning/disapproval determination is out, it is determined whether or not the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON (that is, whether the game balls have continuously won in the first starting opening 63a), and if it is ON, This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern that is out of time for adjusting the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), each process from S554 to S556 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S551: No), is the first continuous winning flag 203v3 on? (That is, whether the game balls have won the first starting opening 63a continuously) is determined (S554). When it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on (S554: Yes), the adjustment special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set to off. (S556).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is off (S554: No), the value obtained by subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is 2 It is determined whether the number is more than one (that is, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol) (S555). Here, it is determined by a value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (S555: Yes), the process of S556 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of holding balls of the second special symbol from the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 2 (S555: No), the special deviation variation according to the gaming state. The pattern table 202e is set. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

With this configuration, when the prize-winning device 630 does not distribute the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b alternately, and continuously wins one of the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b, a short-term deviation occurs. Since the variation pattern is selected, the player who wins the prizes in succession can more quickly complete the hold, and the state in which the prizes are distributed alternately can be made almost the same. Therefore, it can be adjusted so as to reduce the difference in the reserved balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (the holding ball of the first special symbol is 2 If there are more than a predetermined number, and if the number is more than a predetermined number, a fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short time is selected. As a result, in the distribution winning device 630, even if the distribution is made alternately, the difference in the number of holding balls of a predetermined number or more due to the difference in the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if (for example, two or more) occur, it is possible to make an adjustment so as to reduce the difference between the reserved balls by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of the short time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, the same as in the second embodiment. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a variation pattern that is frequently out of place for a short time from being frequently selected, so that the player cannot fully enjoy the effect due to the variation of the special symbol and get tired of the game. It is also prevented that the player recognizes that the lottery result is missed before the special symbol is stopped by selecting the fluctuation pattern that is out of time for a short time, and does not have the expectation for a big hit. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the flag 203v is on, the process of S555 is executed, and if the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, the special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment 202e (FIG. 41) may be set. With this configuration, even when the first starting opening 63a is continuously won, if the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not more than a predetermined number, a normal variation pattern is obtained. It can be configured to be selected, and it is possible to prevent frequent and short-term deviation pattern selection.

As for the second special symbol, as in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340). In the above, only the first is changed to the second and the second is changed to the first, and since the detailed description and the effect to be achieved are the same, the description and the illustration are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 50, a start winning process 2 (S120) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120). The start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) of the fourth embodiment is different from the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S906) in comparison with the starting winning process of the second embodiment (FIG. 24, S108). The continuous winning determination process (S980) is added. Each processing of S901 to S914 in the fourth embodiment is the same as each processing of S901 to S914 in the second embodiment. In the processing of S901, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), the first continuous winning determination processing (FIG. 51, S960) is executed.

In the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), first, it is determined whether the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON (that is, whether the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a last time). (S961). When it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is on, the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set to on (S962). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is off (that is, the game ball has won the second starting opening 63b last time) (S961: No), the first winning flag 203v1 is set to on. Yes (S963). After that, the second winning flag 203v2 is set to OFF (S964).

With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether the game balls have successively won in the first starting opening 63a without alternately winning the game balls in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. You can

In the present embodiment, when the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is on, the variation pattern that is out of the short period is selected. However, it is determined whether the second continuous winning flag 203v4 is on, If it is on, as in the third embodiment, among the suspension of the second special symbol, the variation pattern composed of the variation time until the variation of the special symbol for the earliest variation start sequence is stopped. You may make it select. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be small.

The second consecutive winning determination process (S907) is different from the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) in that the first is changed to the second and the second is changed to the first. Detailed illustration and description are omitted.

In the present embodiment, the first winning flag 203v1 and the second winning flag 203v2 are provided respectively, but only one of them may be provided and the determination may be made according to the ON/OFF state. .. Specifically, in the case of only the first winning flag 203v1, if the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON, the first starting opening 63a is won, and the first winning flag 203v1 is OFF. If it is set, it is determined that the second start opening 63b is a winning. With this configuration, the number of flags and the like can be reduced, and the required capacity of RAM can be reduced. The same applies to the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 and the second consecutive winning flag 203v4.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which, when two consecutive winnings are made in one of the starting openings, a variation pattern for adjustment is determined and the difference between the reserved balls is adjusted, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the special symbol, the other is configured to determine the variation pattern for adjustment when the variation of the special symbol is finished twice or more in a row until the other starts and ends the variation of the special symbol once. You may. Further, by combining the continuous winning and the continuous fluctuation, it is possible to adjust the difference of the reserved balls to be more equal.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but the distribution device 630 is not provided and the first start opening is provided. Even with a configuration in which game balls randomly win the 63a and the second start opening 63b, the difference between the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the hold symbol displayed in the lower display area Ds is displayed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 by the number-of-holds display update process (FIG. 37, S1406). Has been operated, and the case where the hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned on is rearranged and displayed in the order in which the fluctuation starts is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in the pending quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area is rearranged in the order of starting fluctuation, and the background (reserved symbol display is displayed) of the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON. Blinking background (flashing).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8 any one of Ds1 to Ds8) in which the rearranged reserved symbol display (reserved display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) is displayed. ) Is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the background screen of) is displayed in a blinking manner (flash display) indicating that rearrangement has been executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing displays from before the rearrangement to after the rearrangement of the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. Before the rearrangement, the reserved display symbols corresponding to the winning order of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b in the lower display area Ds (if the holding symbol display based on winning the first starting opening 63a "○", "●" is displayed in the case of a reserved symbol display based on winning in the second starting opening 63b. In the present embodiment, since the distribution prize winning device 630 alternately distributes the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is easy to alternately display the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

After that, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed, and the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed in the order of starting the fluctuation. Then, the background is displayed in a blinking manner (indicated by hatching in FIG. 52) with respect to the pending symbol display that was displayed at that time (in FIG. 52, the pending symbol displays that were displayed in Ds1 to Ds5). After that, with respect to the reserved symbol display for the game balls newly won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order (the order in which the winning is established), and the holding is performed. For the symbol display area (Ds6 to Ds7 in FIG. 52), the blinking display is not performed, and a normal background symbol (for example, a blue background color) is displayed.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, the background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed in a blinking manner with respect to the displayed reserved symbol display, so that the player executes the rearrangement. The pending symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, with respect to the order in which the reserved symbol display is displayed, it is possible to easily identify whether it is the winning order or the order in which the fluctuation starts. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, for the reserved symbols that have been won after the rearrangement is executed, the reserved symbols are displayed in the winning order, and the background of the reserved symbols display area is also the normal background, so the player , It is possible to easily identify that the displayed reserved symbol display is before sorting. Further, with respect to the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement has been executed, since the background display is kept blinking, the player recognizes the reserved symbol display before the rearrangement and after the rearrangement at once. be able to.

Also, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, the reserved symbol display is erased (digested), and each displayed retained symbol display is shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area on the right side and displayed. However, since the blinking display of the background is also shifted and displayed accordingly, even if the reserved symbol display is exhausted, the player easily identifies the reserved symbol display that has been rearranged. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the background is displayed as blinking as a notification mode indicating the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement has been executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background color is changed (for example, normally, blue is rearranged. It may be configured to change to red when executed), or the display may be changed as appropriate, such as blinking the reserved symbol display, changing the color, or adding a pattern instead of the background. Furthermore, it may be configured to notify by voice or characters (for example, the voice and characters “The reserved symbols up to the third order have been sorted.” are displayed).

With reference to FIG. 53, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 53, S1400). The main process of the fifth embodiment (FIG. 53, S1400) is different from the main process of the first embodiment (FIG. 35, S1400) in place of the hold quantity display update process (FIG. 37, S1406). In place of the process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) and the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), the pending rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is added. Each process of S1401 to S1405 in the fifth embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1405 is completed, the reserved quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 54, in the fifth embodiment, the pending quantity display update process 2 (S1440) which is one of the main processes (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the reserved quantity display update processing 2 (S1440). The reserved number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is a process for setting a command for displaying the reserved symbol display in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds.

In the reserved number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated (S1441). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is turned on is a variable display start order, and is held corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off. As for the symbol display, the held symbol display is displayed in the order in which the hold is established (S1442).

The rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON. The background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area of the subordinate rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is displayed is blinked (flash) and the rearrangement flag 223k7 is displayed. A background display change command to be displayed on the display control device 114 is generated with a normal background (for example, blue in the present embodiment) as the background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which is off is displayed. Yes (S1443).

In this way, by displaying the background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in a blinking manner, the player has performed the rearrangement on hold. It can be informed that it is a symbol display. Therefore, the player can recognize that the displayed pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the variation, by the notification mode.

Further, the background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed blinking, and the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to OFF. The background of the reserved symbol display area in which the reserved symbol display corresponding to (that is, the hold that has been established after the sorting is executed) is displayed as a normal background, so that the player can sort It is possible to easily recognize the executed pending symbol display and the pending symbol display that has not been rearranged.

In addition, a new background display change command is generated each time this reserved quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed, so a new pending occurs or a special corresponding to the pending symbol display. Even when the symbols start changing and the hold is exhausted, the hold symbol display and the blinking display indicating that the rearrangement has been executed can be updated appropriately according to the state.

Further, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is operated by the frame button 22 during the rearrangeable period in the pending rearrangement processing 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the button is pressed), it is set to ON in all hold areas in which hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed hold symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the hold variable display start order from the hold hold order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF for the newly stored hold, the order established without rearrangement, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol displays displayed at that time are rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter. Also, the rearranged hold symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the newly stored (reoccurring) hold symbol display is displayed in the established order first. Since it is displayed at the end without being displayed by interrupting the pending symbol display that has been displayed, the player can suppress a problem in which the current display is confused as to which sequence is displayed. You can

Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol displays that are displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to notify the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

Also, in the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display, when the reserved symbol having a slower establishment order is displayed before the reserved symbol having a faster establishment order is displayed. Of the pending symbols displayed before the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt, the pending generated by winning in the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt is a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with the expectation of a big hit. In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated, a sound is output, so that it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation for the jackpot.

Returning to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400), the description will be continued. Each process of S1407 to S1412 in the fifth embodiment is the same as each process of S1407 to S1412 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1412 is completed, the pending rearrangement processing 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 55, a hold rearrangement process 2 (S1450) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement process 2 (S1450). The reservation rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) notifies that the rearrangement has been executed (executed) when the frame button 22 is operated during the rearrangeable period of the reservation symbol display. This is processing for setting the rearrangement notification sound command and setting the rearrangement flag 223k7 of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k to ON.

In the pending rearrangement processing 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), first, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (S1451). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1451: Yes), the display button operation display command is generated (S1452). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1453). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1453: Yes), the rearrangement notification sound command is set (S1454). As the rearrangement notification sound command, the sound output device 226 outputs a notification sound indicating that the rearrangement is executed (executed) (in the present embodiment, a sound "rearrange").

In the present embodiment, the sound is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific sound effect (for example, fanfare music or the like) may be output. The output time may be set as appropriate according to the effect, and while the rearranged reserved symbol display is displayed, a dedicated melody or sound effect may be output. With such a configuration, the player can be strongly aware that the rearrangement has been executed, and can easily understand that the reserved symbol display is rearranged.

The rearrangement flags 223k7 of all the reservation areas in which the reservation data of the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k are stored are set to ON (S1455).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1451: No), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1453: No), this process is ended. With such a configuration, when the player wants to sort, it is possible to sort only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be played evenly and efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the holding symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new holding is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order by the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, even when a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode are displayed together. By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed in a blinking manner with respect to all the reserved symbol displays that were displayed in the reserved symbol display area. The case was explained.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the rearrangement is executed, and only the reserved symbol display in the variable start order, which is different from the established order, is displayed in the background of the reserved symbol display area. Blinks.

That is, the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, in the hold quantity display update process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440), the hold area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON has a change start order different from the winning order. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that a background display change command for blinking the background is generated for the reserved symbol display area in which the symbol display is displayed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a state from before the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to after the rearrangement in the modified example of the fifth exemplary embodiment. Before the rearrangement, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol (“○” in the present embodiment) and the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol (“●” in the present embodiment) are displayed in the established order. .. The player has operated the frame button 22 to perform the rearrangement, so that the reserved symbol display "○" of the first special symbol that was displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds3 and the reserved symbol display area Ds4 were displayed. The reserved symbol display “●” of the second special symbol is rearranged, and the background is displayed in blinking, which is a display mode (notification mode) indicating that the rearrangement has been performed.

In the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It

Here, the establishment order and the variation start order are different, and the background is displayed in a blinking manner only for the reserved symbol display in which the display order is changed by executing the rearrangement. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the hold symbol display, the hold symbol having a late establishment order is interrupted before the hold symbol having an early establishment order and the order is changed. The displayed hold symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, of the pending symbols that are displayed before the interrupt symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, about the pending generated by winning the winning opening 63a, 63b different from the reserved symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, in the big hit You can have expectations as to whether or not you will.

In this way, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and operates the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation for a jackpot.

In addition, in order to indicate that the rearrangement has been performed, when the display order of the reserved symbol display is changed, the background is displayed in blinking, and further, with respect to the reserved symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is executed. As a result, the background may be displayed in a special color (for example, red) so that the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement has been executed can be identified. With this configuration, the player can identify both the reserved symbol display that was displayed when the rearrangement was executed and the reserved symbol display whose display order was changed by the rearrangement. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

Referring to FIG. 57, in the modification of the fifth embodiment, the reserved quantity display updating process 2 (FIG. 57, FIG. 57, which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. S1440) will be described.

The processes of S1441 to S1442 in the modification of the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1441 to S1442 in the fifth embodiment. In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1442 is executed, the winning order and the order of start of fluctuation are changed among the reserved areas of the subordinate rearrangement reserved storage area 223k in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there are different holding areas (S1445). Here, the holding area and the variation start order storage area 223k4 are discriminated to determine whether the order is different. Specifically, if the variation start order stored in the variation start order storage area 223k4 in the holding area 2 is the third, the winning order is the second, but the variation start order is the third. , And it is determined that the order is different.

When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the winning order is different from the starting order of the fluctuation among the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON (S1445: Yes). , Of the holding areas in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, the background of the holding symbol display area in which the holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area determined to have a different winning order and variation start order is displayed blinks. A background display change command for displaying (changing) is generated (S1446).

In this way, when the rearrangement is executed, the background is displayed blinking for the pending symbol display that has been displayed and the display order has been changed, so that the player can change the order. It is possible to identify the reserved symbols.

In addition, the notification mode for notifying the pending symbol display in which the display order is changed is not limited to the blinking display, and may be shown by a character display, may be notified by voice, or other display than the blinking display. Alternatively, the reserved symbol display may be displayed in a special color or pattern.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed in a blinking manner with respect to all the reserved symbol displays that were displayed in the reserved symbol display area. The case was explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, in the lower display area Ds, the reserved display area Dsa before the sorting and the reserved display area Dsa before the sorting in which the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order before the sorting The rearranged hold display area Dsb is provided in which the hold symbol display is displayed in the order of starting. Until the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved symbol displays are displayed only in the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa in the winning order, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved symbol display displayed at that time is changed. Are displayed in the reserved display area Dsb after rearranging in the order of starting.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. The sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that the reserved symbol displays are displayed in the winning order, and the reserved symbol displays are displayed in the order in which the fluctuation starts in addition to that.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing reserved symbol displays displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before sorting (sorting not executed) and after sorting (sorting executed) in the sixth embodiment. .. Before the rearrangement, the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds5) of the reserved display area Dsa before the rearrangement is the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol (in the present embodiment, "○") and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol. The displays (“●” in the present embodiment) are displayed in the winning order. At this time, the reserved symbol display is not displayed in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to perform the rearrangement, after the rearrangement, in the state where the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order in the pre-rearrangement hold display area Dsa, the rearrangement is performed. In the hold display area Dsb, the hold symbol display that was displayed in the hold display area Dsa before rearranging at that time is displayed in the order in which the fluctuation starts.

In this way, when the rearrangement is executed, the reserved symbol display before the rearrangement and the reserved symbol display after the rearrangement are displayed in parallel at the top and the bottom, so that the player can determine how the rearrangement is performed. The reserved symbol display in the pre-replacement reserved display area Dsa and the reserved symbol display in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb can be compared and recognized. Therefore, in the order in which the fluctuation starts, the reserved symbol display whose order is different from the winning order can be easily recognized.

In the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It

Here, with respect to the reserved symbol display in which the established order and the variation start order are different and the display order is changed by performing the rearrangement, the before-rearrangement reserved display area Dsa and the after-rearrangement reserved display area Dsb are compared. It can be easily recognized. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the hold symbol display, the hold symbol having a late establishment order is interrupted before the hold symbol having an early establishment order and the order is changed. The displayed hold symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, of the pending symbols that are displayed before the interrupt symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, about the pending generated by winning the winning opening 63a, 63b different from the reserved symbol that is displayed by the interrupt, in the big hit You can have expectations as to whether or not you will.

In this way, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and operates the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. It is possible to operate the frame button 22 with a sense of expectation for a jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol display that was displayed when the frame button 22 was operated was displayed in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb in the order in which the fluctuation starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reserved numbers may be rearranged in the winning order and then displayed in the reserved figure display area Dsb.

Further, it is of course possible to always display the reserved symbol display after rearrangement and before the rearrangement regardless of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. With such a configuration, the player can always visually check the pending symbol display that is displayed in the winning order and the order in which the fluctuation starts, so that the fluctuation starts in the order different from the winning order by rearrangement. It is possible to quickly recognize that there is a symbol display.

With reference to FIG. 59, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 59, S1400). The main processing of the sixth embodiment (FIG. 59, S1400) is different from the main processing of the fifth embodiment (FIG. 53, S1400) in that the reserved quantity display update processing 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is replaced with the reserved quantity display. Update processing 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is added. The processes of S1401 to S1405 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1405 is completed, the reserved quantity display update processing 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 60, in the sixth embodiment, the pending quantity display update process 3 (S1460) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 59, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing 3 (S1460). Reservation number display update processing 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), in the reservation symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds, the pre-rearrangement reservation display area Dsa and the rearranged reservation display area Dsb This is a process for setting a command for displaying a display.

In the reserved quantity display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated (S1461). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

It is determined whether or not the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 of the holding area 1 in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462). When it is determined that the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area 1 in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462: Yes), the rearrangement flag is turned on in the post-rearrangement reservation display area Dsb. The display hold display command for displaying the hold symbol display of the hold area set in No. 1 in the order of starting fluctuation is set (S1463).

By controlling in this manner, when the rearrangement is executed, only the reserved symbol display that has been displayed (the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) is displayed after the rearrangement display area Dsb. It is possible to display a hold symbol display on.

With respect to the holds stored in the hold area in the before-sort hold display area Dsa, a display hold display command for displaying the winning order is generated (S1464). As a result, the reserved symbol display can always be displayed in the winning display order in the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa. When the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned on, the reserved symbol display can be displayed in the rearranged hold display area Dsb and the before-rearrangement hold display area Dsa, respectively.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area 1 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to OFF (S1462: No), the processing of S1464 is executed. As a result, when the rearrangement flag is off in the holding area 1 (that is, all holding areas), the reserved symbol displays are displayed in the winning order only in the pre-sorting hold display area Dsa, and the rearrangement is executed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is not done.

Further, in the state where the rearrangement is not executed, the reserved symbol display is not displayed in the rearranged display area Dsb until the player operates the frame button 22, so the player operates the frame button 22. At times, it is possible to increase the change in the display when the hold symbol display is displayed in the rearranged hold display area Dsb, and to increase the player's motivation to execute the rearrangement.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is determined only in the holding area 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rearrangement flags of all the holding areas in which various data are stored may be determined, or either of them may be determined. Of course, it may be configured to determine whether is ON.

Further, in the present embodiment, the post-sorting hold display area Dsb is configured to be always displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the pre-sort hold display area Dsa is always displayed and the sorting is performed. When (the player operates the frame switch 22), the reserved display area Dsb is displayed after rearrangement, and when all the rearranged reserved symbol displays are exhausted (start of fluctuation), it is automatically hidden. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when it becomes the rearrangement possible period, it is configured to display the characters for notifying that the rearrangement is possible. Instead, when the rearrangement becomes possible, the rearrangement hold pending display area Dsb (holding symbol display is displayed. It may be configured such that a state (not performed) is displayed and the player is notified that the reserved symbol display can be rearranged. With this configuration, the reserved display area Dsb is not always displayed after rearrangement, and the space can be set as the upper display area Dm, and the variable display of the main symbol and the display of the effect symbol can be performed. It can be displayed in a large space. Therefore, the player can be notified of the lottery result that is easy to understand.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, there is no hold that is established during the jackpot game or at the different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there are no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). In the gaming states other than the above, the case of setting as the rearrangeable period has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is set to be included in the rearrangeable period even during the big hit game.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 recalculates the time when each pending fluctuation starts after the big hit game as a starting point when the big hit game starts. Then, the rearrangement data is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and in the voice lamp control device 113, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is set in that the rearrangement period is set even during the big hit game and the rearrangement is executed. Is different from.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 61, a description will be given of the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103) that is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. To do. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this large opening opening/closing processing (FIG. 61, S103). The large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103) of the seventh embodiment not only controls the opening/closing of the first variable winning device 65, but when the jackpot game is started, the fluctuation of each holding is started after the jackpot. This is a process for recalculating the start time and generating rearrangement data in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the recalculated data.

In the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started (S131). Whether the jackpot game is started or not is determined by the processing of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204) or the processing of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207). It is determined by whether the start of is set.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u Regarding the value, starting from after the big hit, it is recalculated in consideration of the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is temporarily stopped (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the variation start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. The value of is recalculated starting from after the big hit (S134).

A rearrangement data command is generated for each holding area based on the fluctuation start time stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5, which is recalculated in the processing of S133 or S134 (S135).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), a process of opening the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S137: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). When it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), a process of closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S142). When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is over (S144). When it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the jackpot game is over (S145). It is discriminated whether or not it was the probability variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot was a trigger for executing the jackpot game. The lottery result is determined to be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is hit (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S144: No), or if it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S146: No), this process is ended.

In this way, when the big hit game is started, the variation start time in each holding area starting from after the big hit game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the big hit game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. The data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k can be updated, and the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of starting the variation after the big hit game.

In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for the suspension of the special symbol, after the remaining variation time elapses, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the pending symbol display in a more accurate order of starting the fluctuation based on the fluctuation start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

With reference to FIG. 62, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 62, S1400). The main processing (S1400 in FIG. 62) of the seventh embodiment is different from the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 35) of the first embodiment in place of the command determination processing (S1414 in FIG. 36). 63, S1470) is added. Each process of S1401 to S1413 in the seventh embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 62, in the seventh embodiment, a command determination process 2 (S1470) that is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S1470). The command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is performed in the main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) of the seventh embodiment, the processes of S1520 and S1521 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. Each process of S1501 to S1518 in the seventh embodiment is the same as each process of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. When it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command is not received in the process of S1517 (S1517: No), the process of S1520 is executed.

In the process of S1520, it is determined whether the rearrangement data command output by main controller 110 has been received. When it is determined that the rearrangement data command is received (S1520: Yes), the data in the variation start time storage area 223k5 of the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k is updated based on the received rearrangement data command. Here, the rearrangement data command is data indicating the recalculated fluctuation start time. The rearrangement data command is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may be generated based on each data in the rearrangement storage area 203u. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement data command has not been received (S1520: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S1519).

In the present embodiment, although the description is omitted, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during the jackpot game, the first prefetching process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 25, S907) S923 or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) S942, the fluctuation start time is calculated starting from after the jackpot game.

In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the fluctuation start time record of each hold is recalculated starting from after the jackpot game is finished, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a rearrangement data command, and the secondary rearrangement hold storage is performed. Since the value of the variation start time storage area 223k5 of each holding area of the area 223k is also updated, even if the jackpot game is set as the sortable period, the holding symbol display can be sorted in the variation start order.

Further, even if the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b during the big hit game, the data indicating the variation start time after the big hit game is transmitted by the prize command, so the voice lamp control device 113 can be rearranged in the variation start order based on the operation of the frame button 22 even for the newly held reserved symbol display. Therefore, even during a jackpot game that tends to be monotonous, the player can perform an operation of rearranging the reserved symbol displays, and can enjoy the game by rearranging the reserved symbol displays.

In the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It

Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display even during the jackpot, so that the reserved symbol displayed before the interrupted reserved symbol is interrupted. It is possible to have an expectation that it is a big hit, with respect to the hold generated by winning in the starting openings 63a and 63b different from the hold symbols displayed in.

In this way, the player operates the frame button 22 during the big hit, and there is a big jackpot in the holding symbol display, and it is expected that the arrangement order will change depending on whether the big jackpot is continuously obtained. Then, the frame button can be operated, and the fun during the big hit game can be increased.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 72. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the first prefetch process (907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 or In the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the winning commands, which are numbered in the order of the variation start time and indicate the order, are output to the voice lamp control device 113b, and the sorting is executed based on the order. I explained about the case.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, even if the game ball wins the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25). , 907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the winning command is generated for various counter values acquired based on the winning, without being numbered in the variation start order. Upon receiving the winning command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 calculates the variation start time based on each counter value indicated by the winning command, assigns the variation start order, and operates the frame button 22. Based on what has been done, the reserved symbol display is rearranged in that order.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighth embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 executes the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display by calculating and numbering the variation start order based on the received winning command, and thus the first embodiment It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. The ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a big hit random number table 222a, a big hit type table 222b, a special hit variation pattern table 222c, and a special out-of-range variation pattern table 222d. It should be noted that these tables are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the special winning variation pattern table 202d, and the special outlier variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. , The description is omitted.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is deleted. Illustration of this is omitted.

As described above, since each table is stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 as well as the ROM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the winning command from the main control device 110 will be described later, although it will be described later. Based on each counter value, before the special symbol corresponding to the pending symbol display starts to fluctuate, the jackpot is determined in advance and the fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation start time is calculated, and the fluctuations are arranged in the order in which they start. The change start order can be numbered based on the change start time so as to be exchangeable. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to execute each control process for determining the fluctuation start order in advance, and the control load can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 65, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the eighth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in place of the start prize process (FIG. 24, S108), and the start prize process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). Has been added.

With reference to FIG. 66, a start winning process 3 (S150) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). The start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) of the eighth embodiment is different from the first winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment in place of the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907). The pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) is replaced with the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914), and the second pre-reading process 2 (S1060) is added.

With reference to FIG. 67, the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) which is one process of the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. explain. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch processing 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). In the first prefetching process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) of the eighth embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the gaming ball winning the first starting opening in the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). Is a process for generating a winning command based on.

In the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), first, in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150), each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (random number per special) The counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern determination counter C4) are read (S1051).

Based on each counter value (the value read in S1051) newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a winning command is generated (S1052). The winning command indicates each counter value, and the voice lamp control device 113 is a command that can determine the winning order based on the winning command.

Further, regarding the second prefetch process 2 (S1060), the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) only changes the first to the second, and therefore the illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted. To do.

Thus, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the first prefetch process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), based on the acquired counter value, jackpot determination, selection of the variation pattern, calculation of the variation start time, the variation start. Since the order numbering and the like are not performed, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning command is generated only for the newly established hold, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and for all the holds stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. It may be configured to generate again. With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 can update all the data in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k each time a game ball wins, and the data is corrupted by noise or the like. Also in this case, processing such as rearrangement can be performed by updating.

With reference to FIG. 68, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 68, S1400). The main processing (S1400 in FIG. 68) of the eighth embodiment is different from the main processing (S1400 in FIG. 35) of the first embodiment in place of the command determination processing (S1414 in FIG. 36). 69, S1490) replaces the pending rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) with the pending rearrangement processing 3 (FIG. 70, S1480).

Referring to FIG. 69, a command determination process 3 (S1490) which is one process of the main process (S1400 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S1490). The command determination processing 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment is the same as the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment except that the processing of S1530 is added instead of the processing of S1513 and S1514. There is. For other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 36, S1414) is executed.

In the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, it is determined whether the winning command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command is received (S1512: Yes), each counter value (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1, fluctuation pattern determination counter C4) is received from the received winning command. ) Is extracted and stored in the other memory area 223m in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1530). Here, in the other memory area, the winning order indicated by the winning command (the winning order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined) is stored in a distinguishable manner for each counter value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1512: No), the process of S1517 is executed. The subsequent processing has already been described in the first embodiment, and will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, each counter value extracted from the winning command is stored in the other memory area 223m, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the counter value may be stored in the corresponding holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223m. Good. With this configuration, the winning order of each counter value can be determined by the holding area, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 70, a hold rearrangement process 3 (S1480) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 68, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this reservation rearrangement processing 3 (S1480). In the pending rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1811 and S1812 are added to the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment. For other processing, the same processing as the pending rearrangement processing (S1413 in FIG. 40) of the first embodiment is executed.

In the hold rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480), first, in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490), the winning command is received and each counter value is stored in the other memory area 223m (that is, It is determined whether or not a winning command has been received (S1811). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1811: Yes), the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is executed. The reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) will be described later in detail, but is a process for determining the variation start order of the reserved symbol display based on each counter value indicated by the received winning command. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1811: No), the process of S1801 is executed. Since the processing from S1801 is the same as the processing from S1801 of the reservation rearrangement processing (S1413 in FIG. 40) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 71, in the eighth embodiment, a reservation rearrangement order determination process (S1812) which is one process of the reservation rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement order determination processing 3 (S1812). The reservation rearrangement order determination processing 3 (S1812 in FIG. 71) of the eighth embodiment is processing for determining the variation start order based on each counter value indicated by the winning command.

In the reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), first, each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, The variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter C4) are read (S1821).

The read data is stored in the reservation area of the rearrangement storage area 223k corresponding to the winning order indicated by the winning command. (In the present embodiment, since the winning commands are output in the winning order, of the vacant storage areas, May be stored in the area with the smallest winning order). A variable display start time at which variable display is started based on the newly stored hold data (counter values) is calculated (S1822).

This fluctuation start time is, as shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol in the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reservation data (if the reservation data is based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second special symbol. If the hold data is based on the special symbol 63b, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol) and each hold data previously stored are determined based on the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the newly stored hold data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation times. Here, the remaining variation time is determined based on the secondary first variation time storage area 223i or the secondary second variation time storage area 223j.

Here, each of the hold data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored hold data means that the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first starting port 63a. Hold data based on the first starting port 63a (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored on the other hand, on the other hand, if the newly stored hold data is hold data based on the second starting port 63b, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 63b that has been done.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order is renumbered in the ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k (S1823). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, However, if the newly stored variable display start order of the pending data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is obvious that only the changed order is renumbered. Good.

It is determined whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (S1824). Here, by the time the special symbol corresponding to this newly established hold becomes the variation start, the variation is stopped and the special symbol determined is determined to determine the game state at the time of the variation start.

The gaming state at the start of fluctuation, when it is determined that the high probability gaming state (S1824: Yes), based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, the first special symbol Is predicted, and the judgment result is stored in the judgment result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the corresponding subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k (S1825). On the other hand, the game state at the start of fluctuation, when it is determined to be a low probability game state (normal game state) (S1824: No), to the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability Based on this, the win/fail of the first special symbol is predicted, and the judgment result is stored in the hit/no hit judgment result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the corresponding subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k (S1826).

Next, the subordinate hold rearrangement storage area update processing (FIG. 72) is executed (S1827). The subordinate rearrangement storage area update processing (FIG. 72, S1827) will be described later in detail, but is based on the result of the judgment of the pending data stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Then, the jackpot type (whether it is a probability change or not) and the variation pattern (variation time) are determined based on each counter value and stored (updated).

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a sub-reservation rearrangement storage area update process (S1827) which is one process of the reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the subordinate suspension rearrangement suspension storage area update processing (S1827).

In the sub-reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827), first, it is determined whether or not the hit/non-judgment result predicted in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the reservation rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) was a big hit. (S1831). When it is determined that the winning/failing determination result predicted in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the reservation rearrangement order determination processing (FIG. 71, S1812) is a big hit (S1831: Yes), the predicted big hit is a sure change big hit (15R probability change). It is determined whether it is a big hit or a second R probability variation big hit) (S1832). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (S1832: Yes), the slave read probability variation flag 223k6 of the slave rearrangement suspension storage area 223k corresponding to the newly stored suspension data is set to ON ( S1833). When the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area, the slave read probability change flag 223k6 is set to OFF because the data in the reserved area before the shift is cleared to 0. In other words, the slave read probability change flag 223k6 that has been set to ON once is sequentially shifted in the holding area, and is overwritten (cleared to 0) when the next new data is shifted in the storage area of the changing data. Set off.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the probability variation jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S1832: No), the process of S1834 is executed.

From the special winnings variation pattern table 222c corresponding to the game state (whether it is in probability variation or shortening time) at the start of variation display, the special winning type counter C2 and variation pattern determination counter C3 of newly stored pending data are stored. The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S1834).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning/failing determination result predicted in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination processing (FIG. 71, S1812) is out (S1831: No), the gaming state at the start of variable display Start of variation display based on the values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 of newly stored pending data from the special deviation variation pattern table 222d corresponding to (whether the probability variation or the time is being shortened) The fluctuation pattern that is determined at some time is predicted (S1835).

The predicted win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in each storage area (corresponding to the newly stored suspension data) corresponding to the suspension area corresponding to the winning order of the secondary rearrangement suspension storage area 223k (S1836). ). It is determined whether or not the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k is stored by interrupting (changing the order) the previously stored variable display start order (S1837). ). When it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k is stored by being interrupted (changing the order) to the previously stored variable display start order. (S1837: Yes), with respect to the pending data after the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data, the winning/prohibiting, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted and updated again (S1838).

In this way, in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, based on each counter value indicated by the winning command output by the main control device 110, it is possible to judge the winning/disapproval, select the variation pattern, and determine the rearrangement order (variation start order). Since each is performed, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, even when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and the processing such as the selection of the variation pattern are concentrated, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 surely executes the processing. You can

Further, since the winning command output from the main control device 110 only indicates each counter value, even if the command is intercepted by a hanging board or the like, it is difficult to determine whether the determination is a big hit. Yes, fraud can be suppressed.

Further, since the data amount of the winning command output from the main control device 110 can be configured to be small, the load of command transmission/reception between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the command transmission/reception can be performed. The time required for can be shortened.

Further, if the value of each counter value is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 does not need to output each counter value again even when the power supply is restored from the power failure, and the pachinko machine 10 can be operated. The startup time at power-on can be shortened.

In the present embodiment, each time the change is held, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the order of fluctuation start (interrupted and stored in the order), and again the game state at the start of fluctuation (high probability or low probability). ), and whether or not the winning judgment is executed in advance. However, if there is a hit among the holdings, the holding that is the winning is held first among the holdings established later. The variation may not be stopped before the winning is held. With such a configuration, the game state at the start of the change is not changed in the change start order, and it is not necessary to perform the advance success/failure determination again, and the control load in the game can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 78. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630 next time, the game ball is directed to either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. A prize notification lamp 660 is provided for notifying whether the operation is performed so as to be distributed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that when a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630, it is notified which one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is distributed. To do.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 and 74, the distribution winning apparatus 630 provided in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the distribution winning device 630 according to the ninth embodiment, a prize notification lamp 660 is added to the front side of the distribution winning device 630 according to the first embodiment that is visible to the player. The winning notification lamp 660 is a lamp for notifying which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in a state where a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630.

As shown in FIG. 73B, the winning notification lamp 660 includes a left root winning notification lamp 660a and a right root winning notification lamp 660b. The left route winning notification lamp 660a is in a state in which the passive distribution member 640 is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the accommodating portion 640a is arranged at a position where the game ball entered in the distribution winning device 630 can be received. When the game ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a, it is controlled to light up.

In addition, the right route winning notification lamp 660b is disposed at a position where the passive sorting member 640 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the accommodating portion 640b can receive the game ball that has entered the sorting winning device 630. When it is in a state (that is, a state in which the game ball is guided to the second starting opening 63b), it is controlled to light up.

The distribution winning device 630 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670 for detecting the rotation of the passive distribution member 640 on the rotation shaft portion of the passive distribution member 640, and detects the rotation angle when the passive distribution member 640 rotates. Is configured. The rotation angle sensor 670 is set such that the position at which the passive distribution member 640 is rotated at the position where the magnet 640c provided on the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a overlap is the origin (rotation angle 0 degree). ing. When the passive distribution member 640 rotates clockwise from the original position in the front view (see FIG. 74(a)), the rotation angle becomes a positive angle, and conversely, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise in the front view from the original position (see FIG. It is set to have a negative rotation angle when it is turned to (a).

Here, the position where the passive distribution member 640 is rotated to the position where the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a overlap is the origin position of the rotation angle sensor 670, so that the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a. Since they are arranged with magnetic poles that repel each other, the passive distribution member 640 does not stop at this origin position, but stops at a position rotated in either the left or right direction in front view, and the rotation angle sensor is positive. Can be a negative value or a negative value. Therefore, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the game ball can be guided to the first starting opening 63a. On the other hand, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a negative value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is in a position where the game ball can be guided to the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, by controlling the lighting of the prize notification lamp 660 based on the determination result, when the player next enters the sorting prize device 630, the game ball is divided into the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b. It is possible to determine in advance which one will be assigned.

In addition, since the position where the passive distribution member 640 stops is a position where the rotation angle sensor 670 has a value that is negative or positive (that is, other than the origin), the left route winning notification lamp 660a or the right of the winning notification lamp 660 is always displayed. The route winning notification lamp 660b is turned on, and the player can be constantly notified of the winning route.

In this way, when a game ball enters the distribution winning apparatus 630, it is possible to determine in advance which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is to be distributed. When the number of holding balls corresponding to the mouth 63a is the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) and the number of holding balls corresponding to the second starting port 63b is 3 that is 1 less than the upper limit number (3 in the present embodiment). Then, if the game balls enter the distribution winning device 630 and are distributed to the first starting opening 63a, an overflow occurs and the game balls are consumed unnecessarily. , If the player does not know which one of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b the state is in, the problem that the game ball cannot be fired always occurs.

However, in the present embodiment, the prize notification lamp 660 allows the player to know in advance whether it is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b that is to be sorted next. Only when it is determined, it is possible to stop the firing of the game ball and play the game efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A prize notification lamp 660 and rotation sensors 670 are added to the main controller 110. The winning notification lamp 660 is connected via an input/output port so that lighting control is performed based on a command from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, the rotation angle sensor 670 is connected so that the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can acquire the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 via the input/output port.

With reference to FIG. 76, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the ninth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (FIG. 14) in place of the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), and the starting prize process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). Has been added.

With reference to FIG. 77, a start winning process 4 (S160) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). In the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment, the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is added to the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. .. The processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the first embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 78, a description will be given of a winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment. To do. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the winning route notification processing (FIG. 78, S1070). The winning route notification processing of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 78, S1070) is divided into the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b when the game ball is next entered into the distribution winning apparatus 630. This is a process for executing lighting control for notifying whether or not to be performed.

In the winning route notification processing (FIG. 78, S1070), first, it is determined whether the rotation angle sensor 670 has a positive value (that is, whether the game ball is guided to the first starting opening) (S1071). ). When it is determined that the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (S1071: Yes), the left route winning notification lamp 660a is controlled to be turned on (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation angle sensor has a negative value (S1071: No), the right route winning notification lamp 660b is controlled to be turned on (S1073).

In this way, by determining the state of the passive distribution member 640 by the value of the rotation angle sensor 670, when the game ball next wins the distribution winning device 630, the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b It is possible to accurately discriminate to which the game is distributed, and the player can be notified of accurate information.

In the present embodiment, the lamp is used for notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and notification may be made by voice or the like, or in the third symbol display device 81, characters or symbols may be used for notification. You may. With this configuration, the player can be notified more easily. In addition, if the third symbol display device 81 informs by characters or symbols, the player can also check the winning route of the distribution winning device 630 while visually confirming the variable display of the special symbol, which makes it easier to play the game. ..

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described ninth embodiment, the state of the passive distribution member of the distribution winning device 630 is determined by the rotation angle sensor 670, and the game ball is either the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. The case where it is determined whether to be distributed has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, the distribution winning apparatus 630 is in a state of guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, the distribution winning device 630 determines that the game ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in the following points. In the tenth embodiment, when a game ball wins the distribution winning device 630 based on that the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b is won, which one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is won. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is assigned to.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the ninth embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, each rotation sensor 670 is deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the ninth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 80, a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the tenth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) of the ninth embodiment in place of the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) and the starting prize process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). ) Has been added.

With reference to FIG. 81, a start winning process 5 (S170) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). The start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) of the tenth embodiment is different from the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment in that the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is deleted. The processes of S1080 and S1090 are added. The processes of S901 to S914 in the tenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment.

When it is determined whether the game ball has won the first starting opening 63a (S901: Yes), the lighting control for turning on the right route winning notification lamp is executed (S1080). Here, since the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is detected that the game balls have won in the first starting opening 63a. In this case, it is possible to determine that the distribution winning device 630 is in a state of distributing the next game ball to the second starting opening 63b. With this configuration, it is possible to predict and determine the state of the passive distribution member 640 without detecting the state of the passive distribution member 640, and it is necessary to provide a sensor or the like for detection. It is possible to simplify the structure. Similarly, when the game ball is won in the second start opening 63b (S908: Yes), the lighting control for lighting the left route winning notification lamp is executed (S1090).

As described above, since the lighting display of the prize notification lamp 660 is switched every time the game ball is won in the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the player wins the game ball in the distribution winning apparatus 630. In this case, it is possible to confirm in advance which one of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the distribution state, and when a game ball is entered, it is not a reserved ball, A game can be played by determining whether or not it will overflow.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 640 is configured to rotate by contact with the game ball, but the structure is not limited to this, and may be configured to be movable by a motor, a solenoid, or the like.

In such a configuration, the passive distribution member 640 is moved (rotated) so as to be alternately distributed to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Further, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the state of the holding ball between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, and the first symbol corresponding to the one of the special symbols that is less reserved. The movement may be controlled so as to be distributed to the starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b. By configuring in this way, in one special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow exceeding the upper limit number of reserved balls, and the upper limit number of times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol evenly. Can be put on hold.

In addition, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, when an error or injustice (abnormal winning etc.) is detected in the game, the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b of the passive distribution member 640 is , The game ball is moved to the position on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 (that is, the position where the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a overlap) so that the game ball is the first starting opening. It may be configured so as to prevent winning of a prize in the 63a and the second starting opening 63b. With this configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is fraudulent, it can be controlled so that the lottery game is not performed, and the damage on the game shop side can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) to FIG. 84. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the power is cut off, the data in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the data in the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 are backed up (backup from the power supply unit 115). Data is retained when power is supplied). Then, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, it is confirmed whether each data in the RAM 23 and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not, the data is loaded (used) as it is, and the power is cut off. The case of returning from the state immediately before and starting the game has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs rearrangement suspension in the startup process (FIG. 83) that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. A rearrangement return data command is generated based on each data in the storage area 203u and output to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 compares the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command with the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223, and if they match, it returns and the game is continued. If it does not match, the data in each holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223k is updated to the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command, and the game is started.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eleventh embodiment, the first embodiment is performed by collating each data of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k which are backed up at the time of power-on, and executing a process of determining whether or not they match. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

82(a) and 82(b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the held symbol displays immediately before the power is turned off are displayed in the established order and returned. In the upper display area Dm, the characters "Holding is displayed in the established order" indicating that the held symbol display is displayed in the established order are displayed. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and the newly established pending symbol display is displayed. Although details will be described later, when the hold symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the established order and is returned, the rearrangement storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are described. This is the time when the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223 are collated and not matched.

FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the held symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the variation start order and then restored. In the upper display area Dm, the characters “Holding is being displayed in the variation start order” indicating that the pending symbol displays are rearranged and displayed in the variation start order are displayed. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and the newly established pending symbol display is displayed. Although the details will be described later, when the hold symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the variation start order and returns, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This is the time when the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223 are collated and matched.

With such a configuration, the gaming shop side, a contractor for maintenance and inspection, etc. can confirm whether or not the data does not match due to some cause when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, since the player normally displays the information, it is not possible to know that the pachinko machine 10 has some trouble, and it is possible to prevent the player from having anxiety or doubt.

In addition, at the time of initial setting when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, data collation is performed, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be restored with a more accurate reserved symbol display. Furthermore, when the data do not match, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is updated, so the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k should match the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u at the time of startup. It is possible to prevent the problem that an incorrect reserved symbol display is displayed at the time of restoration.

In the present embodiment, the notification is made by displaying characters in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of return, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be sound or the like, or a dedicated lamp or the like is turned on. Alternatively, the hold symbol display may be displayed in a special display mode (for example, blinking or a special pattern) at the time of return to notify the user.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are the backup power supply (power stored in the capacitor) from the power supply device 115. ) Is supplied even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, so that the contents of the RAM 203 and the RAM 223 are not initialized and are retained for a certain period (one week in this embodiment).

With reference to FIG. 83, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. The startup process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment has the process of S1120 added to the startup process (FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. Each process of S1101 to S1114 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as each process of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S1109 or S1112 is executed, the processing of S1120 is executed. In the process of S1120, a rearrangement return data command is generated based on each data in each reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. This rearrangement return data command is generated for each holding area, data indicating each holding area (holding areas 1 to 8) is added, and each data of each holding area (correction determination result storage area 203u1, jackpot type storage) Area 203u2, variation pattern type storage area 203u4, variation start time storage area 203u5, prefetch probability variation flag 203u5).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and before the normal game (main process (FIG. 33, S1200)) is executed, in the startup process (FIG. 83) executed, the rearrangement storage area Since the data of 203u is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a rearrangement return data command, the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are initialized at power-on. Data can be collated with the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k, and the data of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp controller 113 matches the data of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the main controller 110. Can be made.

Here, for example, even if the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 stores correct data, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is incorrect or is initialized. In the case where the power supply is restored, even if the reserved symbol display is displayed on the basis of the data in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k at the time of power restoration, there is a possibility that the incorrect reserved symbol display is displayed. However, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the voice lamp controller 113 are collated, so that It is possible to prevent such problems.

With reference to FIG. 84, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment, each process of S1320 to S1325 is added to the startup process (FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. The respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the first embodiment.

When the process of S1131 is executed in the startup process (84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, the process of S1320 is executed. It is determined whether the rearrangement return data command is received from main controller 110 (S1320). When it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1320: No), this process is repeatedly executed. That is, the state is in a standby state until the rearrangement return data command is received.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement return data command is received (S1320: Yes), it is determined whether the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k matches the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command. (S1321). When it is determined that the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match (S1321: Yes), all the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the reserved area in which the data is stored are turned on. Is set to (S1322). To display the characters "Holding is being displayed in the variation start order" indicating that the pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed in the variation start order in the left side display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for instructing is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1323).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command do not match (S1321: No), the rearrangement return data command output by the main control device 110 is Based on the data shown, the data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is updated, and the rearrangement flags 223k7 in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k are all set to OFF (S1324). The reserved symbol display indicates that the letters "holding is displayed in the established order" indicating that they are displayed in the established order are displayed in the left side display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1325).

Note that the startup process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is executed by the process of the wait time (S1102), so that S1311 of the startup process (FIG. 84) of the voice lamp control unit 113 is executed. The main process (S1200) is executed after the processes up to and the display control device 114 startup process (not shown) are completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the startup processing (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 is output before the rearrangement return data command is output from the main control device 110. In the startup process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of FIG. 84, the process of S1320 is executed and the main control unit 110 waits for the rearrangement return data command to be output.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from missing the rearrangement return data command. Further, in the startup process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, after the process of setting interrupt permission (S1311) is executed, the process of receiving the rearrangement return data command and performing the collation is executed. Therefore, even if the main control device 110 first starts the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) and transmits a command, the main control device 110 should perform the process corresponding to the command after executing the process for collating the process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the control process necessary for the normal game cannot be performed and the game is frozen.

In this embodiment, when the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is initialized by operating the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) when the power is turned on, the rearrangement return data command is This is a command indicating that there is no data in the replacement pending storage area 203u. This command may be replaced with a dedicated initial value setting command or the like.

In the present embodiment, when the collation matches, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the variation start order, and when the collation does not match, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the established order. Instead, when they match, they may be displayed in the established order, and when they do not match, they may be displayed in the fluctuation start order. In addition, the reserved symbols are displayed in the state immediately before the power is cut off (arranged in order), and the third symbol display device 81, a dedicated lamp, or the like is used to display the collation result in the patterns, characters, or lighting mode of the lamps. You may comprise so that it may notify. With such a configuration, even if a momentary power failure or the like occurs, it is possible to more accurately return to the state of the reserved symbol display before the power failure, and play the game again with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, a modified example of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(c) and 85. In the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, when the matching results do not match, the reserved symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol as shown in FIG. 82(c).

FIG. 82(c) is a diagram showing an example when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, the reserved symbol display is displayed with a temporary symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is restored. In the upper display area Dm, the characters “temporarily displaying the hold” indicating that the hold symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol are displayed. The provisional reserved symbol display and the characters for informing it are restarted, the game is newly established, and the winning command is generated based on each reserved area of the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u of the main controller 110. Is displayed and is displayed until each holding area of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is updated. Although details will be described later, when the reserved symbol display is displayed as a temporary reserved symbol display and returns, the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113. This is the time when the data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is collated and not matched.

With such a configuration, when the data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 and the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 do not match, a temporary reservation symbol display is displayed. As a result, a game shop side or a trader who performs maintenance and inspection of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has some abnormality and the data does not match. In addition, until the new winning command is received, by displaying the temporary reserved symbol display, it is possible to prevent the player from displaying an incorrect reserved symbol display.

In the present embodiment, the temporary reserved symbol display is displayed, but not limited to this, the temporary reserved symbol display is not displayed, and the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to 8 are displayed in a special color or display mode (for example, yellow). Or blinking display mode).

With reference to FIG. 85, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 85) of the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, the processes of S1330 to S1331 are added to the startup process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) instead of the processes of S1324 to S1325. ing. The processes of S1301 to S1323 in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1323 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1321, the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match. If it is determined not to do so (S1321: No), the data in each holding area of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is cleared to 0 (initialization) (S1330). A display command for displaying the temporary reserved symbol display for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, until a new winning command is received and a newly displayed pending symbol display is displayed), on the display control device 114 ( A temporary symbol command) is generated and output (S1331).

In this way, if the collation of the data does not match, a temporary pending symbol display is displayed, and by delaying the regular pending symbol display until a new winning command is received, a more accurate pending symbol is displayed. The display can be informed to the player.

Further, since the regular reserved symbol display is configured to be restored at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the player starts the game, and thus the reserved symbol display. Also, it can be recognized that the display has been resumed again, and the game can be played with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, backup power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 so that data is backed up even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. I explained about the case.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, backup power is not supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, based on the rearrangement return data command from the main controller 110, the data in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is updated, and the hold symbol display is returned to the state immediately before the power is turned off.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the twelfth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 when the data is not backed up when the power is turned off and the power is turned on again. Thus, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that processing for returning the held symbol display to the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Although not shown, in the twelfth embodiment, the backup power from the power supply device 115 is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

With reference to FIG. 86, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). In the main process (S1400 of FIG. 86) of the twelfth embodiment, the respective processes of S1417 to S1419 are deleted from the main process (S1400 of FIG. 35) of the eleventh embodiment. Each process of S1401 to S1416 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1416 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the main processing (FIG. 86) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information (S1415: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 waits for power-off without executing any processing. Ready to go.

With reference to FIG. 87, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 87) of the twelfth embodiment, the processes of S1340 to S1343 are added to the startup process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. Each process of S1301 to S1311 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as each process of S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

When the process of S1311 is executed, it is determined whether the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 is received (S1340). When it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1340: No), the process of waiting until the rearrangement return data command is received is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has been received (S1340: Yes), the data in each holding area of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is updated based on the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command. (S1341). The rearrangement flag 223k7 of each holding area is set to OFF (S1342). The display control device 114 generates a display command for displaying the character "displaying the hold in the order of establishment" on the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, which indicates that the hold symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment. Is output to (S1343).

As described above, even if the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113, the main control unit 110 sends the voice lamp control unit 113 to the rearrangement storage area 203u even when backup power is not supplied. A rearrangement return data command based on the data stored in is output. Therefore, even when the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved symbol display when the power is turned off can be restored and displayed when the power is turned on again. Therefore, the capacity of the backup power supply of the power supply device 115 can be reduced, and the size of the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be made compact.

Also, when the power is turned on again, regardless of the state when the power is turned off, the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of success, and it is notified that it is displayed in the order of success, so it is restored. The order in which the reserved symbol display is displayed can be easily determined.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, a modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the modification of the twelfth embodiment, when the rearrangement return data command is received from the main control device 110 in the startup process (FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is received. The data is updated, all the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the holding area in which the data is stored are set to ON, and the holding symbol display after the return is displayed in the variation start order.

With reference to FIG. 88, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 88) of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the processes of S1350 to S1351 are added to the startup process of the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 87) instead of the processes of S1342 to S1343. Has been done. The processes of S1301 to S1341 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1341 in the twelfth embodiment.

When the process of S1341 is executed in the start-up process (88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment, in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k, the pending area in which the data is stored is stored. All the rearrangement flags 223k7 are set to ON (S1350). A display command is generated to display the characters "Holding is displayed in variable start order" in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, which indicates that the reserved symbol displays are sorted and displayed in the variable start order. Then, the data is output to the display control device 114 (S1351).

In this way, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10 from the power-off state and the hold symbol display is restored, the hold symbol display is displayed regardless of the order displayed immediately before the power is turned off. Sorted and displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the player has returned from the power-off state and forcibly rearranged.

Also, when the power is restored, the reserved symbol display is automatically rearranged and displayed, so it is recognized that the reserved symbol display rearranged and displayed is the one that was established before the power was cut off. Even if a power failure occurs during a normal game, the game can be restarted with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 sets all the rearrangement flags 223k7 to ON, and in the main processing executed thereafter, The pending symbol display is arranged and displayed in the order of variation start. However, not limited to this, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the value to the value indicated by the variable order storage area 203u4 of the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u indicated by the rearrangement return data command. On the basis of this, a display command for rearranging and displaying the reserved symbol display may be generated and output. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control addition for rearranging the pending symbol display during the startup process. Therefore, when the rearrangement return data command output from the main control device 110 is received, the reserved symbol displays can be rearranged and displayed. In this case, all the rearrangement flags 223k7 may be set to ON, and the reserved symbol display may be configured to be maintained in the rearranged state even after the start-up process, or may be displayed during the start-up process. The rearrangement-reserved symbol display may be configured such that the display is maintained in a rearranged state until it is consumed.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off (the game state is high probability or low probability or time saving (normal probability of the symbol is high. State) or if the time saving is in progress, the number of times of saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is output as a command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return and can determine the rearrangement or the like.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 90. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, in the startup process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device is based on the data in the rearranged storage area 203u that is backed up. For 113, the rearrangement return data command is output, the data indicated by the output rearrangement return data command is collated with the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, and the power supply of the reserved symbol display is cut off. The case of returning to the immediately previous state has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is supplied with backup power from the power supply device 115 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, in the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the subordinate rearrangement hold backed up is not received without receiving the rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110. Based on the data in the storage area 223k, the reserved symbol display is displayed and restored.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the thirteenth embodiment, the main control device 110 is backed up in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 without outputting the rearrangement return data command to the voice lamp control device 113. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that a process for restoring the reserved symbol display is executed based on the data.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, is supplied with backup power when the power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is supplied. Each data stored in the RAM 223 is held.

With reference to FIG. 89, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. In the startup process (FIG. 89) of the thirteenth embodiment, the process of S1120 is deleted from the startup process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment. Each process of S1101 to S1114 in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment. That is, the same process as the startup process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment is executed.

With reference to FIG. 90, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. The startup process (FIG. 90) of the thirteenth embodiment is different from the startup process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment in that the processes of S1360 are added instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the thirteenth embodiment are the same as the respective processes of S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

When the process of S1310 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, based on the data stored in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k, A display command for causing the display control device 114 to display the reserved symbol display is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1360).

Here, the displayed hold symbol display is displayed based on the data of each hold area stored in the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k immediately before the power is turned off. Since the state of the rearrangement flag 223k7 of each holding area is stored, the holding symbol display is displayed in the order displayed immediately before the power-off.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing performed when the power of the main control device 110 is turned on, and it is possible to shorten the rise time (time until the normal game is executed) when the power is turned on.

Further, in the state immediately before the power is cut off, the pending symbol display can be restored, and the player can restart the game with peace of mind even after the power is turned on again.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the variation patterns are respectively selected at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started, and the case where the variation is started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the first special symbol or the second special symbol has a high probability of being selected when it becomes a big hit such as super reach at a timing at which fluctuation start is possible. When the fluctuation pattern is selected, a notification mode for notifying the player is displayed so as to look at the display area on the side where the fluctuation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fourteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected, the player notifies the display area displayed with the variation pattern so as to pay attention. The point is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c). FIG. 91A is a diagram schematically showing that the background image in the right side display area Dm2 is displayed in a blinking manner when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2.

FIG. 91(b) shows the second special symbol displayed in the right side display area Dm2 when the variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2. It is the figure which showed typically that the size of (the symbol which exists) was displayed by the symbol larger than usual.

In FIG. 91(c), when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right side display area Dm2, the player is informed to see the right side display area Dm2 in the left side display area Dm1. It is the figure which showed typically that the character of "" was displayed.

With such a configuration, the player plays the game while gazing at the display area on the side where the background image is displayed in blinking, so that the player can display the variation pattern that is easy to be selected when a big hit such as super reach occurs. It is possible to play a game while preventing the variation mode being performed from being overlooked.

In addition, the player can easily understand which display area should be seen, and can always enjoy the game without paying attention to both display areas at all times. Therefore, the player's fatigue can be reduced even after playing the game for a long time.

In the present embodiment, by the above notification, the special symbol to be noticed is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left display area Dm1 or the right side of the upper display area Dm that displays the special symbol to be noticed. The size of the display area of the display area Dm2 may be variable. Specifically, when attention is paid to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the left display area Dm1 is enlarged and displayed on the right display area Dm2 side, and the size of the right display area Dm2 is reduced. Alternatively, the display may be changed so as to be eliminated (all the upper display area Dm is changed to the left display area Dm1). With such a configuration, the player can be notified of the variation mode of the special symbol to be noticed. Further, the player can play the game while expecting that the left side display area Dm1 or the right side display area Dm2 can be largely changed, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A first delay time storage area 203v5 and a second delay time storage area 203v6 are added to the other memory area 203v.

In the first delay time storage area 203v5, in the second special symbol, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected, the same time as the selected variation time is for delaying the variation start of the first special symbol. This is a storage area that is stored as a delay time.

The details of the first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described later, but in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the variation pattern selected is a jackpot. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern or the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out of alignment, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

When the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated every time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed. .. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

The second delay time storage area 203v6, in the first special symbol, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected, the same time as the selected variation time, for delaying the variation start of the second special symbol. This is a storage area that is stored as a delay time.

The second delay time storage area 203v6 will be described in detail later, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the variation pattern selected is a jackpot. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern or the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out of alignment, the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

When the delay time is stored in the second delay time storage area 203v6, the time is updated every time the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S750 in FIG. 96) is executed. .. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), is subtracted.

In this way, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the variation start of the other special symbol that is the variation start after that is delayed. Therefore, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation pattern having a high probability of being selected when a big hit is variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a complicated game state in which the player needs to pay attention to both the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2.

In the present embodiment, the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5 and the second delay time storage area 203v6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the count value and the like may be stored. May be. With this configuration, each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the count value is decremented by 1, so that the number of times the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed is counted. Of course, it may be configured to measure time.

Referring to FIG. 93, in the fourteenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the fourteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 94, in the fourteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 5 (S350) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S350). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. If the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment, a delay time for delaying the variation start of the second special symbol is set, and the first special pattern is set. It is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the pattern variation mode.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, a variation that becomes a big hit) It is determined whether the pattern or the outlying super reach is variably displayed (S571). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S571: No), the first delay time is decremented by 2 ms and updated (S584). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S571: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot. (S572). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S572: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S573). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S572: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S575). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S576).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S577).

The fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S577 is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an outlying super reach (S578). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment (S578: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern is the delay time. Is set in the second delay time storage 203v5 (S579). The first caution notice command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the left display area Dm1 in which the first special symbol is displayed is set (S580).

A second mute command is set to mute the sound effect or sound that changes the second special symbol (the sound effect or sound that is set in the changing pattern in which the second special symbol is changed) (S581). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S582). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S583).

In this way, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the notification mode that focuses on the variation mode of the first special symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can easily play the game.

Also, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, attention is paid to the variation mode of the first special symbol, which is related to the variation of the second special symbol. Sound effects and voice are muted. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which of the special symbols should be noted. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the sound and the sound effect of the first special symbol, and the game can be more enjoyed.

Further, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, if the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the variation start of the second special symbol is delayed, so that the left display area Dm1 and the right display are simultaneously displayed. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the noticeable variation mode from being displayed, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, by displaying the variation mode that the player expects to be a jackpot at different times (states where they are not displayed at the same time), it is possible to play a game for a longer time while maintaining the expectation of a jackpot. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, by setting the variation pattern command and starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time can be measured in time with the variation start of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately calculated. Can be measured.

In addition, as a notice mode for notifying the player so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the first special symbol may be configured to be large (see FIG. 91(b)). Further, in order to pay attention to the first special symbol, the right side display area Dm2 may be configured to display the character "Look at the left!!" which indicates that attention is paid to the first special symbol (Fig. 91(c)). Further, the above contents may be combined with each other. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the second special symbol is paid attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol. The effect sound and voice related to the fluctuation of the design are muted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two speakers, and is configured to output a voice or sound effect related to the first special symbol on the one hand, and a voice or sound effect related to the second special symbol on the other hand. It is configured to output etc., and in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when a variation pattern that is a big hit or a super-reach that is out of line is selected, a sound or a sound effect related to the second special symbol is output. You may make it pay attention to the variation mode of a 1st special symbol by setting it as a structure which makes a speaker non-operation or low output. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily switch between voices and sound effects (which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be output such as voices and sound effects).

Referring to FIG. 95, in the fourteenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is a second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is added. Each process of S701 to S709 in the fourteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 96, in the fourteenth embodiment, a second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 95, S206) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. 5 (S750) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (S750). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. If the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment, a delay time for delaying the variation start of the first special symbol is set, and the second special symbol is set. It is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the pattern variation mode.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750), first, whether the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (that is, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, a variation that becomes a big hit) It is determined whether the pattern or the out-of-range super reach is variably displayed (S751). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (S751: No), the second delay time is decremented by 2 ms and updated (S764). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second delay time is not set (S751: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot. (S752). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S752: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S753). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to set the variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S752: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S755). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S756).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected variation pattern is It is generated (S757).

The fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S757 is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or an outlying super reach (S758). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern or a deviating super-reach variation pattern (S758: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern is the delay time. Is set in the first delay time storage 203v5 (S759). A second caution notice command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the right display area Dm2 in which the second special symbol is displayed is set (S760).

A first silencing command for silencing a sound effect or voice that changes the first special symbol (a sound effect or voice that is set in a variation pattern in which the first special symbol changes) is set (S761). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S762). The start of measurement of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S763).

In this way, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the notification mode that focuses on the variation mode of the second special symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can easily play the game.

Further, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, attention is paid to the variation mode of the second special symbol, which is related to the variation of the first special symbol. Sound effects and voice are muted. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to easily understand which special symbol should be paid attention to. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the sound and the sound effect of the second special symbol, and the game can be more enjoyed.

Also, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the variation start of the first special symbol is delayed, so that the left display area Dm1 and the side display are displayed at the same time. In the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the noticeable variation mode from being displayed, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. Also, by displaying the variation mode that the player expects to be a jackpot at different times, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the jackpot for a longer time, and to get tired of the game early. It is possible to prevent it.

Further, by setting the variation pattern command and starting the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time can be measured in time with the variation start of the second special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately calculated. Can be measured.

In addition, as the notification mode of informing the player so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol, the size of the second special symbol may be configured to be large (see FIG. 91(b)). Further, in order to pay attention to the second special symbol, a character "Look right" can be displayed in the left side display area Dm1 to notify that the second special symbol is to be noticed (Fig. 91(c)). Further, the above contents may be combined with each other. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 98. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the variation patterns are respectively selected at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started, and the case where the variation is started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, at the timing when the fluctuation can be started, the probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is high is high. When the variation pattern is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of displaying a notification mode for informing the player so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern having a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected, and a command indicating the variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, a voice is output. The lamp control device 113 differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the player gives notice so that the player pays attention to the display area displayed in the variation pattern.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 97, a variable display setting process (S1411) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) of the fifteenth embodiment has the processes of S1630 and S1640 added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) of the first embodiment. The processes of S1601 to S1614 in the fifteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1601 to S1614 in the first embodiment.

When the process of S1603 is executed in the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifteenth embodiment, the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is executed. It The details of the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) will be described later, but in the main control device 110, the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol is a variation pattern that is a big hit, or is out of order. In the case of reach, for the variation mode of the first special symbol, to set a command to execute a notification to bring the player's attention and a command to mute the sound or sound effect relating to the variation mode of the second special symbol. Processing.

In the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is a fluctuation pattern that is a big hit or an outlying super reach. (S1631). When the received first fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern that is a big hit or it is determined that it is out of reach (S1631: Yes), the background of the left display area Dm1 that displays the first special symbol A first caution notice command for instructing the display controller 114 to blink the image (see FIG. 91A) is generated and output to the display controller 114 (S1632).

A second silencing command for silencing the voice and the sound effect relating to the variation mode of the second special symbol is generated and output (S1633). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that is a big hit or that it is not out-of-range super reach (S1631: No), this process ends.

Returning to the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the description is continued. When the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1411) is executed, the processes from S1604 to S1608 are executed. When the process of S1608 is executed, the process of the second caution notice process (S1640) is executed. Regarding the second caution notice process (S1640), the process of the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is such that the first caution notice command is the second caution notice command, the second mute command is the first mute command, Since only the respective changes are made and the others are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the type of the variation pattern output from the main control device 110 is determined and the player expects the jackpot to be a jackpot, when the variation pattern is a jackpot or out of reach, the variation mode is played. Since the notification mode that allows the player to pay attention is set, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the fluctuation mode. Therefore, the player can determine which special symbol variation mode should be noted, and can easily play the game. Therefore, the player's fatigue can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the first caution command or the second caution command, the background image of the display area on the side where the special symbol is displayed is displayed in a blinking manner. However, the size of the special symbol on the attention side is not limited to this. The height may be increased (see FIG. 91(b)). In addition, as in the case of a notification mode in which attention is paid to the second special symbol, for example, a character “” that notifies the second special symbol in the left side display area Dm1 so as to pay attention to the special symbol on the attention side You may comprise so that the character "Look right" may be displayed (refer FIG.91(c)). Further, the above contents may be combined with each other. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the special symbol having a high probability of being selected when the jackpot is hit.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the variation patterns are respectively selected at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started, and the case where the variation is started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern in the first special symbol, the variation pattern to be a jackpot or the out-reach super reach (that is, the probability of being selected when the jackpot is high is high. When the variation pattern) is selected, it is determined whether the same variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol as well, and if it is selected, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol is used. Delay the start of fluctuations in.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the sixteenth embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big hit is selected, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started. , Is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the process of delaying until the variable display with the second special symbol is completed is executed.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. 99, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 99, in the second special symbol (left display area Dm2), in the state in which the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out is selected and displayed, the first special symbol ( In the right side display area Dm1) also, the super-reach that is out of the way is selected, the start of fluctuation in the first special symbol is delayed, and the second special symbol (left side display area Dm2) is noticed in the notification mode. A certain word, "Look at the right!" is displayed. Then, when the variation pattern of the super reach displayed with the second special symbol ends, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 99, the variation pattern of the delayed super reach of the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is the figure which showed typically.

Thus, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when it is a big hit (for example, super reach) is selected, the variation pattern in the first special symbol Since the start of variation of No. is delayed, the player can concentrate on the variation mode of one special symbol and can play the game calmly.

Further, the player has a variation pattern having a large expectation for the jackpot in succession, and the variation starts in order with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the player has a long expectation for the jackpot. It is possible to play, and it is possible to prevent getting tired of the game early.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, a first delay time storage area 203v5 is provided in the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This first delay time storage area 203v5, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected, a second special symbol The same time as the time until the fluctuation pattern that is selected or fluctuatingly displayed fluctuates is a storage area that is stored as a delay time for delaying the fluctuation start of the first special symbol.

The first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described in detail later, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the variation pattern selected is a jackpot. Is a variation pattern that is, or is a variation pattern of the super-reach that is out, if the variation pattern is also selected in the second special symbol, the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol ends variation The same delay time as the time until it is stored is stored.

Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated every time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed. .. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

Referring to FIG. 100, in the sixteenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 100, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) of the sixteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the sixteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 101, in the 16th embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 6 (S360) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 6 (S360). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. If the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a big hit or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out of alignment, it is determined whether or not a similar variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and the variation pattern is selected. If it is, the delay time for delaying the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set, and the process for setting the notification mode or the like for notifying the player to pay attention to the second special symbol Is.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) In step S621, it is determined whether a variation pattern that is a jackpot or a variation pattern of out-of-range super-reach is selected). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S621: No), the first delay time is decremented by 2 ms and updated (S635). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S621: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot. (S622). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S622: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S623). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S622: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S625). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S626).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S627).

The variation pattern selected in the process of S627 is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern or an outlying super reach (S628). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a jackpot or a variation pattern of super-reach that is out (S628: Yes), a variation pattern that is a jackpot in the second special symbol, or It is determined whether or not the out-of-range super-reach is selected or changing (S629).

In the second special symbol, if it is determined that the variation pattern to be a jackpot or the out-of-order super reach is being selected or varied (S629: Yes), the variation that is a jackpot being selected or varying in the second special symbol. The time until the pattern or the out-of-range super-reach ends is stored as the delay time in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S630).

In the left side display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed, the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed so as to display the character "Look at the right!" that notifies the second special symbol (the right side display area Dm2) to pay attention. The second caution notice command for instructing is set (S631). On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when it is determined that the variation pattern to be a big hit or the outlying super reach is not being selected or varied (S629: No), the process of S632 is executed. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S632). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S633).

In this way, in the variation mode of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that is a big hit or the variation pattern of the super-reach that is out of line is selected, the variation start of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started. Is delayed until the variation pattern that is variably displayed with the second special symbol is changed, so that the variation pattern that the player has a great expectation for the jackpot is variably displayed in both display areas at the same time. It can be suppressed. Therefore, with a feeling of expectation for the jackpot, it is possible to concentrate on the display of the variation pattern of one special symbol, and the game can be played easily. Also, by being displayed in both display areas, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fluctuation of one special symbol.

Also, in the second special symbol, while the variation pattern is displayed, a notification mode for notifying the second special symbol is displayed, so that the player can easily determine the special symbol to be noticed. It is possible to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the second special symbol, when the variation pattern with the expectation for a jackpot ends, then the variation pattern of the delayed first special symbol is displayed in a varying manner, and the player continuously hits the jackpot. It is possible to enjoy the variation mode having a great sense of expectation, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the notification mode for notifying that attention is paid to the second special symbol, the notification is made by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image in the left display area Dm2 may be displayed in blinking or a special color. good. Further, the size of the symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed large. Further, it is of course possible to combine them for notification.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation start of the first special symbol is delayed, but it is not limited thereto, and the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is added to the time until the variation of the second special symbol is finished. By starting the fluctuation, until the second special symbol ends the fluctuation, the first special symbol is not displayed in the right display area Dm1, or the small symbol is variably displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol ends. , The selected variation pattern (super reach, etc.) may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to change the timing of start of fluctuation, and the control load can be suppressed as compared with the case of delaying.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is configured to be delayed, but it may be configured to delay the second special symbol, or from the first special symbol and the second special symbol, later. It may be configured to delay the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is notified has been described in the case of being notified by the display mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and becomes the reserved ball, it becomes possible to start changing before the variation starts. When the winning/judging determination is made and, as a result, it is a big hit, the player is informed in advance that the winning/judging result will be a big hit due to the change due to the suspension, or it is decided by a lottery.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventeenth embodiment, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot in a state where it is displayed as a reserved ball as a reserved ball before the fluctuation is started (hereinafter, one-shot notification and Point) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. 102(a), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, among the reserved symbol displays of the second special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is usually "●". Where, is displayed in "▲" which is a special reserved symbol display, the display mode informing the player in advance that it will be stopped and displayed in the display mode of the special symbol showing the big hit is schematically FIG.

Further, in FIG. 102(b), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, among the reserved symbol displays of the first special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is usually " Where "○" is displayed, it is displayed as "△" which is a special reserved symbol display, and the display mode informing the player in advance that it will be stopped and displayed in the display mode of the special symbol indicating the big hit will be displayed. It is the figure which showed typically.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize the winning/disapproval determination result in advance by displaying the reserved symbol, and every time the reserved symbol display is displayed, the special reserved symbol display for notifying the big hit is displayed. You can have expectations and be more interested in games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is notified in advance by the pending symbol display (notice of one shot), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be notified by voice, or a dedicated lamp or the like may be used. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may of course be configured to notify by characters or symbols.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A first notification flag 203v7, a second notification flag 203v8, and a notification timer storage area 203v9 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first notification flag 203v7 is a flag indicating that a reserved symbol display (in the present embodiment, “Δ”) is displayed in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol informing that a big hit has occurred. The details of the first notification flag 203v7 will be described later, but in the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is possible to display a special reserved symbol display for notifying a big hit. , Is set to ON based on the instruction to the voice lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, when the jackpot game is started, the first notification flag 203v7 is set to off, based on the pending symbol display notifying that the jackpot is to be won. The flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

The second notification flag 203v8 is a flag indicating that a special reserved symbol display (“▲” in the present embodiment) that indicates a big hit is being displayed in the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol. This second notification flag 203v8 will be described later in detail, but in the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is possible to display a special reserved symbol display for notifying a big hit. , Is set to ON based on the instruction to the voice lamp control device 113. Although illustration is omitted, the second notification flag 203v8 is set to off when the jackpot game is started, which is based on the special reserved symbol display notifying that the jackpot is to be won. The flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

Notification timer storage area 203v9, on the other hand, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when it is displayed as a pending symbol display (single notification) to notify that it is a big hit, after being displayed, the reserved symbol display It is a storage area in which the time until the change of the special symbol based on is stopped is stored. When one notification is made with one special symbol, if the variation pattern that is a hit with the other special symbol is selected, than the set time stored in this notification timer storage area 203v9 Long fluctuation times are selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring before the jackpot due to the one-announced pending symbol display, and to prevent the player from being confused.

In addition, after one notification is given, a special symbol different from the special symbol that has been notified (for example, when one notification is made in a reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, the second The hold corresponding to the special symbol) is established, and the fluctuation is stopped before the one-announced hold symbol display, and when the jackpot is reached, the gaming state may be changed. In detail, we predicted that it would start changing in a high probability game state, determined in advance that it would be a big hit, and made one notification, but due to the hold held after that, due to the difference in the change start order, If it starts to fluctuate first and then stops at 15R jackpot, then it will be changed to a game in the normal probability (low probability) game state, and the result of judgment whether or not the reserved symbol display is announced There is a problem that it is not a big hit, but a miss.

However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when one notification is performed, the variation pattern is selected so that the jackpot game does not occur before that. Therefore, the above-described problem can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notification that would confuse the player.

FIG. 104 is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k in the seventeenth embodiment, a pending notification flag 223k8 is added to the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k in the first embodiment.

The hold notification flag 223k8 is provided in each hold area, and when the first notification command or the second notification command is received from the main control device 110, the hold notification flag 223k8 of the hold area indicated by the command is turned on. Is set. Further, the hold notification flag 223k8 resets each data in the hold area to the initial value when the hold is exhausted and the hold area is shifted, and when the hold data storage area is shifted to the changing data storage area. When it is cleared to 0, it is turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 105, S926) in the seventeenth embodiment, the first announcement lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is added to the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The first extension variation look-ahead processing (FIG. 107, S1160) is added. Each process of S931 to S939 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S931 to S939 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S931, when it is determined that the predicted hit determination result is a big hit (S931: Yes), the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is executed. The first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) will be described later, but if one notification has not been executed, a process of performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute one notification is executed.

In the first announcement lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150), first, it is determined whether the first announcement flag 203v7 or the second announcement flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1151). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1151: No), in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the change order is first, and the winning one is stored. It is determined whether it has been done (S1152).

If it is determined that there is a winning order in the rearrangement storage area 203u and there is a winning order (S1152: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the rearrangement storage area 203u, when it is determined that all the change order is out of order (S1152: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1153). The notification count value is a value obtained from the value of the special winning type counter C2. In the present embodiment, the special winning type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (any of 0 to 30 in the present embodiment) (S1154). When it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a win (S1154: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of a big hit of the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol for which the determination is made. A first notification command for instructing display with a symbol display (single notification) is generated (S1155). The first notification command is a command indicating which reserved area is the command for the reserved symbol display.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to this reserved symbol display is changed is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1156). The first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S1157). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out of range (S1154: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S1151: Yes), 2 ms is subtracted from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 to update the notification timer. Is performed (S1158).

In this way, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for whether to make one notification is not performed, so once one notification is made, Until the jackpot game is over, the next one-shot notification is not performed, and the one-shot notification is performed multiple times, so that the player can be prevented from being confused.

In addition, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to give one notification, it is possible to prevent one notification from being given even with a pending symbol display that is a big hit every time, and expectation to the big hit if one notification is not made Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player does not hold.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a counter value or the like may be stored and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

Referring to FIG. 105, the description is continued by returning to the processing of the first prefetch update processing (FIG. 105, S926). When the processing of S934 or S935 is executed, the first extension variation look-ahead processing (FIG. 107, S1160) is executed.

In the first extension variation look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160), first, it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161: Yes), the second notification flag 203v8 is stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u that triggered the setting of the second notification flag 203v8 to ON. With respect to the data of the holding area, the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 when the second special symbol corresponding to the holding area starts to change is calculated (predicted), and the selected change pattern (change time) ) Is determined (predicted) (S1162). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF (S1161: No), this process ends.

With this configuration, in the pending symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, one notification is made, and even when the variable display of the second special symbol is extended and displayed, the variation pattern (variation) By determining (predicting) the time) in advance, the reserved symbol displays can be rearranged in the correct variation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Next, the second prefetch update process (S946) which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch update processing (S946). In the second prefetch updating process (FIG. 108, S946) in the seventeenth embodiment, the second announcement lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is added to the second prefetch updating process (FIG. 28, S946) in the first embodiment. The second extension variation look-ahead processing (FIG. 108, S1180) is added. Each processing of S951 to S959 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each processing of S951 to S959 in the first embodiment.

In the processing of S951, if it is determined that the predicted win/no determination result is a big hit (S951: Yes), the second notification lottery processing (FIG. 109, S1170) is executed. The second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) will be described later, but if one notification has not been executed, a process of performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute one notification is executed.

In the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1171). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1171: No), in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the change order is first, and the winning one is stored. It is determined whether it has been done (S1172).

In the rearrangement storage area 203u, when it is determined that the variation order is earlier and there is a winning order (S1172: Yes), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the rearrangement storage area 203u, when it is determined that all of the change orders are out of order (S1172: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1173). The notification count value is a value obtained from the value of the special winning type counter C2. In the present embodiment, the special winning type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a notification counter may be provided exclusively.

It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a hit count value (any of 0 to 30 in the present embodiment) (S1174). When it is determined that the acquired notification count value is a win (S1174: Yes), the special notification is performed to notify the jackpot of the reserved symbol display of the determined second special symbol to the voice lamp control device 113. A second notification command for instructing to display the reserved symbol display (single notification) is generated (S1175). The second notification command is a command indicating which reserved area is the command for the reserved symbol display.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to this reserved symbol display is changed is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1176). The second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1177). On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out of range (S1174: No), this process ends. Further, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON (S1171: Yes), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9. 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of (1), is subtracted and the notification timer is updated (S1178).

In this way, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is on, the lottery for whether to make one notification is not performed, so once one notification is made, Until the jackpot game is over, the next one-shot notification is not performed, and the one-shot notification is performed multiple times, so that the player can be prevented from being confused.

In addition, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to give one notification, it is possible to prevent one notification from being given even with a pending symbol display that is a big hit every time, and if one notification is not made, it will be a big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the player does not hold expectations.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a counter value or the like may be stored and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

With reference to FIG. 108, the description returns to the process of the second prefetch update process (FIG. 108, S946). When the processing of S954 or S955 is executed, the second extension variation look-ahead processing (S1180) is executed. The second extension variation prefetching process (S1180) is the same as the other processes except that the second announcement flag 203v8 is changed to the first announcement flag 203v7 in the first extension variation prefetching processing (FIG. 107, S1160). Therefore, illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With such a configuration, in the pending symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, one notification is made, and even when the variable display of the first special symbol is extended displayed (delayed), By determining the variation time, the reserved symbol displays can be rearranged in the correct variation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Referring to FIG. 110, in the seventeenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) of the seventeenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 111, in the seventeenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 7 (S370) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S370). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol, when one notification is made, a variation pattern longer than the time until the variation mode of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the one-announced pending symbol display is changed Is set.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S651). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S651: Yes), it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S652). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S652: Yes), the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is the first alternative fluctuation pattern and is the first alternative fluctuation pattern. It is set as a command (S653).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the game state at that time from the normal time special hit variation pattern table 202d or the special short-term/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 202d, The fluctuation pattern of the closest fluctuation time is selected from the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. For example, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), if the jackpot type is 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is Selected.

If the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than all the fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table, the value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is set as the fluctuation time. An alternative fluctuation pattern is set. In this alternative variation pattern, after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time, they are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit. Also, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of 2R probability variation, an alternative variation pattern in which the variation time is a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 instead of the normal variation pattern for 2R probability variation Selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S652: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S654). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to set the variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S655).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S651: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S656). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S657).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S658).

The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S659). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S660).

Referring to FIG. 112, in the seventeenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 112, S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) of the seventeenth embodiment is a second special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S26) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is added. Each process of S701 to S709 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 113, in the seventeenth embodiment, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 7 (S770) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S770). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Further, in the first special symbol, when one notification is performed, the variation time until the variation mode of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the one-announced pending symbol display is set is set.

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot (S771). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S771: Yes), it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S772). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is on (S772: Yes), the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is the second alternative fluctuation pattern and the second alternative fluctuation pattern. The command is set (S773).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the game state at that time from the normal time special hit variation pattern table 202d or the special short-term/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 202d, The variation pattern having the closest variation time is selected with the variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. For example, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), if the jackpot type is 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot jackpot B is Selected.

If the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than any of the fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table, an alternative fluctuation pattern is set with the fluctuation time being the value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9. It In this alternative variation pattern, after all the main symbols in the special symbol are variably displayed during the variation time, they are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit. Also, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of 2R probability variation, an alternative variation pattern in which the variation time is a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 instead of the normal variation pattern for 2R probability variation Selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is off (S772: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S774). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to set the variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S775).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S771: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S776). When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S777).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, the variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected variation pattern is It is generated (S778). The second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S779). The start of measurement of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S780).

In this way, when the one-shot notification is executed in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the second special symbol, the one-shot notification is executed in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol, which corresponds to the first special symbol. In this case, the variation mode of the second special symbol, in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit, is delayed until the special symbol corresponding to the one-off specially reserved symbol display stops fluctuating. It is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring before the jackpot game based on the special reserved symbol display.

Therefore, assuming a lottery in a high-probability gaming state, even if one notification is given, the jackpot does not occur before that, so the game state cannot change and one notification is given. It is possible to prevent a problem that the lottery game based on the display of the held symbols does not become a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and play the game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the alternative variation pattern is selected to delay the occurrence of the big hit, but it is of course possible to delay the variation start. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent another jackpot from occurring before the jackpot triggered by the display of the held symbols for which one notification has been made.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the jackpots are delayed, but only the 15R normal jackpot may be delayed. With such a configuration, the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the 2R certainty variation jackpot occur before the jackpot based on the pending symbol display that has made one notification, but the gaming state is changed from high probability to low probability. That can be prevented, and the lottery game based on the display of the held symbols which has been notified one time can be made a big hit. In addition, even before the big hit based on the one-off notification of the pending symbols, a big hit occurs, and a lot of big hit games can be provided to the player, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

With reference to FIG. 114, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing this main processing (FIG. 114, S1400). The main processing of the seventeenth embodiment (FIG. 114, S1400) is different from the main processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 35, S1400) in the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) and the reserved quantity display update processing (FIG. 37). , S1406), a command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) and a pending number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) are added. Each process of S1401 to S1413 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, the command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 115, the command determination process 4 (S1560) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 4 (S1560). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is performed in the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

In the command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1470) of the seventeenth embodiment, the processing of S1561 and S1562 is added to the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. Each process of S1501 to S1518 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as each process of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. When it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command is not received in the process of S1517 (S1517: No), the process of S1561 is executed.

In the process of S1561, it is determined whether the first notification command or the second notification command output by main controller 110 has been received (S1561). When it is determined that the first notification command or the second notification command is received (S1561: Yes), the hold notification flag 223k8 in the hold area of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k indicated by the received notification command is set to ON. Yes (S1562).

Referring to FIG. 116, in the seventeenth embodiment, the reserved quantity display updating process 4 (S1550) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing 4 (S1550). Reservation number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), the reservation symbol display is rearranged flag 223k7 is set in the on-hold symbol display is the fluctuation start order, the off-set reserved symbol display is in the established order. Display, further, special hold symbol display the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (in the present embodiment, if the first special symbol is "△", the second special symbol If so, it is a process for displaying with “▲”).

In the reserved quantity display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated (S1551). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

Display the reserved symbol display of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in the order in which the fluctuation starts, and for the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF, the reserved symbol display in the order in which the reservation is established. The display hold display command for displaying is set (S1552).

By controlling in this manner, when the rearrangement is executed (when the frame switch 22 is operated), the displayed pending symbol display (the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) is displayed. Only for this, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged and displayed in the variation start order.

It is determined whether or not there is a holding area in which the holding notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553). When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: Yes), the hold symbol display in which the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is displayed as a special hold symbol display (this implementation). In the form, a hold display command for display to be displayed with “Δ” for the first special symbol and “▲” for the second special symbol is generated (S1554). A voice command for generating a voice (in the present embodiment, a voice “big hit!!”) indicating that one notification has been issued is generated (S1555). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no holding area in which the holding notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: No), this processing ends.

In this way, when the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, the hold symbol display is set to be displayed as a special hold symbol display for notifying that the jackpot has been hit, so that the player has a new hold. Every time the symbol display is displayed, whether or not the special reserved symbol display is displayed, it is possible to play the game with expectation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, when the special reserved symbol display is displayed, the fact that it is a big hit is also notified by voice, so that the player's ambition can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game earlier.

Further, the hold symbol display is updated and displayed every time the hold symbol display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) is executed, so that the hold symbol display or the special hold symbol is accompanied by the completion of the hold. The display can also be moved and displayed, the player can be made to display an accurate reserved symbol display, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

In the present embodiment, the voice notifying that one notification has been issued is repeatedly notified while the hold notice flag 223k8 is set to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be output.

Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the reserved symbol display as a special reserved symbol display, it is configured to notify one notification, but it is not limited thereto, the background is a different color or display mode (for example, blinking display) It may be notified by displaying it, or may be configured to notify by displaying characters on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) and the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) to win the voice lamp control device 113. The command, the first notification command, the second notification command, and other various commands are output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 sends a command indicating various count values (special winning random number counter C1 and the like) acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b. In the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) that outputs to the voice lamp control unit 113 and is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113, the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the main control unit 110 and the first process The configuration may be such that the 2 prefetch processing (FIG. 27, S914) is executed. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to perform the game processing (winning detection of various winning openings, etc.) without omission. Note that this configuration can be similarly applied to the first to sixteenth embodiments described above, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are separately selected for the variation patterns, and the case where the determination result is notified is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment, when displaying the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the left display area Dm1 and the second special symbol that variably display the first special symbol are displayed. With the right side display area Dm2 that displays the symbols in a variable manner, effects that are respectively related to each other are displayed, and the result of each judgment is notified.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighteenth embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when a specific condition is satisfied, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are associated with the variable display mode (hereinafter , Fusion effect) is displayed and the player is informed of the result of the hit/miss determination, which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117(a), a display mode of the fusion effect variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. When it is determined by the first special symbol or the second special symbol that the fusion effect variation pattern is selected, the variation display of the special symbol by the fusion effect variation pattern is synchronized with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (Fusion production) is started. As shown in FIG. 117(a), the fusion effect is displayed on the left side display area Dm1 for displaying the first special symbol and the right side display area Dm2 for displaying the second special symbol. To be done. In detail, in the left display area Dm1, as a red group, it indicates that the result of the determination of the first special symbol is notified, and in the right display area Dm2, as a white group, the result of the determination of the second special symbol is notified. It is shown that. If the red group wins the white group with a ball throw, it indicates that the first special symbol is a big hit, and if the white group beats the red group, it is a second special symbol. On the other hand, in the case where the result of the coin throw is a draw between the red group and the white group, it indicates that both the winning and losing determination results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are out.

In this way, normally, in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the judgment result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, but the fusion effect is determined. Then, different from the normal time, the change display mode (fusion effect) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are related to each other, the result of the judgment is notified and the player is given a fresh feeling. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, the fusion effect is configured to be easily determined when the hit determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit, so that the player expects the jackpot when the variable display of the fusion effect is started. You can play with a great feeling. Therefore, the player can expect the normal display (the period when the fusion effect is not displayed) whether the variable display of the fusion effect is started or not, and can enjoy the game for a long time. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is the effect by the coin purse, but is not limited thereto, if the main character (player) wins the enemy without distinguishing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The effect may be a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In such a case, when the fusion effect is started, the division between the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 disappears, and in the upper side display area Dm, a one-to-one car race with the enemy is performed. Is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can easily play the game by knowing that if the car of the main character finishes earlier than the car of the enemy, it will be a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol (main symbol) as a number is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be displayed in small variations in each display area. With such a configuration, the player can confirm the winning/disapproval determination result even by looking at the main symbol, and can easily recognize whether the production is notified of the deviation or the notification of the hit. ..

Further, the main symbol may be configured to be displayed by changing it to a numeral and changing it to a temporary symbol such as "○" or "x". With this configuration, the area for displaying the main symbol can be reduced, and the display area that can be used for the fusion effect can be configured to be larger.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118(a), the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment will be described. In the rearrangement storage area 203u, each of the holding areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (the changing data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the adjustment effect flag 203u10 and the fusion effect execution Flags 203u11 are added respectively.

The adjustment effect flag 203u10, which will be described later in detail, indicates that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time, so that a variation pattern for time adjustment is selected and is held. It is a flag. This adjustment effect flag 203u10 performs time adjustment in order to execute the fusion effect when it is decided to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The holding area corresponding to the special symbol that changes is set to ON. On the other hand, the holding area is shifted by the use of the holding, and when the change of the special symbol is finished, it is set to OFF by being overwritten by the data of the newly shifting holding area. The fusion effect is a fusion effect variation pattern in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started at the same time, and the variation display with which the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 are related is performed. Shows the contents that are variably displayed as the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is a flag indicating that the fusion effect execution is on hold. Although details will be described later, the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 executes the fusion effect when it is determined to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Then, it is set to ON for the hold area corresponding to the determined hold. On the other hand, each data in the holding area is shifted by the use of the holding, and when the change of the special symbol is completed, the data in the holding area to be newly shifted is overwritten and set to OFF.

With reference to FIG. 118(b), the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to this embodiment will be described. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k, like the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main controller 110, the storage areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (while the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing). Data), an adjustment effect flag 223k10 and a fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are added respectively. The adjustment effect flag 223k and the fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are adjusted in the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main control device 110, except that the adjustment effect flag 223k and the fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are set to ON based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Since the effect flag 203u10 and the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, FIG. 119(a) is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. A fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is added to the other memory area 203v. The fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value acquired when it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed by the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) described below. In the main process (FIG. 33), the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is incremented by 1 in the process of updating the variation type counter CS1 (S1209), and is incremented to the upper limit value of 99, and then is incremented to 100. Then, the counter value is updated to 0 which is the initial value.

Next, FIG. 119(b) is a diagram showing a fusion effect variation pattern list stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. This fusion effect variation pattern list is a diagram collectively showing the fusion effect variation patterns added to the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The fusion effect variation pattern is stored by being assigned to a specific address in the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e. Specifically, the result determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as the fusion effect variation pattern selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol is out. At the top address of the special winning variation pattern table 202d, the variation pattern in which the first special symbol wins in the coin-placing effect is stored. Further, at the head address of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation pattern in which the second special symbol is lost in the coin putting effect is stored.

Moreover, the first special symbol is removed, and the second special symbol is a winning combination result variation pattern selected as the fusion effect variation pattern, the start address of the special outlier variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In, the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is lost in the coin throwing effect is stored. Further, at the head address of the special winning variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation pattern in which the second special symbol wins in the coin-placing effect is stored.

Furthermore, the first special symbol is disengaged, and the second special symbol is also selected as a fusion effect variation pattern to be selected in the case of a hit determination result, the special outlier variation that selects a variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At the last address of the pattern, the variation patterns that are drawn in the ball-placing effect are stored.

By configuring in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined to execute the fusion effect, the fusion effect can be easily obtained based on the result of the hit/miss judgment between the first special symbol and the second special symbol for executing the fusion effect. Can be selected, and the control load can be reduced as compared with the case where selection is performed using a counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, in the fusion effect, a fusion effect variation pattern is selected for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the display mode for variably displaying the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2 is voiced. Although the notification is given to the lamp control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 based on the combination of the hit/miss determination results is one fusion effect variation pattern. May be configured to be selected as. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display modes displayed on the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2 from deviating from each other. Further, it is possible to reduce the control load of the display control device 114 as compared with the case where the fusion effect is displayed separately.

Moreover, the main control device 110 respectively selects the fusion effect variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as in the present embodiment, and outputs the variation pattern command to the voice lamp control device 113, respectively. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that receives the variation pattern command or the display control device 114 that receives a display command based on the variation command from the voice lamp control device 113 may perform display control as one variation mode. .. With this configuration, main controller 110 selects the fusion effect variation pattern by the same control as when selecting the normal variation pattern when selecting the fusion effect variation pattern, and the voice lamp control device. It can be output to 113, and it is possible to prevent the control executed by main controller 110 from being complicated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect variation pattern is configured to be stored in the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e, respectively, but the invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to set and store the configured dedicated variation pattern table.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, in the eighteenth embodiment, a special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) of the eighteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is added. Each process of S301 to S309 in the eighteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 121, in the eighteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 8 (S380) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 8 (S380). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, when it is determined to execute the fusion effect, the synchronization variation pattern or the fusion effect variation pattern for executing the fusion effect is selected.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S671). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S671: Yes), the special hit change pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S672). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is set to the special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S673).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S671: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S674). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is set to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

It is determined whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 in the hold area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u corresponding to the hold that starts to change is on (S675). When it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is ON (S675: Yes), the synchronous fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the holding area is selected and selected. A first fluctuation pattern command indicating the synchronized fluctuation pattern is generated (S676). Here, this synchronization variation pattern is a fusion effect lottery process (not shown) executed in one process of a fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) or a second prefetch update process (not shown) described later. When it is determined to execute the fusion effect, the fluctuation start time is adjusted so that the suspension of the first special symbol and the suspension of the second special symbol that are determined to execute the fusion effect start the variation display at the same timing. This is a variation pattern for Specifically, among the suspension of the first special symbol and the second special symbol determined to execute the fusion effect, the variation start time is the variation start time of the later, the variation start time of the earlier variation start time In order to match with, the fluctuation time obtained by adding the time of the difference to the selected fluctuation time is stored for the suspension that starts fluctuation immediately before.

Note that the synchronization fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the result of win/fail judgment is dislocated, and is variably displayed so that the main symbol is variably displayed for a set variability time and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating disengagement. It is a fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is OFF (S675: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 in the reservation area of the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponding to the start of fluctuation is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is present (S677). When it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S677: Yes), the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the rearrangement storage area 203u in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to on. A fusion effect variation pattern is selected on the basis of the hit/no decision result and a first variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fusion effect variation pattern is generated (S678).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S677: No), the variation pattern type is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol hold execution area 203c. It is selected (determined) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S679).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S680). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S681). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S682).

In this way, by determining whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON when selecting the variation pattern, normally, the variation pattern is selected based on each counter value. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the fusion effect, a variation pattern selection method different from the normal one becomes possible, and the variation pattern can be flexibly executed according to the situation.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (not shown) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) Select a variation pattern of a special symbol, generate a second variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern, for the processing of S681, change to a second stop type command, for the processing of S682 Since the same processing is executed except that the variation time of the second special symbol is started, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 of FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first look-ahead update processing (FIG. 122, S926) in the eighteenth embodiment, the fusion effect lottery processing (FIG. 123, S1220) and S1240 are different from the first look-ahead update processing (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. ~ The processing of S1241 is added. Each process of S931 to S935 in the 18th embodiment is the same as each process of S931 to S935 in the first embodiment.

When the processing of S934 or S935 ends, the fusion effect lottery processing (FIG. 123, S1220) is executed. The details of the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) will be described later, but when the selected variation pattern is a winning variation pattern or a super-reach that is out of alignment, a process of determining whether to execute the fusion effect. To execute.

Next, after the process of S936 is executed, it is determined whether the sorting order is interrupted and renumbered or whether the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240). When it is determined that the sorting order has been interrupted and renumbered or that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 has been set to ON (S1240: Yes), the hit determination result storage area stored in each holding area. 203u1, the big hit stop type storage area 203u2, the variation pattern type storage area 203u4, the variation start time storage area 203u5, and the prefetch probability variation flag 203u6 are updated, and the rearrangement order is renumbered based on the variation start time (S1241). Here, when the fluctuation start order changes due to the newly generated hold, the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is normal or normal) may change, but even in such a case, fluctuation start again It is possible to recognize the correct rearrangement order (change start order) by re-execution of the hit determination in the game state at that time and updating the selected change pattern.

In addition, even if it is decided that the fusion effect is executed, by selecting the synchronous fluctuation pattern, the order in which fluctuation starts is changed, but in that case also, in the gaming state when the fluctuation starts again. Since the hit/no hit judgment and the variation pattern are updated, the accurate variation start order can be recognized. For the holding area for which the synchronous fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation pattern is not reselected, and the fluctuation start is started based on the selected synchronization fluctuation pattern or the fusion effect fluctuation pattern. Time etc. are calculated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order is not interrupted and renumbered and the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S1240: Yes), the process of S939 is executed.

With such a configuration, when it is decided to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), re-execution of the winning/absence determination and the variation pattern of each holding area are performed again. Since the reselection is performed, the exact fluctuation start order can be redetermined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a fusion effect lottery process (S1220) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 122, 926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the fusion effect lottery process (S1220).

In the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), first, it is determined whether or not there is a holding area in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON among the holding areas of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main controller 110. (S1221). If it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off in all the holding areas (S1221: No), the winning/judging determination result of the holding areas of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is hit. It is determined whether or not there is a reserved area (S1222).

When it is determined that the win/fail judgment result is out of all the holding areas (S1222: No), the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is the fluctuation pattern to which the win/fail judgment result hits (ie, It is determined whether the variation pattern is selected in the S934 process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 122, S926) (S1223). When it is determined that the variation pattern predicted to be selected is a winning variation pattern (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether the fusion effect can be executed (S1224). Here, in the present embodiment, the condition of whether the fusion effect can be executed is that there are two or more reservations corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. In addition, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is a number including the newly generated reservation.

In this way, by setting the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be two or more, one is a holding for executing the fusion effect variation pattern, and the other is a synchronization variation. It can be set as a hold for executing the pattern, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can synchronize the start of execution of the fusion effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a deviation fluctuation pattern (S1223: No), the fluctuation pattern predicted to be selected is a super reach where the judgment result is wrong. Is determined (S1225). When it is determined that the variation pattern expected to be selected is the outlying super reach (S1225: Yes), the process of S1224 is executed.

When it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed (S1224: Yes), the value of the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is acquired (S1226). It is determined whether the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227). In the present embodiment, the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 has a counter value of "0 to 99", and a counter value of "0 to 19" is set as a winning counter value.

When it is determined that the acquired counter value is the counter value set for the hit (S1227: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON for the holding area in which the fusion effect is executed (S1228). ). Here, for the holding area for performing the fusion effect, the first special symbol is a holding area corresponding to the newly generated holding. On the other hand, for the second special symbol, of the stored reserved areas of the second special symbol, the reserved area with the latest variation start order is set as the reserved area for executing the fusion effect.

By comparing the variation start times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the reservation area in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON, the fusion is performed among the reservation areas corresponding to the special symbols whose variation start time is earlier. The adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON for the holding area before the holding area in which the effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1229).

The difference between the fluctuation start times of the holding areas for which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON is calculated. The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is a synchronization variation pattern indicating a time obtained by adding the calculated variation start time difference to the variation time of the variation pattern expected to be selected in the holding area in which the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON. (S1330).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S1221: Yes), and if it is determined that there is a hit holding area (S1222), the selected variation pattern is out of the supermarket. When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the reach (S1223: No and S1225: No), the fusion effect cannot be executed (that is, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is two or less). When it is determined (S1224: No), when it is determined that the value of the acquired fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a deviation counter value (S1227: No), this process is ended in any case.

In this embodiment, if the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON in any of the holding areas (that is, it is already determined to execute the fusion effect), whether or not to execute the fusion effect. Since the processing is not performed, it is possible to prevent the fusion effect from being continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the fusion effect early because the fusion effect frequently occurs.

Further, in the present embodiment, if any of the holding areas (excluding the holding area corresponding to a newly generated holding) has a holding area with a hit/miss determination result, the fusion effect is not executed. did. With this configuration, the jackpot game is sandwiched, and it is possible to prevent the execution start time of the fusion effect from being shifted due to the restart timing of the special symbol that was temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern expected to be selected is a winning fluctuation pattern or an out-of-range super-reach, it is configured to decide whether to execute the fusion effect by lottery, so that the fusion effect fluctuation pattern is correct. When the determination result is a win, the variation pattern is easily selected, and when the fusion effect is executed, the player can be greatly expected to win. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the fusion effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the fusion effect is determined by satisfying a predetermined condition, further obtaining a counter value and performing a lottery, so that the fusion effect is frequently executed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the fusion effect at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the condition that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 2 or more, respectively, is set as the condition that the fusion effect can be executed, so that the fusion effect is executed. It is possible to set a synchronization variation pattern that matches the timing, and it is possible to easily match the timing of executing the fusion effect with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is configured to be executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be configured to be executed at another timing. The timing for executing the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) may be set as appropriate, but specifically, for example, an RTC or the like may be provided and configured to be executed at a predetermined set time. ..

With such a configuration, the fusion effect will be executed by lottery every predetermined time, and by adjusting the execution start time and the lottery probability, it is possible to provide a game that does not make the player tired. it can. In addition, by notifying the player of the time for the lottery of the fusion effect by the third symbol display device 81 or the like in advance, the player can play the game in anticipation of the time, so that the game can be played for a long time. It can be enjoyed by the player.

As a condition capable of executing the fusion effect, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is two or more, respectively, but it is not limited thereto, and may be three or more, or the like. It may be configured to determine whether the fusion effect can be executed at the synchronized timing instead of the number of holdings. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities to execute the fusion effect, and to further entertain the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, one of the reserved balls is set to the synchronous fluctuation pattern to synchronize the timing of executing the fusion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is changing. May be extended or shortened for synchronization.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to synchronize the fluctuation start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to this, the fluctuation start time is not synchronized, the fluctuation start The variation of the earlier special symbol is displayed until the other special symbol begins to vary, such as displaying a blackout screen or displaying the delay variation mode such as continuing to vary the main symbol during the other, and the other. The special symbol (the special symbol for performing the fusion effect of which the fluctuation start is later) may be configured to execute the fusion effect at the timing when the fluctuation starts. With this configuration, the process for synchronizing the fluctuation start times is not required, and the control load on the main controller 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to start execution of the fusion effect at the synchronized timing, it is configured to synchronize with the synchronization variation pattern, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation start timing may be delayed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control processing for synchronization and reduce the control load on main controller 110.

Further, the fusion effect of the present embodiment is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to display the respective related variation modes, so that the player does not win the jackpot with either one of the special symbols. On the other hand, you can play with great expectations. Further, the effects of both special symbols can be seen in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can be provided with an easily understandable game effect.

Even in the second prefetch updating process (not shown) which is one process of the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first prefetch updating process (only in that it is the process relating to the second special symbol) is different. The same processing as that of FIG. 122, S926) is executed. Detailed description is omitted.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to be executed when it is predicted that the variation pattern of the hit or the variation pattern of the outlying super reach is selected, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and may be the following configurations. .. When the variation pattern per hit or out of reach is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) of the first embodiment, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first variation pattern command. 117(b), the display control device 114 is controlled so that the area of the display area for displaying the variation pattern of the hit or the variation pattern of the outlying super reach is enlarged and displayed. ..

With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the display area to be noticed and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, when the variation pattern that is easy to select when it is a big hit, the display area is enlarged, so that it is easy to see the variation mode, and pay attention to the variation of the other special symbol, and miss the variation mode that is a hit. It is possible to prevent problems that occur. In the present embodiment, when the winning variation pattern or the out-of-range variation of the super reach is displayed in both display areas, control is performed to prohibit the enlargement of the display area when the variation starts simultaneously. Also, if the timing of the start of variation is different, by changing the size of the display area that has been enlarged first to the size of the normal time (the area of the uniform display area) It is possible to recognize that the variation pattern that is easy to select is selected. Therefore, if the player changes to the normal display area after the display area is enlarged and before the fluctuation stops, the player can expect a larger jackpot (expected to obtain two consecutive hits). It is possible to play the game with a feeling, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Based on the time stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5, the fluctuation start order of each reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is renumbered again. With this configuration, even during the probability change chance game, the player can rearrange the reserved symbol displays in the order in which they start changing by operating the frame button 22, and the player can start changing accurately. The order can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation chance game is executed, it can be executed when there is no probability variation jackpot or the like hitting the holding area first. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by another big hit when the probability variation chance game is started.

In the present embodiment, since the synchronization variation pattern is selected for the hold stored immediately before the holding area in which the fusion effect is executed, the fusion effect is produced by the player by the effect of the synchronization variation pattern. It can be recognized that it is started, and it is possible to prevent missing the fusion effect. Therefore, the player can prepare in advance for watching the fusion effect.

In the present embodiment, since the probability variation chance game is executed in the high-probability game state, it is more advantageous for the player in the structure in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are individually drawn. It can be set to shift the game to. Therefore, the player can increase the enjoyment in the higher-probability gaming state as compared with the gaming machine in which one special symbol is sequentially displayed in a variable manner.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is configured to determine whether or not to execute based on the fact that the variation pattern of the jackpot or the variation pattern that is out of reach is selected in one of the special symbols. The configuration is not limited to the above, and may be the following configurations. For example, when the jackpot is determined, the fusion effect may be configured to be executed, and the type of the jackpot may be determined in the variation mode of the fusion effect. Specifically, based on the fact that the 15R normal jackpot is determined in the first special symbol, the fusion effect is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in the coin putting effect shown in FIG. 117(a). If the red group in the left display area Dm1 wins, the 15R regular jackpot, while if the white group in the right display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed wins, the 15R probability variation jackpot is notified, and the red group wins the performance. To configure.

With this configuration, the player can easily recognize the fusion effect. Further, not only the expectation for the jackpot, but also the expectation for the probability variation jackpot can be greatly given to the player. In such a configuration, jackpots with different numbers of rounds may be set, and for example, the jackpot may be awarded when either the 15R jackpot or the 5R jackpot wins, or the amount of profit given to other players. You may comprise so that it may alert|report so that whichever thing with a different height may be given.

In the second prefetch updating process (not shown) which is one of the second prefetching processes (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 129, S926). ), the same process is executed except that the process is changed to the process related to the second special symbol, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a modified example of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are synchronized so as to start the fusion effect, but in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the variation start timing is Not particularly synchronized. Specifically, first, in the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts changing, the fusion effect is executed first, and when the fusion effect of the special symbol that starts later is started, the fusion that has started first The fusion effect is started so as to interrupt the effect, and the winning/decision determination result is notified by the variable display mode in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are involved.

Specifically, in the fusion effect, the player in the red corner displayed in the left side display area Dm1 and the player in the blue corner displayed in the right side display area Dm2 are competing for boxing competition. In the first look-ahead update process (not shown) or the second look-ahead update process (not shown) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, if either one of the holding holds is determined to be a win, the fusion effect is produced. It is decided to execute. Next, the suspension for executing the fusion effect is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one is the suspension notified as a win). Here, if the type of hit that has been determined is 15R probability big jackpot, if the player in the display area corresponding to the special symbol (for example, the player in the red corner if the first special symbol) wins, 15R probability variation The player is notified that the jackpot will be awarded.

In the variable display mode in which the variation start is earlier among the suspensions determined to execute the fusion effect, first, the character “Challenger Want!” is displayed until the other special symbol starts variation, and the boxing Fusion production is started with the players displayed. On the other hand, when the variation of the special symbol for executing the fusion effect that starts later is started, the boxing player is also displayed, and the effect of starting the boxing match is executed. Then, in accordance with the variation ending time of the winning special symbol, the boxing player corresponding to the winning special symbol wins.

As a result, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not require a process for executing a process for synchronizing the fluctuation start time in order to execute the fusion effect, so that the control load of the main control device 110 is reduced. Can be reduced.

In addition, all the variation modes performed by the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the display mode of the fusion effect. In such a configuration, if they are out of alignment with each other, the production in which the boxing game continues is displayed, and when the fusion production variation pattern determined to be a hit is selected, the player corresponding to the special symbol wins. It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, the player can recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a more understandable manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 selects the fusion effect, but in the main control device 110, the fluctuation time is determined, and a signal indicating the fluctuation time and a signal indicating the win/fail judgment result are respectively voiced. It may be configured to output to the lamp control device 113, determine whether the voice lamp control device 113 is in a state in which the fusion effect can be executed, and display the fusion effect based on the variation time and the result of the judgment. With such a configuration, the main control device 110 does not need to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the fusion effect, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Moreover, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the fusion effect, by looking at the state of the number of holdings. Specifically, when the reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are evenly stored, the fusion effect is configured to be executed. Furthermore, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the fusion effect based on the fact that the variation patterns of the same variation time are stored alternately, respectively, the first special symbol It is easy to match the execution and end of the fusion effect with the symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the mutual judgment result, the variation pattern is determined by lottery, and the case of executing each lottery game explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) If it is predicted that a jackpot (hereinafter, a regular jackpot) that triggers the transition to a low-probability game state with one of the special symbols will be won (if it is determined in advance before the fluctuation starts), until the jackpot starts The game is executed with the effect of whether or not the player can win the probability variation jackpot in the other special symbol in the meantime.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the nineteenth embodiment, in the high-probability game state, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the normal jackpot is won, delay until the jackpot occurs, meanwhile, the other special symbol When the jackpot is won in, a difference from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the jackpot is controlled so as to be extended after the normal jackpot.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, an effect display mode in the probability variation chance game of whether or not the high-probability game state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment can be extended will be described. During the high probability game state, in the first special symbol (left side display area Dm1), it is determined that the normal jackpot has been won by the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) described below, and the countdown effect command is set. Then, the effect display mode indicating the start of the probability variation chance game is displayed in the left display area Dm1. In the present embodiment, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 124, balloons are displayed in the left display area Dm1 and are variably displayed so as to inflate with the passage of time. In addition, if the balloon is broken, it is indicated by letters that the high-probability game state (probability change) ends.

When the effect display mode showing this probability change chance game is displayed, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has been won in the special symbol on which the balloon is displayed. By the time the jackpot game is started, I think that I will be able to win the probability variation jackpot and play the game. By configuring in this way, unlike in the past, the player can play not only the jackpot but also the probability variation jackpot in a short time, which is different from the usual time. You can play a game with a goal.

The variable display of the first special symbol is displayed small at the position on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to know that the first special symbol is variably displayed according to the completion of the reserved symbol display, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the lottery game is being executed. Also, each time the reserved symbol display is exhausted, it can be recognized that the start of the normal jackpot is approaching, and each time the displayed first special symbol fluctuates and stops, the player is excited. Since the player can enjoy the feeling, the taste of the game can be increased.

Without being able to win the probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol, if the normal jackpot is confirmed in the first special symbol, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 124, the balloon will be in the effect display mode, and the stop symbol of the special symbol showing the normal jackpot. Is displayed. Although not shown, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the second special symbol, the balloon is not broken and the stop symbol of the special symbol indicating the normal jackpot is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the probability variation jackpot is started with the second special symbol after the normal jackpot because the special symbol showing the jackpot is stopped and displayed without breaking the balloon. You can Therefore, the player plays the game in the hope that the balloon will not be broken, and can be more interested in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notification for winning the probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol is not to break the balloon, but is not limited thereto, for example, a character such as "the probability variation still continues!" is displayed. Then, the player may be informed. Further, it is not limited to the effect of whether or not the balloon is broken, and naturally, other effect display modes may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A first variation change flag 203v11 and a second variation change flag 203v12 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first fluctuation change flag 203v11 is predicted that the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (determined before the fluctuation starts. ) Is a flag indicating that. The first fluctuation change flag 203v11 is set to ON in the process of S1254 of the fluctuation change process (FIG. 130, S1250) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) described later. On the other hand, the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is set to off based on the start of the game. In the initialized state when the power is turned on, it is set to off. The flag is also backed up by the backup that accompanies the power-off, is loaded in the startup process (FIG. 34), and returns to the state before the power-off.

Further, the second variation change flag 203v12, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state), it was predicted that the normal jackpot was won in the second special symbol (determined before the variation start It is a flag indicating that. This second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON in the same manner as the first variation change flag 203v11 in the variation change processing (not shown) of the second look-ahead update processing (not shown), and the jackpot game that normally accompanies the jackpot is played. Set to off when started. Others are different from the first variation change flag 203v11 only in respect of the second special symbol, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a part of the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special deviation variation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.

The upper diagram of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a special winning fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability variation of the special winning fluctuation pattern table 202d. The hit variation change pattern and the hit extension variation pattern are added to the special reduction variation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability variation in the first embodiment.

The winning variation change pattern is a variation pattern that is selected on the condition that the winning/disapproving determination result is a winning when the normal jackpot is won when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state. The fluctuation time is set to 180 seconds, which is longer than the other fluctuation times. Therefore, since it takes time to be stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating a hit, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to make a success/failure determination a plurality of times with the other special symbol during that time. Therefore, in the meantime, it is possible to make the player expect that the other special symbol will also be a probability variation jackpot. Further, for example, it is possible to give more jackpots to the player even if the jackpot is a regular jackpot instead of the probability variation jackpot, and the player can enjoy the game more.

In the high probability game state, the winning extension fluctuation pattern is already selected in the case where it is predicted that the other special symbol will win the regular jackpot, and the variation selected when one of the special symbols wins the regular jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. It is a pattern. This extended fluctuation pattern is composed of a fluctuation time of 300 seconds, which is longer than other fluctuation patterns. Further, the time until the normal jackpot won with the other special symbol during the probability variation chance game is definitely stopped is a maximum of 240 seconds in the fluctuation of the special symbol being held. This is because when the normal jackpot is the 4th holding of the special symbol, the holdings 1 to 3 are variably displayed in a deviation change pattern of 20 seconds which will be described later, and the normal jackpot has a fluctuation time of 180 seconds. Is.

By configuring in this way, in the high probability game state, if you win the regular jackpot with one special symbol, then win the jackpot with the other special symbol, the jackpot is always one of the regular jackpot game The jackpot game will be started later. Therefore, when the hit in the other special symbol is the probability variation big hit, the normal big hit is executed and the low probability game state is entered. After that, it is possible to shift to the high-probability game state again by the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, a high probability game state can be given to the player for a longer time.

The lower diagram of FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for time reduction/probability variation of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e. The special deviation variation pattern table 202e for time saving/probability variation of the present embodiment has a deviation variation changing pattern and an extension deviation variation pattern added to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e for time saving/probability variation of the first embodiment. ..

The deviation change pattern is, in the high probability game state, when it is predicted that the regular jackpot is won, the hold determination stored in the holding area corresponding to the special symbol that was won for the regular jackpot is the result of the win/fail judgment. This is a variation pattern that is selected when the variation starts under the condition of being present. This deviation variation change pattern is composed of a variation time of 20 seconds and is composed of a relatively long variation time as compared with other variation patterns. Therefore, when there is a lot of hold balls corresponding to the special symbol when the hold that is expected to be won in the normal jackpot is established, this deviation change pattern is executed for the hold. Therefore, the variation change pattern is executed up to 3 times, and the start of the normal jackpot is delayed by up to 60 seconds. Therefore, the delayed time can increase the possibility of winning the jackpot with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more opportunities to win the big hit.

In the high-probability game state, the out-of-range extension variation pattern is a variation pattern selected in the case where it is predicted that one of the special symbols has been won in a normal jackpot case, and one of the special symbols has a non-eligibility determination result. This out-of-range extension fluctuation pattern is composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, which is relatively shorter than other fluctuation patterns. Therefore, one lottery cycle can be shortened, and more lottery games can be executed with one special symbol. Therefore, more lottery games can be played in a short time during the probability variation chance game, and more chances of winning the jackpot can be given to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, in the nineteenth embodiment, a special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) which is one process will be described. 127 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the nineteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 128, in the nineteenth embodiment, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 9 (S390) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 (S390). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, in the high-probability game state, when it is predicted that the second special symbol will usually be a big jackpot, the winning extension variation pattern or the out-of-range extension variation pattern is selected based on the hit/miss determination result. On the other hand, in the high-probability game state with the first special symbol, when it is predicted to be a normal jackpot, select the hit variation change pattern or the out-of-range variation change pattern based on the hit determination result.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S821). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S821: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state is set (S822). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is set to the special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the game state is a high-probability game state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (the upper diagram of FIG. 126) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S823).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S821: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S824). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is set to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (the lower figure in FIG. 126) is set.

It is determined whether or not the second fluctuation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, it is predicted that the second special symbol is usually a big jackpot during the high-probability game state) (S825). When it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is ON (S825: Yes), the extension variation pattern of the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the extension variation pattern is notified to the voice lamp controller 113. The first fluctuation pattern command of is generated (S826).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S825: No), the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to on (that is, the high probability game state with the first special symbol). It is determined whether or not it is usually predicted as a big hit) (S827). When it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to ON (S827: Yes), the variation change pattern in the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the variation change pattern is set in the voice lamp control device 113. A first variation pattern command for notifying is generated (S828).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is off (S827: No), the variation pattern type is stored based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. Is selected (determined) from the fluctuation pattern table selected by (S829).

Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S830). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S831). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S832).

In this way, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the high-probability game state, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot will be hit, the probability variation chance game is executed. During the probability variation chance game, if it is predicted that the second special symbol will usually be a big jackpot, the variation determination result of the first special symbol is out, and the out extension variation pattern is selected, so 3 It becomes a lottery game of a short time, and the cycle for starting the lottery game can be shortened. Therefore, more lottery games can be executed in the first special symbol, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to obtain a lottery game that is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the player wins the jackpot.

Also, in the second special symbol, since the normal jackpot that transitions to the low probability game state is won, if it is possible to win the probability variation jackpot in the first special symbol, the probability variation jackpot will be Since it is executed after the normal jackpot of the two special symbols, it is possible to shift the gaming state transitioned to the low-probability gaming state again to the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play for a long time in the high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a chance to win more jackpots.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the variation time of 300 seconds is used as the winning extension variation pattern, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the time until the normal jackpot of the second special symbol is started is calculated, and based on that. The variable time may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time until the big jackpot of the first special symbol is started, and it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily showing an effect with a long variable time.

In addition, when it is predicted that the first special symbol will usually be a big hit, with respect to the suspension of the first special symbol that has been suspended until then, the deviation variation change pattern is selected, but not limited to this. Alternatively, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time such as one of out-of-range super reach may be selected. With this configuration, the same variation pattern as usual is displayed during the probability variation chance game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Further, since the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced, the capacity of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start of the big jackpot is usually delayed by selecting a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, but the invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation start may be delayed by a predetermined time. Specifically, in the high-probability game state, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot is won, the time to delay the fluctuation start may be determined by lottery, and the fluctuation start may be delayed during that time. .. With such a configuration, the player wants to make a lottery jackpot by making more lottery games with the other special symbol while the variation of the special symbol is stopped (delayed). You can play and concentrate on the game. Further, in the probability variation chance game, the variation start of one special symbol is stopped (delayed), and it is possible to indicate to the player that a more special game is being performed.

In addition, also in the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the same process is executed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 only with respect to the second special symbol, and thus the detailed description will be given. Is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 129, S926) in the nineteenth embodiment, the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S926) and S1130 are different from the first prefetch updating process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. Each process up to S1131 is added. Each process of S931 to S932 in the nineteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S931 to S932 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S932, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the normal jackpot (S932: No), the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) is executed. The variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) will be described later, but is a process for setting the probability variation chance game if the probability variation game is not in progress when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state.

The processing of S933 of the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S933 of the first embodiment. When the process of S933 ends, it is determined whether or not the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, in the second special symbol, it is predicted that a normal big hit will occur) (S1130). When it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1130: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted probability variation jackpot is a hit even in the normal gaming state (S1131). ). When it is determined that the winning is achieved even in the normal game state (S1131: Yes), the countdown effect avoidance command is generated (S1132).

This countdown effect avoidance command is a command for allowing the balloons displayed in the probability variation chance game to continue to be displayed without being broken. In the second special symbol (right side display area Dm2), a balloon is displayed, and in the first special symbol (left side display area Dm1), when the probability variation chance game of whether a probability variation jackpot can be obtained is being performed, When it is predicted that the probability variation will be a big hit in one special symbol, in the probability variation chance game, in order to notify that the probability variation has been obtained, the balloon is switched to an effect display mode in which the balloon is not broken. Thereby, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has been obtained in the probability variation chance game.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S1130: No), or if it is determined to be out of the normal gaming state (S1131: No), the process of S1132 is skipped. Then, the process of S934 is executed.

Thus, in the processing of S1131, by determining whether or not it is a win even in the normal game state, during the probability variation chance game, the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed after the normal jackpot in the second special symbol. It may be the case. In that case, a lottery may occur in a low-probability game state, which may result in no jackpot, but in such a case, the countdown effect avoidance command is not set, and thus the player has a first chance of winning a sudden variation jackpot. It does not indicate that you have won the symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of incorrect information.

Since each process of S934 to S939 in the nineteenth embodiment is the same as each process of S934 to S939 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the certainty chance jackpot is held as a certainty variation jackpot. Since it is configured to set whether or not it is established, it is possible to change the effect based on the establishment of the hold, and it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of incorrect information.

The countdown effect avoidance command may be set by the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the winning command, based on the winning command. With this configuration, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, description will be given of the change changing process (S1250) which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the change processing (S1250).

In the variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (S1251). Whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag 203m of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 is set to ON in the main controller 110.

When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is off (S1251: No), based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter from the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the time of variation start. Then, the variation pattern is predicted and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S1252).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is on (S1251: Yes), whether the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to on (that is, during the probability variation chance game). It is determined whether there is any (S1253). When it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1253: Yes), the process of S1252 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (that is, the probability variation chance game is not in progress) (S1253: No), the first variation change flag 203v11 is turned on. (S1254). The hit variation change pattern is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reservation area of the corresponding rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1255).

The time until the set variation change pattern ends changing is calculated (S1256). It should be noted that the time until the variation change pattern of this perturbation ends is the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is currently fluctuating, the number of holdings of the first special symbol (this time, the number that does not include the holding that is a normal winning). ) Is multiplied by the variation time of the deviation variation pattern, which is 20 seconds, and the result is added with the variation time of the variation variation pattern of 180 seconds.

A countdown effect command is set based on the time calculated in the process of S1256 (S1257). When the countdown effect command set here is output to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 so that the effect display mode in which the balloon is broken is displayed after the calculated time. .. With this configuration, in the probability variation chance game, even if the probability of the probability variation jackpot is not established in the second special symbol, the main control device 110 executes an effect that the balloon is broken at the end of the probability variation chance game. It is not necessary to notify the command again, and the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, is it determined in the process of S1131 that the normal game state (low probability game state) is also a win? (I.e., whether it is a big hit random number value in the low probability game state), but not limited to it, the big hit random number value (judgment value) that is determined as a big hit in the normal game state and the probability variation game state, respectively May be configured to be discriminated as the value of (no common value). With such a configuration, in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926), it is possible to generate the countdown avoidance command by determining whether the random number value is determined to be a win in the low probability game state. Therefore, the control processing amount of main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the high-probability game state, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the normal jackpot is won, the start is delayed, and the balloon that notifies that delay is cracked However, the time until the big hit is usually executed (determined) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the countdown may be performed. With such a configuration, the player can be informed easily of the remaining time in the high-probability game state. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game while determining the time.

In addition, usually the jackpot is delayed, after the production of the countdown is started, the number of executions of the lottery game of the other special symbol is counted, and when the countdown is 0 or the balloon is broken, the number of times is given to the player. You may comprise so that it may notify. With such a configuration, it is possible to evaluate how effectively the high probability game state is played by the player. In addition, after the countdown effect is started, each reference value (for example, 0 to 10 times, 11 to 20 times, etc.) is set in advance for the number of times the lottery is performed with the other special symbol, and each reference value is supported. The rank may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily evaluate the game in the high-probability game state based on the displayed rank.

In the present embodiment, the normal jackpot is delayed during the high-probability game state, and the countdown effect (whether or not the balloon is broken in the present embodiment) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the regular jackpot is delayed. The special symbol that is different from the other special symbol different (for example, if the start of the normal jackpot is delayed in the first special symbol, the second special symbol) to execute the lottery game (starting slot of the corresponding special symbol Target). Specifically, if the normal jackpot is delayed in the first special symbol, in the left side display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, "start more fluctuations of the second special symbol!" Aiming at the starting opening (second starting opening 63b)!" may be displayed to notify the player.

Next, a modified example of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are configured to be alternately established by the distribution device 630. However, in the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment, the first starting port 63a is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second starting port 63b is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. With this configuration, the player operates the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, the game ball reaches the upper center position of the variable display device unit 80, and the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is reached. By firing the game balls so that the game balls are distributed to the right side and flow down, respectively, it is possible to win the game balls to both start ports. Further, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 and launching the game ball with such strength that the game ball reaches the upper left side of the variable display device 80, the game ball easily flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Since (the amount of the game ball flowing down to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 increases), it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to win the first starting opening 63a (or reduce the winning to the second starting opening 63b). be able to). Further, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 and launching the game ball with such strength that the game ball reaches the upper right side of the variable display device 80 (or the return rubber 69), the game ball is displayed in the variable display device unit. Since it becomes easy to flow down the right side of 80 (the amount of flow of the game ball to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 increases), it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to win the second start opening 63b (or the first start). It is possible to reduce winnings to the mouth 63a).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the notification as shown in FIG. 124 is executed by setting the countdown effect command in the process of S1257 of the fluctuation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The configuration has been described. On the other hand, in the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment, the main control device 110 does not set the countdown effect command, but outputs the determination result of the established win/loss determination condition and the information of the selected variation pattern as a winning command. .. In the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 performs control for determining whether or not the winning variation change pattern is selected based on the winning command and setting the notification mode as shown in FIG. The MPU 221 of FIG. In addition, as the notification mode, a special symbol different from the special symbol for which the variation change pattern is selected (for example, if the variation alteration pattern is selected in the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is given priority to the player. Notify to start fluctuation. As a specific notification mode, for example, the character "Aim at the left side starting opening (first starting opening 63a)!!" is displayed in the right side display area Dm2.

By performing a lottery on whether or not to set the notification mode, it is possible to set a case where the player is notified and a case where the player is not notified, and it is possible to suppress an excessive advantage for the player. it can. Regarding the lottery, it may be based on the setting value of the setting means that can be set by the game shop side, or it may be possible to obtain a random number value and perform a lottery with a predetermined probability, or the state of winning of the gaming machine so far. The lottery may be performed based on the number of jackpots, the difference ball, the number of changes from the current previous jackpot, and the like. By doing so, the profit to be given to the player can be adjusted based on the state of the gaming machine and the profit obtained by the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a profit to the player within a range of profit that is assumed in advance.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify that the normal jackpot to be transitioned from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state has been won, but is not limited thereto, and when the jackpot with a small number of rounds is determined, it is set. It may be notified, or when a win without a reduction in time is won, it may be notified. Further, without being limited to the hit, it may be configured to notify in advance based on that it is determined that the state advantageous to the player is shifted to the disadvantageous state.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 140. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, in the case of executing the respective lottery games, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined by a lottery pattern regardless of the mutual judgment result. I explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment, when the holding balls determined to be the big hits overlap among the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the big hit is usually a big hit. Whether or not the probability variation jackpot is determined, the control is executed so that the normal jackpot is started before the probability variation jackpot.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the twentieth embodiment, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have overlapping jackpots, if one is a regular jackpot and the other is a probability variation jackpot, the probability variation jackpot is later than the regular jackpot. Different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the control for selecting the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is executed so that the jackpot game is started.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the notification effect during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. The upper diagram of FIG. 131 shows one of the rounds during the jackpot game. As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 131, each time each round is started, the characters “Please hit the button repeatedly!”, which is a notification prompting the player to hit the frame button 22 repeatedly, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed in. This is, by hitting the button repeatedly, whether or not there is a hit among the holding balls currently stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Is an effect for notifying the player in advance.

When the player operates (presses down in this embodiment) the frame button 22 a predetermined lottery is executed, the lottery is won, and if the reserved ball to be won is stored, the result is shown in FIG. 131(a). As shown in the figure, the characters "another big hit" are displayed indicating that the winning ball is stored in the reserved balls. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated and the predetermined lottery is not won, or when the lottery is won but the winning ball is not stored in FIG. 131(b) even if the lottery is won. ) Characters such as "Sorry!!" are displayed.

By operating the frame button 22, the player can know in advance whether another big hit will be obtained early. In addition, since the player who does not want to know in advance does not operate the frame button 22, the information about whether or not there is a hit in the reserved ball is not displayed, so that the player can set it according to his or her preference. You can choose the game.

This notification effect is displayed each time the round starts. In addition, once it is notified that there is a hit in the reserved ball, it is not notified from the next round. With such a configuration, until the final round, the player can play the game with the expectation that there is a hit in the reserved ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the big hit game.

Next, the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this rearrangement pending storage area 203u, an overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is added to the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the first embodiment.

The overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is a special symbol of the reserved ball that is the probability variation jackpot, which is usually a big hit, when the holding balls that are hits with the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are overlapped. It is a flag indicating that the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is a reserved ball selected so that the jackpot game is started later than the special symbol of the reserved ball.

The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is the holding area of the sorting holding storage area 203u in which it is decided to select the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern in the processing of S1280 of the first duplication hit processing (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. Set to on. On the other hand, in the duplication adjustment flag 203u12, when the holding ball is exhausted, the holding area is shifted to the changing data storage area where the changing data is stored, and when the change ends, the next change is started. It is sometimes set to off by being overwritten with new data. The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is restored to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. In the state where the gaming machine is initialized, the flag is set to off. Although the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is not described and illustrated this time, the first duplication hit process (not shown), which is a process of the second prefetch update process (not shown), is also performed. The difference is that the overlapping adjustment flag 203u12 of the reserved area for the second special symbol is set to ON, but it is set to ON similarly.

With reference to FIG. 132(b), the other memory area 223m set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 132B is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 223m. A confirmation notification flag 223m1 and a confirmation notification counter 223m2 are added to the other memory area 223m in the first embodiment.

The confirmation notification flag 223m1 is a flag indicating that in the notification effect during the big hit, it is notified that there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding balls. In detail, in the jackpot mid-stage effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, a confirmation notification display for notifying that there is a winning holding ball among holding balls is displayed. After that, it is turned on in the process of S1581. In addition, it is set to off as the jackpot ends.

The confirmation notification counter 223m2 is a storage area for storing a counter value that is incremented by 1 each time the big hit medium effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) is executed. The confirmation notification counter is set to "0" which is an initial value when the power is turned on, is added up to "255" which is an upper limit value, and is set to "0" which is an initial value when 1 is added next. .. This confirmation notification counter is a counter value for determining whether or not to notify whether or not there is a holding ball to be hit in the holding balls in the notification effect of the big hit. The hit counter value is set for each big hit round. In the present embodiment, a value of "0 to 1" is set as the hit counter value for 1R to 10R, and a value of "0 to 9" is set to the hit counter value for 11R to 15R.

With such a configuration, a lottery is performed each time the player operates the frame button 22, so that the timing of notification can be different for each jackpot, and the player can be given a feeling of mannerism. Can be suppressed. Also, if you do not win the lottery, notification will not be executed even if there is a hit in the reserved ball, so you can create a state where it is not always notified, you can surprise the player with a big hit later, You can continue to have expectations even without it. In addition, since the lottery is selected every time the frame switch 22 is operated, the more the frame switch 22 is operated, the higher the probability of being notified, and the player operates the frame switch 22 to be ambitious. You can participate in the game.

Furthermore, since the round progresses and the lottery probability becomes 5 times after 11R, it is easy to win even if you have not been able to win the lottery up to 11R, and it is possible to prevent players from giving up if they are not hit (not notified). it can. Therefore, the player can participate in the notification effect with the expectation that it may be notified after 11R.

In the present embodiment, the hit count value is configured to be variable between 1R to 10R and 11R to 15R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed for each round, or the winning probability is determined by lottery at each start of each round. It may be configured to determine. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the player will be put on hold at an unexpected timing, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, in the twentieth embodiment, of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) which is one process will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. Instead of (FIG. 18, S310), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 134, in the twentieth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. 10 (S410) will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (S410). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, if the result of the judgment of the special symbol to start changing is a hit, and if there is a hit to the holding ball of the second special symbol, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is selected so that the normal jackpot game is started first. To do.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S840). .. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S840: Yes), the special winning variation pattern table 202d according to the gaming state is set (S841). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is set to the special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or during the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probable variation special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The big hit type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the big hit type is determined (S842).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S840: No), the special deviation variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set (S843). In the present embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is set to the special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the second special symbol. It is configured. When the game state is the normal game state (a low probability game state and not during the time saving), the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10B) is set. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a time saving (the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving/probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

It is determined whether the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 of the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponding to the suspension that starts to change is set to ON (S844). When it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S844), the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the rearrangement storage area is selected and based on the variation pattern. Generate a first variation pattern command.

Here, the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation set in the first overlapping hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) described later. It becomes a pattern. The extended variation pattern and the shortened variation pattern are display modes in which the main symbols are variably displayed during the set variation time, and based on the lapse of the set variation time, the result of the judgment is notified. This is a variation pattern that is stopped and displayed at.

The shortened variation pattern is a variation pattern for controlling (adjusting) so as to start the normal jackpot of the first special symbol that starts to vary this time, before the probability variation jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol. is there. On the other hand, the extension variation pattern is a variation for controlling (adjusting) so as to start the probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol that starts variation this time, after the normal jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol. It is a pattern.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S844: No), the variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c. The selected variation pattern table is selected (determined) (S846). Based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected fluctuation pattern is It is generated (S847). The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S848). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S849).

By configuring in this way, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start changing is a probability variation jackpot, after the normal jackpot of the second special symbol, adjust so that the jackpot game is started. You can On the other hand, if the lottery game of the first special symbol that is about to start changing is a normal jackpot, it can be adjusted so that the jackpot game is started before the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the reserved ball, even when the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot are overlapped, the probability variation jackpot is executed after the normal jackpot is executed, so it is high. The probability game state can be maintained longer. Therefore, more jackpots can be given to the player.

In the present embodiment, the variation time of the extension variation pattern or the shortening variation pattern is determined in the first overlapping hit process (S136 of FIG. 136) executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a. Although configured in this manner, the invention is not limited to this, and in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410), variation time may be calculated and determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the fluctuation time, the probability variation jackpot is configured to be executed after the normal jackpot, but not limited to this, by delaying the fluctuation start of the probability variation jackpot by a predetermined time, You may adjust so that the probability variation jackpot starts later. With such a configuration, the variation start is delayed, so that the player can recognize that the jackpot will be further executed, and can recognize the subsequent jackpot early.

Further, in the present embodiment, the extended variation pattern and the shortened variation pattern are newly set, respectively. However, from the existing variation pattern table, a variation pattern in which the normal jackpot is usually displayed first may be selected. You may comprise. In such a configuration, a variation pattern with a short variation time or a variation pattern with a long variation time may be set in advance in the existing variation pattern table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment, each process of S1260 to S1261 and the first overlap hit process are different from the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. (FIG. 136, S1270) is added.

In the processing of S1260, it is determined whether or not the winning area corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u (S1260). In this determination, it may be determined whether or not a big jackpot is stored among the holds stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When it is determined that there is a big jackpot due to the second special symbol being held (S1260: Yes), the first overlapping hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) is executed.

The details of the first overlapping hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) will be described later, but when the holdings to be hits overlap among the holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the normal big hit is started. The processing for selecting the extension variation pattern or the shortening variation pattern as the hit variation pattern of the first special symbol is executed so that it comes before the start of the probability variation big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that all of the second special symbols are held off (S1260: No), or after the first overlap hit process (FIG. 135, S1270) is executed, the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON. If not, the fluctuation pattern is newly stored based on the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 from the special winning fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state at the time of fluctuation start. It is predicted (determined in advance) and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 (S1261).

In addition, each process of S931 to S933 and S935 to S939 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment is S931 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. -S933, S935-S939 and the same processing as each processing are performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the first duplication hit process (S1270), which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the first duplicate hit processing (S1270). In the first overlap hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) in the twentieth embodiment, it is determined whether a hit hold is stored in the hold corresponding to the second special symbol, and when a hit hold is stored, Is for determining the type of each hit and for selecting the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern as the variation pattern of the first special symbol so that the normal jackpot start is executed before the probability variation jackpot start. Processing.

In the first overlap hit process (FIG. 136, S1270), first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold area in which the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON in any of the hold areas of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. If the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S1271: Yes), this process ends. In this way, if the jackpot has already overlapped with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and there is a pending change in which the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the process in the case of overlapping again is performed. It is configured not to do. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the control load of main controller 110 from becoming excessively large. Further, in a state in which three or more jackpots are held, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling performance by not performing control such that the jackpot is given to the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the duplication adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S1271: No), the probability change probability of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stored in the reservation area of the rearrangement storage area 203u is It is determined whether or not it is a hit even if it is a low probability game state (normal game state) (S1272). In the normal gaming state, if it is determined that the game is out of play (S1272: No), this process ends. In this way, by determining whether the probability variation jackpot is a hit even in the normal game state, if the probability variation jackpot is delayed from the actual fluctuation start time, the one that starts changing in the high probability game state is a low probability game. Even if the fluctuation starts in the state, only the big hit can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being damaged.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is determined even in the normal gaming state (S1272: Yes), is the prefetching probability change flag 203u6 in the reserved area of the newly stored rearrangement reserved storage area 203u ON (ie,? , Is the newly stored hold a probability variation jackpot?) (S1273). When the newly stored hold is determined to be the probability variation big hit (S1273: Yes), it is determined whether the hit of the hold area corresponding to the second special symbol is a normal big hit (S1274). When it is determined that the hit of the holding area corresponding to the second special symbol is a normal jackpot (S1274: Yes), the time until the normal jackpot of the holding area of the second special symbol stops fluctuating is calculated ( S1275).

The time until the fluctuation of the normal jackpot of the second special symbol is stopped, the remaining fluctuation time of the currently changing second special symbol and the second special symbol that is stored before the second special symbol of the normal jackpot. It is calculated by adding the variable time of suspension of the special symbol, respectively.

After the time until the variable stop calculated in the process of S1275, the variable time is calculated so that the newly-stored probability of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation jackpot, stops variable, and the variable time is changed. The extended variation pattern constituted by is set (selected) and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding holding area (S1276). Here, the variation time of the extended variation pattern is currently stored in the remaining variation time of the first special symbol that is currently varying, before the newly stored first special symbol, which is a probability variation jackpot, is reserved. The variation time of the suspension of 1 special symbol is added, and the variation start time of the probability variation jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol is calculated. Then, the time obtained by subtracting the fluctuation start time from the time calculated in the process of S1275 and adding 3 seconds is determined as the fluctuation time. If the fluctuation start time is later than the time calculated in the process of S1275, an extended fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning in the holding of the second special symbol is the probability variation big hit (S1274: No), this process is ended. When it is determined that the pre-reading probability variation flag 203u6 of the newly stored holding area is off (S1273: No), the hit of the holding area corresponding to the second special symbol is determined whether it is a probability variation jackpot. (S1277). When it is determined that the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (S1277: Yes), the time until the probability variation jackpot of the reserved area of the second special symbol stops fluctuating is calculated (S1278). The calculation of this time is performed by the same method as the process of S1275.

Based on the variation start time of the hold that is the normal jackpot of the first special symbol, the newly stored normal jackpot of the first special symbol is started before the probability variation jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol. It is determined whether it is possible (shortened) (S1279). Here, the determination of whether or not possible, when the variation time of each holding area corresponding to the first special symbol is configured with a shortened variation time of 1 second, can it be started before the probability variation jackpot of the second special symbol? To determine.

When it is determined that the normally stored big jackpot of the newly stored first special symbol can be started before the probability variation jackpot stored in the hold of the second special symbol (S1279: Yes), newly. The shortened variation pattern is stored in the variation pattern type storage area of the reserved area corresponding to the stored special area and the first special symbol stored earlier than the reserved area. The shortened fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern composed of a fluctuation pattern of 1 second.

The duplication adjustment flag 203u12 of the holding area storing the extension variation pattern or the shortening variation pattern is set to ON (S1281). Reservation areas are renumbered in order of variation start time (S1282).

With such a configuration, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the big hits overlap, the variation time can be adjusted so that the probability variation big hits start after the normal big hits. .. Therefore, after the normal jackpot is executed, it is transitioned to or maintained in the low-probability game state (normal game state), but after that, the probability variation jackpot is executed, resulting in a high-probability game state (probability variation game state). The gaming state can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play in a high-probability game state for a long time. Moreover, more jackpots can be given to the player.

In addition, when the big hit which is overlapped with the 1st special design and the 2nd special design is the probability variation big hit in both sides or the normal big hit in both sides, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is not selected (the selection is prohibited. ), the player can enjoy the game with a normal variation pattern.

In addition, after the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the variation start time of each holding area is updated, and the variation start time is renumbered again in order of the variation start time. Alternatively, even if the fluctuation start order changes due to the shortened fluctuation pattern, it is possible to update the correct fluctuation start order. Therefore, the winning command can be generated based on the correct variation start order, and even when the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct variation start order.

In the present embodiment, the extended variation pattern is calculated based on the time until the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, stops changing and is determined based on the time. However, the extension variation pattern is not limited to this, and is the most common variation pattern. It is also possible to assume a maximum variation time when combined in a long variation pattern and to preset and select a variation pattern having a variation time longer than that as an extended variation pattern.

In addition, the newly stored first special symbol until the probability of a sudden change jackpot is all configured with a shortened variation pattern of 1 second, but it is not limited to this, and the time until the normal jackpot of the second special symbol fluctuates stops It may be configured so that it is calculated and appropriately set so as to be shorter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern for adjusting the variation time is set, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variation start may be delayed or the suspension of the deviation may be invalidated. It may be configured to adjust. With this configuration, main controller 110 can reduce the control load for adjusting the fluctuation time.

Incidentally, in the second prefetch updating process (not shown) which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914) executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 63b, Although it is different from the process for the reserved ball of the two special symbols, the same process as the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) is executed, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 137, in the twentieth embodiment, the large opening opening/closing process (S103) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this large opening opening/closing processing (S103). The large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 137, S103) of the twentieth embodiment controls opening/closing of the first variable winning device 65.

In the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 137, S103), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started (S131). Whether the jackpot game is started or not is determined by the processing of S608 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204) or the processing of S808 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207). It is determined by whether the start of is set.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the change start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u Regarding the value, starting from after the big hit, it is recalculated in consideration of the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is temporarily stopped (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the variation start time storage area 203u5 of each holding area stored in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. The value of is recalculated starting from after the big hit (S134).

A rearrangement data command is generated for each holding area based on the fluctuation start time stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5, which is recalculated in the processing of S133 or S134 (S135).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S136: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S137). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S137: Yes), a process of opening the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S137: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140). When it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), a process of closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S142). When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S142: Yes), the ending command is set (generated) (S143).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is over (S144). When it is determined that the jackpot game is over (S144: Yes), the jackpot game is over (S145). It is discriminated whether or not it was the probability variation jackpot (S146). The determination as to whether it was a probability variation jackpot was a trigger for executing the jackpot game. The lottery result is determined to be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is hit (S146: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S144: No), or if it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S146: No), this process is ended.

In this way, when the big hit game is started, the variation start time in each holding area starting from after the big hit game is updated. Therefore, even when the player operates the frame button 22 during the big hit game, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also generates the rearrangement data command based on the updated fluctuation start time. The data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k can be updated, and the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of starting the variation after the big hit game.

In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for the suspension of the special symbol, after the remaining variation time elapses, By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, it is possible to calculate a more accurate fluctuation start time and generate a rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can rearrange the pending symbol display in a more accurate order of starting the fluctuation based on the fluctuation start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

With reference to FIG. 138, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). In the main process (S1400 of FIG. 138) of the twentieth embodiment, the effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) of the big hit is added to the main process (S1400 of FIG. 35) of the first embodiment, and the command determination process ( 36, S1414) is changed to the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). Each processing of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, S1415 to S1419 in the twentieth embodiment is the same as each processing of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, S1415 to S1419 in the first embodiment. .. When the processing of S1413 is completed, the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 139, in the twentieth embodiment, the command determination process (S1414) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 138, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1414). In the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment, each processing of S1565-S1566 is added to the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment. The processes of S1501 to 1519 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1501 to 1519 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment. Is executed.

In the process of S1517 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) of the twentieth embodiment, when it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command is not received (S1517), during the jackpot game. It is determined whether the round number command output from main controller 110 is received (S1565). When it is determined that the round number command is received (S1565: Yes), the jackpot round number and the round valid time are set based on the received round number command (S1566). The round effective time is set to 5 seconds, during which the notification effect during the big hit game is executed.

Next, returning to the main processing (S1400) in FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the main process of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 138, S1400), after the process of S1410 is executed, or when it is determined in the process of S1401 that the time is less than 1 ms (S1401: No), a big hit medium effect process ( 140 and S1570) are executed.

With reference to FIG. 140, in the twentieth embodiment, a big hit medium effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) that is one process of the main process (FIG. 138, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the effect processing during the big hit (FIG. 140, S1570). In the big hit medium effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) of the twentieth embodiment, in the notification effect during the big hit game, a lottery is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, and a big hit occurs in the reserved ball. A process of notifying the player whether there is a reserved ball is executed.

In the big hit medium production process (FIG. 140, S1570), first, the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is read, "1" is added to the value, and the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is updated (S1571). Next, it is determined whether the round valid time is in progress (S1572). Whether or not it is the round valid time is determined whether it is the round valid time (5 seconds from the start of the round in this embodiment) set in the process of S1566 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid time (S1572: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round valid time is in progress (S1572: Yes), it is determined whether the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (that is, the confirmation notification has already been made) (S1573). .. When it is determined that the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is on (S1573: Yes), this process ends.

When it is determined that the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is off (S1573: No), the display confirmation effect command is generated (set). The display confirmation effect command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display a background screen for notification effect on the third symbol display device 81.

A display button operation display command is generated (set) (S1575). This display button operation display command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters “Please hit the button repeatedly!” on the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the notification effect has started and start operating the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can easily participate in the notification effect.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576). Here, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) once. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1576: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576: Yes), the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is acquired (S1577). The value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 acquired with a winning probability based on the number of rounds is judged to be right or wrong (S1578). Here, when the number of rounds is 1R to 10R, "0 to 1" is set as the hit determination value, and when the number of rounds is 11R to 15R, "0 to 9" is set as the hit determination value. Is set.

It is determined whether or not the obtained determination result of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is a win (S1579). When it is determined that the hit determination result is a hit (S1580), it is determined whether there is a hit hold in any of the hold areas of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u (S1580). If it is determined that there is a winning hold (S1580: Yes), a display confirmation notification command for instructing confirmation notification display is generated (set) (S1581). The confirmation notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (S1582). Here, the display confirmation notifying command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters “another big hit!” on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 131(a). .. From this display, the player can recognize that there is a big hit in the hold. Therefore, the player can operate the frame button 22 in the expectation of this display. Therefore, even during a big hit, the player can play the game without getting tired of the game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning/disapproval determination result is out (S1579: No), or when it is determined that all the holding areas are out (S1580: No), a display for instructing the non-confirmation notification display A non-confirmation notification command is generated (set) (S1583). Here, the non-confirmation notification command for display is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the character "sorry!!" on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 131(b). When the character "Sorry!!" is displayed, the player can recognize that the notification has not been given because the reserved ball has not been hit or the number of consecutive hits is insufficient. Since the notification effect is configured to be executed every round until the confirmation notification is displayed, even if the player displays "Sorry!!" in one round, the player still actually hits the holding ball. Hoping that there may be, you can participate in the notification production in the next round.

In this way, when the big hits overlap with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern is adjusted so that the probability variation big hit starts after the normal big hit. Furthermore, during a jackpot, by performing an effect as to whether or not there is a jackpot in the holding ball, if the jackpot being informed that there is a jackpot in the holding ball, the jackpot being executed is usually a jackpot. Even so, the player can play the game with the expectation that the hit that has been put on hold is a probability variation big hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to continue playing with high expectations even during a big hit.

Further, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the jackpots overlap, and the shortened variation pattern is selected in order to start the normal jackpot before the probability variation jackpot. As a result, when the normal jackpot is started via the shortened variation pattern, the player can participate in the notification effect, expecting that the probability variation jackpot should be stored in the hold.

In addition, since the notification effect is not notified unless the lottery indicating whether or not to perform the notification is won even if the jackpot which is a big hit is stored, the player is made to operate the frame button 22 multiple times. It is possible to participate in the notification production for a longer time.

In addition, since the lottery for notifying is performed every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing of notifying each time (the number of operations, etc.) is not constant, and the player is surprised. You can

In addition, since the lottery probability of whether or not to notify by the round is changed, it is possible to change the easiness of being notified by the round and set the round in which the player is expected to be notified more. .. In the present embodiment, since the hit probability is set to be high after 11R, even if the notification effect continues until 11R, if the hold is hit after 11R, it is possible to easily display the confirmed effect. Therefore, the player can continue to participate in the notification production with the expectation that the notification may be made after 11R even if the notification is not made for many rounds.

In the present embodiment, in the case where the normal jackpot or the probability variation jackpot is already established in one special symbol, if the other special symbol is established later, by adjusting the variation time to be the hit, Although it was configured that the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot is started after the jackpot game of the regular jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the regular jackpot and the bonus jackpot are among the reserved first special symbol and second special symbol. It is also possible to control whether or not the probability variation jackpot is usually started after the jackpot, by determining whether or not and are stored, and adjusting the variation time of the special symbols held on both sides. With this configuration, the fluctuation time can be adjusted more efficiently. Also, even when there is only a short time before the probability variation big hit starts, the variation pattern can be selected so that the normal big hit is started first.

Further, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), when it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit, the variation pattern is forced to have a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time. It may be configured to be selectively selected. By configuring in this way, the start of the probability variation jackpot will be further delayed, during which the expectation that the usual jackpot will be held with the other special symbol, by playing the game, more The jackpot can be given to the player.

Further, the configuration described in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined to configure the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the notification.

In the present embodiment, the notification effect is configured such that the frame button 22 can be operated many times during the round valid time and the lottery is executed each time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it can be performed only once in one round. You may comprise. Further, instead of executing the notification effect for each round, it may be configured to execute only one specific round. It may be configured to determine whether or not this particular round is a round for which the notification effect is performed by a lottery during a big hit. With such a configuration, the rounds in which the notification effect is executed are randomized, and when the notification effect is executed, it is possible to participate in the notification effect while feeling freshness. Further, when the notification effect is executed, it is possible to have more expectation that the holding area is hit.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started on the one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery game determined to be the other hit that has started to fluctuate, even after the one jackpot game. Regarding the case where the hit determination result is maintained, it has been described, but not limited to that, when the big hit is started in one special symbol, in the other special symbol, the fluctuation determined to be the variation started is It may be configured to be disabled. In such a configuration, when the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot are respectively determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the normal jackpot is started first, and until the jackpot ends, It is good to execute control to delay so that the probability variation jackpot does not start. With such a configuration, when the normal jackpot is started, it is possible to prevent the special symbol, which is the probability variation jackpot, from fluctuating and being invalidated.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 149. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eighth embodiment (see FIGS. 64 to 72), the variation pattern of the special symbol has been described as being determined regardless of the number of holding balls at the start of variation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute control for selecting each variation pattern based on the number of holding balls at the time of variation start. ..

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the following points. In the twenty-first embodiment, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the fluctuation can be started, the number of holding balls of the corresponding special symbol is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eighth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the twenty-first embodiment is different from the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 9B) in the reservation areas 1 to 8 respectively. 223k9 has been added.

The rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is performed when the reserved symbols are rearranged and the reserved symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the variation start order, It is a flag indicating that a change has occurred in the variation start order of the reserved symbol display. This rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON by the processing of S1895 of the subordinate suspension rearrangement display notification processing (FIG. 148, S1871) described later. On the other hand, when the hold is exhausted, the hold area is shifted, and the special symbol corresponding to the hold can start changing, and is turned off when shifting from the hold area 1 of the hold data storage area to the changing data storage area. Is set to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, in the twenty-first embodiment, the normal extraordinary deviation pattern table 202e (set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, respectively, will be described. 222d) will be described.

The normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and at the start of variation of the special symbol, the winning/disapproval determination result is out, and the gaming state is a low probability gaming state. It is a variation pattern table selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the case of (normal probability game state). MPU201 of the main controller 110, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), from the normal special deviation pattern table 202e, fluctuation The number of holding balls corresponding to the special symbol to be started (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol if changing the first special symbol is started), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern determination counter The variation pattern is determined based on the value of CS3.

The normal extraordinary deviation pattern table 222d in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 and has the same contents as the normal special deviation pattern table 202e of the main controller 110. .. The normal special deviation pattern table 222d is output from the main controller 110 in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113, which will be described later. Based on the command, it is used to determine (predict) the variation pattern selected at the start of variation before the variation starts with respect to the data in each retention area stored in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k. To be Specifically, the normal special deviation pattern table 222d is a fluctuation pattern to be selected when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a low-probability gaming state and the win/fail judgment result determined at that time is out. It's a table. The variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern determination counter CS3 stored in each of the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k based on the winning command, and the number of holding balls of the special symbol corresponding to the current state (of the first special symbol) If it is on hold, the change pattern is determined in advance based on (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol) and is stored in the change pattern type storage area 223k3 of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k.

Note that the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (222d) has different types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) selected when the number of reserved balls is "0", "1-2", and "3". Is configured as described above (each counter value is set). When the number of holding balls is “0”, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is configured to be easily selected as compared with the case of other numbers of holding balls. Specifically, it is configured so that the variation pattern that becomes the reach can be selected more easily than the case where the number of holding balls is other. When the number of holding balls is “1 to 2”, a variation pattern having a relatively longer variation time is set so that it is easier to be selected than when the number of holding balls is “0”. A variation pattern having a relatively shorter variation time than that in the case of "3" is set to be easily selected. When the number of holding balls is “3”, a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is configured to be easily selected as compared with the case of other numbers of holding balls. Although not shown in the drawing, the normal special deviation pattern table 202e (222d) is a special special deviation pattern table 202e (222d) that is dedicated to select the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. ) Are set respectively.

With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected, so that the game ball enters the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b during that period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the reserved ball is gone and the first special symbol or the second special symbol does not change (the state where the lottery game is not performed). Therefore, the state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates and stops occurs, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, when the number of holding balls is "3" which is close to the upper limit value "4", a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, so that the holding digestion cycle becomes faster and It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b in a state where the number of balls becomes the upper limit value of "4" and overflowing as an invalid ball that does not become a holding ball. .. Therefore, it is possible for the player to shorten the time for which the reserved ball becomes the upper limit value “4” and stop the firing of the game ball, and to play the game efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the time reduction/probability change special deviation variation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the time reduction/setting set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The probability variation special deviation pattern table 222d will be described.

The special deviation variation pattern table for time saving/probability variation 202e is selected when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) with respect to the special deviation variation pattern table for normal time 202e described above. Different in points.

The special deviation variation pattern table 222d for time saving/probability variation selects a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time when the number of retained balls is “0” as compared with the case where the number of retained balls is “1 to 3”. It is configured to be easily handled. In addition, the special deviation variation pattern table for time saving/probability variation is configured so that a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is easily selected even when the number of holding balls is “1 to 2” as compared with the normal special deviation variation pattern. Has been done. Therefore, in the time saving game state or the high probability game state, it is possible to further accelerate the digestion cycle of the holding balls. Therefore, in the time saving game state or the high probability game state, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are easily opened by setting the winning probability of the ordinary symbol to a high probability, and one opening time And since the number of times of opening increases, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, but since the reserved ball is exhausted in a quick cycle, the game can be played at a good tempo.

Note that the special short-term/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 222d set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 has the same configuration as the special short-term/probability variation special deviation variation table 202e of the main controller 110. .. Further, the normal special deviation pattern table 222d is similarly used to determine the variation pattern in advance, except that it is a variation pattern selected for the time saving game state or the high probability game state. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

Further, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same as the normal special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special winning fluctuation pattern table 202d for time reduction/probability change set in the ROM 201 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113. Are set as the normal time special hit variation pattern table 222c and the time reduction/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 222c. That is, when the hit/no hit determination result is a hit, the variation pattern is selected based on each counter value regardless of the number of reserved balls.

With reference to FIG. 144, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). The main processing of the 21st embodiment (FIG. 144, S1400) is different from the main processing of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 68, S1400) in the reserved quantity display update processing 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) and the reserved rearrangement processing 4. (FIG. 145, S1850) is added. Each process of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, S1414 to S1419 in the twenty-first embodiment is the same as each process of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, S1414 to S1419 in the eighth embodiment. .. When the process of S1412 is completed, the pending rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 145, in the twenty-first embodiment, the pending rearrangement process 4 (S1850), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement processing 4 (S1850). Each time the reservation rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) in the twenty-first embodiment is executed, based on the data of each reservation area stored in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the current number of reservation balls. Then, the selected variation pattern is updated to update the variation start order and the like.

In the pending rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) of the twenty-first embodiment, first, the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed. The reservation rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) will be described later, but based on the data of each reservation area stored in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the current number of reservation balls. This is processing for selecting and updating the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation again.

After the pending rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed, it is determined whether it is a rearrangeable period (S1852). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1852: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1853). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1854). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1854: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the holding areas in which the holding data of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k are stored are set to ON. (S1855).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1852: No) or if the frame button 22 is not operated (S1854: No), this process ends.

With such a configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game is played evenly, and the game can be played efficiently.

Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, the player executes the control to rearrange and display the pending symbol displays in the variable start order based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, it may be configured to be executed each time is stored. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the order in which the variable display is started by the reserved symbol display rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, even if a new pending symbol display is displayed, the pending symbol display and the display mode that has already been displayed before the pending symbol display are displayed together By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store data that is rearranged. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data necessary for rearrangement (winning judgment result, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.) by a winning command. The voice lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform rearrangement.

Next, referring to FIG. 146, in the twenty-first embodiment, the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 which is one process of the reservation rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. (S1851) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1851 in FIG. 146).

In the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1461 in FIG. 146) according to the twenty-first embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a winning command from the main control device 110 is received (S1861). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1861: Yes), each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern determination counter C4) are read (S1862). Each data read out in the process of S1862 is stored in the corresponding holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223k (the area with the smallest holding area among the holding areas in which no data is stored) (S1863). On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command is not received (S1861: No), the processes of S1862 to S1863 are skipped and the process of S1864 is executed.

Of each of the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k, each data such as the variation pattern and the variation start time is an unupdated holding area, and the variation start time is calculated in order from the holding area with the earliest variation start time, The change start time of the holding area is stored in the storage area 223k5 (S1864). In addition, for all the holding areas, if the holding area has not been updated, the fluctuation starting time is determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the currently changing first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the fluctuation starting time The storage area is recalculated from the earlier holding area and stored.

In the process of S1864, the gaming state when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved area for which the variation start time is recalculated can be varied is determined whether it is a high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) (S1864). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of fluctuation start is a high probability gaming state (S1865: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, it is stored in the hit determination result storage area 223k1. The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is judged and the judgment result is stored in the judgment result storage area 223k1 (S1866). On the other hand, the game state at the start of fluctuation, when it is determined that the low probability game state (normal game state) (S1865: No), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability, The value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the hit determination result storage area 223k1 of the holding area of the rearrangement hold storage area 223k is determined, and the determination result is stored in the hit determination result storage area 223k1 (S1867).

The slave hold rearrangement storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) is executed. The subordinate hold rearrangement hold storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) will be described later, but for each hold area, the variation pattern is determined in advance based on the result of the acceptance/rejection determination determined in advance based on the variation start time. Processing for updating. It is determined whether or not there is a pending area in which each data such as the fluctuation start time and the fluctuation pattern has not been updated in the pending area of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k (S1869). When it is determined that there is an unupdated holding area (S1869: Yes), the process returns to S1864 and the same process is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no unupdated holding area in the subordinate rearrangement holding area 223k (S1869: No), the change start order of each holding area is renumbered based on the change start time to change. The data is stored in the order storage area 223k4 (S1870). The slave hold rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) is executed. The subordinate hold rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) will be described later, but the hold symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is rearranged and displayed in the variation start order. When the order of the displayed reserved symbols is changed, the notification process for notifying the player that the rearrangement order has been changed is a process for executing the notification process.

With reference to FIG. 147, in the twenty-first embodiment, a sub-reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update which is one process of the sub-reservation rearrangement order determination processing (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The process 2 (S1868) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the subordinate suspension rearrangement suspension storage area update processing 2 (S1868).

In the subordinate suspension rearrangement suspension storage area update process 2 (S1478 of FIG. 147) according to the twenty-first embodiment, first, the success/failure determination result predicted in the processes of S1866 and S1867 of the suspension rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1461 of FIG. 146). Is determined to be a jackpot (S1881). When it is determined that the predicted hit determination result is a jackpot (S1881: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S1882). Whether or not the probability variation is a big hit is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the big hit type storage area 223k2 in the holding area of the secondary rearrangement holding storage area 223k.

When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (S1882: Yes), the slave read-ahead probability variation flag 223k6 of the rearrangement storage area 223k is set to ON (S1883). On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the normal jackpot (S1882: No), the processing of S1883 is skipped and the processing of S1884 is executed.

The game state at the start of variation is determined and selected at the start of variation based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 from the special winning variation pattern table 222c corresponding to the game state. The variation pattern is determined (predicted) in advance (S1884). On the other hand, when the predicted hit determination result is out (S1881: No), the game state at the start of fluctuation is determined, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined from the special deviation fluctuation pattern table 222d corresponding to the game status. And the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 and after the special symbol to select this variation pattern, the number of suspension of the corresponding special symbol (if predicting the variation pattern for the retention ball of the first special symbol, that suspension Based on the number of holding balls of the first special symbol which is established after the sphere), the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is determined (predicted) in advance (S1885). The predicted win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the corresponding storage area of the rearrangement storage area (S1886).

In this way, in the hold rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851), since the fluctuation start time and the fluctuation pattern of the hold area of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area are updated, the number of hold balls is increased or decreased and a new hold is performed. By the establishment of, even if the change start order of the hold symbol display that has already been sorted and displayed in the change start order occurs, each time, the hold symbol display is displayed in the change start order based on the updated data. it can. Therefore, the player can recognize the latest variation start order in the changing game state, and can easily play the game.

Further, the main control device 110 does not execute control for rearranging the reserved symbol displays, transmits a winning command, and executes the processing necessary for rearrangement in the voice lamp control device 113, so the main control device The control load on 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to frequently update the data in the holding area and always update to the latest variation order.

The fluctuation start time of each holding area changes depending on the holding fluctuation time of the same special symbol stored before that. Here, since the fluctuation pattern that determines the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holding balls, it changes when the number of holding balls increases while the balls are held. However, since the fluctuation start time, the fluctuation pattern to be selected, and the like are updated every time the number of reserved balls changes, the fluctuation start order can always be updated to the correct fluctuation start order. Further, the number of holding balls can be adjusted to an appropriate number by changing the selected variation pattern depending on the number of holding balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which there is no reserved ball and a time for which the special symbol is not drawn is generated, or the reserved ball reaches the upper limit value and overflow occurs.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the data in the holding area is always updated regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of holding balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the data in the holding area is updated when the number of holding balls increases or decreases. May be configured as follows. Further, the data in the holding area may be updated only when the number of holdings increases. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the update frequency of the holding area and reduce the control load of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, in the twenty-first embodiment, the subordinate hold rearrangement display which is one process of the hold rearrangement order determination processing 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The notification process (S1871) will be described. FIG. 148 illustrates this sub-holding rearrangement display notification processing (S1871).

In the subordinate hold rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871), first, it is determined whether or not there is an area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is on in any of the respective holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k (S1891). .. When it is determined that there is a holding area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is on (S1891: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a change in the change order of the holding areas in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to on (S1892). ). Here, whether or not there is a change in the variation start order is determined when the renumbering is performed in the process of S1870 and whether or not the order has been updated in a different order.

When it is determined that the variation start order is changed (S1892: Yes), it is determined whether the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1893). When it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is ON (S1893: Yes), a notification command for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed is generated (set) (S1893). In the present embodiment, as a notification that the rearrangement order has been changed again, the characters "the rearrangement order has been changed again" are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1893: No), the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to on (S1895). A notification command for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed is generated (set) (S1896). Here, as a notification mode for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed, the characters "the rearrangement order has been changed" are displayed in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the player is informed that the reserved symbol displays have been rearranged.

By configuring in this way, due to the increase or decrease in the number of holdings, etc., by changing the fluctuation pattern that is previously determined to be selected at the start of fluctuation of each holding area, even if the fluctuation start order changes, It is possible to appropriately notify the player of a change in the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display that is rearranged and displayed in an easily understandable notification mode. Therefore, the player knows that the reserved symbol displays have been rearranged, and by identifying the reserved symbol displays, it is possible to prevent the reserved symbol displays from being rearranged and being confused. it can.

In addition, when the rearrangement is changed, if it is changed again, it is configured to give a different notification, so that the player can easily recognize that this change has been changed again. By recognizing, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the rearrangement order is changed again, the notification is made by characters. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol display device is displayed before the rearrangement order is changed and after the rearrangement order is changed. Alternatively, the lower display area Ds 81 may be displayed side by side. Further, the number of changes may be represented by a number or the like, or the background of the reserved symbol display or the reserved symbol display area in a color corresponding to the number of changes (for example, blue for the first change, red for the second change, etc.) May be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, the number of times and the color change, so that the player can easily identify that the rearrangement order has been changed.

Further, when the rearrangement order of the holding areas for which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is changed, a dedicated flag indicating this may be set and set to ON. In this case, the flag may be set to OFF based on the execution of the process of notifying the rearrangement order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player operates the frame button 22 during the effective time to arrange and display the reserved symbol displays in the variation start order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is always in the variation start order. The hold symbol display may be displayed, and the variation start order may be changed every time it is changed.

Next, returning to the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400), the description will be continued. In the twenty-first embodiment, in the main processing (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the pending quantity display update processing 5 (FIG. 149, S1871) is executed after the processing of S1405 is executed. To be done.

Referring to FIG. 149, in the twenty-first embodiment, the pending number display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. explain. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the reserved quantity display update processing 5 (S1871). In the reserved quantity display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1871), the reserved symbols display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is changed in the variation start order, and the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to OFF. The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area is displayed in the order in which the hold is established. Further, with respect to the pending symbols displayed in the variation start order, the pending symbol display is blinked and displayed for the pending symbol display in which the variation start order is changed to notify that the variation start order has been changed. Execute the process.

In the reserved quantity display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840), first, the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the subordinate rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to on is displayed in the variable start order, and the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned off. A hold display command for display is generated to cause the display control device 114 to display the hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area set in No. 1 in the hold establishment order (S1921).

It is determined whether or not any of the holding areas of the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k has a holding area whose rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1922). When it is determined that there is a reserved area in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1922: Yes), a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON. Blinks (S1923). A rearrangement order change notification sound command is set (S1924). Here, the rearrangement order change notification sound command outputs a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as ping pong) indicating that the rearrangement has been performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1922: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the rearrangement order is changed again, that portion is displayed in blinking, so that the player can easily recognize where the change has been changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by not knowing whether or not the displayed pending symbol display is changed again.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k7 is set to ON is repeatedly blinked and displayed, but the invention is not limited thereto. The order change flag 223k7 may be set to off, and blinking display may be executed for a predetermined time and ended.

Further, although it is configured to display the changed pending symbol display in a blinking manner, a notification such as a blinking display may be given to the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement order is changed. Further, as a notification mode for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed, it is configured to notify that the rearrangement order has been changed not only by blinking display but also by a notification mode such as rotating and displaying the pending symbol display. May be. Further, the notification mode may be changed based on the number of times the order is changed. Specifically, if the number of changes is one, the pending symbol display is shaken and displayed, and if the number of changes is two, the pending symbol display is repeatedly displayed by enlarging and reducing.

Further, the notification sound notified by the rearrangement order change notification sound command may be a voice saying "the rearrangement order has been changed!". Further, it may be configured to give a notification such as "the rearrangement order has been changed again!" or "the rearrangement order has been changed for the Oth time!", etc., based on the number of changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the variation pattern to be selected is determined by the number of holdings at the time of variation start, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 always determines the variation pattern based on the game state. Since the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation is previously determined and updated, it is possible to always notify the correct fluctuation start order of the pending symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the holding area in which all the holding data is stored, the data is updated every time, but the holding area in which the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is fixed (for example, a special symbol With respect to the first holding area of the number of holding balls, up to four holding balls, which are the upper limit values, are stored), the update may be stopped or prohibited. Good. With this configuration, the control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, among the pending symbols displayed in the variation start order, the variation start order is determined with respect to the pending symbol display in which the variation start order has been determined (the future, the pending symbol display in which the variation start order is not changed) It may be displayed in a display mode informing that it is doing (for example, the display color of the hold symbol display is displayed in a specific color, or a changing order such as “HOLD” with respect to the confirmed hold symbol display. Is displayed to indicate that it has been confirmed).

In the present embodiment, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 controls the rearrangement has been described, but as shown in the first embodiment, the main control device 110 executes the rearrangement process. It may be configured to. In this case, each data (variation pattern, variation start time, etc.) in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u may be updated for each timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Then, each time updating is performed, an updating command may be generated based on the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, and the updating command may be output to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, a modification of the 21st embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment, each time the hold rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1851 in FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 is executed, a dynamic display of each hold area of the subordinate rearrangement hold area 223k is performed. By updating the mode on the basis of the current number of reserved balls, the player is notified of the case where the player is informed of the exact change start order at any time. However, in the modified example of the twenty-first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the variation patterns of various super reach are selected by the same value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the increase or decrease of the number of pending numbers. Further, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter CS3 for selecting each super reach is also set to be constant regardless of the number of holding balls. With this configuration, in the case of out-of-range super reach, the variation pattern can be determined in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead processing (FIG. 27, S914) at the time of winning. Therefore, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, in the reservation rearrangement order determination processing (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the data is stored in each reservation area of the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k. If there is a variation pattern that does not change even if the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, it is set as a rearrangeable period. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern is changed by the increase or decrease of the hold is stored, the sortable period is canceled (or set as the sort prohibited period) so that the sort is not executed. A fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern does not change due to increase/decrease of the hold is composed of the fluctuation pattern that is stored up to the upper limit and is stored at the beginning, the fluctuation pattern of the hit, and the fluctuation pattern that is out of reach. It

With this configuration, when it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order, the player is notified that the sorting is possible, and the sorting is performed by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, confusion can be further suppressed for the player.

The configurations of the first to 21st embodiments may be combined as appropriate.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown below in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing the win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination means, the success/failure determination condition is established. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode related to time information of the corresponding second identification information, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the win/win judgment condition that is met is satisfied. Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information is started, the order of satisfaction of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is a combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, and the dynamic display mode determination means are The holding information storage means for storing the holding information having at least the information regarding the determined dynamic display mode, and the holding information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means are distinguished from each other. On the other hand, the hold display means for displaying the fulfillment order of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is a combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, for each hold information in a distinguishable hold display mode; Alternatively, when the second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and each hold stored previously. Time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined based on the dynamic display mode for each information, and is stored in the hold information storage means. Dynamic display start time information determination means, and that the predetermined conditions are met Based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the suspension information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is changed to the dynamic display. And a rearranging means for rearranging the rearrangement in the order of starting the game machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode relating to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/win determination condition is met, the first win/win determination condition that is satisfied and the first win/win determination condition that is satisfied are displayed until the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. (2) Suspension information having at least an order in which the success/failure determination conditions are combined and the information regarding the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The winning/losing result in which the first winning/failing determination condition and the second winning/failing determination condition are combined for each holding information while distinguishing the pending information of the first winning/failure judging condition and the second winning/failing judgment condition stored in the pending information storage means. The order in which the determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. When the first or second hit determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed is stored first. The dynamic display start time information determining means determines the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information becomes the dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode for each pending information. And stored in the holding information storage means. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display displayed on the hold display means based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time determination means. The display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order in which the dynamic display is started. Thereby, for example, the hold information for the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information for the first lottery game is stored in advance. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, the newly stored second lottery game. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of is more than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. Get faster However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 has a condition distribution means for assisting the establishment of the first win/win condition and the second win/win condition alternately.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the allocating means assists in that the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are alternately established. This makes it easier to equally establish the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be played in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rearrangement means, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the suspension information is stored in the suspension information storage means, the suspension information thereof. The first or second corresponding to the newly established hold information and the hold information previously stored based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each hold information previously stored in the storage means. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that a dynamic display start order of the identification information is determined, and the order is associated with the hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, the dynamic information corresponding to each pending information previously stored in the pending information storage means is stored. Based on the display start time information, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is set for each hold. The information is stored in the pending information storage means by the rearrangement means in association with the information. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the pending information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even if there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display modes in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and to notify the player of the accurate dynamic display start order. You can

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machine has operation means operable by the player, and the rearranging means satisfies the predetermined condition when the operation means is operated. As a game machine A4, the holding display modes are rearranged.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the player has an operating means that can be operated, and the rearranging means rearranges the hold display modes, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operating means is operated. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means as if the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to perform rearrangement in the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to inform the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the exact dynamic display start order. You can

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the rearranging means determines that the predetermined condition is met and newly displays the hold display when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly met. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that the hold display modes displayed on the means are rearranged.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly satisfied, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means. As a result, when a new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the exact dynamic display start order.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A5, the special game state in which it is easier to judge whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after the privilege game execution means has executed the privilege game is more likely to hit The lottery information for drawing whether or not to transfer is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second win/win determination condition, and the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied, and the established determination condition When storing the hold information corresponding to, the game information has a game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information, the winning/disapproval determination means, the hold information storage means Based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information deciding means, until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in , The dynamic display start time information corresponding to each hold information is the special game state is determined by the game state lottery means to perform advance determination to determine whether or not the result, the result is When the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed while being stored in the hold information storage means in association with each hold information. The formal determination is made based on the game state when the variation can be started, and the dynamic display mode determination means stores the hold information in the hold information storage means. Until the corresponding first or second identification information can be dynamically displayed, the win/fail determination unit determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the suspension information storage unit. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. A gaming machine B1 characterized by determining a dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine B1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5. In other words, in order to perform a lottery, whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to determine whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game The lottery information of is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss determination condition. Further, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the dynamic display start time determined by the dynamic display start time determination means. Then, the game state lottery means determines whether or not the game state at the start of dynamic display corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the advance/rejection determination means performs the advance/rejection determination in advance. Then, the result is stored in the hold storage means by the hit/miss determination means in association with each hold information. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, the win/no win determination is based on the game state in that case. Formally implemented by means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be displayed dynamically, based on the determination result of the advance determination by the hit/miss determination means stored in the hold information storage means. Then, the dynamic display time is determined. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. Thereby, even if the pending information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the success/failure determination is performed. .. Therefore, the dynamic display time can be determined in advance on the basis of the correct hit determination result, and the correct dynamic display start order can be determined even when a new hit determination condition is satisfied next.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on each of the second display means, and the hit/no hit determination result by the hit/no hit determination means are coincident, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Condition allocation means for assisting in alternately establishing a condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, and a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means. A gaming machine C1 having a holding storage means for storing as a right to play the first or second lottery game.

According to the gaming machine C1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The condition allocation means assists in that the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions are alternately established. When the first or second winning/disabling determination condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the pending storage means. As a result, the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition are easily established evenly, the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and the first lottery game is performed. It is possible to prevent one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored up to the upper limit number in advance. Therefore, although the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored up to the upper limit number, respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that one or more rights are generated and the right is invalidated. it can.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C1, a game area and a game ball flowing down in the game area that flows down in the game area enter a first starting opening that satisfies the first win/fail judgment condition, and a game that flows down in the game area. When the ball enters, it has a second starting port that satisfies the second win/fail judgment condition, and the condition distributing means has a game ball in the first starting port and the second starting port. A game machine C2 having a game ball guiding unit for assisting in alternately entering the ball.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first win/win condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second win/win condition is satisfied. It The game ball guiding section of the condition distribution means assists the game balls alternately entering the first starting port and the second starting port. This makes it easier for the player to alternately enter the game ball into the first start opening and the second start opening by letting the game ball flow down into the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Since the execution of and can be performed efficiently, many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C2, the rearrangement means stores the reserved information when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established and the reserved information is stored in the reserved information storage means. Of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established hold information and the hold information previously stored, based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each hold information previously stored. A game machine C3, wherein a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is associated with hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball guiding section receives the game ball from the ball entrance of the condition distributing means, rotates it in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and moves the game ball to the first starting port through the first guide path. After being guided, the game ball that has entered from the ball entrance is received in a state of being rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction that is the opposite direction to the first direction. Then, the game ball is guided by the game ball guide portion to the second starting opening via the second guide path. As a result, it becomes possible to alternately guide the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening by using the common member, and to distribute the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening, respectively. As compared with the case where the game balls are provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be configured compactly.

In the game machine of the game machine C3, the game ball guiding section of the condition distributing means is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the entrance, in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, the first passive portion that receives the entered game ball and rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction, and enters the ball entrance when it rotates to a predetermined angle in the second direction. A second passive part, which is arranged at a position facing the game ball, receives the game ball and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance. After turning in the second direction, the game ball is prevented from turning in the first direction before entering the ball entrance, or the second passive portion enters the ball. After receiving the game ball entered from the mouth and rotating in the first direction, before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, a rotation restriction that prevents the game ball from rotating in the second direction. And a gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, the first passive portion receives the entered game ball and is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. The second passive portion receives the game ball that has entered, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. After the first passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may rotate in the first direction before the game ball next enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction, before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, it rotates in the second direction. This is hindered by the rotation restricting portion. As a result, after the game ball guiding unit rotates to guide the game ball to one guide path, the game ball will rotate in the other direction before the next game ball enters, and the next ball enters. It is possible to prevent a problem that the game ball is guided to the same guide path as the game ball that entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game balls entering the ball entrance to the first start opening and the second start opening more accurately and alternately, and equalize the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Can be stored in.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine C1 has a gaming area and a common starting opening that satisfies the first or second winning/disabling determination condition when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area. Condition distribution means, every time a game ball enters the common starting port, controllably alternately establishes the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition. Machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, every time a game ball flowing down in the game area enters the common starting port, the condition distributing means controlably distributes the establishment of the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition. As a result, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately played at the common starting port, and the game area can be made compact.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, after the rearrangement display of the reservation display mode on the reservation display means by the rearrangement means is executed, the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly established. In this case, in the state where the display order of the rearranged display mode of the rearranged display is maintained, the newly displayed hold display mode indicating the first or second win/fail judgment condition is the hold order in the established order. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

The gaming machine D1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1. That is, if the first or second winning/judgment condition is satisfied after executing the rearrangement display of the reservation display mode on the reservation display means by the rearrangement means, the display order of the rearranged display mode of the reservation display is maintained. In this state, the hold display mode indicating the newly established first or second win/fail judgment condition is displayed on the hold display means in the order in which the hold display is established. As a result, even if the corresponding hold display mode is displayed after the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied after the rearrangement display is executed, the display order of the rearranged display mode of the hold display is maintained. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the order in which the dynamic display is started at the time when the rearrangement is performed. Therefore, the player can distinguish the rearranged display mode from the rearranged display mode and the rearranged display mode from the rearranged display mode before or after the rearrangement. You can Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize which order the hold display mode indicates.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine D1, the rearrangement is performed in a state in which the reserved display mode in which the rearrangement display has been executed and the reserved display mode in which the rearrangement display has not been executed are mixedly displayed in the reserved display means. When a predetermined condition that triggers execution of the means is newly established, the sorting means sorts all the hold display modes displayed on the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the state in which the suspended display mode in which the rearrangement display has been executed and the suspended display mode in which the rearrangement display has not been executed are mixedly displayed in the suspension display means, a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the rearrangement means is newly added. When it is materialized, all the reservation display modes displayed on the reservation display means are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display. As a result, even if the suspended display modes after the sorting is performed and when the sorting is not performed are displayed in a mixed manner, the sorting is performed again, so that the order in which the accurate dynamic display is started is changed. It can be identified by the hold display mode after the execution of the replacement.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the hold information storage means determines whether or not the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means on the basis of whether or not the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied. In the normal reserved storage area, the normal reserved storage area in which the normal reserved information having at least the judgment information used for determining and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored, and Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored normal hold information can be dynamically displayed, based on the normal hold information, the win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means and the dynamic display mode determination are made in advance. A rearrangement storage area in which the dynamic display mode by the means and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as rearrangement information. When the 2 win/fail judgment conditions are newly established, the newly established normal hold storage area is stored in the newly established normal hold storage area based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. Determines the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the stored normal suspension information and the normal suspension information previously stored in the normal suspension storage area is started. A gaming machine E1 having a sorting order determining means for storing the order in the sorting pending storage area.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 and D2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the first or second win/loss judgment condition is satisfied, the normal hold information having at least the win/fail judgment information used for the win/fail judgment and the dynamic display determination information used for the determination of the dynamic display mode is the hold information storage. It is stored in the normally reserved storage area of the means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal suspension information stored in the normal suspension storage area can be dynamically displayed, based on the normal suspension information, a win/fail judgment result and a dynamic display mode are provided in advance. The dynamic display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. When the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly satisfied, the newly held normal hold is newly established based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. Determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the normal pending information stored in the storage area and the normal pending information previously stored in the normal pending storage area is started, The order is stored in the sorting pending storage area by the sorting order determining means. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the sorting order can be processed separately, and the processing for determining the sorting order can be facilitated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement and to facilitate the development of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing control of the game in accordance with the sub-control signal output from the main control means, and the main control The means has the holding information storage means, the sorting information is stored in a sorting holding storage area of the holding information storage means, and the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determining means based on the sorting information. Each time it is determined, a winning signal indicating each sort order stored in the sort pending storage area is output to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means indicates the win signal based on the win signal. Based on the sorting order stored in the slave sorting pending storage area, and the sorting order stored in the slave sorting pending storage area, the sorting of the pending display mode is performed. An amusement machine E2 having the rearrangement means for executing.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. The rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement storage area of the main control means, and is stored in the rearrangement storage area every time the rearrangement order is determined by the rearrangement order determination means based on the rearrangement information. A winning signal indicating each sort order is output from the main control means to the sub control means. Further, in the slave control means, each sort order indicated by the winning signal is stored in the slave sort pending storage area of the slave pending information storage means. Then, based on the rearrangement order stored in the subordinate rearrangement storage area, the rearrangement means of the subordinate control means performs rearrangement of the hold display mode. Accordingly, the main control unit does not need to perform the process of rearranging the hold display modes even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load of the main control unit can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing control of the game in accordance with the sub-control signal output from the main control means, and the main control The means has the holding information storage means, and indicates each sort information stored in the sort holding storage area every time the sort information is stored in the sort holding storage area of the hold information storing means. The winning control signal is output to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means has a subordinate hold information storage means having a subordinate rearrangement hold storage area in which each sort information indicated by the win signal is stored based on the win signal. The sorting order determining means for determining a sorting order based on a dynamic display start time in each sorting information of the subordinate sorting pending storage area, and storing the sorting order in the subordinate sorting pending storage area. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that the gaming machine E3 includes: the sorting means that sorts the pending display mode based on the sorting order stored in the subordinate sorting pending storage area.

The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. Every time the rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement storage area of the main control means, a winning signal indicating each rearrangement information stored in the rearrangement storage area is output by the main control means to the sub-control means. Further, in the slave control means, each sort information indicated by the winning signal is stored in the slave sort pending storage area of the slave pending information storage means. Then, the rearrangement order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the rearrangement information stored in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area, and the rearrangement order determination means of the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area is used by the rearrangement order determination means. Remembered. Based on the stored rearrangement order, rearrangement of the hold display mode is executed by the rearrangement means of the secondary control means. As a result, the main control unit does not need to determine the rearrangement order, and the subordinate control unit can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load on the main control unit can be reduced. .. Therefore, the rearrangement of the hold display modes can be executed while suppressing the control load of the main control means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, the holding information storage means determines whether or not the hold is based on whether the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied. The normal hold storage area for storing the true/false judgment information used for the true/false judgment by the means and the dynamic display determination information used for the dynamic display manner determination by the dynamic display manner determining means, and the normal reserve storage area. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of information can be dynamically displayed, the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means and the motion by the dynamic display mode determination means are based on the information in advance. A dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored as rearrangement information as a rearrangement reservation storage area, the rearrangement means preliminarily When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting effective information is stored in the sorting pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the sorting valid information is stored in each sorting information of the sorting pending storage area. On the basis of the above, the game machine F1 is characterized in that the reservation display mode displayed on the reservation display means is rearranged.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, and E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second hit/miss judgment condition, the hit/miss judgment information used for hit/damage determination and the dynamic display determination information used for deciding the dynamic display mode are the normal hold storage area of the hold information storage means. Memorized in. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of information stored in the normal reserved storage area can be dynamically displayed, based on the respective pieces of information, the judgment result, the dynamic display mode, and the movement are determined in advance. The display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting validity information is stored in the sorting pending storage area by the sorting means for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and each of the sorting pending storage areas is stored. Based on the rearrangement information, rearrangement of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately rearrange the hold display modes that were displayed when the predetermined condition was satisfied, in the order in which the dynamic display was started.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine F1, the rearrangement means repeatedly updates and displays the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means at every predetermined update timing, and holds the hold display means. As for the display of the display mode, for the reserved display mode of the rearrangement reservation storage area in which the rearrangement valid information is stored, the rearrangement is displayed in the order in which the dynamic display is started, while the rearrangement valid information is stored. A game machine F2 characterized in that the reservation display mode of the rearrangement reservation storage area that has not been displayed is displayed in the order in which the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied.

The gaming machine F1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1. That is, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is repeatedly updated at every predetermined update timing and displayed by the rearrangement means. The reservation display mode of the rearrangement display area in which the rearrangement effective information is stored is rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started and displayed by the rearrangement means. On the other hand, the hold display mode in which the rearrangement valid information is not stored is displayed by the rearrangement means in the order in which the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied. Therefore, the suspended display mode in which the rearrangement has been performed can be displayed while maintaining the order in which the rearrangement has been accurately performed in the order in which the dynamic display is started. Therefore, it is possible to separately display the suspended display modes that have been sorted and unsorted, and even if a new suspended display mode is displayed after the sorting is performed, the dynamic display of the suspended display modes that have been sorted is performed. The player can easily recognize the order in which the display is started.

A first lottery game and a second lottery to be executed after the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game in any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2. Based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss judgment condition, lottery information for drawing whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the win/no hit judgment with the game is more likely to be won than the normal time is acquired, When the 1st or 2nd hit/absence determination condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied hit/absence determination condition is stored, the lottery information is stored in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information. The dynamic display start time information has a state lottery means, and when the win/fail judgment means newly stores the hold information in the hold information storage means when the first or second win/loss judgment condition is newly established. A game when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored suspension information can be started based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the determination means. The game state lottery means determines whether the state is the special game state, executes a preliminary determination to determine whether or not to win in advance, and stores the result in the holding information storage means, and the result of that determination is When it is about to shift to the special game state and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored suspension information is started is earlier than the suspension information stored earlier, the storage is newly stored. Whether or not the game state when the dynamic display is started again is the special game state with respect to the hold information in the order later than the order of the dynamic display start corresponding to the held information, The gaming state lottery means makes respective judgments, executes the pre-judgment for making the win/fail judgment in advance, and stores the results thereof in the holding information storage means, respectively. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be dynamically displayed, the winning/non-hitting is performed each time new pending information is stored in the pending information storage means. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the suspension information storage means by the determination means, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance and stored in the suspension information storage means, while the determination information is stored in the suspension information storage means. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored hold information can be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. To be Characteristic gaming machine G1.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, in order to perform a lottery, whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to determine whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game The lottery information of is drawn by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied win/loss determination condition is stored, the lottery result is held by the gaming state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. When the first or second hit determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the hold information is stored based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. The game state lottery means determines whether the game state is the special game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information can be dynamically displayed, and the game state lottery means determines in advance. Preliminary determination is performed by the hit/miss determination means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. If the result is about to shift to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored suspension information is started is earlier than the suspension information stored earlier, then With respect to the hold information in the order of, again, the game state lottery means determines whether the game state when the dynamic display is started is the special game state again, and the advance determination is performed in advance to determine whether or not the game is successful. It is executed by the judging means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be dynamically displayed, a preliminary determination is made each time new pending information is stored in the pending information storage means. Based on the determination result, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination means and stored in the pending information storage means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination means executed in that case. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. As a result, even if the pending information is newly stored and the order in which the dynamic display is started is changed, and the hit determination result of the hold information stored earlier is changed, the hit determination result is also changed. It can be re-determined in advance as appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to determine the dynamic display mode again based on the latest result of the hit determination, and it is possible to correctly determine the order in which the dynamic display is started. Therefore, the pending display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started.

It has a main control means for performing the main control of the game, and a sub control means for executing the control of the game based on the sub control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is the first hit determination condition. Based on the establishment of, the first lottery game win/non-judgment is executed, and based on the establishment of the second win/win judgment condition, the second lottery game win/non-judgment means is executed. First display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means of the main control means, in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied, and the main control The second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means of the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied, the second display means and the first identification information. The first display means includes a display control means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a hit. A gaming machine to which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given when the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information on the first or second display means in a display mode indicating a hit. In the dynamic display mode, the main control unit determines a dynamic display mode in which the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display time based on the determination result of the hit determination unit. Determining means, display mode signal generating means for generating a display mode signal based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and outputting the display mode signal to the slave control means; and the first or second identification. When either one of the pieces of information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, and when the other first or second identification information is being dynamically displayed, a suspension signal for instructing suspension of the dynamic display On the other hand, the control signal generating means for generating a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display based on the end of the bonus game based on the The control means dynamically displays the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal on the first or second display means based on the reception of the display mode signal, and the slave control means, Dynamic display time measuring means for measuring the time of dynamic display based on reception of the display mode signal, and interruption of measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means based on reception of the interruption signal And a dynamic display state that is suspended based on the reception of the restart signal. The remaining dynamic display time is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the suspended first or second identification information remains according to the remaining dynamic display time. A subordinate dynamic re-display mode determining means for determining a dynamic re-display mode that is a dynamic display mode to be displayed at the dynamic display time of 1. A gaming machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Further, in the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the hit determination of the first lottery game by the hit determination means in the order in which the first hit determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is given. .. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determining means determines a dynamic display mode in which the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generation means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and is output to the slave control means. Then, when either one of the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, if the other first or second identification information is being dynamically displayed, the dynamic display An interruption signal for instructing interruption is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, on the basis of the end of the bonus game based on the hit, the management signal generation means generates a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display. Further, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the display mode signal, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means. The dynamic display time is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means. Upon receipt of the interruption signal from the main control means, the measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means is interrupted by the secondary time management means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the restart signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the remaining According to the dynamic display time of, the dynamic display mode which is the dynamic display mode to be displayed during the remaining dynamic display time of the interrupted first or second identification information is determined by the slave re-display mode determination means. To be done. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information that was interrupted during the bonus game is started, the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining time is determined, and the dynamic remaining display is given to the player. The lottery result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by the dynamic re-display mode according to the display time. Further, even if the main control means does not instruct the sub-control means by selecting the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining dynamic display time, the sub-control means performs dynamic re-display according to the remaining dynamic display time. Since the display mode is determined, the control load on the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even in a gaming machine that simultaneously executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is possible to suppress an increase in load on the main control means and perform various effects of the game.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine H1, the subordinate re-display mode determination means configures the dynamic display time within the reference time when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is less than or equal to the reference time. While determining the short dynamic redisplay mode that is the dynamic redisplay mode that has been performed, if it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, a dynamic time longer than the reference time is determined. A gaming machine H2 for determining a normal dynamic re-display mode which is the dynamic re-display mode configured by display time.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the slave control means, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is less than or equal to the reference time, the short dynamic re-display which is a dynamic re-display mode configured by the dynamic display time within the reference time. The display mode is determined by the driven redisplay mode determination means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the secondary redisplay determination means. Therefore, the dynamic re-display mode can be determined according to the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time becomes short, by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode, it is possible to inform the player of the determination result of the lottery game in an easy-to-understand manner.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, a predetermined upper limit number of times. And a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The means determines, when the number of times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the one of the ones having a higher number of hits. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is a dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the lesser one of the first or second win/fail judgment conditions. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is determined in a dynamic display mode.

According to claim I1, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. The number of times the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions stored in the hold storage means are satisfied is determined by the number-of-times judging means. When the number-of-times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/no judgment condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the number of wins is higher. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is dynamically displayed with a dynamic display time shorter than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition with the smaller number of times of establishment. The short dynamic display mode, which is the mode, is determined. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss judgment condition with the larger number of wins is played in a short time. It can be adjusted so that the difference in the number of times of establishment from the two acceptance/rejection determination conditions becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, a predetermined upper limit number of times. And a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The means determines, when the number-of-times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the one of the smaller number of hits is satisfied. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition is a dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition of the longer one. A gaming machine I2 characterized by being determined to a dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I2, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. The number of times the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions stored in the hold storage means are satisfied is determined by the number-of-times judging means. When the number-of-times determining means determines that the number of times each of the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition is satisfied is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the number of times of winning is less. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is dynamically displayed with a dynamic display time longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition with the larger number of times of establishment. The long dynamic display mode, which is the mode, is determined. By determining the long-dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition with the smaller number of times established becomes longer, and the number of times the win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means is less likely to decrease. The adjustment can be made so that the difference in the number of times the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means are small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly enabled, the number-of-times judgment means is stored in the pending storage means. The determination means determines the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result determined by the number of times determination means. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second win/win judgment condition is newly enabled, the first win/win judgment condition and the second win/win judgment condition stored in the hold storage unit are displayed. The number of times of is satisfied is determined by the number of times determining means. Then, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result. Therefore, the dynamic display mode determination means can determine the dynamic display mode based on the latest information on the number of times of establishment stored in the hold storage means at the timing of starting the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the dynamic display mode determination means, when the determination result of the win/failure determination means is a hit, regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination means. On the other hand, when the determination result of the hit/miss determination means is out of alignment, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the number-of-times determination means. ..

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination result of the hit determination unit is a win, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination unit. On the other hand, when the determination result of the hit determination unit is out of order, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result of the number of times determination unit. Therefore, in the case of a win, it is possible to determine a normal dynamic display mode that indicates the win, and to make the player have a sufficient sense of expectation as to whether or not a bonus game will be given. By determining the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of times of establishment stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to prevent the production of the game from being impaired.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the gaming machine I5 is characterized in that it is determined that the predetermined number of times or more of the difference is two or more times.

According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, when it is determined that there is a difference of two times or more, it is stored in the pending storage means. Since the dynamic display mode for adjusting the established number of times is determined, it is often the case that the short dynamic display mode or the long dynamic display mode is determined and the effect of the game is difficult to understand. Can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines I1, I3 to I5, the dynamic display mode determination means has a predetermined number of times of establishment of the first or second winning/absence determination condition stored in the hold storage means, whichever has a greater number of establishment times. The gaming machine I6 is for determining the short dynamic display mode when the number of times determining means determines that there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1, I3 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times the first or second hit/miss determination condition stored in the hold storage means, which has the greater number of times of satisfaction, is satisfied a predetermined number of times or more, and the number of times determination means has a difference of a predetermined number or more. If it is determined that the short dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, when the number of times of establishment of the predetermined number of times or more is not stored, the short dynamic display mode is not determined even if the number of times determination means has a difference of the predetermined number of times or more. It is possible to prevent the aspect of the game from being determined and the game effect becoming monotonous.

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the dynamic display mode determination means is such that the number of times the first or second win/fail determination condition stored in the hold storage means is satisfied is a predetermined number or more, and A gaming machine I7, wherein the long dynamic display mode is determined when the determination means determines that there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times.

The gaming machine I7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5. That is, the number of times the first or second hit/miss determination condition stored in the hold storage means, which has the greater number of times of satisfaction, is satisfied a predetermined number of times or more, and the number of times determination means has a difference of a predetermined number or more. When it is determined that the long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, in the case where the number of times of establishment is not stored more than the predetermined number of times, the long-dynamic display mode is not determined even if the number-of-times determining means has a difference of a predetermined number of times or more. It is possible to prevent the aspect of the game from being determined and the game effect becoming monotonous.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the dynamic display mode determination means moves the identification information corresponding to the first win/loss judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means. Before the dynamic display can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and the one of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, which has the larger number of times of establishment stored in the pending storage means, is judged whether or not it is valid. A gaming machine I8, wherein one of the long dynamic display modes is determined based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the condition.

The gaming machine I8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7. That is, before the identification information corresponding to the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition stored in the holding storage means can be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is determined to be the dynamic display mode. It is determined in advance by each means. Of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, one of a plurality of long dynamic display modes is selected based on the dynamic display mode stored in the holding storage means and corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition with the larger number of times of establishment. The long dynamic display mode of is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, by determining the long dynamic display mode based on the previously determined dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition stored in the holding storage means, the difference in the number of times of establishment. It is possible to determine a longer dynamic display mode that is more suitable for reducing.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7, or I8, the dynamic display mode determination means is the identification information corresponding to the first win/loss judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold storage means. Before the dynamic display of can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance, and one of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, which has the larger number of established times stored in the holding storage means, A gaming machine I9, characterized in that the dynamic display time of the long dynamic display mode is determined based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition.

The gaming machine I9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7, and I8. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined to be the dynamic display mode before the identification information can be dynamically displayed, which corresponds to the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the holding storage means. It is determined in advance by each means. Of the dynamic display modes determined in advance, the long dynamic display is performed based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition stored in the holding storage means, which has the larger number of times of establishment. The dynamic display time of the mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Therefore, since the long dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamic display time of the determined dynamic display mode having the larger number of times of establishment, the difference in the number of times of establishment can be adjusted to be smaller.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing the win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, a predetermined upper limit number of times. Hold storage means for storing up to, continuous succession monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination When the consecutive success monitoring means determines that one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, the continuously established one of the first and second ones. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition is changed to a short dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode having a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second win/loss judgment condition. A gaming machine I10 characterized by being determined.

According to the gaming machine I10, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. Then, the continuous establishment monitoring unit determines whether or not one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is continuously satisfied. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first win/defeat determination condition or the second win/defeat determination condition is continuously established, the dynamic display mode determination means is the first or the one of the continuously established ones. The short dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is a dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second win/fail judgment condition. To decide. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition of the one continuously established is performed in a short time, and thus the first win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means It can be adjusted so that the difference in the number of times of establishment from the second win/fail judgment condition becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the second corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition. The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the right to play the first or second lottery game when the first or second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied, respectively, are each a predetermined upper limit number of times. Hold storage means for storing up to, continuous succession monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination The means, when the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first hit determination condition or the second hit determination condition is continuously satisfied, the first or the one that is not continuously satisfied. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/no judgment condition that is continuously satisfied. A gaming machine I11 characterized by determining a certain long-dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I11, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the result of the first lottery determination by the determination unit is performed by the first display unit in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the pending storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. Then, the continuous establishment monitoring unit determines whether or not one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is continuously satisfied. When the continuous establishment monitoring means determines that either the first win/defeat judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, the dynamic display mode determination means determines whether the first success/failure determination condition is the one that is not continuously satisfied. The dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition is longer than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition that is continuously satisfied. Is determined as the long dynamic display mode. By determining the long-dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition of the one not continuously established becomes longer, and the number of times the win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means is reduced. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to adjust so that the difference in the number of times of establishment between the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means becomes small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11 has a condition distributing means for assisting the establishment of the first win/win condition and the second win/win condition alternately, and a gaming machine I12.

The gaming machine I12 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11. That is, the condition distribution means assists the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition to be alternately established. Therefore, it is possible to make the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions substantially equal to each other, and to easily store the number of times the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied up to the upper limit number in the hold storage means.

In the gaming machine I10 or I12, the gaming machine I10 or I12 has a number determination means for determining the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means, The consecutive success monitoring means does not judge that either the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number of times judging means determines the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. When it is determined that the respective numbers of times of establishment are greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second acceptance/rejection determination condition having the higher number of times of establishment is A gaming machine I13, which determines a dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I10 or I12, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number-of-times determining means determines the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The continuous success monitoring means does not judge that either the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number-of-times judging means determines the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. When it is determined that the number of times of establishment is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Short dynamic display mode is determined. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, even if the number of times of establishment is not continuous, if there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times of establishment, it corresponds to the acceptance/rejection judgment condition of the one with the greater number of times of establishment. Since the lottery game to be performed is performed in a short time, it is possible to make adjustment so that the difference in the number of times the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means are small. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

In the gaming machine I11 or I12, the gaming machine I11 or I12 has a number determination means for determining the number of times the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means, The continuous success monitoring means does not determine that either the first win/win judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously met, and the number of times judging means determines whether the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are met. When it is determined that the number of times of each establishment is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition having a smaller number of times of establishment is set as the long-running motion. An amusement machine I14, which is characterized in that it is determined to be a dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine I14 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I11 or I12. That is, the number-of-times determining means determines the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. The continuous success monitoring means does not judge that either the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition is continuously satisfied, and the number-of-times judging means determines the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. When it is determined that the number of times of establishment is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition having the higher number of times of establishment. , Short dynamic display mode is determined. By determining the long-dynamic display mode in this way, even if the number of times of establishment is not satisfied continuously, if there is a difference more than a predetermined number of times of establishment, it corresponds to the acceptance/rejection determination condition of the one with less number of establishments. Since the lottery game to be performed becomes long and the number of times the win/loss determination condition stored in the hold storage means is less likely to decrease, the difference in the number of times the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold storage means are satisfied. Can be adjusted to be smaller. Therefore, it is possible to easily store the number of times the first win/win determination condition and the second win/win determination condition are satisfied in the pending storage unit evenly up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to suppress overflow.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1 is displayed at that time when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by having rearrangement notifying means for notifying an executed notification manner indicating that the rearrangement has been executed when the rearrangement is performed by the rearrangement means. J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, and G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the predetermined conditions are met, when the rearrangement display mode displayed at that time is executed, the executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement has been executed is displayed. It is notified by the replacement notification means. In this way, the player can identify, by the executed notification mode, whether the currently held display mode indicates the order of establishment or the order of starting the dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress confusion about the game of the player.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine J1, the rearrangement notifying means displays, as the executed notification mode, a display mode capable of identifying that the rearrangement has been executed on the hold display means. Playing machine J2.

The gaming machine J2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1. That is, as the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification means displays the pending display means in a display mode capable of identifying that the sorting has been executed. Therefore, the executed notification mode can be displayed closer to the suspended display mode by displaying the executed notification mode on the same suspended display mode, and the player misses the executed notification mode. The effect is that it can be prevented.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rearrangement notifying means indicates that the rearrangement display means displayed when the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means indicates that the rearrangement has been executed. While performing the notification in the executed notification mode, the pending display mode displayed after the sorting by the sorting means is performed in the unexecuted notification mode indicating that sorting is not executed. Amusement machine J3.

The gaming machine J3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, with respect to the hold display mode displayed when the rearrangement is performed by the rearrangement means, the rearrangement informing means informs of the executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement has been executed. On the other hand, with respect to the hold display mode displayed after the sorting by the sorting unit, the sorting notification unit reports the unexecution notification mode indicating that sorting has not been executed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to distinguish between sorting performed and sorting not performed, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the sorting order of the hold display mode, and it is possible to further prevent confusion about the game. ..

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, when the predetermined condition is met, the hold display modes sorted by the sorting means in a different order from the established order are individually displayed. The sorting notification means has a sorting identification means, and the sorting notification means is displayed in a sorting order different from the established order based on the information identified by the sorting identification means as the executed notification mode. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is informed in a display mode indicating that the display mode is the hold display mode.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display modes rearranged by the rearrangement unit in an order different from the established order are individually identified by the rearrangement identification unit. As the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification unit notifies the display mode indicating the hold display mode displayed in the rearrangement order different from the established order based on the information identified by the rearrangement identification unit. .. Thereby, the player can easily recognize the pending display mode in which the variation start order is different from the established order, and more easily recognize the order in which the pending display mode is displayed.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the hold display means, in addition to the formation order hold display area for displaying the hold display mode in the formation order, and the formation order hold display area, the dynamic display. And a start order hold display area for displaying the hold display mode in a display start order, and the hold display mode is displayed in the established order hold display area while the predetermined condition is satisfied. With this as a trigger, in a state in which the display of the hold display mode in the establishment order hold display area is maintained, the dynamic display rearranged in the start order hold display area is started in the order of starting the dynamic display. A gaming machine J5, characterized in that a hold display mode is displayed.

The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4. That is, they are displayed in the established order hold display area of the hold display means in the order in which the hold display mode is established. In addition to the established order hold display area, the hold display modes are displayed in the start order hold display area of the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. While the hold display mode is displayed in the succession order hold display area, the display of the hold display mode in the succession order hold display area is maintained when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the start order hold display area is displayed. The hold display mode is displayed in the order sorted by the sorting means. As a result, the player can simultaneously identify the hold display mode before the rearrangement and after the rearrangement is performed, and can easily determine how the rearrangement is performed.

On any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, J1 to J5, the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit. On the basis of the fact, the temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed, and the remaining dynamic of the first or second identification information being temporarily stopped after the privilege game is finished. Re-dynamic display start means for dynamically displaying the display mode again, and based on that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the dynamic display start time information The deciding means dynamically sets time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes a dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that the time information until the start of display is determined again and stored in the holding information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, and J1 to J5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first or second identification information in the dynamic display is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating the hit. Then, after the bonus game is finished, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information which is temporarily stopped is dynamically displayed again by the re-dynamic display starting means. The first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information display means starts the dynamic display based on the display of the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit. The time information until the dynamic display start from the end of the privilege game as the starting point is redetermined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, and is stored in the pending information storage means. In this way, when the privilege game is started, the time information until the dynamic display is started is re-determined as the time information starting from the end of the privilege game. Even when the specified conditions are satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started accurately.

In the gaming machine K1, the dynamic display start time information determination means is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit. Corresponding to the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the stored suspension information, with respect to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information. Based on the dynamic display mode, the time information until the dynamic display starts from the end of the privilege game as a starting point is respectively redetermined, while the first or second identification displayed in the display mode showing the hit For the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the information, based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored hold information, a dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game A gaming machine K2, characterized in that the time until the start is redetermined.

According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1. That is, when the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating a hit, it is stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means. Based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored suspension information, the pending information is dynamically set from the end of the privilege game. The time information until the display is started is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. On the other hand, with respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage unit corresponding to the first or second identification information displayed in the display mode showing the hit, the corresponding dynamic display based on the stored hold information. Based on the aspect, the time until the dynamic display starts from the end of the privilege game as the starting point is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. Therefore, the hold information corresponding to the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information that is not temporarily stopped are distinguished from each other, and the time information until the start of the dynamic display is determined. Time information until the start can be determined.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the holding information storage means determines the win/loss determination information and the dynamic display mode determination used in the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/loss determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information having at least dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the means is stored, and the first or the first corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area Before the second identification information can be dynamically displayed, based on the normal hold information, the win/fail judgment result by the win/fail determination means, the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the dynamic display start in advance. The time information is determined by the time information determining means and stored as the rearrangement information, while the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, and the rearrangement information is displayed as the rearrangement information. The stored time information has a rearrangement storage area that is updated and stored with the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, and the first or second hit determination When the condition is newly established, the normal hold stored in the newly established normal hold storage area is based on the time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. The order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the information and the normal suspension information previously stored in the normal suspension storage area is started is determined, and the sequence is arranged in the order. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that it has a sorting order determination means for storing it in a replacement pending storage area.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second win/loss judgment condition, the win/no judgment information used for win/no judgment by the win/fail determination means and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means. The normal pending information having at least and is stored in the normal pending storage area of the pending information storage means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal suspension information stored in the normal suspension storage area can be dynamically displayed, the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is determined based on the normal suspension information. The dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means and the time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored in the rearrangement storage area of the reservation information storage means as rearrangement information. On the other hand, the time information stored as the rearrangement information is changed to the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating the hit. It is updated and stored in the rearrangement pending storage area. When the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly satisfied, it is stored in the newly established normal hold storage area based on the time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort hold storage area. The rearrangement order determining unit determines the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal suspension information and the normal suspension information previously stored in the normal suspension storage area is started. The order is stored in the rearrangement pending storage area. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the sorting order can be processed separately, and the processing for determining the sorting order can be easily performed. Further, even when the privilege game is started, the time information starting from the end of the privilege game is updated, so that the rearrangement can be easily executed even during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine K3, the sort order determining means corresponds to each sort information stored ahead of the sort pending storage area when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied during the privilege game. Based on the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time determination means, the normal hold information stored in the newly established normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area are stored. The order in which the dynamic display is started from the end of the privilege game of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to each of the normal hold information is determined, and the order is determined. A gaming machine K4, which is stored in the rearrangement storage area.

According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3. That is, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied during the privilege game, the time re-determined by the dynamic display start time determining means corresponding to each sort information stored in the sort reservation storage area ahead. First identification information and second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the newly established normal hold storage area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area based on the information. The order in which the dynamic display is started, starting from the end of the privilege game with, is determined by the sorting order determining means, and the order is stored in the sorting pending storage area.

Therefore, even with respect to the first or second win/loss determination conditions established during the privilege game, the order of starting more accurate dynamic display is determined, and the suspended display mode is set in the order of starting accurate dynamic display. Can be rearranged. Therefore, even if the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied during the bonus game, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the display means, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first win/fail judgment condition. Based on the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined, and based on the fulfillment of the second win/loss determination condition, the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is dynamically set. Until the display is started, the main judgment information is win/fail judgment information about the win/fail judgment by the win/no judgment means and the dynamic display determination information about the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Main hold information storage means that distinguishably stores the order information in which the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the hold information and the win/loss determination condition that is satisfied are the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition, and A main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means, The sub-control information storing means stores the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the sub-hold information, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, First hit/miss judgment stored in the sub-hold information storage means While distinguishing the subordination hold information between the decision condition and the second propriety decision condition, the order of establishment of the propriety decision condition that is the combination of the first propriety decision condition and the second propriety decision condition is identified for each subordinate hold information A dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means based on the pending display means displayed in a possible pending display mode and the secondary pending information stored in the secondary pending information storage means. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate display mode discriminating means for discriminating the subordinate hold information storage means, the first or second identification being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means. Based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the information and the dynamic display mode determined by the slave dynamic display mode determining means for each slave holding information previously stored in the slave holding information storage means, a new slave is displayed. Dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information is the dynamic display start, and storing the time information in the secondary suspension information storage means, Based on each of the time information stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is triggered when the condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L1 having a sorting means for sorting in an order of starting dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine L1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. The first hold determination information and the second hold determination condition are combined for each slave hold information while distinguishing the hold information from the first hold determination condition and the second hold determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the subordinate hold information storage means are stored in the subordinate hold information storage means first. The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining unit for each slave hold information. The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the slave holding information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit on the display means is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first or second win/fail. On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are distinguished from each other, and a succession signal for notifying that the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied is generated, On the basis of the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the succession signal generating means for outputting to the slave control means in the order of satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode, and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition;
In the case where the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/loss determination condition is started to be dynamically displayed, the win/loss determination means relates to win/loss determination. The win/fail judgment information and the dynamic display determination information relating to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means are used as the main hold information, and the win/fail judgment conditions corresponding to the main hold information are satisfied and the order information is satisfied. Main hold information storage means that stores whether the win/fail judgment condition is the first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition, and that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means. Based on the stored main hold information, a main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information stored therein, the slave control means having received the establishment signal. On the basis of the above, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/absence determination condition that triggered the generation of the success signal becomes dynamically displayable, information on the number of the success signals received is displayed. , It is possible to distinguish the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition indicated by the win signal, and to identify the win order of win/win judgment conditions that is the combination of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the sub-holding number storage means and the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means. While distinguishing each sub-holding number information, the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions that combine the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition for each sub-hold number information are displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode Hold display means, a sub-hold information storage means for storing information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as sub-hold information based on the reception of the main hold information signal, and the sub-hold information. A slave display information discriminating means for discriminating the dynamic display manner determined by the dynamic display manner deciding means of the main control means based on the slave holding information stored in the storage means, When the sub-hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and first stored in the sub-hold information storage means. The first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information is dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining unit for each of the slave hold information that has been set. Decide the time information until Then, the dynamic display start time information deciding means to be stored in the subordinate hold information storing means and the subordinate hold information storing means by the dynamic display start time information deciding means upon the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a rearrangement means for rearranging the hold display modes displayed on the hold display means in the order in which the dynamic display is started based on the stored time information. Gaming machine L2.

According to the description of the gaming machine L2, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The main control means distinguishes between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met. The establishment signal for notifying is generated by the establishment signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the order of establishment of the first or second hit/miss determination condition. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the sub-control unit, based on the reception of the establishment signal, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/miss determination condition that triggers the generation of the establishment signal can be dynamically displayed. The information regarding the number of the received establishment signals distinguishes the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition from the establishment signal, and the acceptance/rejection determination condition obtained by combining the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition. Are stored in the sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so as to be identifiable. The slave control means distinguishes the slave hold number information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition on the basis of the slave hold number information stored in the slave hold number storage means, and for each slave hold number information. In addition, the order of satisfaction of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, is performed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the secondary display mode determination means based on the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means. In the slave control means, when the slave hold information is newly stored in the slave hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the slave hold information storage means first. The first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining means for each slave hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

The gaming machine L1 or L2, further comprising a condition distribution means for assisting the establishment of the first win/win judgment condition and the second win/win judgment condition alternately.

The gaming machine L3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2. That is, the allocating means assists in that the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are alternately established. This makes it easier to equally establish the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be played in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, when the rearrangement means receives the main hold information signal and the hold information is stored in the subhold information storage means, the rearrangement information is stored in the subhold information storage means. Based on the time information corresponding to each sub-hold information previously stored, of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established sub-hold information and the sub-hold information previously stored. A gaming machine L4, characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the sub-hold information storage means in association with the sub-hold information.

The gaming machine L4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3. That is, when the main holding information signal is received and the holding information is stored in the sub-holding information storage means, based on the time information corresponding to each sub-holding information previously stored in the sub-holding information storage means. Then, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is related to each slave hold information. It is stored in the subordinate holding information storage means by the rearrangement means. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated every time the subordinate hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even if there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display modes in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and to notify the player of the accurate dynamic display start order. You can

Any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rearranging means, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operating means is operated, A gaming machine L5 characterized by rearranging the hold display modes.

According to the game described in the gaming machine L5, the following effect is produced in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means as if the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to perform rearrangement in the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to inform the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the exact dynamic display start order. You can

The rearrangement means rearranges the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means when the predetermined signal is satisfied when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received. The gaming machine L6 according to any one of claims 1 to 4.

According to the game described in the gaming machine L6, the following effect is produced in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4. That is, when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received from the main control means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when a new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the exact dynamic display start order.

In order for the main control means to carry out the lottery whether or not to judge whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after executing the privilege game are shifted to the special game state which is more likely to hit than usual. Of the lottery information is acquired based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, and the main hold information corresponding to the met judgment condition is stored. In this case, there is a game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the main hold information storage means in association with the main hold information, and the slave control means is stored in the slave hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each slave hold information can be dynamically displayed, each slave hold information is supported based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. Perform a pre-judgment in which the gaming state when the first or second identification information becomes dynamically displayable is judged according to the lottery information in advance to judge whether or not it is the special gaming state, It has pre-engagement determination means for storing the result in the slave hold information storage means in association with each of the slave hold information, and the driven display mode determination means of the slave control means stores it in the slave hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the subordinate hold information that has been registered can be dynamically displayed, the pre-engagement determination unit stores the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the subordinate hold information storage unit and the dynamic determination. 7. The gaming machine L7 according to claim 1, wherein the dynamic display mode is determined based on display determination information.

According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to hit the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after executing the privilege game than in the normal time The lottery information of is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss determination condition. Further, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and the main hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is associated with the main hold information, and the lottery information is the gaming state lottery means. Is stored in the main holding information storage means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display start time information determination means determines until the first or second identification information corresponding to each slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means can start dynamic display. Based on the time information, the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to each subordinate hold information can be dynamically displayed is the special game state by the game state lottery means according to the lottery information. A preliminary judgment is performed by the preliminary judgment means to make a judgment and to judge whether or not the judgment is successful. Then, the result is stored in the sub-holding storage means by the pre-determination means in association with each sub-holding information. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed, the pre-engagement determination means stores the pre-determination determination in the sub-hold information storage means. Based on the result and the dynamic display determination information, the dynamic display mode is discriminated by the subordinate display discriminating means of the subordinate control means. As a result, the new follow-up information is stored, and even if the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the success/failure determination is performed. Be seen. Therefore, the dynamic display time information can be determined in advance on the basis of the correct hit determination result, and the dynamic display start order can be determined even when a new hit determination condition is satisfied next.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Condition distribution means for assisting in alternately establishing a condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, and a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means. Until the holding storage means for storing as a right to play the first or second lottery game and the condition distribution means, next, it is assisted to establish which of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. And a discrimination result notifying means for notifying the player of information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result of the discriminant discrimination means. Characteristic gaming machine M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is the first display means, the second identification information is the second display means, and they can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The condition allocation means assists in that the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions are alternately established. When the first or second winning/disabling determination condition is satisfied by the condition distributing means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the pending storage means. Further, the established condition identifying means identifies which of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition is in a state in which the condition sorting means is in a state in which the condition assigning means is in a state of assisting the satisfaction. Based on the identification result of the satisfaction condition identifying means, the identification result informing means informs the player of information indicating the identification result. As a result, the first win/loss determination condition and the second win/loss determination condition are easily established evenly, the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and the first lottery game is performed. It is possible to prevent one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored up to the upper limit number in advance. Therefore, although the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored up to the upper limit number, respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that one or more rights are generated and the right is invalidated. it can. In addition, the identification result notifying means notifies the state of the sorting means to the next condition to be fulfilled. Even if the win/loss determination condition is satisfied, if the win/loss determination condition causes overflow, the player can play the game so that the win/loss determination condition is not satisfied, and the overflow can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, a game area and a game ball flowing down in the game area enter a first starting opening that satisfies the first win/fail condition and a game ball flowing down the game area. By having a ball, a second starting port that satisfies the second win/fail judgment condition is established, and the condition distributing means alternately inserts game balls into the first starting port and the second starting port. The game machine M2 according to claim 1, further comprising a game ball guide portion that assists in ball play.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first win/win condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second win/win condition is satisfied. It The game ball guiding section of the condition distribution means assists the game balls alternately entering the first starting port and the second starting port. This makes it easier for the player to alternately enter the game ball into the first start opening and the second start opening by letting the game ball flow down into the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Since the execution of and can be performed efficiently, many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine M2, the condition distribution means causes the game ball that flows down the game area to enter a ball entrance and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance through the game ball guide section. It has a first guide path for guiding to a first starting opening and a second guide path for guiding to the second starting opening through the game ball guiding section, and the game ball guiding section is provided with the After receiving the game ball that has entered from the ball entrance and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first guide path, the game ball that entered from the ball entrance is then described above. It is received in a state of being rotated in the first direction, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in a second direction which is the opposite direction to the first direction to guide the game ball to the second guide path. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball guiding section receives the game ball from the ball entrance of the condition distributing means, rotates it in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and moves the game ball to the first starting port through the first guide path. After being guided, the game ball that has entered from the ball entrance is received in a state of being rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction that is the opposite direction to the first direction. Then, the game ball is guided by the game ball guide portion to the second starting opening via the second guide path. As a result, it becomes possible to alternately guide the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening by using the common member, and to distribute the game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening, respectively. As compared with the case where the game balls are provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be configured compactly.

In the gaming machine M3, the game ball guiding section of the condition distributing means is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. A first passive portion that receives a game ball that has entered the ball and rotates in a second direction to a predetermined angle, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance when rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. The second passive portion, which is arranged at a facing position, receives the game ball and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance, and receives the game ball. After rotating in two directions, before the game ball enters the ball entrance, it prevents the game ball from rotating in the first direction, or the second passive unit enters from the ball entrance. A rotation restricting portion that prevents the game ball from rotating in the second direction after receiving the ball in the first direction and rotating in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entrance. A gaming machine M4 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, the first passive portion receives the entered game ball and is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. The second passive portion receives the game ball that has entered, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. After the first passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may rotate in the first direction before the game ball next enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive unit receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction, before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, it rotates in the second direction. This is hindered by the rotation restricting portion. As a result, after the game ball guiding unit rotates to guide the game ball to one guide path, the game ball will rotate in the other direction before the next game ball enters, and the next ball enters. It is possible to prevent a problem that the game ball is guided to the same guide path as the game ball that entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game balls entering the ball entrance to the first start opening and the second start opening more accurately and alternately, and equalize the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Can be stored in.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the establishment condition identifying means causes the condition distributing means to enter the next ball based on the game ball entering the first or second starting opening. A gaming machine M5 characterized by identifying a starting opening to assist.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine M5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines M2 to M4. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first or second starting opening, the starting opening that assists the condition distributing means to enter the next opening is identified by the establishment condition identifying means. Therefore, the player can recognize the starting opening to be assigned next, and the player can play the game while suppressing the invalid balls due to the overflow.

The establishment condition identifying means detects a state in which the game ball guiding section is rotated, and based on the detection result, the game ball guiding section causes the game ball to enter through a guide path to be guided next. A gaming machine M6 characterized by identifying a starting opening to be assisted.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine M6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine M3 or M4. That is, the state in which the game ball guiding unit of the condition distribution means is rotated is detected, and based on the detection result, the game ball guiding unit guides the game ball next, so that the game ball enters the ball. The starting port assisted by is identified by the satisfaction condition identifying means. Therefore, the state of the condition distribution means can be accurately identified and notified, and the player can be notified of accurate information and the game can be played so as to suppress overflow.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the display means, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first win/fail judgment condition. Based on the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined, and based on the fulfillment of the second win/loss determination condition, the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is dynamically set. Until the display is started, the main judgment information is win/fail judgment information about the win/fail judgment by the win/no judgment means and the dynamic display determination information about the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Main hold information storage means for distinguishably storing the order information in which the win/loss judgment condition corresponding to the hold information and the win/no win judgment condition that are met are the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition; When the main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the above-mentioned Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main hold information is dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display determination information for each main hold information stored in the main hold information storage means. Main dynamic display start time stored in the main holding information storage means by determining the time information of Based on the information deciding means and the new main holding information stored in the main holding information storing means, the sub-control means stores information about the stored main holding information and time information corresponding to the main holding information. A main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the main hold information signal, and the sub-control means relates to information indicated by the main hold information signal based on the reception of the main hold information signal. Each sub-holding information while distinguishing the sub-holding information storage unit that stores information as sub-holding information and the sub-holding information of the first win/fail determination condition and the second win/fail determination condition stored in the sub-hold information storage unit. For each of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment condition, the order of satisfaction of win/fail judgment conditions is displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode, and a predetermined condition is met. On the basis of that, based on each time information determined by the main dynamic display start time information determining means indicated by the slave holding information stored in the slave holding information storage means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is displayed. A gaming machine N1 having a sorting means for sorting in the order of starting the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine N1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, when the main hold information is newly stored in the main hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the main hold information storage means first. The time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display determination information for each main hold information stored in It is determined by the display start time information determining means and stored in the subordinate holding information storage means. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of the stored main hold information and the time information corresponding to the main hold information. Is generated by the main holding information signal generating means. Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. The first hold determination information and the second hold determination condition are combined for each slave hold information while distinguishing the hold information from the first hold determination condition and the second hold determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are met is performed by the hold display means as a display in an identifiable hold display mode, and in the slave control means, the slave hold information storage means is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. Based on each time information determined by the main dynamic display start time information determining means indicated by the stored subordinate hold information, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means by the rearranging means in the order of starting the dynamic display. Sorted. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no decision of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/loss judgment condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal has a win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. , The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game, and the second win/loss judgment signal. A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result of the second lottery game; 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the display means, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first win/fail judgment condition. Based on the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined, and based on the fulfillment of the second win/loss determination condition, the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode, and, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is dynamically set. Until the display is started, the main judgment information is win/fail judgment information about the win/fail judgment by the win/no judgment means and the dynamic display determination information about the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The order information in which the win/loss judgment condition corresponding to the hold information is satisfied and the win/fail judgment condition that is satisfied are the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are stored in a distinguishable manner, and are stored even when the power is off. And a main hold information for notifying the slave control means of the information about the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means. A main hold information signal generating means for generating a signal, and the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, holds the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal in the slave hold state. Subordinate hold information storage means for storing as information and its subordinate While distinguishing the sub-hold information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means, the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are set for each sub-hold information. Based on the hold display means for displaying the combined success/failure determination conditions in a distinguishable hold display mode and the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, the main control means is dynamically displayed. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate hold information storage unit and the subordinate display information discriminating unit for discriminating the dynamic display form decided by the form deciding unit, in the first or second display unit. Remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the motion discriminated by the slave display mode discriminating unit for each slave suspension information previously stored in the slave suspension information storage unit. Dynamic information stored in the slave hold information storage means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information is dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode. On the basis of the display start time information determining means and the establishment of the predetermined condition, the hold display is performed based on the time information stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means. A gaming machine N2, comprising: a rearrangement means for rearranging the hold display mode displayed on the means in an order in which the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine N2, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub-control means in accordance with an instruction from the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. The first hold determination information and the second hold determination condition are combined for each slave hold information while distinguishing the hold information from the first hold determination condition and the second hold determination condition stored in the hold information storage unit. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When the subordinate hold information is newly stored in the subordinate hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the subordinate hold information storage means are stored in the subordinate hold information storage means first. The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining unit for each slave hold information. The information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the slave holding information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/no win determination condition, and the win/no win of the first lottery game by the win/loss judgment means. Based on the determination result, the first win/loss determination signal includes a win/loss determination signal generating unit that generates a second win/loss determination signal based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination unit. The sub-control means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game on the basis of the first determination signal, and the second display of the determination result. A second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the second lottery game, and the win/no win judgment result by the win/loss judgment means is a hit, and the first or the second 2 When the first or second identification information indicating the hit on the display means is stopped and displayed, in the gaming machine to which the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given, the main control means sets the first or second win/fail. On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are distinguished from each other, and a succession signal for notifying that the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied is generated, On the basis of the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the succession signal generation means for outputting to the slave control means in the order of satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and the identification information of the first identification information corresponding to the success/failure judgment condition that has been met Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition; When the 1st or 2nd hit/absence determination condition is satisfied, until the 1st or 2nd identification information corresponding to the satisfied hit/absence determination condition is dynamically displayed, the hit/damage determination related to the hit/miss determination by the hit/miss determination means. The information and the dynamic display determination information relating to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means are used as the main suspension information, and the order information and the success/failure determination that the success/failure determination conditions corresponding to the main suspension information are satisfied. Based on a main hold information storage unit that stores whether the condition is the first hit determination condition or the second hit determination condition, and the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage unit. Obey information about its stored main pending information A main holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying the controlling means, and the sub-control means is an opportunity to generate the establishment signal based on the reception of the establishment signal. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/miss determination condition can be dynamically displayed, information about the number of received success signals is provided as the first win/fail determination condition indicated by the success signal and the information. A secondary hold number storage means that distinguishes from the second win/fail judgment condition and stores the establishment order of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, as distinguishable hold number information in a distinguishable manner. And based on the slave hold number information stored in the slave hold number storage means, while distinguishing the slave hold number information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, each slave hold number. Receiving the main hold information signal and hold display means for displaying the order in which the match determination conditions, which are the first match determination condition and the second match determination condition for each information, are displayed in an identifiable hold display mode. On the basis of that, based on the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means for storing information about the main hold information indicated by the main-hold information as sub-hold information, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, When the secondary display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means, and the secondary suspension information is newly stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, The remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the slave display mode for each slave hold information previously stored in the slave hold information storage means. Based on the dynamic display mode determined by the determination means, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined, and the slave hold information is determined. The dynamic display start time information determining means to be stored in the storage means, and the respective times stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means upon the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine N3, comprising: a sorting means for sorting the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means in the order in which the dynamic display is started based on the information.

According to the gaming machine N3, main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and control of the game is executed by the sub-control means in accordance with an instruction from the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The main control means distinguishes between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met. The establishment signal for notifying is generated by the establishment signal generating means, and is output to the control means in accordance with the order of establishment of the first or second hit/miss determination condition. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/no judgment condition. In the main control means, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the win/win determination means is used until the first or second identification information corresponding to the met win/win determination condition is dynamically displayed. As the main hold information, the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main hold information, and the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the main hold information is satisfied. The order information and the win/fail judgment conditions that are satisfied are memorized in the main pending information storage means so as to be distinguishable between the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the main control means, based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information regarding the stored main hold information. It Then, in the sub-control unit, based on the reception of the establishment signal, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the hit/miss determination condition that triggers the generation of the establishment signal can be dynamically displayed. The information regarding the number of the received establishment signals distinguishes the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition from the establishment signal, and the acceptance/rejection determination condition obtained by combining the first acceptance/rejection determination condition and the second acceptance/rejection determination condition. Are stored in the sub-holding number storage means as sub-holding number information so as to be identifiable. The slave control means distinguishes the slave hold number information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition on the basis of the slave hold number information stored in the slave hold number storage means, and for each slave hold number information. In addition, the order of satisfaction of the win/fail judgment conditions, which is the combination of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, is performed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the main hold information signal, the information on the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave hold information. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is determined by the secondary display mode determination means based on the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means. In the slave control means, when the slave hold information is newly stored in the slave hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the slave hold information storage means first. The first or second identification information corresponding to the new slave hold information can be dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the slave display mode determining means for each slave hold information stored in The time information until it becomes is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Then, in the secondary control means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means. The sorting means sorts the dynamic display in the order in which it starts. Thereby, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the main control means does not execute the processing of rearranging the hold display modes in the start order of the dynamic display, but is executed by the sub control means, the control load of the main control means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the main holding information storage means is configured to be able to retain data even when the power is off, and the main control means is the gaming machine when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. Main initial control execution means for executing the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of, and as one processing of the main initial control processing, based on the main hold information and the time information stored in the main hold information storage means. , A return data signal generating means for generating a return data signal and outputting it to the subordinate control means, the subordinate control means initializing the gaming machine when power is turned on to the gaming machine. In the secondary initial control executing means for executing the secondary initial control processing, and the secondary initial control processing executed by the secondary initial control executing means, the return data signal indicates based on the return data signal from the main control means. A gaming machine N4, further comprising: sub-holding information restoring means for storing information as sub-restoring holding information in the sub-holding information storage means.

The gaming machine N4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1. That is, the main hold information storage means of the main control means retains data even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation unit based on the main hold information and the time information stored in the main hold information storage unit, Is output. In the secondary control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the secondary initial control processing, which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the secondary initial control executing means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control executing means, the information indicated by the return data signal is returned as the secondary return pending information based on the return data signal from the main controlling means. Stored by the means. As a result, when the power is reapplied to the gaming machine after the power is cut off, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the sub-hold is held. The return storage information is stored according to the information storage means. Therefore, the data stored in the sub-hold information storage means can be returned to the state immediately before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the player can display the hold display mode that was displayed immediately before the power was turned off. Since the secondary return pending information is stored as the information based on the main pending information and the time information, even when the power is restored and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display modes are arranged in the order of starting to change. It can be displayed instead.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the main hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold data even when the power is off, and the main control means is provided when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A main initial control execution unit that executes a main initial control process that is an initial setting of the gaming machine; and as one process of the initial control process, stored in the main hold information storage unit with respect to the sub control unit. And a return data signal generating means for generating a return data signal based on the main holding information and outputting the return data signal to the slave control means, and the slave control means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the sub initial control execution means for executing the sub initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, and the sub initial control processing executed by the sub initial control execution means, based on the return data signal from the main control means. And a sub-hold information restoring means for storing the information indicated by the return data signal as sub-hold holding information in the sub-hold information storing means, a gaming machine N5.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine N5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N1 to N3. That is, the main hold information storage means of the main control means retains data even when the power is off. In the main control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the main initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation unit based on the main hold information stored in the main hold information storage unit and output to the sub control unit. In the secondary control means, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the secondary initial control processing, which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, is executed by the secondary initial control executing means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control executing means, the information indicated by the return data signal is returned as the secondary return pending information based on the return data signal from the main controlling means. Stored by the means. As a result, when the power is reapplied to the gaming machine after the power is cut off, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the sub-hold is held. The return storage information is stored according to the information storage means. Therefore, the data stored in the sub-hold information storage means can be returned to the state before the power is cut off in the state immediately before the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the player can display the hold display mode that was displayed immediately before the power was turned off.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the sub-hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power is off, and the sub-hold information return means is provided from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is collated with the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and if it is determined that they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not coincide with each other, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the auxiliary hold information storage means as the auxiliary return hold information, the gaming machine N6.

According to the game described in the game machine N6, the following effect is produced in addition to the effect produced by the game machine N4 or N5. That is, the subordinate holding information storage means of the subordinate control means retains data even when the power is off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information restoring means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the auxiliary hold information storage means as the auxiliary return hold information. Therefore, the data in the pending information storage means can be updated according to more correct data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the correct hold display mode when the power is turned off.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the sub-hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power is off, and the sub-hold information return means is provided from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is compared with the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and if they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained, A game machine N7, characterized in that, when they do not match, the subordinate holding information storage means is initialized to be displayed in a holding display mode showing a temporary holding display mode.

The gaming machine N7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4 or N5. That is, the subordinate holding information storage means of the subordinate control means retains data even when the power is off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information restoring means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the secondary hold information storage means is initialized, and a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode is displayed. Therefore, by displaying the temporary hold display mode, the clerk of the gaming shop or the like can recognize that the data stored in the sub-hold information storage means is abnormal. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from displaying the hold display mode on the basis of incorrect information, and prevent the player from being confused.

In any of the gaming machines N5 to N7, the dynamic display start time information determining means corresponds to the stored slave return holding information based on that the slave return holding information is stored in the slave holding information storage means. A gaming machine N8, which determines time information to be stored and stores it in the sub-hold information storage means.

The gaming machine described in the gaming machine N8 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N5 to N7. That is, in the slave control means, the time information corresponding to the stored slave return holding information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means based on the storage of the slave return holding information in the slave holding information storage means. Are stored in the sub-hold information storage means. Therefore, after returning from the power failure, it is possible to rearrange and display the hold display modes corresponding to the stored subordinate return hold information in the order in which they start changing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by notifying the player of the order in which the fluctuation starts even after the power is cut off.

In any of the gaming machines N4 to N8, the rearrangement means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the subordinate return suspension information is stored in the subordinate suspension information storage means, and A gaming machine N9, characterized in that the hold display modes are rearranged and displayed.

The gaming machine N9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines N4 to N8. That is, in the slave control means, when the slave return suspension information is stored in the slave suspension information storage means, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the suspension display mode is in the order of starting the dynamic display. It is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means. Therefore, by returning from power-off and rearranging the display modes in the order in which the dynamic display is started, the order in which the dynamic display is started can be recognized as soon as the game is restarted, and the game can be understood. It can be done easily.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination Based on the satisfaction of the condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is determined from a group of dynamic display modes composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes, and the second determination of win or failure is made. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition based on the establishment of the means, from a dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes. A notification for determining, based on the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means, which one of the first identification information and the second identification information that is dynamically displayed should be notified to the player. A gaming machine O1 characterized by having a destination determining means and a visual notifying means for notifying the player of the identification information determined by the notification destination determining means so as to be visually recognized by the player.

According to the gaming machine O1, based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. On the basis of the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes. Determined by means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is dynamically displayed from a dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes. It is determined by the mode determining means. Of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed, which of the identification information is notified to the player to be visually recognized is determined by the notification destination determination means based on the result of the hit determination. The identification information determined by the notification destination determining unit is notified by the visual notifying unit so that the player can visually recognize the identification information. As a result, the identification information to be visually recognized is determined based on the result of the judgment, so that the player can easily discriminate the identification information to be visually recognized, and can easily play the game. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine O1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the win/fail judgment result of the win/fail determination means, and the dynamic display mode group includes the win/fail determination means. The result of the judgment is configured to include a high-expectation degree dynamic display mode that is more easily determined in the case of a hit than in the case of a deviation, and the notification destination determination unit is the dynamic display mode determination unit. Based on the determination of the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined as the notification destination of the first or second identification information for which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine O2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode group is configured to include a high-expectation degree dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined when the hit determination result of the hit determination unit is a hit than in the case of a deviation. Based on the determination that the high-expectation dynamic display mode has been determined by the dynamic-display-mode determining means, the first or second identification information on which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed is the notification destination. It is determined by the notification destination determining means. Therefore, by notifying the player to visually recognize the high-expectation dynamic display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the high-expectation dynamic display mode. On the basis of the above, the dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the determined high expectation dynamic display mode is completed. A gaming machine O3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is made based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determination means determines that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode. The dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the displayed high-expectation dynamic display mode ends. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high expectation dynamic display mode. Based on the above, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed, the dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended. A gaming machine O4 having a dynamic display extending means.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the dynamic display mode determining means determines that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determination is made. The dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended by the dynamic display extension means until the dynamic display of the displayed high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting when the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, a voice output unit that outputs a preset voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode, and the identification information notified by the notification destination determination unit are the first identification information. Volume change means for mute the voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information or to set the volume to a volume lower than the normal volume based on the determination of either one of the second identification information. A gaming machine O5 characterized by having one.

The gaming machine O5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4. That is, the voice output means outputs the voice preset in correspondence with the dynamic display mode. Based on that the identification information notified by the notification destination determining means is determined to be either the first identification information or the second identification information, the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is muted or The volume changing means sets the volume to a volume lower than the normal volume. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being more concentrated on the identification information determined by the notification destination determination means, and to miss the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first hit determination On the basis of the satisfaction of the condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is based on the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means, and when the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means is successful , Determined based on a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more easily determined than in the case of deviation, and established based on the establishment of the second win/defeat determination means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition based on the win/no judgment result of the win/no judgment means from the dynamic display mode group; 2 When the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the satisfaction of the win/fail judgment condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode is set. For identification information different from the identification information that is dynamically displayed, duplication determination means that determines whether or not the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined, and the duplication determination means, Also when it is determined that the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined, the high-expectation dynamic display mode corresponding to either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed. A dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of the dynamic display, and a gaming machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is more likely to be determined when the win/loss judgment result by the win/loss determination means is hit than when it is out. The dynamic display mode determination means determines from a dynamic display mode group configured by a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail determination condition from the dynamic display mode group. When the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition is the high expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high expectation dynamic For the identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the display mode, the duplication determination unit determines whether the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the high-expectation dynamic display mode has been determined for different identification information, it corresponds to either the first identification information or the second identification information. The start of the high-expectation dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Thereby, even when the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the start of one high-expectation dynamic display mode is delayed, At the same time, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode from being started. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the high-expectation degree dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed first and can play the game. As a result, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine O6, the dynamic display delay means is longer than the end of the high expectation dynamic display mode in which the identification information of the one whose start of dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed, A gaming machine O7, which delays the start of the dynamic display of the high-expectancy dynamic display mode in the identification information of the one whose start is delayed.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the high expectation in the identification information of which the start of the dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed, and the high expectation in the identification information of the one that delays the start of the dynamic display longer than the end of the dynamic display mode. The start of the dynamic display in the dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the delayed high-expectation dynamic display mode is started after the dynamic display of one of the high-expectation dynamic display modes is finished, so that the player It is possible to play a game by focusing on the high-expectation dynamic display mode. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

In the gaming machine O6 or O7, there is provided visual recognition notifying means for notifying the player of the identification information different from the identification information whose start of dynamic display has been delayed by the dynamic display delay means. A gaming machine O8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O6 or O7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the visual notification means notifies the player of the identification information different from the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Therefore, the player can easily determine which identification information should be focused on the dynamic display. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for imparting a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a hit, the first or second game machine. 2 When the win/fail judgment condition is satisfied, the first or second corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition that has been satisfied until the first display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is started. Suspension information storage means for storing suspension information having at least judgment information of success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means executed when identification information can be dynamically displayed. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed based on the hold information being stored, whether the hold information is valid or not. Based on the advance hit determination means for performing the judgment in advance and the hit determination result by the advance hit determination means, the advance notification for determining whether or not to notify that the result of the advance judgment was hit A gaming machine P1 characterized by having a deciding means and a pre-reading notifying means for notifying the player of the winning/non-judgment result of the prior winning/non-winning judgment means when the prior notification deciding means decides ..

According to the gaming machine P1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. When the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the first or second identification information corresponding to the win/fail determination condition that has been satisfied corresponds to the win/fail determination condition that has been satisfied until the dynamic display is started. Suspension information having at least the success/failure determination information of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination unit executed when the first or second identification information becomes dynamically displayable is stored in the suspension information storage unit. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be dynamically displayed based on the fact that the hold information is newly stored in the hold information storage means. The advance/rejection determination means determines in advance whether or not the hold information is valid. Based on the hit/nozzle determination result by the pre-win/no-judgment means, the pre-notification determination means determines whether or not to notify that the pre-judgment result is a win. When the advance notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the preliminary determination is a win, the look-ahead notification means notifies the player of the win/fail judgment result of the advance win/failure determination means. As a result, since the notification result is notified in advance before the result of the determination result is notified by the identification information, the result of the determination result can be notified to the player earlier and the expectation for the jackpot can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is determined based on the fulfillment of the first win/loss determination condition, and based on the establishment of the second win/loss determination means, The holding information storage means has a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition, and the suspension information storage means holds the first or second win/loss determination condition. In addition, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the established hit/miss determination condition is dynamically displayed, the suspension information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the first or second hit/absence determination condition is satisfied and new holding information is stored, the remaining dynamic display of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display is stored. The time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined based on the time and the previously stored dynamic display mode of each hold information. Then, the dynamic display start time information determining means to be stored in the holding information storage means, and the determination of whether or not the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after the privilege game execution means has executed the privilege game, The lottery information for lottery whether or not to shift to a special game state that is more likely to be won than usual is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second win/win determination condition, and the first or second win/loss determination condition. When the hold information corresponding to the established determination condition is stored, the game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information is provided. , The prior win determination means, based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, whether the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each hold information is the special game state. A gaming machine P2, characterized in that the judgment is made based on the lottery information, and whether or not the game is won is made in advance.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/loss judgment condition, based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition. When the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determining means determines until the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail determination condition is dynamically displayed. Suspension information having at least information regarding the dynamic display mode is stored in the suspension information storage means. When the first or second hit determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed is stored first. The dynamic display start time information determining means determines the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information becomes the dynamic display start based on the dynamic display mode for each pending information. And stored in the holding information storage means. A lottery for selecting whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to hit the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game. The information is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second win/loss determination condition. Further, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, it is determined by lottery information whether the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the advance winning/disabling determination means is determined. According to the above, the acceptance/rejection determination is executed in advance. As a result, the game state at the start of fluctuation is determined in advance, and based on the result, the win/fail determination is performed in advance, so that more accurate advance/non-win determination can be performed. Therefore, the player can be notified of accurate information in advance, and the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine P2, when the result of the prior determination is determined to be notified by the prior notification determining means, and the result of the success/failure determination executed based on the established success/failure determination condition is a success. In the above, the dynamic display mode determination means has notified that the notification determination means has been hit as a dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition. A gaming machine P3, characterized in that the first or second identification information corresponding to the information determines an extended dynamic display mode that is longer than the start of dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the advance notification determination means that the result of the preliminary determination is a hit, and the result of the success/failure determination executed based on the established success/failure determination condition is a success, The display mode determination means, as the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition, is the first or the first corresponding to the hold information which notifies that the notification determination means has hit. The extended dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, which is longer than the period in which the 2 identification information starts the dynamic display. Here, after being notified that the result of the pre-determination is a hit by the look-ahead informing means, the lottery game based on the win/loss determination condition that has been established thereafter, the identification information is stopped and displayed earlier than the informed lottery game. Then, when the game state is changed, the result of the preliminary determination may change. Then, as a result of changing the result of the pre-determination, there may be a problem that the pre-reading notification means does not result in a hit even though the hit is notified. However, since the extended dynamic display mode is determined, the identification information corresponding to the suspension information notified in advance of the winning is dynamically displayed first. Therefore, since the dynamic display is started in the same gaming state as the gaming state determined when the preliminary determination is performed, the result of the preliminary determination and the determination at the time of starting the dynamic display can be matched. Therefore, there is an effect that the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means and the second identification information for indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means are dynamic. Second display means to be displayed, display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit, the player A privilege game execution means for giving an advantageous privilege game, and when the first or second win/loss determination condition is met, the first or second identification information corresponding to the win/win condition determination condition that has been met is Until the dynamic display is started, a reservation information storage unit that stores reservation information including at least judgment information relating to the judgment of the established first win/fail judgment condition or the second win/fail judgment condition, and the hold information storage unit. The first and second identification information and the second identification information are stored in the holding information, respectively, and the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in relation to each other. And a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a fusion dynamic display mode for notifying the result of judgment of the first lottery game and the second lottery game by dynamically displaying in a mode. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine Q1, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the first win/no judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. When the first or second win/win judgment condition is met, the first win/win judgment condition or the first win/win judgment condition that is satisfied until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is started. (2) Hold information having at least hit/miss determination information related to the hit/no hit determination is stored in the hold information storage means. The holding information storage means stores the holding information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, and the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically associated with each other. The dynamic display mode determination means determines a fusion dynamic display mode for notifying the result of the determination whether the first lottery gaming machine and the second lottery game are played by dynamically displaying in the display mode. Thus, the fusion dynamic display mode makes it possible to easily determine at a time the win/no win determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player that the determination result cannot be identified by the dynamic display of the win/loss determination results of the first lottery game and the second lottery game independently.

In the gaming machine Q1, the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed when the hold information of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition are respectively stored in the hold information storage means. Fusion determination means for determining whether the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied is provided, and the dynamic display mode determination means is configured to perform the fusion when the fusion determination condition is determined to be satisfied. While determining the dynamic display mode, when the fusion determination condition is determined to be unsatisfied by the fusion determination means, the determination result corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is met based on the satisfaction of the first win/defeat determination condition A dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode of the first identification information and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition are independent of each other A gaming machine Q2 characterized by being determined as.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the fusion dynamic condition for dynamically displaying the fusion dynamic display mode has been established when the suspension information storage means stores the suspension information of each of the first win/defeat determination condition and the second win/defeat determination condition. It is discriminated by the fusion discriminating means. When the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, the fusion dynamic display mode is determined by the fusion dynamic display mode determination means. On the other hand, if the fusion determination unit determines that the fusion dynamic condition is not satisfied, the first display of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first win/win determination condition. And the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition are determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as independent dynamic display modes based on the satisfaction of the second win/no decision condition. It Accordingly, even when the fusion dynamic display mode cannot be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display modes of the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed, respectively, and thus the fusion dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Until it becomes possible, it is possible to prevent the problem that the lottery game is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the dynamic display according to the state of the game to the player.

In the gaming machine Q1 or 2, the fusion dynamic display mode is composed of a first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode, respectively, in synchronization with each other, respectively. ..

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the fusion dynamic display mode is configured by the first fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and the second fusion dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information. The first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are synchronously determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. As a result, the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are determined in synchronization, so that the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode are started at the same timing. Easy to configure. Therefore, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in a dynamic display mode in which they are associated with each other, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of each other from deviating from that set. Therefore, the fusion dynamic display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be dynamically displayed, and the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q3, when it is determined by the fusion determination means that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, the first win/failure determination condition and the second win/failure determination condition stored in the hold information storage means are set. It has a synchronization adjusting means for assisting the dynamic display mode determining means to determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode based on the corresponding hold information at the synchronized timing. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the fusion determination means that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, the first determination result based on the hold information corresponding to the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The synchronization adjusting means assists the dynamic display manner determining means to determine the first fusion dynamic display manner and the second fusion dynamic display manner at the synchronized timing. Accordingly, the dynamic display mode determination means can more easily determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode at the synchronized timing. Therefore, by dynamically displaying the first dynamic display mode and the second dynamic display mode at the synchronized timing, the dynamic display related to the first lottery game and the second lottery game was started at the same time. This can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition The first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means and the second identification information for indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means are dynamic. Second display means to be displayed, display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit, the player A privilege game executing means for giving an advantageous privilege game, and based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, the game state after the privilege game given by the privilege game executing means is set. A game state determining means for determining whether to shift to a normal game state or a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; The lottery monitoring means for determining whether or not the first or second win/loss determination condition is determined to be transferred to the normal game state by the game state determining means, and the lottery monitoring means for satisfying the condition. When it is determined that the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied, a bonus delay means for delaying the start of the bonus game corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition that is determined to satisfy the condition, A gaming machine R1 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine R1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. Based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, the gaming state after the bonus game given by the bonus game executing means is the normal gaming state and the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The game state determining means determines to which of the following. When the special gaming state is in effect, the lottery monitoring means determines that the first or second win/loss determination condition is determined by the win/loss determination means and the game state determination means determines to shift to the normal gaming state. It When it is determined by the lottery monitoring means that the first or second win/loss determination condition that satisfies the condition is satisfied, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition that is determined to satisfy the condition. It is delayed by the bonus game delay means. As a result, even if the player wins the game when shifting to the normal game state, the game is executed in the special game state until the bonus game is executed, so that the player can play the game in the special game state for a longer time. Can be done. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine R1, while one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being dynamically displayed, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means with the other identification information, the one of the one is displayed. Privilege game carry-over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the identification information until the other privilege game is completed, and the result of judgment whether or not the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the completion of the privilege game A gaming machine R2, characterized in that, regardless of the gaming state after the bonus game, a winning/unwinning determination maintaining means for maintaining the winning/unwinning determination result determined in the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display.

The gaming machine R2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1. That is, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means with the other identification information during the dynamic display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining movement of the one identification information is performed. The special display is carried over by the special game carry-over means until the other special game is finished. Then, the result of the judgment of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the end of the privilege game is judged by the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game. The judgment result is maintained by the judgment determination maintaining means.

As a result, during the special game state, while the start of the privilege game that is a transition to the normal game state is delayed, the determination in the special game state is maintained for the lottery game whose dynamic display is started. Therefore, even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage that would be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new winning while the bonus game is delayed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, at least the normal dynamic display mode and the normal mode. Determined according to the establishment of a dynamic display start condition from a dynamic display aspect group configured by an extended dynamic display aspect having a dynamic display time longer than that of the dynamic display aspect, and based on the establishment of the second hit/absence determining means. And a dynamic display mode deciding means for deciding a dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition in accordance with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group, and the privilege delaying means, The gaming machine R3, which delays the start of the privilege game by causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine R3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2. That is, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, and at least the dynamic display time is longer than the normal dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. Is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group configured by the long extended dynamic display mode. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by means. Then, by causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode, the start of the privilege game is delayed by the privilege delay means. Therefore, since the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed even while the start of the bonus game is delayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored during the delayed time.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied, the first established condition is satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is satisfied. On-hold information storage means for storing on-hold information having at least the win/fail judgment information related to the hit/no hit judgment of the first or second hit/no hit judgment condition and the game status information related to the game status determined by the game status determination means; Based on the fact that the hold information is newly stored in the storage means, the game state determined as the result of the judgment of hitting corresponding to the holding information is determined before or after the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. It has a preliminary judgment means for judging from information and the game state information, and the lottery monitoring means, based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means, the first or second winning/judging judgment condition which satisfies the condition. The privilege delay means stores, in the reserved information storage means, the hold information corresponding to the first or second winning/disabling judgment condition which is determined by the lottery monitoring means to satisfy the condition. On the basis of the fact that the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, with respect to the same hit/damage determination condition stored in the holding information storage unit prior to the judged hit/miss determination condition, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine R4, wherein the extended dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means.

The gaming machine R4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R3. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is met, the win/fail judgment of the met first or second win/loss judgment condition is made. On-hold information storing means stores at least hold information having at least a hit/miss determination information related to the above and a game state related to the game state determined by the game state determining means. Based on the fact that the hold information is newly stored in the hold information storage means, the game state determined as the result by the critic corresponding to the hold information is the hit/miss judgment information before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. And the game state information is used for determination by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result of the advance determination means, it is determined by the lottery monitoring means whether the first or second win/fail determination condition that satisfies the condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the hold information corresponding to the first or second win/loss determination condition that the lottery monitoring means determines that meets the conditions is stored in the hold information storage means, the hold information precedes the determined win/loss determination condition. The privilege delay means causes the dynamic display manner determination means to determine the extended dynamic display manner according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition for the same hit/absence determination condition stored in the storage means. As a result, even when the pending information to be dynamically displayed is stored prior to the stored pending information that is to be transferred to the normal gaming state, when the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, the pending information is also stored before the pending information. Since the extended dynamic display mode is determined as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the held information being held, it is possible to delay the start of the privilege game corresponding to the held information, which is a point of shifting to the more normal gaming state. Therefore, even when the winning/disabling determination condition for shifting to the normal game state is established during the special game state and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the player is in the special game state for a longer time. A game can be played.

In the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the privilege delay means corresponds to one of the first and second winning/disabling determination conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means. Is stored in the holding information storage means, if the result of the judgment is hit by the pre-judgment means, and if the other judgment condition of the other is judged to be decided in the special game state is newly established. , The start of the privilege game corresponding to the suspension information of the other winning/disabling determination condition which is the transition to the newly established special game state, and the transition to the normal game state stored in the suspension information storage means. The gaming machine R5, which is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the pending information.

The gaming machine R5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4. That is, while the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second win/fail judgment conditions determined to satisfy the condition by the lottery monitoring means is stored in the hold information storage means, the win/fail judgment result is judged by the pre-determination means. In the case where the other winning/judging determination condition that is determined to determine the special gaming state is newly established, the privilege corresponding to the hold information of the winning/discarding determination condition that is a transition to the newly established special gaming state The start of the game is delayed by the privilege delay means rather than the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information that is to be transferred to the normal game state stored in the hold information storage means. As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the normal game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the special game state is executed, and thus even after the two privilege games are executed. The player can be allowed to play a game in the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and it is possible to suppress the expectation for the jackpot.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with an instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first winning/judging condition. Then, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed, and the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/no win determination condition. On the basis of the result, the first win/loss determination signal has win/loss determination signal generating means for respectively generating second win/loss determination signals based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means, The sub-control means, based on the first win/loss judgment signal, first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the first lottery game, and based on the second win/loss judgment signal. , A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game, and the result of the determination of the result of the determination of success is a hit, and hits the first or second display means. When the first or second identification information indicating is displayed in a stopped state, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is given, and the main control unit determines that the win/loss determination unit determines that the winning combination is a win. Whether the gaming state after the bonus game is the first jackpot for shifting to the first gaming state or the second jackpot for shifting to the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state Based on whether the first or second win/win determination condition is met, whether the hit is the first jackpot or the second jackpot. Predetermination means for determining whether or not it is a hit before the dynamic display start condition, which is the condition for starting the dynamic display, by the identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition, and the predetermination means Based on the result of the determination, the preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information regarding the determination result, and the preliminary determination signal generation means for outputting to the secondary control means. , The sub-control means, on the basis of receiving the advance determination signal, until the dynamic display start condition of the win/fail determination condition corresponding to the advance determination information indicated by the received advance determination signal is satisfied, Based on the sub-hold information storage unit that stores the pre-determination information and the pre-determination information stored in the sub-hold information storage unit, it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information indicating that the first big hit is stored. The secondary monitoring means and the secondary monitoring means Whether or not to notify the player of the game state transition information related to the preliminary determination information determined to be the first jackpot based on the determination that the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot is to be stored is stored. And a notification means for notifying the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information when it is determined that the player is notified by the advance notification determination means. And a gaming machine S1.

According to the gaming machine S1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. In the main control means, when the hit determination means determines a hit, the gaming state after the bonus game is set to the first jackpot to be shifted to the first gaming state, or the player is more than the first gaming state. The second jackpot to be shifted to the second gaming state, which is advantageous to, is determined by the hit type determining means. Based on the fact that the first or second win/loss judgment condition is met, whether the hit is the first jackpot or the second jackpot is met. The identification information corresponding to the hit determination condition is determined by the pre-determination unit before the dynamic display start condition that is the condition for starting the dynamic display is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information regarding the determination result is generated by the preliminary determination signal generation means and output to the secondary control means. .. Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the preliminary determination signal, until the dynamic display start condition of the hit determination condition corresponding to the preliminary determination information, the preliminary determination information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Remembered. Based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information indicating that the first big hit is stored. Based on the fact that the secondary monitoring means determines that the pre-determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be stored, the game state transition information relating to the pre-determination information that is determined to be the first jackpot is provided to the player. Whether or not to notify is determined by the advance notification determining means. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notification means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information. As a result, the player is notified of the game state transition notification mode, and if the current game state is the second game state, the player determines that the remaining time of the second game state is short, and the remaining time. A game can be played by effectively utilizing time. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine S1, the pre-determination signal generating means of the main control means generates the pre-determination signal capable of discriminating a win/fail judgment condition corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured in a notification mode capable of distinguishing whether the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the advance determination information is the first win/loss determination condition or the second win/loss determination condition. A gaming machine S2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1. That is, in the main control means, with respect to the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, the pre-judgment signal generating means generates a pre-judgment signal capable of discriminating the hit/miss judgment condition corresponding to the judgment result. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured as a notification mode in which it is possible to identify whether the win/failure determination condition corresponding to the advance determination notification mode is the first win/failure determination condition or the second win/fail determination condition. Thereby, the player can play the game so that the first jackpot is not satisfied by the game state transition notification mode, and the winning/deciding condition is preferentially satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to play the game more effectively using the second game state. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, when the main control unit determines that the first or second win/loss determination condition that is the first jackpot is satisfied during the second game state. The gaming machine S3, further comprising: a privilege delay means for delaying the start of the privilege game corresponding to the determined first or second win/loss determination condition.

According to the gaming machine S3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined by the pre-determination means during the second game state that the first or second win/loss determination condition that is the first jackpot is satisfied, the determined first or second win/loss When it is determined that the determination condition is satisfied, the start of the determined privilege game is delayed by the privilege delay means. As a result, the second game state is given to the player for a longer time, and more profit can be given to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the operating means that can be operated by the player, and the first operating of the operating means by the player, the first win/win judgment condition is satisfied rather than the second win/win judgment condition. Variable means for changing the first advantageous state that is easy to perform and the second advantageous state in which the second win/loss determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first win/loss determination condition by performing a second operation that is different from the first operation. A gaming machine S4 characterized by having.

The gaming machine S4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3. That is, the first advantageous state in which the first win/win judgment condition is more easily established than the second win/win judgment condition by the player first operating the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first operation which is different from the first operation By performing two operations, the variable means changes the state to the second advantageous state in which the second win/loss determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first win/loss determination condition. Thereby, based on the delay information notified by the notification means, by operating the operation means, it is possible to change to a state in which the win/loss determination condition different from the win/loss determination condition in which the privilege game is delayed is easily established. More lottery games can be played by the player during the second game state. Therefore, more profit can be given to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, when the main control means is dynamically displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the bonus game is given by the other identification information. Includes a bonus game carry-over means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the bonus game for the other is finished, and the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the bonus game is finished. A win/loss judgment maintaining means for maintaining the win/no judgment result of the identification information with the win/no judgment result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the bonus game. Gaming machine S5.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, when one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, when the privilege game is given by the other identification information, the remaining movement of one of the identification information is performed. The special game carry-over means carries over until the special display of the other special game ends. Then, the result of the judgment of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the end of the privilege game is judged by the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game. The judgment result is maintained by the judgment determination maintaining means.

As a result, during the second game state, the lottery game whose dynamic display is started is delayed in the second game state while delaying the start of the privilege game that is a transition to the first game state. Since it is maintained, even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent a problem that would be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new win while the bonus game is delayed.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss judgment condition, at least the normal display mode of the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win condition. Determination based on the establishment of a dynamic display start condition from a dynamic display mode group configured by a dynamic display mode and an extended dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time longer than that of the normal dynamic display mode, and the second winning/absence determination Dynamic display mode determining means for determining, based on the establishment of the means, a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition from the dynamic display mode group according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; A pre-dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition. Generating a pre-dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the determination means and the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determination means; A preliminary dynamic display mode signal generating means for outputting to the slave control means, and the slave monitoring means determines the extended dynamic display mode based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal. A gaming machine S6 for determining whether or not the pre-determination information for the first jackpot is stored.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition is based on at least the normal win/win state and the normal dynamic display mode based on the fulfillment of the first win/loss determination condition. Is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from the dynamic display mode group configured by the extended dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display time according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by means. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition. Is determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means. A preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means and output to the slave control means. It Based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal, the secondary monitoring unit determines whether or not the preliminary determination information that is the first jackpot for determining the extended dynamic display mode is stored. As a result, the player is informed in the gaming state transition notifying mode that the winning/judging determination condition for the first jackpot, in which the delayed start during the second gaming state is delayed, is satisfied. Therefore, by being notified of the game state transition notification mode, the player can more quickly determine that the remaining second game state is short and can effectively use the remaining second game state.

In any of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the main control means is based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/loss judgment condition, and is a first jackpot against the hit win/fail judgment condition that has been established, or a positive change. The main holding information storage means stores the holding information for determining whether or not to be a big hit until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the pre-determination means of the main control means is a main holding information storage means. The determination is made based on the stored hold information, and the privilege delay means of the main control means has the hold information corresponding to one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition. In the state where the pre-article determination means has determined that the first big hit, the holding information corresponding to the other is newly established, and when the holding information determines that it is the second big hit, The start of the privilege game corresponding to the newly established hold information of the other win/fail judgment condition is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the first jackpot hold information stored in the hold information storage means. A gaming machine S7 characterized by being present.
According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S3 to S6, the following effect is produced. That is, in the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second hit/miss determination condition, a hold for determining whether the hit/win determination condition that has been satisfied is the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. The information is stored in the main pending information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, the advance determination means makes a determination. In the main control means, while the holding information corresponding to one of the first winning/disagreement judging condition and the second winning/damage judging condition is judged to be the first jackpot by the preliminary judging means, the holding information corresponding to the other is newly added. When the hold information is determined to be the second jackpot, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the newly held hold information of the other hit/miss determination condition is stored in the hold information storage means. The privilege delay means delays the start of the privilege game corresponding to the stored first jackpot holding information. As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the first game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the second game state is executed, so that two privilege games are executed. After that, the player can be allowed to play a game in the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and it is possible to suppress the expectation for the jackpot.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. First display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means, and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means Second display means to be displayed, display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, and When the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a hit, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the hit, the player And a bonus game execution means for giving an advantageous bonus game, and when the result of the determination by the determination means is a win, the game state after the bonus game given by the privilege game execution means Is a normal jackpot for shifting to a normal gaming state or a special jackpot for shifting to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a hit type determining means, and the first hit/absence determination condition. On the basis of the establishment, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination means, the success/failure established. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the determination condition according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and the dynamic display mode determination means is already established before the dynamic display start condition is established. Pre-judgment means for judging whether the normal big hit or the special big hit is achieved before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, with respect to the first or second hit/absence judgment condition, and the dynamic display start condition In one of the first hit determination conditions and the second hit determination conditions before the above is satisfied, it is determined by the pre-determination means when the normal jackpot, in the other hit determination conditions, When the pre-judgment means determines that the special jackpot is to be made, the start of the bonus game corresponding to the win/loss determination condition that is determined to be the normal jackpot corresponds to the win/loss determination condition that is determined to be the special jackpot. A gaming machine T1 comprising: a privilege start adjusting means for adjusting the start time of the privilege game so as to precede the start of the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine T1, whether or not the first lottery game is won is determined by the win/loss determination means based on the establishment of the first win/loss determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. When the hit/no hit determination result by the hit/no hit determination means is a win, the player is more advantageous than the normal jackpot and the normal game status in which the gaming state after the bonus game given by the bonus game execution means is shifted to the normal gaming state. Either the special jackpot to shift to the special game state is determined by the hit type determining means. Based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display start condition is satisfied depending on whether the normal or special jackpot is achieved with respect to the already established first or second win/loss determination condition. Before, it is judged by the preliminary judgment means. Before the dynamic display start condition is established, one of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions is usually judged by the pre-judgment means as a jackpot, and the other win/win judgment condition is: When it is determined by the pre-judgment means that the special jackpot is reached, the start of the bonus game is adjusted by the bonus start adjustment means so that the start of the bonus jackpot game of the normal jackpot is preceded by the start of the bonus jackpot game of the special jackpot. It As a result, the normal jackpot is started, and after shifting to the normal gaming state, the special jackpot is executed and shifted to the special gaming state, so that the player can have a great expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine T1, the privilege start adjusting means is a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined by the pre-determination means when the normal jackpot is achieved, and the advance determination is performed when the special jackpot is achieved. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the shortened dynamic display mode that has a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined by the means. Or a dynamic display mode determining means as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the special jackpot, as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the normal jackpot. A gaming machine T2, characterized in that the dynamic display mode determining means determines an extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode determined by.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are produced. That is, as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition determined to be a normal jackpot, a dynamic display mode determination means determines as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/loss determination condition determined to be the special jackpot. The privileged start adjustment means causes the dynamic display mode determination means to determine a shortened dynamic display mode that has a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode. Alternatively, as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined to be the special jackpot, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined to be the normal jackpot. The privilege start adjustment means causes the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode that has a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode. Thereby, by adjusting the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode that is a normal jackpot or the dynamic display mode that is a special jackpot, the start of the bonus game of the normal jackpot is easier than the start of the bonus game of the special jackpot. It can be adjusted to come first. Therefore, a lot of profits can be given to the player while entertaining the dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine described in the gaming machine T1 or T2, when the first or second win/win determination condition is met, it is established before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is met. The holding information storage unit that stores the holding information having at least the hit determination information relating to the hit determination of the first or second hit determination condition, and the first information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storing unit. Alternatively, the preliminary display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means for the second identification information before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and the determination by the preliminary display mode determining means. Based on the result and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information which is being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means, a first information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means. End time discriminating means for discriminating time information related to the time until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information is terminated, and the privilege start adjusting means comprises the first win/fail judgment condition and the second For either one of the hit determination conditions and the hit determination conditions, when the holding information corresponding to the hit determination conditions determined by the pre-determination unit when the normal jackpot is stored in the holding information storage unit, Regarding the other newly established hit determination condition, if it is determined by the pre-determination means that the jackpot is a special jackpot, the normal jackpot holding information determined by the end time determination means The adjustment dynamic display mode configured by the dynamic display time such that the dynamic display corresponding to the pending information to be the special jackpot ends after the time when the dynamic display corresponding to The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the pending information, which is one of the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions. When the pending information corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined by the pre-judgment unit when the special jackpot is stored in the reservation information storage unit, the other pre-determined win/fail judgment condition newly established. When it is determined by the determination means that the winning/decision condition is normally a big jackpot, before the time when the dynamic display corresponding to the special jackpot holding information determined by the end time determination means ends. , The adjustment dynamic composed of the dynamic display time such that the dynamic display corresponding to the normally-held jackpot information ends. A gaming machine T3, characterized in that the dynamic display mode determining means determines a display mode as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the normally held jackpot holding information.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met, before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the met win/fail judgment condition is met, the win/fail judgment of the met first or second win/loss judgment condition is made. The holding information storing means stores the holding information having at least the hit/miss determination information related to the. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means. Then, it is determined by the prior aspect determination means. The first or second corresponding to the suspension information based on the determination result in the preliminary aspect determination means and the remaining dynamic display aspect of the first or second identification information during the dynamic display in the first or second display means. The time information relating to the time until the dynamic display of the identification information is ended is judged by the ending time judgment means. With respect to either one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition, when the pending information corresponding to the hit determination condition determined by the pre-determination means to be a normal jackpot is stored, Regarding the other win/fail judgment condition established in step 1, when the pre-judgment means determines that the win/judgment condition is a special jackpot, the dynamic display of the normally held jackpot holding information determined by the end time determination means is displayed. An adjusted dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display time such that the dynamic display of the holding information that is a special jackpot ends after the time until the end is a dynamic display mode of the holding information that is a special jackpot. As a result, the dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the privilege start adjusting means. On the other hand, with respect to either one of the first hit determination condition and the second hit determination condition, when the pending information corresponding to the hit determination condition determined by the pre-determination unit when the special jackpot is determined is stored. For the newly established win/loss judgment condition, if the pre-judgment means determines that the win/judgment condition is a normal jackpot, the end time determination means dynamically determines the pending information to be a special jackpot. The adjustment dynamic display mode configured by the dynamic display time such that the dynamic display of the normally-held jackpot information ends before the time until the display finishes is displayed. As the dynamic display mode, the dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the privilege start adjustment means. Thus, if the dynamic display time of the adjusted dynamic display mode is set so as to reduce the difference between the start of the special jackpot bonus game and the start of the special jackpot bonus game, the player performs the bonus game at a good tempo. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can play more lottery games.

Based on the satisfaction of the win/loss judgment condition, a win/loss judgment information acquisition means for acquiring the win/loss judgment information of the game, a win/loss judgment means for judging the win/loss judgment information acquired by the win/loss judgment information acquisition means, and a win/loss judgment means therefor. Based on the result of the hit determination, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and an operation means operable by the player, and within a preset effective period. An operation lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the operation means, and an informing means for informing a player of information related to a game when the operation lottery means determines a hit And a lottery probability changing means for setting the lottery probability that the operation lottery means determines to be a win, to different lottery probabilities in the first effective period and the second effective period different from the first effective period within the effective period. A gaming machine U1 characterized in that it has.

According to the gaming machine U1, the win/loss judgment information of the game is acquired by the win/no judgment information acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the win/no judgment condition. The hit/damage determination information acquired by the hit/damage determination information acquisition means is judged by the hit/miss determination means. The bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the hit determination being made by the hit determination means. A predetermined lottery is performed by the operation lottery means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player within a predetermined effective period. When the operation lottery means determines that the player has won, the notification means notifies the player of the information related to the game. The lottery probability determined by the operation lottery means to be a win is set by the lottery probability changing means to different lottery probabilities in the first valid period and the second valid period different from the first valid period within the valid period. With this, when the player operates the operation means within the valid period, the probability of being notified of the information related to the game can be changed depending on whether it is the first valid period or the second valid period. It is possible to improve the motivation to operate the operating means. Therefore, since the information related to the game can be notified by the operation of the player himself, it is possible to suppress the boredom of the game.

In the gaming machine U1, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games, and the first valid period is a period during which one of the plurality of small privilege games is executed. The second effective period is set during a period during which any of the plurality of small privilege games, which is different from the small privilege game set during the first effective period, is executed. A gaming machine U2 characterized by being set.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games. A first valid period is set during a period in which any one of the small privilege games is executed. Further, among the plurality of small privilege games, the second effective period is set during a period during which a small privilege game different from the small privilege game for which the first effective period is set is executed. This makes it possible to change the probability of informing the information related to the game during the first valid period and the second valid period during the privilege game, and improve the motivation to operate the operation means even during the privilege game. it can. Therefore, even during the bonus game, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, based on the satisfaction of the win/fail judgment condition, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the win/win judgment condition is satisfied, the win/no judgment is made. Before the start of the dynamic display start condition, based on the pending information storage unit that stores the pending information having at least the hit/miss judgment information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and the pending information stored in the pending information storage unit. The pre-judgment information is determined by the pre-judgment means in the holding information stored in the holding information storage means. A gaming machine U3, which is information relating to whether or not the hold information is stored.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are produced. That is, on the basis of the satisfaction of the hit determination condition, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the hit determination condition is satisfied, it is acquired by the hit determination information acquisition means. The pending information having at least the hit determination information is stored by the pending information storage means. Based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means, the pre-judgment means judges the win/fail judgment result before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The information related to the game notified to the player is composed of information related to whether or not the holding information stored in the holding information storage means is stored as the holding information determined to be hit by the pre-determination means. ing. Therefore, by operating the operation means, the player can know the hit/miss determination result for the hold information stored in the hold information storage means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can know the result of winning/judging earlier by his/her operation. In addition, even if the hold information to be won is not notified by the operation of the operation means, with the expectation that there is actually hold information to be won just by being out of the lottery by the operation means, the identification information You can enjoy the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

In the gaming machine U2, with respect to the hit determined by the win/loss determination means, a normal jackpot that shifts the game state after the privilege game is executed to the normal game state and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state The special jackpot to be moved to the special game state is to have a hit type determination means for determining either one, and the information related to the game is the normal jackpot that is the trigger for the privilege game being executed. A gaming machine U4, which is information relating to whether or not it is the special jackpot.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effect described in the game machine U2, the following effect is achieved. That is, with respect to the hit determined by the hit determination means, a normal jackpot that shifts the game state after the privilege game is executed to the normal game state and a special game state that is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Either one of the special jackpots to be transferred is determined by the hit type determining means. Information relating to whether the hit that triggered the execution of the privilege game being executed is a normal jackpot or a special jackpot is notified as information relating to the game.

Thereby, the player can recognize the game state after the privilege game is executed during the privilege game at an early stage by operating the operation means. Further, even during the bonus game, the lottery probability based on the operation of the operating device is changed, so that it is possible to change the lottery probability depending on the period of operating the operating device during the bonus game. Therefore, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game during the bonus game.

A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/loss determination means for performing a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first display means of the second lottery game by the prize determination means. The second identification information indicating the result of the hit determination is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second hit determination condition is satisfied, and the first identification information is displayed on the first display means by the second identification information. The display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the information on the second display means and the result of the hit/damage determination by the hit/miss determination means are hits, and the display control means causes the first or second display means to display the information. The first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a hit, and a privilege game execution means for giving a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is established, and the first hit determination condition is satisfied. On the basis of the above, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is established, the right to execute the first lottery game is suspended, and the first lottery game is held. (2) The right to execute the second lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is met based on the satisfaction of the win/loss determination condition. And a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit/absence determination condition, with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition as a trigger, The dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is determined based on the number of holdings held in the holding means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Dynamic display mode deciding means to be decided according to the above, and for each hold held by the holding means every time a predetermined judgment condition is met, the holding means holds the holding means when the judgment condition is met. Preliminary dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode based on the number, and when the first or second determination condition is satisfied, is satisfied until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The holding information including at least the order of satisfaction of the winning/judging determination conditions, which is the combination of the first winning/failure judging condition and the second winning/damage judging condition, and the information on the dynamic display mode judged by the advance dynamic display mode judging means is stored. Hold information storage means, first win/fail judgment condition and second win/fail judgment stored in the hold information storage means While distinguishing the hold information from the determination conditions, the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions that combine the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions for each hold information are displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode. Each time the judgment conditions of the holding display means and the preliminary dynamic display mode judging means are satisfied, the preliminary dynamic display mode judging means for each holding information stored in the holding information storage means is judged. Based on the dynamic display mode and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed, until the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed for each hold information. The time information is determined or updated, and the start time information updating means for storing the time information in the holding information storage means, and the start time information updating means stores the time information in the holding information storage means upon the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a rearrangement means for rearranging the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the respective time information thus obtained. Gaming machine V1.

According to the gaming machine V1, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the first win/no judgment condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination unit is performed by the second display unit in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied. Here, the first identification information is displayed on the first display means, the second identification information is displayed on the second display means, and the display control means can dynamically display the information. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination unit is a win, and the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the privilege game. Performed by means. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. The right to execute the first lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition. Is held by the holding means. Also, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the second lottery game is executed until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the win/win judgment condition is satisfied. The right to do is reserved by the reservation means. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first win/fail judgment condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the number of reservations held in the holding means upon the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. It is determined. Further, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is based on the number of reservations held by the holding means upon the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by the determining means. Each time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, for each of the holds held by the holding means, the dynamic display mode is based on the number of holds when the determination condition is satisfied, the pre-dynamic display mode determination means. Is determined by. When the first or second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied, until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the win/fail judgment condition is fulfilled by combining the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition that are satisfied. Suspension information having at least information regarding the dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The winning/losing result in which the first winning/failing determination condition and the second winning/failing determination condition are combined for each holding information while distinguishing the pending information of the first winning/failure judging condition and the second winning/failing judgment condition stored in the pending information storage means. The order in which the determination conditions are satisfied is displayed by the hold display means as a display in a distinguishable hold display mode. Each time the determination condition of the advance dynamic display mode determination means is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means for each hold information and the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed Based on the remaining dynamic display mode, the time information until the first or second identification information becomes the dynamic display start is determined or updated by the start time information updating means for each holding information, and stored in the holding information storage means. Remembered. Then, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is dynamically displayed based on each time information stored in the hold information storage means by the start time information updating means. Are sorted by the sorting means in the order of starting. Thereby, for example, the hold information for the second lottery game is newly stored while the hold information for the first lottery game is stored in advance. At this time, if the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, a new storage is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the held information of the second lottery game is the dynamic of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. It will be earlier than the display start time. However, since the hold display mode is displayed in order in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions, which are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions, are sequentially displayed, the first lottery stored previously In the hold display mode showing the order after the game hold information, the newly stored hold display mode of the second lottery game is displayed. Then, there may be a case where the start order of the actual dynamic display is different from the fulfillment order of the acceptance/rejection determination condition. It is sorted and displayed in the starting order. In addition, the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information is determined based on the number of holdings of the holding means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. When the increase/decrease is determined, the dynamic display mode determined in advance changes. Therefore, the order in which the dynamic display starts is changed, but the time information for starting the dynamic display is also determined or updated every time the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, so that a more accurate dynamic display can be obtained. The player can be notified of the starting order. Therefore, even if the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in an order different from the order in which the actual win/loss determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to start the dynamic display. Since the hold display modes are rearranged, the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine V1, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged and displayed in the order in which the dynamic display is started, the hold display mode is rearranged and displayed. As a result of the time information of the corresponding hold information being updated by the start time information updating means, an order monitoring means for determining whether the order displayed by rearrangement has been changed, and the order monitoring means changes the order. When it is determined that the occurrence has occurred, the reserving display mode that is rearranged and displayed is rearranged in an order in which a new dynamic display is started, and a rearrangement updating means, and a game characterized by the above. Machine V2.

The gaming machine V2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1. That is, when the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, the time of the hold information corresponding to the hold display mode rearranged and displayed. As a result of the information being updated by the start time information updating means, the order monitoring means determines whether or not there is a change in the order in which the information is rearranged and displayed. When it is determined by the order monitoring means that the order has been changed, the rearranged display means rearranges and displays the reserved display mode by the rearrangement updating means in the order of starting a new dynamic display. As a result, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied and the hold display modes are rearranged and displayed, and then the order in which the dynamic display is started changes due to increase or decrease of the hold, etc. Since it is performed, the player can recognize the correct rearrangement order. Therefore, the confusion of the player can be further suppressed.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, when the rearrangement updating means rearranges the dynamic display in the order in which the new dynamic display is started, the change start order of the suspended display mode displayed in the rearrangement is changed. A gaming machine V3 having a notifying means for notifying a player of

The gaming machine V3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2. That is, when the rearrangement updating means rearranges the dynamic display in the order in which the new dynamic display is started, the player is informed that the change start order of the suspended display mode displayed in the rearrangement has been changed. Will be notified by. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the change start order of the hold display mode displayed by rearranging has been changed. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, In any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z1 characterized by. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, In any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z2. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, In any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 to U4, V1 to V3, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion of and. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a plurality of starting openings provided on the game board surface, the winning or failure of the game is drawn by lot, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed. It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, corresponding to each starting port, the winning or losing of the game is individually drawn, and the lottery result is a special symbol corresponding to each starting port (for example, the first special for two starting ports). After the symbols and the second special symbols are dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified. In this way, it is proposed that a plurality of special symbols can be dynamically displayed at the same time.
For example, in Patent Document 1, when the game ball enters the first starting port, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is started, and when the game ball enters the second starting port, the dynamic of the second special symbol is started. Start display. Therefore, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is dynamically displayed, when the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the other special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Both are in a state of being dynamically displayed at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode for notifying the big hit, the big hit game is started.
As a type of jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the probability that the jackpot will be in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is improved to a high-probability gaming state that shifts to a high-probability gaming state. The normal jackpot and the transition to the probability game state are set. When a normal jackpot is started during a high-probability game with one special symbol, the result is determined based on the probability of the normal game state in the other special symbol that has already started to change and before the fixed stop (for example, , JP-A-2005-319221).
By the way, in such a gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independently and dynamically displayed, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are short to normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot. If you win each time, if the regular variation jackpot is executed after the probability variation jackpot is executed, the high-probability game state ends in a short time, and the player's willingness to play is shortened. There was a problem that it attenuated.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a player's willingness to play in a gaming machine that simultaneously dynamically displays a plurality of special symbols.
<Means>
To achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a main control means for executing the main control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the instruction of the main control means. , The main control means executes the win/no judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, and the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss judgment condition. Based on the judgment result of the judgment means and the judgment result of the first lottery game by the judgment means, the first winning judgment signal is based on the judgment result of the second lottery game by the judgment means and the second winning judgment signal. And the subordinate control means dynamically display the first identification information indicating the win/loss judgment result of the first lottery game, based on the first win/loss judgment signal. And a second display means for dynamically displaying, based on the second win/loss judgment signal, second identification information indicating a win/no judgment result of the second lottery game. When the result of the hit determination is a win, and the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given, and the main control means is When the winning/non-winning determination means determines that the game state after the bonus game is the first jackpot for shifting to the first game state, or the player is more likely to play the game than the first game state. Based on the hit type determining means for determining whether to make the second jackpot to be shifted to the advantageous second game state, and whether the first or second win/loss determination condition is satisfied Whether the first big hit or the second big hit, the dynamic display start condition in which the identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition is a condition for starting the dynamic display. Based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means and the pre-judgment means for judging the pre-judgment information regarding the judgment result, and the sub-control A pre-determination signal generating means for outputting to the means, the sub-control means, based on the receipt of the pre-determination signal, to the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination signal. Until the corresponding dynamic determination start condition of the win/fail judgment condition is satisfied, the first hold information is stored based on the slave hold information storage unit that stores the advance judgment information and the preliminary judgment information stored in the slave hold information storage unit. Pre-determined information indicating that it is a big hit is stored Based on the fact that the sub-monitoring unit that determines whether or not the sub-monitoring unit stores the pre-determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be hit, the pre-determination that is determined to be the first jackpot The advance notification determining means for determining whether or not to notify the player of the game state transition information related to the information, and when the advance notification determining means determines to notify the player, the player is in the game state. And a notifying means for notifying a game state shift notification mode based on the shift information.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the advance determination signal generating means of the main control means corresponds to the determination result of the advance determination means. The pre-judgment signal capable of identifying the win/no judgment condition is generated, and in the game state transition notification mode, the win/no judgment condition corresponding to the pre-judgment information is the first win/no win judgment condition or the second win/win judgment. It is configured in a notification manner capable of distinguishing whether it is a determination condition.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the main control means is the first jackpot which is the first jackpot by the pre-determination means during the second gaming state. When it is determined that the first or second win/win determination condition is satisfied, the bonus delay means delays the start of the bonus game corresponding to the determined first or second win/loss determination condition.
The game machine according to the technical idea 4 is the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in which the operating means that can be operated by the player and the player first operates the operating means. The first win/win judgment condition is more easily satisfied than the second win/fail judgment condition, and the second win/fail judgment condition is satisfied than the first win/fail judgment condition by performing a second operation different from the first operation. And a changing means for changing to a second advantageous state that is easy to perform.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in any of technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the main control means dynamically displays one of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the privilege game is given by the other identification information, the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information is carried over until the other privilege game is completed, and the privilege game carry-over means is used. Maintain the judgment result of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the end of the bonus game with the judgment result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the bonus game And a success/failure determination maintaining means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 5, wherein the main control means responds to the established win/loss determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition. The dynamic display mode of the first identification information is selected from a dynamic display mode group including at least a normal dynamic display mode and an extended dynamic display mode having a dynamic display time longer than the normal dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition is dynamically displayed from the dynamic display mode group based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination means. The dynamic display mode determining means for determining according to the establishment of the start condition and the dynamic display mode for determining by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the satisfaction of the first or second win/fail judgment condition. The secondary control of the dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means for determining before the display start condition is satisfied and the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means. A preliminary dynamic display mode signal generating means for generating a preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the means, and outputting the preliminary dynamic display mode signal for outputting to the slave control means. Based on the signal, it is determined whether or not the advance determination information that is the first jackpot for determining the extended dynamic display mode is stored.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 3 to 6, and the main control means is established based on that the first or second win/fail judgment condition is met. The holding information for deciding whether to be the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot with respect to the hit determination condition is provided with main holding information storage means, which is stored until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, The pre-judgment means of the main control means makes a judgment based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, and the privilege delay means of the main control means has the first hit/absence judgment condition and the second While the hold information corresponding to one of the win/fail judgment conditions is determined to be the first jackpot by the pre-determination means, the hold information corresponding to the other is newly established, and the hold information is set in advance. When it is determined that the second jackpot is determined by the determination means, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the newly established hold information of the other win/fail determination condition is set as the first jackpot stored in the hold information storage means. It is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the pending information.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the slave control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the win/no judgment means. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition, the win/loss determination means of the second lottery game is executed. Then, the first hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/no hit judgment result of the first lottery game by the hit/no hit judgment means, and the second hit/miss judgment signal based on the hit/miss judgment result of the second lottery game are generated by the hit/miss judgment signal generating means.
In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game based on the first determination signal. Further, based on the second winning/unwinning determination signal, second identification information indicating the winning/unwinning determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed by the second display means.
Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the first or second display means, the bonus game is awarded to the player. Thus, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed.
In the main control means, when the hit determination means determines a hit, the gaming state after the bonus game is set to the first jackpot to be shifted to the first gaming state, or the player is more than the first gaming state. The second jackpot to be shifted to the second gaming state, which is advantageous to, is determined by the hit type determining means. Based on the fact that the first or second win/loss judgment condition is met, whether the hit is the first jackpot or the second jackpot is met. The identification information corresponding to the hit determination condition is determined by the pre-determination unit before the dynamic display start condition that is the condition for starting the dynamic display is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, a preliminary determination signal for notifying the secondary control means of the preliminary determination information regarding the determination result is generated by the preliminary determination signal generation means and output to the secondary control means. ..
Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the preliminary determination signal, until the dynamic display start condition of the hit determination condition corresponding to the preliminary determination information, the preliminary determination information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Remembered. Based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information indicating that the first big hit is stored.
Based on the fact that the secondary monitoring means determines that the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be stored, the game state transition information regarding the preliminary determination information determined to be the first jackpot is provided to the player. Whether or not to notify is determined by the advance notification determining means. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notification means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information.
As a result, the player is notified of the game state transition notification mode, and if the current game state is the second game state, the player determines that the remaining time of the second game state is short, and the remaining time. A game can be played by effectively utilizing time. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, with respect to the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, the pre-judgment signal generating means generates a pre-judgment signal capable of discriminating the hit/miss judgment condition corresponding to the judgment result. The gaming state transition notification mode is configured as a notification mode in which it is possible to identify whether the win/failure determination condition corresponding to the advance determination notification mode is the first win/failure determination condition or the second win/fail determination condition. Thereby, the player can play the game so that the first jackpot is not satisfied by the game state transition notification mode, and the winning/deciding condition is preferentially satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to play the game more effectively using the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined by the pre-determination means during the second game state that the first or second win/loss determination condition that is the first jackpot is satisfied, the determined first or second win/loss When it is determined that the determination condition is satisfied, the start of the determined privilege game is delayed by the privilege delay means. As a result, the second game state is given to the player for a longer time, and there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state in which the first win/win judgment condition is more easily established than the second win/win judgment condition by the player first operating the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first operation which is different from the first operation By performing two operations, the variable means changes the state to the second advantageous state in which the second win/loss determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first win/loss determination condition. Thereby, based on the delay information notified by the notification means, by operating the operation means, it is possible to change to a state in which the win/loss determination condition different from the win/loss determination condition in which the privilege game is delayed is easily established. More lottery games can be played by the player during the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, when one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed, when the privilege game is given by the other identification information, the remaining movement of one of the identification information is performed. The special game carry-over means carries over until the special display of the other special game ends. Then, the result of the judgment of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the end of the privilege game is judged by the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game. The judgment result is maintained by the judgment determination maintaining means.
As a result, during the second game state, the lottery game whose dynamic display is started is delayed in the second game state while delaying the start of the privilege game that is a transition to the first game state. Since it is maintained, even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, it is possible to prevent a problem that would be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new winning while the bonus game is delayed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/win determination condition is based on at least the normal win/win state and the normal dynamic display mode based on the fulfillment of the first win/loss determination condition. Is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from the dynamic display mode group configured by the extended dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display time according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/no judgment condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Determined by means. Before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition. Is determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means. A preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means and output to the slave control means. It Based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal, the secondary monitoring unit determines whether or not the preliminary determination information that is the first jackpot for determining the extended dynamic display mode is stored.
As a result, the player is informed in the gaming state transition notifying mode that the winning/judging determination condition for the first jackpot, in which the delayed start during the second gaming state is delayed, is satisfied. Therefore, by being notified of the game state transition notification mode, the player can more quickly determine that the remaining second game state is short and can effectively use the remaining second game state. There is.
According to the game described in the technical idea 7, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 3 to 6, the following effect is exhibited. That is, in the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second hit/miss determination condition, a hold for determining whether the hit/win determination condition that has been satisfied is the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. The information is stored in the main pending information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, the advance determination means makes a determination.
In the main control means, while the holding information corresponding to one of the first winning/disagreement judging condition and the second winning/damage judging condition is judged to be the first jackpot by the preliminary judging means, the holding information corresponding to the other is newly added. When the hold information is determined to be the second jackpot, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the newly held hold information of the other hit/miss determination condition is stored in the hold information storage means. The privilege delay means delays the start of the privilege game corresponding to the stored first jackpot holding information.
As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the first game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the shift to the second game state is executed, so that two privilege games are executed. After that, the player can be allowed to play a game in the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and it is possible to prevent the expectation for the jackpot from being hindered.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines )
114 display control device (first display means, a portion of the second display hands stage)
201 MPU (determine constant means)
202b Jackpot type counter (part of game state determining means)
S1256 period information discriminating means
S1257 A part of effect execution means

Claims (7)

Main control means for executing the main control of the game,
With sub-control means for executing game control according to instructions from the main control means,
The main control means,
A win/loss determination means that performs a win/fail determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a win/no determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition,
A first win/loss determination signal is generated based on the win/win determination result of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means, and a second win/loss determination signal is generated based on the win/loss determination result of the second lottery game by the win/loss determination means. And a success/failure determination signal generating means,
The sub-control means,
First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of the first lottery game, based on the first determination signal
A second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game, based on the second determination signal.
A game in which a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is given when the result of the determination by the determination unit is a hit and the first or second identification information indicating the hit is stopped and displayed on the first or second display unit. In the machine
The main control means,
When it is determined to be a hit and hit by the hit determination means, the gaming state after the bonus game is set to the first jackpot to be shifted to the first gaming state, or it is advantageous to the player over the first gaming state. And a hit type determining means for determining whether or not to be a second jackpot to be transferred to the second game state,
Based on the fact that the first or second hit/absence determination condition is met, it is determined whether the hit is the first jackpot or the second jackpot with respect to the met hit/absence determination condition. Preliminary determination means for determining before the dynamic display start condition, which is the condition for the identification information corresponding to the established hit determination condition to start the dynamic display,
Based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, a pre-judgment signal generating means for generating a pre-judgment signal for notifying the sub-control means of the pre-judgment information regarding the judgment result, and outputting the pre-judgment signal to the sub-control means. Has,
The sub-control means,
Based on the reception of the advance determination signal, the advance determination information is stored until the dynamic display start condition of the win/fail determination condition corresponding to the advance determination information indicated by the received advance determination signal is satisfied. Sub-hold information storage means,
Based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary holding information storage means, secondary monitoring means for determining whether or not the preliminary determination information indicating that the first big hit is stored,
Based on the fact that the secondary monitoring means determines that the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be stored, the game state transition information regarding the preliminary determination information determined to be the first jackpot is provided to the player. Advance notification determining means for determining whether or not to notify
And a notification means for notifying the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information when the advance notification determination means determines that the player is notified. Characteristic gaming machine. The pre-determination signal generation means of the main control means, for the determination result of the pre-determination means, is for generating the pre-determination signal capable of distinguishing the hit determination condition corresponding to the determination result,
The game state transition notification mode is configured to be a notification mode capable of distinguishing whether the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the advance determination information is the first win/loss determination condition or the second win/loss determination condition. The gaming machine according to claim 1. When the main control means determines that the first or second win/loss determination condition for the first jackpot is satisfied during the second game state, the determined first The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising: a privilege delay means for delaying the start of the privilege game corresponding to the first or second win/fail judgment condition. An operation means that can be operated by the player,
By the player first operating the operation means, a first advantageous state in which the first win/loss determination condition is more easily established than the second win/loss determination condition and a second operation different from the first operation 4. The variable means for changing the second win/loss determination condition to a second advantageous state in which the second win/loss determination condition is easier to be established than the first win/loss determination condition. Amusement machine. The main control means,
When the privilege game is given by the other identification information during the dynamic display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information is changed to the other one. A bonus game carryover means to carry over until the bonus game is over,
Whether or not the result of judgment of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the privilege game is carried out is determined by the game state at the start of dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising: a win/loss determination maintaining unit that maintains the win/loss determination result. The main control means,
The dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied win/fail judgment condition is based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, and at least the dynamic display time is longer than the normal dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. A long extended dynamic display mode, the dynamic display mode group is determined in accordance with the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition, and based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination means, 2. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of identification information from the group of dynamic display modes according to the establishment of a dynamic display start condition,
A pre-dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, based on the satisfaction of the first or second determination condition. Discriminating means,
A pre-dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means is generated, and is transmitted to the slave control means. Advance dynamic display mode signal generation means for outputting to
The sub-monitoring unit determines whether or not the preliminary determination information, which is the first jackpot for determining the extended dynamic display mode, is stored based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5. The main control means, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second win/loss judgment condition, holds for determining whether the win/win judgment condition that has been fulfilled is the first jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. Information has a main holding information storage means for storing until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied,
The pre-determination means of the main control means is for making a determination based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means,
The privilege delay means of the main control means is in a state in which the holding information corresponding to one of the first win/win judgment condition and the second win/win judgment condition is determined as the first jackpot by the pre-judgment means, When the hold information corresponding to the other is newly established and the hold information is determined to be the second jackpot by the pre-determination means, the privilege corresponding to the newly established hold information of the win/fail judgment condition. 6. The start of the game is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the first jackpot holding information stored in the holding information storage means, according to any one of claims 3 to 5. Game machine.

Images